This is a modern-English version of The journal of Frederick Horneman's travels, from Cairo to Mourzouk, the capital of the kingdom of Fezzan, in Africa, in the years 1797-8, originally written by Hornemann, Friedrich.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
THE
Journal
OF
FREDERICK HORNEMAN'S ADVENTURES,
FROM
Cairo to Mourzouk,
THE
CAPITAL OF THE KINGDOM OF FEZZAN,
IN AFRICA.
IN THE YEARS 1797-8.
IN THE YEARS 1797-8.
LONDON:
LONDON:
PRINTED BY W. BULMER AND CO.
CLEVELAND-ROW, ST. JAMES’S;
FOR G. AND W. NICOL, BOOKSELLEES TO HIS
MAJESTY,
PALL-MALL.
1802.
PRINTED BY W. BULMER AND CO.
Cleveland Row, St. James's;
FOR G. AND W. NICOL, BOOKSELLERS TO HIS MAJESTY,
Pall Mall.
1802.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Introduction | page i |
Preface, containing some Account of F. Horneman; of the Preparations for his Voyage; and of Events previous to his leaving Cairo | xvii |
CHAPTER I. | |
Section I.—To Ummesogeir | 1 |
Section II.—Observations on the Desert; passing from the Valley of Natron to the Mountains of Ummesogeir | 8 |
Section III.—Ummesogeir, and further Journey to Siwah | 11 |
Section IV.—Siwah | 14 |
Section V.—Antiquities of Siwah | 20 |
Section VI.—Departure from Siwah; Journey to Schiacha; and Danger which the Traveller there incurred | 29 |
Section VII.—Departure from Schiacha; Arrival at Augila | 36 |
CHAPTER II. | |
Section I.—Augila, and further Progress to the Confines of Temissa | 40 |
Section II.—Observations on the Region of the Harutsch | 48 |
Section III.—Arrival at Temissa, and further Journey | 53 |
Section IV.—Of Zuila | 56 |
Section V.—Farther Journey, and Arrival at Mourzouk, the Capital of the Kingdom of Fezzan | 59 |
CHAPTER III. | |
Some Account of Mourzouk, and of the Kingdom of Fezzan | 62 |
APPENDIX. | |
No. I. | |
Observations on F. Horneman’s Description of the Country and Antiquities of Siwah; with Reference to ancient Accounts of the Oasis and Temple of Ammon. By Sir William Young, Bart. F. R. S. | 75 |
No. II. | |
Some Account of F. Horneman, after his Arrival at Mourzouk | 97 |
No. III. | |
A Memoir, containing various Informations respecting the Interior of Africa; transmitted from Mourzouk in 1799, by F. Horneman | 105 |
No. IV. | |
Geographical Illustrations of the Travels and Informations of F. Horneman, with Maps; by Major James Rennell, F. R. S. | 121 |
No. V. | |
Observations on the Language of Siwah; in a Letter to the Rt. Hon. Sir Joseph Banks; by William Marsden, Esq. F. R. S. | 189 |
No. VI. | |
List of the Members of the Society, instituted for the Purpose of promoting a Discovery of the Interior Parts of Africa | 193 |
ERRATA
Corrections
Pag | 6, | Line | 9, | for roum, read rouin. |
— | 14, | — | 7, | for monachie, read menschie. |
— | 19, | — | 10, | for Logman, read Logmam. |
— | — | — | 13, | for fennel, read flesh or meat. |
— | — | — | 14, | for eyelid, read eyebrow. |
— | 46, | — | 9, | after watering-place, insert called Ennaté. |
— | 95, | — | 6, | for would, read wouldst. |
— | — | — | 27, | for rare, read sure. |
— | 105, | — | 9, | for Ungila and Supah, read Augila and Siwah. |
— | — | — | 15, | after is, insert not. |
— | 107, | — | 17, | for Burnû, read Burgû. |
— | — | — | 22, | for SSW, read SSE. |
— | 112, | — | 17, | for the culture of their land, read their preparation of leather. |
[i]INTRODUCTION.
The Society, instituted in the year 1788, for the purpose of exploring the Interior of Africa, in pursuing their great design, adopted wise and certain principles of procedure: they inquired, and then examined; they sought intelligence, and then directed research: their progress has been answerable to the just system of their pursuits and perseverance; and the Society, from the epoch of 1798, have been enabled to direct their efforts for further discovery, on data from actual visitation and experiment.
The Society, established in 1788 to explore the interior of Africa, followed a clear and effective approach in pursuit of their important goal: they asked questions, then investigated; they gathered information, and then guided their research. Their progress has reflected the sound methods of their efforts and determination. Since 1798, the Society has been able to focus their efforts on further discoveries based on data from actual visits and experiments.
A volume of the transactions of the Society, printed in the years 1790—92, sets forth in detail, such communications respecting the Interior of Africa, as might be collected on inquiry from British Consuls; from the recital of Negro, or Moorish traders; or from that of Shereefs and others, who had passed with the caravans on religious pilgrimage, in different directions between Mecca and the various and remote stations of Mahomedans in Africa.
A volume of the Society's transactions, published between 1790 and 1792, provides a detailed account of information regarding the interior of Africa, gathered through inquiries made to British Consuls, as well as accounts from African traders, Moorish merchants, and Shereefs and others who traveled with caravans on religious pilgrimages in various directions between Mecca and different distant locations of Muslims in Africa.
[ii]Those communications were, at the time, most interesting and useful; they afforded at once the incentive and the direction to farther inquiry; they opened new objects to commercial enterprize, and new matter for scientific speculation, on the productions of nature, and the manners and conditions of society, in a quarter of the globe hitherto unexplored: further, they pointed out the road, and facilitated the means, of ascertaining the truth of each account, and of estimating its importance and advantages by actual visitation and experiment.
[ii]Those communications were really interesting and useful at the time; they provided both the motivation and guidance for further investigation. They revealed new opportunities for business ventures and opened up new topics for scientific inquiry regarding natural resources and societal behaviors in an area of the world that had not been explored before. Moreover, they outlined the path and made it easier to verify the accuracy of each account and assess its significance and benefits through real visits and experiments.
Be it allowed, that the narrators spoke of what they had heard, as well as of what they had seen; let it be granted that they were mostly ignorant, credulous, or partially informed; and that, distinctively and in detail, the accuracy of their representations was little to be depended on; yet on points wherein their accounts agreed, they merited attention and regard; they together opened a general view of the society, and of the country; and afforded matter of such reasonable conjecture and inference, as might warrant and direct the course of further investigation. Reflecting on these and other relations made by unenlightened men, it appears, that as the great continent of Africa, amidst its seas of sand, occasionally shews its Oasis, or fertile[iii] isle, rising in each desert; so, in analogy to the face of the country, does the blank and torpid mind of its people, display occasionally notes of intelligence and philanthropy; rich spots of genius, and partial scenes of improved social establishment. Having passed whole regions sterilized by apathy and ignorance, the result of superstitions, prejudice, and oppression, the enlightened traveller comes to a sudden view of some rich field of character, and contemplates with delight the free-born spirit and sagacity of the Tuarick of Hagara, and the ingenuity and benevolence of the Houssan. To unfold and disseminate these germs of civilization, is surely a noble task! What description of men and country can be more interesting? whither could the refinement of arts? whither could enlightened philosophy better tend, to humanize and improve? whither could the spirit of trade better direct its course? As we speculate on the projected intercourse, the noblest views open to the mind, anticipating reciprocal advantages: in the dispensation of intelligence and the arts of peace, carrying therewith complacent manners to rude and ferocious nations; and in a full compensation to the enlightened adventurers, from new materials of ingenuity and of commerce, and from new subjects of scientific inference, extending the advancement of human knowledge in all its branches.
Let’s consider that the narrators talked about what they had heard as well as what they had seen; let's acknowledge that they were mostly uninformed, gullible, or only partially knowledgeable; and that, in detail, the accuracy of their accounts was not very dependable; yet, on the points where their stories matched, they deserve attention and respect; they together provided a general view of society and the country; and offered material for reasonable conjecture and inference that might justify and guide further investigation. Reflecting on these and other accounts from uneducated people, it seems that just as the vast continent of Africa, amidst its seas of sand, occasionally shows its oasis or fertile[iii] islands rising in each desert, similarly, the blank and unresponsive minds of its people occasionally reveal glimpses of intelligence and kindness; rich spots of talent and partial instances of improved social structures. After passing through entire regions stricken by apathy and ignorance, the result of superstitions, prejudice, and oppression, the enlightened traveler suddenly encounters a rich display of character and admires the free spirit and wisdom of the Tuarick of Hagara, as well as the creativity and compassion of the Houssan. To uncover and share these seeds of civilization is truly a noble endeavor! What description of people and place could be more fascinating? Where could the refinement of the arts? Where could enlightened philosophy better aim to humanize and improve? Where could the spirit of trade better direct its efforts? As we consider the potential interactions, the most admirable visions open up to the mind, anticipating mutual benefits: in the sharing of knowledge and the arts of peace, bringing pleasant manners to rough and fierce societies; and in a full reward for the enlightened explorers, from new sources of creativity and commerce, and from new subjects that spark scientific inquiry, further advancing human knowledge in all its fields.
[iv]The communications in question, operating on the minds of intelligent Members of the African Society, and giving a spur to the curiosity and enterprize of the agents they might employ, formed a suitable and necessary Preface to the undertaking and efforts for practical discovery, and for ensuring the advantages thence to be derived.
[iv]The communications in question, influencing the thoughts of knowledgeable members of the African Society and stimulating the curiosity and initiative of the agents they could hire, served as an appropriate and essential Introduction to the efforts for practical discovery and for securing the benefits that could be gained from it.
The compilation of various informations respecting Africa, had thus an intrinsic value, as affording premises of inquiry, and as giving encouragement and direction to adventure.
The collection of different information about Africa had real value, as it provided a basis for exploration and encouraged and guided adventure.
But further, and even immediately, wisdom and sagacity will extract truth from accounts, however contradictory, and useful and certain inference, from documents the most ambiguous or incomplete.
But furthermore, and even right away, wisdom and insight will draw out the truth from stories, no matter how contradictory, and useful and reliable conclusions from documents that are the most unclear or incomplete.
Efforts of rude ingenuity often suggest not only improvement but discovery; the rustic forms a lever to raise the mass, and the sagacity of the mechanic applies it to ascertain the weight.
Efforts of crude creativity often imply not just enhancement but also discovery; the farmer creates a lever to lift the load, and the wisdom of the mechanic uses it to measure the weight.
Science often works with effect on the loose and disjointed materials which ignorance has heaped together; compares, arranges, and connects their[v] substances and forms; shews in their matter, construction, or decomposition, new uses; derives new informations, and adds to the stock of human inventions and knowledge.
Science often works with the scattered and unrelated materials that ignorance has piled up; it compares, organizes, and connects their substances and forms; reveals new uses in their composition, structure, or breakdown; uncovers new information, and contributes to the collection of human inventions and knowledge.
Were it necessary to illustrate such position by example, the writer would refer, as a special instance, to the elucidations of Major Rennell on the communications in question: to that most accurate and acute philosopher and geographer, the details have afforded matter of enquiry and deduction of the highest import to science. By analysis, and a comparative view of accounts given of journies and places, in reference to the plans of D’Anville, and other geographers; to modern travels; to ancient expeditions; to descriptions of ancient writers; and above all, to those of the father of history, Herodotus; Major Rennell hath corrected the map of Africa, with a learning and sagacity which hath converted conjecture into knowledge; and on experience of those who have explored parts of that great continent, given confidence to each future traveller who may visit its remotest regions.
If an example were needed to illustrate this point, the writer would highlight Major Rennell's insights on the communications in question. To this highly precise and insightful philosopher and geographer, the details have provided important material for inquiry and deduction for science. By analyzing and comparing accounts of journeys and locations, in relation to D'Anville's maps and those of other geographers; modern travels; ancient expeditions; descriptions from ancient writers; and especially those of the father of history, Herodotus; Major Rennell has revised the map of Africa with a depth of knowledge and wisdom that has turned speculation into understanding; and based on the experiences of those who have explored parts of that vast continent, he has given confidence to every future traveler who may explore its farthest regions.
Had the proceedings of the Society stopped here, and its work been confined to the compilation above alluded to, and to the comments of Major Rennell, the[vi] usefulness of its institution would have been acknowledged by posterity.
Had the Society's activities ended here, and its work been limited to the compilation mentioned earlier, along with Major Rennell's comments, the value of its establishment would have been recognized by future generations.
But happily the Journal of Mr. Park’s travels to the Niger, and that of Mr. Horneman’s journey from Cairo to Mourzouk, will fully shew, that the attainments of the Society are no longer narrowed to the mere rudiments of discovery, which tradition and ingenious inference, alone before supplied.
But thankfully, Mr. Park’s travel journal to the Niger and Mr. Horneman’s journey from Cairo to Mourzouk will clearly show that the Society's achievements have expanded beyond just the basics of discovery, which were previously provided only by tradition and clever reasoning.
Even under the inauspicious circumstances of wars and revolutions which from nearly the date of the establishment of the Society, have spread desolation far and wide, and in the year 1798, reached to the very capital of Africa; their chosen emissaries have surmounted all the dangers and difficulties, which these events superadded to the ordinary risk of enterprise.
Even with the unfortunate circumstances of wars and revolutions that have caused widespread destruction since almost the founding of the Society, and which, in 1798, even reached the heart of Africa, their selected representatives have overcome all the dangers and challenges that these events added to the usual risks of their endeavors.
It should not be omitted, that the traveller, (whose work is now submitted to the public,) was further indebted to the liberal and enlightened spirit, which directs the genius of truly great men to foster useful arts and sciences amidst the horrors of war; and give orders to the armies under their command, to forbear all molestation of the emissary from even an hostile[vii] country, whose intentions and pursuits are directed to objects of common value and concern, to the nations of the world at large.
It shouldn't be overlooked that the traveler, whose work is now shared with the public, also owed a debt to the generous and open-minded spirit that inspires genuinely great individuals to support useful arts and sciences even amidst the chaos of war. They instructed the armies under their command to refrain from interfering with the emissary from even a hostile[vii] country, whose goals and activities are aimed at common values and concerns for all nations around the world.
Under such patronage and protection from the General Bonaparte, and with his special passport and safeguard, Frederick Horneman safely reached the caravan passing from Mecca, and pursued, and accomplished his journey from Cairo to the kingdom of Fezzan; which from the general resort of caravans to its capital, Mourzouk, may be considered as the proper post of direction and outfit, for his further travels to the remotest regions of Africa.
Under the patronage and protection of General Bonaparte, and with his special passport and security, Frederick Horneman safely reached the caravan traveling from Mecca. He then continued his journey from Cairo to the kingdom of Fezzan, which, given the influx of caravans to its capital, Mourzouk, can be seen as the ideal starting point for planning and preparing his further travels to the farthest regions of Africa.
In planning the routes of Park and of Horneman, the Society availed itself of former communications, sagaciously discriminated the proper path of research, and have to exult in the success of each adventure. These emissaries have explored roads which shortly mercantile adventure will, and must enter. In this new race of commerce, shame indeed would it be to our national councils, could it possibly be supposed that from the default of patronage and support of Government, our commercial people may lose the start for a priority of factories and establishments of trade, and permit other nations to usurp the vantage ground[viii] which British enterprise, under the auspices of a patriotic and enlightened, but private institution, shall have explored, marked out, and prepared for them.
In planning the routes for Park and Horneman, the Society made use of previous communications, carefully identified the right path for research, and can celebrate the success of each mission. These explorers have traveled paths that soon will be taken over by commercial ventures. In this new wave of trade, it would be a real shame for our national leaders to allow our commercial sector to miss the opportunity to establish factories and trade operations first, just because of a lack of government support and encouragement, and let other countries take the lead on the ground that British initiative, guided by a dedicated and informed private organization, has already discovered, mapped out, and prepared for them.[viii]
By Mr. Park’s discoveries, a gate is opened to every commercial nation to enter and trade from the west to the eastern extremity of Africa. The navigable parts of the rivers Gambia and Niger are not so far distant, but that great facilities of trade may thence be derived, aided by the establishment of intermediate stations and points of intercourse. A considerable traffic is carried on by the natives for ostrich feathers, drugs, ivory, and gold, even without such advantage. On due direction and exertions of British credit and enterprise, it is difficult to imagine the possible extent to which the demand for our country’s manufactures might arrive, from such vast and populous countries in the bosom of which gold, the great medium of commerce, is readily found; and which would be sought for and brought into circulation with new avidity and success, in proportion as objects for the exchange, became known, desirable, and necessary to the people.
Thanks to Mr. Park’s discoveries, a gateway has opened for every commercial nation to trade from the west all the way to the eastern edge of Africa. The navigable sections of the Gambia and Niger rivers are close enough that significant trading opportunities can arise, especially with the establishment of intermediate stations and trade points. The locals already engage in considerable trade for ostrich feathers, medicinal plants, ivory, and gold, even without these advantages. With the right direction and the efforts of British credit and enterprise, it’s hard to imagine just how much the demand for our country's manufactured goods could grow from such large and densely populated regions where gold, the main currency for trade, is readily available. As people learn about new, desirable, and necessary items for exchange, the drive to obtain them will increase significantly.
This subject has already been recommended by the Society, to the attention of Government; and on the return of peace, it is not doubted, but it will be treated[ix] with a consideration and regard, suitable to the important interests which it involves.
This topic has already been suggested by the Society for the government's attention; and when peace returns, there’s no doubt it will be addressed[ix] with the consideration and respect that the important interests it entails deserve.
When the thorny track of a Park or a Horneman is become the beaten road of the merchant, advantages of another sort will quickly follow; and the intercourse extend to the instruction of the naturalist and philosopher, to the promotion of civilization, and to the increase of the general stock of human knowledge and happiness.
When the rough path of a park or a Horneman becomes the main route for merchants, different kinds of benefits will soon follow; interactions will broaden, leading to learning opportunities for naturalists and philosophers, promoting civilization, and boosting the overall wealth of human knowledge and happiness.
Contemplating such accomplishment of the wise and benevolent purposes of their Institution, the patriotic members of this Society cannot but look back with exultation to the hour of its establishment, and they will with satisfaction recapitulate its means and progress, towards such happy termination of their labours.
Contemplating the achievements of the wise and generous goals of their Institution, the patriotic members of this Society can’t help but look back with pride to the moment it was established, and they will happily summarize its efforts and progress towards the successful outcome of their work.
Of those who transmitted accounts which they had received, concerning the people and country of Africa, Mr. Ledyard and Mr. Lucas were specially employed, with the further intent of progress into the heart of the country; for the purpose of ascertaining the truth of these recitals, the correcting them on personal information, and the elucidating, on actual survey, any[x] future plan for turning the knowledge thence derived to account.
Of those who shared stories they had heard about the people and land of Africa, Mr. Ledyard and Mr. Lucas were specifically tasked with delving deeper into the interior of the country. Their goal was to verify these accounts, correct them based on firsthand experience, and clarify, through actual exploration, any future plan to make use of the knowledge gained from this endeavor.[x]
Mr. Ledyard died at Cairo, ere his eager and enterprising spirit could even start towards its object: Mr. Lucas, deterred by impending difficulties and dangers, proceeded not further than to Mesurata, seven days journey S. E. of Tripoly; there collected informations from the Shereef Imhammed, and traders of Fezzan, and then measured his road back to Tripoly; and shortly after returned to England.
Mr. Ledyard died in Cairo, before his eager and adventurous spirit could even begin to pursue its goal. Mr. Lucas, discouraged by looming challenges and risks, only made it to Mesurata, a seven-day journey southeast of Tripoli. There, he gathered information from the Shereef Imhammed and traders from Fezzan before making his way back to Tripoli and returning to England shortly after.
The Society, with that persevering spirit which ever distinguishes manly minds, engaged on sound principles, and for noble purposes, were not appalled by the death of one emissary, or the failure of another.
The Society, with that persistent spirit that always sets apart strong minds, committed to solid principles and noble goals, were not discouraged by the death of one representative or the failure of another.
They sought out and appointed a new traveller, and to take a new road. Mr. Ledyard was to have penetrated from the east, Mr. Lucas from the north; Major Houghton was appointed in the year 1790, to sail for the mouth of the Gambia, and to traverse the country from west to east: Major Houghton arrived on the coast of Africa November 10, of that year, immediately commenced his journey, ascended the Gambia to Medina, 900 miles (by the water-course) distant from the mouth of[xi] the river, and thence proceeded to Bambouk and to the adjoining kingdom of Kasson; where, in September 1791, he unfortunately terminated his travels with his life, near to the town of Jarra. Mr. Park, who was engaged in the service of the Society, in 1795, more successfully followed the route of Major Houghton, and further explored to the banks of the Niger, to Sego, and to Silla, the first of that great line of populous and commercial cities, dividing the southern from the northern deserts of Africa; and the very existence of which, for centuries past, hath been rather matter of rumour than of information; and been made the subject of philosophic romance,[1] in default of authentic account and description.
They searched for and hired a new traveler to take a different route. Mr. Ledyard was set to come from the east, and Mr. Lucas from the north; Major Houghton was appointed in 1790 to sail to the mouth of the Gambia and cross the country from west to east. Major Houghton arrived on the coast of Africa on November 10 of that year and immediately started his journey, traveling up the Gambia to Medina, which is 900 miles (by the watercourse) from the river mouth, and then continued to Bambouk and the nearby kingdom of Kasson. Unfortunately, in September 1791, he ended his travels with his life near the town of Jarra. Mr. Park, who joined the Society in 1795, successfully retraced Major Houghton’s route and explored further to the banks of the Niger, to Sego, and to Silla, marking the beginning of a major line of populous and commercial cities that separates the southern and northern deserts of Africa. For centuries, the existence of these cities had been more of a rumor than confirmed knowledge, and they became the subject of philosophical speculation, due to the lack of authentic accounts and descriptions.
The informations of Mr. Park were communicated to the Society at their annual Meeting in May 1798.
The information about Mr. Park was shared with the Society at their annual meeting in May 1798.
The year 1798 will ever be noted, as the memorable epoch, when the researches of this Society announced to the world the course of the Niger, from west to east; and, after the distance of 2300 years, corroborated the testimony of the Nasamones, and accounts of Herodotus, contested during that long period by ancient and later writers, and ultimately rejected[xii] within the century past, by the learned D’Anville. But further, the settlements on its fertile shores, are by the informations of Park, derived from inquiries so near to the source, as now greatly to be depended on; at least so far, as to give assurance of objects of commerce and learned inquiry, that will amply repay further research. The just motto of the Society is, “quod non peractum, pro non inchoato est;” its exertions and perseverance answer to it, and it is to be congratulated that the task is now easy, its accomplishment assured.
The year 1798 will always be remembered as the significant moment when the research from this Society revealed the path of the Niger River, flowing from west to east; and, after 2300 years, confirmed the accounts of the Nasamones and Herodotus, which had been debated by ancient and modern writers and ultimately dismissed within the last century by the scholar D’Anville. Moreover, the settlements along its fertile banks are supported by Park's findings, based on inquiries made very close to the source, which can now be relied upon to a great extent; at least enough to guarantee opportunities for trade and scholarly research that will greatly reward further exploration. The Society's fitting motto is, “quod non peractum, pro non inchoato est,” and its efforts and determination reflect this, making it commendable that the task is now straightforward, with success assured.
The writer of this Essay, not presuming to graft addition or observation on the intelligent and authentic Journal of Mungo Park, ventures a single comment, of import to the Society, and in justice to its agent.
The writer of this Essay, not trying to add or comment on the insightful and trustworthy Journal of Mungo Park, offers one observation that is important to the Society and fair to its representative.
Mr. Park has not only designated the route of country but of men. He hath marked the districts of population covering the great belt of land intersecting Africa from west to east, and at the same time hath noted the distinctions of Moor and Negro, in manners, prejudices, and government. He hath thereby given to the Society information of the viaticum of character and accomplishments proper and necessary to ensure the success of their future agents: he hath pointed out the[xiii] roads to districts and cities of the greatest interest, and at the same time hath shewn the means of securing entrance and hospitable reception.
Mr. Park has not only mapped out the route of countries but also of people. He has identified the population areas covering the vast stretch of land crossing Africa from west to east, while also noting the differences between Moors and Negroes in terms of customs, biases, and governance. He has provided the Society with valuable insights into the character and skills needed to ensure the success of their future agents: he has outlined the[xiii] paths to the most interesting regions and cities, and he has shown how to secure entry and a warm welcome.
The Society hath availed itself of the intelligence; and a new emissary, Mr. Horneman, hath given his lesson full effect in an expedition which is the subject of the present Volume.
The Society has made use of the information, and a new envoy, Mr. Horneman, has fully implemented his lesson in an expedition that is the focus of this Volume.
Of the further progress of this accomplished traveller, the Editor forbears to intimate design or suggestion.
Of the continued journey of this skilled traveler, the Editor refrains from hinting at any plans or recommendations.
The season of mere expectation and conjecture is gone by. It were idle indeed at this period of actual discovery, to hazard surmise for future correction on experiment.
The time for just waiting and guessing is over. It would be pointless right now, with actual discoveries happening, to take chances on predictions that we might have to change later based on experiments.
At outset of the Society instituted for the purpose of exploring the Interior of Africa, it might have been proper to set forth, in glowing colours, all that was rumoured, and all that might be expected; well were general reports and ingenious inferences suited to rouze curiosity, to excite adventurous spirit, and to give a spring to the first movements and purposes of the Institution.
At the beginning of the Society established to explore the Interior of Africa, it would have been appropriate to present, in vivid detail, everything that was rumored and all that could be anticipated; indeed, general reports and clever assumptions were well-suited to spark curiosity, inspire adventurous spirits, and energize the initial actions and goals of the Institution.
[xiv]Such incentives are no longer necessary; and knowledge actually acquired, demands, in the future display, merely accuracy and precision, as the guides to further success.
[xiv]Such incentives are no longer needed; the knowledge we have gained now requires just accuracy and precision to achieve future success.
The Society is confirmed in its purpose, and assured of its objects and of the means of attainment.
The Society is certain about its purpose and confident in its goals and the methods to achieve them.
Its travellers will not in future rush on with zealous but unadvised curiosity; or hesitate as in the dark, and on unfounded apprehensions; but, disciplined and educated, proceed with a spirit corrected and confirmed by knowledge and precaution, towards certain purposes and ends.
Its travelers will no longer rush in with eager but misguided curiosity; nor will they hesitate in the dark, driven by unfounded fears; instead, they will move forward, guided and informed, with a mindset shaped and strengthened by knowledge and caution, toward specific goals and outcomes.
An adventurer may yet fail; but it is presumed the adventure cannot, unless from failure of the funds and resources of the Society; which, in this great and opulent country, it would be a calumny on the generosity and patriotism of its people, for one moment to anticipate as possible.
An adventurer might still fail; but it's assumed the adventure itself won’t fail, unless there’s a shortage of funds and resources from the Society; which, in this vast and wealthy country, would be a slander against the generosity and patriotism of its people to even consider as a possibility.
Yet let it be remembered, that the extent of our undertakings can only be commensurate with our means.
Yet let it be remembered that the scale of our efforts can only match our resources.
Expense and charge attend our present inquiries;[xv] and even a more advantageous extension of our researches apart, demands of much beyond what our actual numbers and contributions can furnish, will be necessary to ensure the effect of national advantage, and turn to public account the successful experiment of an enlightened and patriotic, but not numerous, Association.
Expense and charges are part of our current inquiries;[xv] and even a more beneficial expansion of our research requires much more than what our current numbers and contributions can provide. It will be essential to ensure national benefit and make the outcomes of a successful experiment by an informed and patriotic, but not large, Association work for the public good.
The Society cannot condescend to solicitation; nor is it necessary: it will suffice, that, emboldened by success, they suggest to their countrymen, that, under proper patronage, and with the means of extending their researches, the conclusion will be of advantage, to Great Britain—to Africa—and to the World.
The Society won’t lower itself to asking for help, nor is it needed: it will be enough that, encouraged by their success, they point out to their fellow countrymen that, with the right support and resources to expand their research, the outcome will benefit Great Britain, Africa, and the World.
W. YOUNG,
W. Young
SECRETARY TO THE AFRICAN SOCIETY.
Secretary of the African Society.
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[1]By Bishop Berkeley.
By Bishop Berkeley.
[xvii]Preface to the Journal, &c.
GIVING SOME ACCOUNT OF MR. FREDERICK HORNEMAN; OF THE PREPARATIONS FOR HIS VOYAGE; AND OF EVENTS PREVIOUS TO HIS LEAVING CAIRO.
GIVING SOME ACCOUNT OF MR. FREDERICK HORNEMAN; OF THE PREPARATIONS FOR HIS VOYAGE; AND OF EVENTS PREVIOUS TO HIS LEAVING CAIRO.
At the time that Mr. Mungo Park, engaged in the service of the Society instituted for the purpose of exploring the Interior of Africa, was prosecuting discoveries eastward from the river Gambia, it was thought proper to extend their researches in another line of direction, and engage an emissary to explore that great continent, proceeding westward from the city of Cairo.
At the time when Mr. Mungo Park was working for the Society set up to explore the interior of Africa and was making discoveries east of the Gambia River, it was decided to broaden their research in a different direction and hire someone to explore that vast continent, moving west from the city of Cairo.
Early in the year 1796, Mr. F. Horneman offered himself to the Committee of the Society for this service; he appeared to be young, robust, and, in point of constitution and health, suited to a struggle with different climates and fatigues: in his manner and conversations he displayed temper, acuteness, and prudence: he was well apprized of the dangers and difficulties of the enterprize he was to engage in, and shewed a spirit and zeal for the undertaking, which strongly recommended him as a proper person to be employed for the carrying it into effect.
Early in 1796, Mr. F. Horneman offered himself to the Committee of the Society for this task; he seemed young, strong, and fit in terms of health and stamina for dealing with various climates and challenges. In his demeanor and conversations, he showed patience, sharpness, and good judgment. He was well aware of the dangers and challenges of the mission he was about to undertake and demonstrated a strong enthusiasm and commitment to the project, which made him an excellent candidate for carrying it out.
The Committee accordingly engaged his services; and observing in him such foundation of good ordinary education, as further[xviii] attainments might readily be engrafted upon, they sent him, at the expense of the Society, to Gottingen; there to study the rudiments and writing of the Arabic language, and, generally, such sciences as (in the result of due application of the knowledge acquired), might render any account of his future travels more interesting and useful to his employers, and to the public.
The Committee decided to hire him, noticing that he had a good basic education that could easily be built upon. They sent him, at the Society's expense, to Göttingen to study the basics and writing of the Arabic language, as well as other subjects that, with proper application of the knowledge gained, would make any report of his future travels more interesting and useful for his employers and the public.
F. Horneman pursued the requisite studies for several months with great assiduity, under the tuition of Professors Blumenbach, Heeren, Hoffman, Tyschen, and Heyne; and in May, 1797, returned to England, properly instructed for his intended voyage. He was then introduced to a general meeting of the Society, when his engagement was approved of, and he was directed to proceed to Egypt with all convenient dispatch.
F. Horneman studied diligently for several months under the guidance of Professors Blumenbach, Heeren, Hoffman, Tyschen, and Heyne. In May 1797, he returned to England well-prepared for his planned journey. He was then presented at a general meeting of the Society, where his appointment was approved, and he was instructed to head to Egypt as soon as possible.
Passports from Paris were applied for, and granted, permitting him to pass through France; and in July, 1797, he left London on his way to Paris.
Passports from Paris were requested and granted, allowing him to travel through France; in July 1797, he left London heading to Paris.
He was furnished with letters of introduction to several persons of literary distinction in that capital; and, on arrival, his reception was liberal and friendly, and proportionate to the lively interest which was every where taken in his scheme of enterprize, and in the means of promoting its success. He was invited to a meeting of the National Institute. The first members of that learned society tendered their patronage, encouragement, and assistance: Mr. Lalande furnished him with copies of his “Memoire sur L’Afrique.”[xix] Mr. Broussonet recommended him to Mr. Laroche, appointed Consul for Mogadore; and by this latter gentleman’s means he made a further and most useful acquaintance with a Turk of distinction (a native of Tripoly), then resident at Paris. This Mussulman entered into the motives and plan of his travels with a liberal approbation, and a zealous interest in the success; which was little to have been expected from one of such persuasion and character. He gave Mr. Horneman letters of introduction, strongly recommending him to the friendship and protection of several leading Mahommedan merchants at Cairo, who were in the habits of trade with people of the remotest regions of Africa; and he added his own advice, and instructions for the journey.
He received letters of introduction to several well-known literary figures in that city. Upon his arrival, he was welcomed warmly and generously, reflecting the strong interest in his business venture and the ways to help it succeed. He was invited to a meeting of the National Institute, where the founding members of that scholarly group offered their support, encouragement, and assistance. Mr. Lalande provided him with copies of his "Memoire sur L’Afrique." Mr. Broussonet recommended him to Mr. Laroche, who had been appointed Consul for Mogadore. Through Mr. Laroche, he also made a valuable connection with a distinguished Turk, originally from Tripoli, who was then living in Paris. This Muslim showed genuine enthusiasm for his travel goals and plans, which was unexpected given his background and beliefs. He gave Mr. Horneman letters of introduction, highly recommending him to several prominent Muslim merchants in Cairo who had trade connections with distant parts of Africa, and also offered his own advice and guidance for the journey.
Thus provided, Mr. Horneman, in August, left Paris for Marseilles, where he embarked the end of the month, and arrived at Alexandria the middle of September: he staid at Alexandria but a few days, and then went to Cairo, where he purposed residing some time, to study the language and manners of the Mograbins, or western Arabs, with whom he was to associate in his future travels. His own letter will best describe his further progress.
Thus prepared, Mr. Horneman left Paris for Marseilles in August, where he boarded a ship at the end of the month and arrived in Alexandria by mid-September. He only stayed in Alexandria for a few days before heading to Cairo, where he planned to stay for a while to learn about the language and customs of the Mograbins, or western Arabs, whom he would be interacting with on his future travels. His own letter will best describe his further progress.
(Translation.)
Translation.
“Sir, | Cairo, August 31, 1798. |
“In my last letter I mentioned my intentions of leaving Cairo about the end of May. The plague beginning to rage in the month of April, it became a proper and necessary precaution not only to defer my journey, but absolutely to shut myself up in my house.[xx] My zeal for the undertaking I have engaged in, would have led me to break through this confinement and leave the city, with a view to join the merchants at their place of rendezvous, whence they were directly to depart for Fezzan, had not obstacles arising from the difficulty of procuring the necessary credits for my equipment prevented my immediate procedure.
“In my last letter, I mentioned my plans to leave Cairo around the end of May. With the plague starting to spread in April, it became essential not just to delay my journey but to completely isolate myself at home.[xx] My enthusiasm for the mission I took on would have pushed me to break this confinement and leave the city to join the merchants at their meeting point, from where they were set to head to Fezzan, if it weren't for the challenges I faced in getting the necessary funds for my equipment, which stopped me from proceeding right away.”
“As soon as from abatement of the pestilence, I could safely go abroad, I met and renewed my acquaintance with several of the caravan, who remained in the city, expecting the return of others from Mecca. A French commercial house, on whom I had no letters of credit or other claim to confidence, than what arose from private friendship and esteem, having handsomely offered such advance of monies as I might require, I was enabled to prepare for my journey, and set out with this caravan, as soon as complete and ready for departure. All these designs were suddenly frustrated by the arrival of the French on the coast of Egypt. Those who formed the caravan at Cairo quickly dispersed; that from Mecca coming to join it was not yet arrived: myself and other Europeans were seized and confined in the castle, rather as a place of refuge from the indignation and fanaticism of the populace, than as a prison, and we remained there until the arrival of the French at Cairo.
“As soon as the plague eased up enough for me to go outside safely, I met up with and reconnected with several people from the caravan who were still in the city, waiting for others to return from Mecca. A French commercial house, to whom I had no letters of credit or claims to trust beyond personal friendship and respect, generously offered me whatever money I needed. This support allowed me to get ready for my journey, and I set out with the caravan as soon as it was fully prepared for departure. However, all these plans were abruptly derailed by the arrival of the French on the coast of Egypt. The people in the caravan in Cairo quickly dispersed; the one coming from Mecca hadn’t arrived yet. I and a few other Europeans were taken and held in the castle, more as a safe haven from the anger and fanaticism of the crowd than as prisoners, and we stayed there until the French reached Cairo.”
“Soon after their coming, I made acquaintance with two of their learned men, Berthollet and Monge, they liberated and presented me to the Commander in Chief, and he received me with every mark of attention and goodness. His regard for science, and esteem of[xxi] learned men are too well known to render it necessary for me to expatiate on these high qualities. He promised me protection, he offered me money or whatever was requisite to my undertaking, and he directed the necessary passports to be prepared for me.
“Shortly after they arrived, I met two of their scholars, Berthollet and Monge. They helped free me and introduced me to the Commander in Chief, who welcomed me with great kindness and attention. His admiration for science and respect for learned individuals are well-known, so I don’t need to elaborate on these impressive qualities. He promised to protect me, offered me money or anything else I needed for my work, and arranged for the necessary passports to be prepared for me.”
“I lost no time in seeking out my friends, the merchants of Fezzan, and renewing my connections with them. Gradually as the public tranquillity became assured, they returned, one by one into the city, till the whole were again assembled; and fifteen days have now passed, since we have been making preparations for our final departure, actually fixed for the day after to-morrow.
“I wasted no time reaching out to my friends, the merchants of Fezzan, and reconnecting with them. As public peace was gradually established, they began to return to the city one by one until everyone was back together. Now, after fifteen days of preparation, we are set to leave for good the day after tomorrow.”
“Commonly those who engage in an extraordinary enterprise, consider means yet more extraordinary, as requisite to the success of the undertaking: my opinion, and therewith procedure will be founded on directly the contrary proposition. The plan which I have chalked out for my journey will be simple and easy to pursue. You shall have it in a single line, “it is to travel as a Mahommedan merchant of the caravan.” I am assured that under such character, I can travel with the same surety as the natives of the country.
“Typically, those who take on an extraordinary venture consider even more extraordinary means as necessary for success. My perspective, however, and my approach will be based on the exact opposite idea. The plan I’ve laid out for my journey will be straightforward and easy to follow. You can sum it up in one line: ‘I will travel like a Muslim merchant of the caravan.’ I am confident that in this role, I can travel with the same certainty as the locals.”
“Many of the caravan having been at Mecca, are aware that there are numbers of good Mussulmen from various countries who speak not Arabic, and who have different usages and customs; and thus simply attaining a knowledge of certain religious ceremonies and prayers, there is no difficulty in passing generally as a Mahommedan; for as to a certain less equivocal criterion of a[xxii] personal nature, the delicacy of Mahommedan manners precludes any danger of inquiry.
“Many of the caravan, having been to Mecca, know that there are many good Muslims from different countries who don’t speak Arabic and who have their own practices and customs. Therefore, by simply learning some religious ceremonies and prayers, it's not hard to pass as a Muslim; because regarding a more personal criterion, the sensitivity of Muslim customs prevents any risk of questioning.”
“To travel as a Christian, will perhaps be impracticable for at least five years to come, for it is incredible how deep and strong an impression the expedition of the French has made on the minds of the pilgrims to and from Mecca: dispersed to their several homes they will carry an aggravated prejudice against Christians far and wide, and to the very heart of Africa.
“To travel as a Christian might be impossible for at least five years, because it’s shocking how strong an impression the French expedition has left on the minds of pilgrims traveling to and from Mecca. Dispersed to their various homes, they will take an intensified prejudice against Christians with them, spreading it far and wide, all the way to the heart of Africa.”
“Should it be objected to me, that I risk a similar fate with that of Major Houghton, by travelling as a trader, my answer is, “that by travelling as a Mahommedan trader, I shall never travel alone; and with those too of the caravan, considered as one of the least of its merchants.
“Should anyone object that I risk a fate similar to Major Houghton by traveling as a trader, my response is, ‘by traveling as a Muslim trader, I will never be alone; I will be with those in the caravan, regarded as one of the least of its merchants.’”
“In respect to my astronomical instruments, I shall take special care never to be discovered in the act of observation; should those instruments, however, attract notice, the answer is ready, “they are articles for sale;” nor is there fear that I should be deprived of them, whilst master of my price. My comrades know the value of gold at least better than myself. In a word, the merchants of our Fezzan caravan, are men of wealth, integrity, and enterprise; but Mahommedans, the most prejudiced and fanatic.
“In regard to my astronomical instruments, I'll make sure I'm never caught while observing; if those instruments do draw attention, I’ll simply say, ‘They’re for sale.’ I’m not worried about losing them as long as I control the price. My friends know the value of gold at least better than I do. In short, the merchants in our Fezzan caravan are wealthy, honest, and enterprising men; however, they are also Mahommedans, the most biased and fanatical.”
“I have not yet fixed or methodized my design, as to further journey into the interior of Africa; but I have made acquaintance[xxiii] with a man who has been at Bornou and Cashna, a place, from every account which I can collect, and particularly from the Jalabs, deserving my immediate attention after arrival at Fezzan.
“I haven’t finalized or organized my plans for further exploring the interior of Africa yet, but I’ve met a man who has been to Bornou and Cashna. From everything I can gather, especially from the Jalabs, these places deserve my immediate attention after I arrive in Fezzan.”
“I expect to be at Fezzan by the beginning of November, and I should propose in the next year, setting out for the Agades and Cashna, residing in and exploring those countries during ten months, and then returning viâ Mecca or Senegambia. Should any necessity of the case oblige me to return to Tripoly, I should not consider my tour as complete, but (with permission of the Society,) hold myself in readiness for a further undertaking.
“I expect to be in Fezzan by the beginning of November, and I plan to propose, next year, a trip to Agades and Cashna, spending ten months living in and exploring those regions, and then returning via Mecca or Senegambia. If I need to return to Tripoly for any reason, I wouldn’t consider my trip complete, but (with the Society's permission) I would be ready for another mission.”
“I will write again from Fezzan, if I can do so without danger; the safest plan that occurs, is to pack up some bale of goods with an ordinary letter of advice in Arabic, making my real dispatch the package or covering of some article of trade.
“I will write again from Fezzan, if I can do so safely; the best strategy I can think of is to pack some goods with a regular letter of advice in Arabic, using the package or covering of a trade item as my actual message.
“Pray write to and direct the English Consul at Tripoly, or elsewhere, never to make inquiry after me of the traders from Fezzan, and particularly when conveying any thing from me consigned to you. These people are of a very jealous and inquisitive temper, and any inquiries made after me by a Christian, might raise a thousand suspicions, and prove even of fatal consequence to me.
“Please write to and inform the English Consul in Tripoli, or wherever, never to ask about me from the traders from Fezzan, especially when delivering anything from me to you. These people are very jealous and curious, and any inquiries made about me by a Christian could raise a lot of suspicions and could even be disastrous for me."
“Nay, should yourselves not hear of me these three years, make no inquiry. Under such precaution, my danger will not be that I travel as a trader and Mahommedan, but such only as results from[xxiv] climate and ordinary perils of voyage in these countries; which I trust successfully to oppose, with a good constitution and strength of body, and with courage and suitable temper of mind.
“Nah, if you don’t hear from me in these three years, don’t ask about it. With this precaution, my dangers won’t come from traveling as a trader and Muslim, but only from the climate and usual risks of travel in these areas; which I hope to handle successfully, with good health and physical strength, along with courage and the right mindset.”
“It remains only for me to recommend to the Committee, the man whom I mentioned in a former letter. I met with the person in question, Joseph Frendenburgh, who was born in Germany, just on the eve of his intended departure from Cairo for his native country. I engaged and employed him as interpreter; and, pleased with the office, he offered to continue in my service, and attend me in my expedition. He had been ten or twelve years past forced to embrace the Mohammedan religion; had three times made the voyage to Mecca, and spoke perfectly both the Arabic and Turkish languages; in short, he was precisely the man that suited me. The connection with him will ensure me character and confidence from others, and indeed, without him, I should scarcely be able to pursue my journey, without actually embracing and professing Mahommedanism myself, I now well know him on ten months experience, and in just reliance on him, have no apprehension of the calamity incident to travellers, of being robbed by their servants.
“It’s just left for me to recommend the man I mentioned in a previous letter to the Committee. I met Joseph Frendenburgh, who was born in Germany, right before he was about to leave Cairo for his home country. I hired him as an interpreter, and since he was happy with the role, he offered to keep working with me and join me on my journey. He had been forced to convert to the Mohammedan religion about ten or twelve years ago, had made the trip to Mecca three times, and was fluent in both Arabic and Turkish; in short, he was exactly the person I needed. Working with him will help me build a good reputation and gain trust from others, and honestly, without him, I’d hardly be able to continue my journey without actually converting to Mahommedanism myself. After knowing him for ten months, I feel secure relying on him and have no worries about the risks travelers face, like being robbed by their servants.”
“I shall consign to him the care of my camels and my horses, (for we merchants of the caravan all go armed, and on horseback,) he will further have the care of my merchandize, and altogether, I shall have leisure for my inquiries, and for attending to the general objects of my undertaking. The demands of this man are far from exorbitant, and I request of the Society, the attending to a just[xxv] remuneration of his services, and specially, if in case of my death, he should faithfully preserve my journals and papers, and proceed with them to England.
“I will leave my camels and horses in his care, (since we merchants of the caravan are always armed and ride on horseback,) and he will also take care of my merchandise. This way, I’ll have time to focus on my inquiries and the overall goals of my mission. His demands are reasonable, and I ask the Society to ensure he receives a fair[xxv] payment for his services. Especially if I die, I need him to keep my journals and papers safe and take them to England.”
“I have been in some doubt as to the means of sending this letter, but on my request, General Bonaparte has with great goodness, himself condescended to take charge of its safe conveyance.
“I have been somewhat uncertain about how to send this letter, but at my request, General Bonaparte has kindly agreed to personally ensure its safe delivery.
“I hope my next will be from Fezzan, and that after three years, I shall be enabled to give account of the interior of Africa.
“I hope my next will be from Fezzan, and that after three years, I will be able to report on the inner regions of Africa."
“I am, &c. &c. &c.
"I am, etc. etc. etc."
“FREDERICK HORNEMAN.”
"FREDERICK HORNEMAN."
To Mr. Edwards, Secretary to the Society, instituted for exploring the interior of Africa.
To Mr. Edwards, Secretary of the Society, founded to explore the interior of Africa.
The above letter was transmitted to the African Committee, under the seal of General Bonaparte, who in addition to other marks of favour and protection shewn to the enterprise of Horneman, took on himself the care of forwarding his dispatches, as above stated.
The letter above was sent to the African Committee, with the seal of General Bonaparte, who, in addition to other gestures of support and protection for Horneman’s project, took it upon himself to ensure his dispatches were sent, as mentioned earlier.
Mr. Horneman’s Journal of his Travels from Cairo to Fezzan commences five days after the date of this letter. It was by him written in German, and in that language transmitted to the Committee of the African Society. Under their direction, a translation of it was made by a native of Germany, sufficiently versed in the[xxvi] English language, to render the sense of the original with truth and perspicuity; and, on collating his version, it appears to have been executed with fidelity and care. Some correction of foreign idioms and style was yet required: the Secretary, in performing this duty of Editor, has been attentive to the preserving not only the genuine descriptions, remarks, and precise meaning of the traveller, but likewise the spirit, and (at the same time) simplicity of narrative which characterizes his Journal; and, it is presumed, that on reference to the original, the translation offered in its present form will yet appear to be as nearly literal, as the different idioms and context of the English and German languages will admit of.
Mr. Horneman’s Journal of his Travels from Cairo to Fezzan starts five days after the date of this letter. He wrote it in German, and it was sent in that language to the Committee of the African Society. Under their guidance, a translation was made by a native German speaker who was proficient enough in the[xxvi] English language to accurately convey the original meaning. Upon reviewing his version, it seems to have been done with attention to detail and care. Some adjustments for foreign idioms and style were still necessary: the Secretary, in taking on the role of Editor, has focused on preserving not only the genuine descriptions, comments, and exact meaning of the traveler but also the spirit and simplicity of the narrative that defines his Journal. It is believed that when compared to the original, the translation provided here will yet appear to be as closely literal as the differences between the English and German languages allow.
To the Journal now printed is added an Appendix, containing,
To the Journal now published is added an Appendix, containing,
1st. A Note, on Mr. Horneman’s Description of the Country and Antiquities of Siwah; with Reference to ancient Accounts of the Oasis and Temple of Ammon; by the Secretary, Sir William Young, Bart. F. R. S.
1st. A Note on Mr. Horneman’s Description of the Country and Antiquities of Siwah; with Reference to Ancient Accounts of the Oasis and Temple of Ammon; by the Secretary, Sir William Young, Bart. F. R. S.
2d. A Memoir, containing various informations respecting the interior of Africa, transmitted from Mourzouk, in 1799, by F. Horneman.
2d. A Memoir, containing various information about the interior of Africa, sent from Mourzouk in 1799 by F. Horneman.
3d. Geographical Elucidations of the Travels and of the Informations of F. Horneman, with Maps, by Major James Rennell, F. R. S.
3d. Geographical Clarifications of the Travels and Knowledge of F. Horneman, with Maps, by Major James Rennell, F. R. S.
4th. Remarks on the Language of Siwah, in a Letter to the Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, P. R. S. by William Marsden, Esq. F. R. S.
4th. Comments on the Language of Siwah, in a Letter to the Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, P. R. S. by William Marsden, Esq. F. R. S.
The Route
of
Mr. Frederick
Hornemann,
from Ægypt to Fezzan;
with the Coasts & Countries adjacent,
Compiled by J. Rennell, 1802.
The Route
of
Mr. Frederick Hornemann,
from Egypt to Fezzan;
with the Coastlines & Countries nearby,
Compiled by J. Rennell, 1802.

Published according to Act of Parliament by J. Rennell, April 5th. 1802. | J. Walker Sculpt. |
[1]TRAVELS
IN THE
INTERIOR OF AFRICA.
[1]TRAVELS
THROUGH THE
INTERIOR OF AFRICA.
CHAPTER I.
Trip from Cairo to Augila.
SECTION I.
To Ummesogeir.
The merchants of Augila had appointed their rendezvous to be held at Kardaffi, a village in the vicinity of Cairo; where I joined them on September the 5th, 1798, and leaving that place the same day, in about an hour we reached the great body of the caravan, which yearly returns from Mecca through Cairo and Fezzan, to the western countries of Africa. The caravan was waiting for us at a small village called Baruasch: we halted at some little distance from the pilgrims, and encamped until the next morning; when the monotonous kettle-drum of our Sheik awakened us before rise of the sun, with summons to proceed on our journey.
The merchants of Augila had set their meeting place at Kardaffi, a village near Cairo. I joined them on September 5th, 1798, and after leaving that place the same day, we reached the main caravan within about an hour. This caravan returns annually from Mecca through Cairo and Fezzan to the western regions of Africa. The caravan was waiting for us at a small village called Baruasch. We camped a little distance away from the pilgrims and stayed until the next morning, when the steady beat of our Sheik's kettle-drum woke us before sunrise, calling us to continue our journey.
I had not under-rated the difficulties of the journey; I was aware that many must arise, especially affecting myself, never having[2] before travelled with a caravan, and being little acquainted with the customs and manners of those who composed it. We had travelled from day-break till noon, and no indication appeared of halt or refreshment, when I observed the principal and richest merchants gnawing a dry biscuit and some onions, as they went on; and was then, for the first time, informed, that it was not customary to unload the camels for regular repast, or to stop during the day-time, but in cases of urgent necessity. This my first inconvenience, was soon remedied by the hospitality of some Arabs who were riding near me, and who invited me to partake of their provisions.
I didn’t underestimate the challenges of the journey; I knew there would be many, especially for someone like me, who had never traveled with a caravan before and was not very familiar with the customs and behaviors of its members. We had been traveling from dawn until noon, and there was no sign of a break or a chance to rest, when I noticed the main and wealthiest merchants munching on a dry biscuit and some onions as they continued on. It was then that I learned, for the first time, that it wasn't the norm to unload the camels for regular meals or to take breaks during the day, except in cases of urgent necessity. My initial discomfort was quickly resolved by the generosity of some Arabs riding nearby, who invited me to share their food.
Soon after sun-set, our Sheik gave the signal for halting; and we pitched our tents.
Soon after sunset, our Sheik signaled to stop, and we set up our tents.
My dragoman, or interpreter, might, even in Europe, have passed for a good cook; and from remains of the provision which our hospitable friends at Cairo had supplied, was preparing an excellent supper, when an old Arab of Augila, observing his preparations, and that myself was unemployed, addressed me nearly as follows: “Thou art young, and yet dost not assist in preparing the meal of which thou art to partake: such, perhaps, may be a custom in the land of infidels, but is not so with us, and especially on a journey: thanks to God, we are not, in this desert, dependent on others, as are those poor pilgrims, but eat and drink what we ourselves provide, and as we please. Thou oughtest to learn every thing that the meanest Arab performs, that thou mayest be enabled to assist others in cases of necessity; otherwise, thou wilt be less esteemed, as being of less value than a mere woman; and many will think they may justly deprive thee of every thing in thy possession, as being unworthy to possess any thing: (adding sarcastically,) perhaps thou art carrying a large sum of money, and payest those men well.”[3] This remonstrance was not thrown away. I immediately assisted in every thing that was not beyond my force; and proportionally gained on the good opinion and esteem of my fellow-travellers, and was no longer considered as a weak and useless idler in their troop.
My interpreter might have easily passed as a good cook, even in Europe, and was preparing a great dinner from the leftover food that our generous friends in Cairo had given us. When an old Arab from Augila saw him cooking and noticed that I was just sitting around, he spoke to me like this: “You’re young, yet you’re not helping to prepare the meal you’re going to eat. Maybe that’s how they do things in the land of infidels, but it's not how we do it, especially while on a journey. Thank God, we aren’t relying on others in this desert like those poor pilgrims. We eat and drink what we provide for ourselves, however we want. You should learn everything that even the simplest Arab does so that you can help others when necessary; otherwise, you’ll be valued less than a mere woman. Many will think it's fair to take everything you own because you're seen as unworthy of having anything at all. (He added sarcastically,) maybe you’re carrying a lot of money and paying those men well.”[3] His words struck a chord. I immediately started helping with everything I could manage, which in turn earned me the respect and good opinion of my fellow travelers, and I was no longer viewed as a weak and useless bystander in the group.
The next morning we set out early, and after a march of four hours, arrived at Wadey-el-Latron. The signal had been made to halt, for the purpose of collecting fresh water, when a troop of Bedouins appeared at some distance in front, and created great alarm in our caravan. Our Sheik, or leader, had acquired, and deserved, the veneration and confidence of his followers, as much from his known prudence and valour, as from his dignity of Iman. He immediately ordered us to occupy the spot affording water, and himself, with about twenty Arabs and Tuaricks, advanced to reconnoitre the ground where the Bedouins had appeared: they had now retreated wholly out of sight, and we had time to cook and fill our water bags. We could not, however, consider this as a proper or safe station for the night; accordingly at four o’clock we proceeded on our march; and about eight in the evening reached the foot of a sand-hill, and encamped in great disorder, created by the late alarm;—making no fires, and using every precaution to avoid notice or discovery of our retreat.
The next morning we left early, and after a four-hour trek, we arrived at Wadey-el-Latron. We had stopped to gather fresh water when a group of Bedouins appeared in the distance, causing panic in our caravan. Our leader, the Sheik, had earned the respect and trust of his followers through his wisdom, bravery, and dignified presence. He quickly directed us to secure the water source while he, along with about twenty Arabs and Tuaricks, went to scout the area where the Bedouins had shown up. By then, the Bedouins had completely disappeared from sight, giving us time to cook and fill our water bags. However, we didn't see this as a safe spot to spend the night. So, at four o’clock, we continued our march and around eight in the evening, we reached the base of a sand hill and set up camp in a chaotic manner due to the earlier scare—keeping our fires off and taking every precaution to avoid being seen or discovered during our retreat.
The next morning, September 8th, we entered the Desert, which may be considered as the boundary of Egypt; and after travelling thirteen hours, encamped on a tract of land by the Arabs called Muhabag.
The next morning, September 8th, we entered the Desert, which can be seen as the boundary of Egypt; and after traveling for thirteen hours, we set up camp on a piece of land known to the Arabs as Muhabag.
The ensuing day, our journey was less fatiguing; in four hours and a half we reached Mogara, a watering-place on the verge of a fruitful valley.
The next day, our journey was less exhausting; in four and a half hours, we reached Mogara, a rest stop on the edge of a fertile valley.
[4]The water collected for the use of the caravans is carried in bags made of goat-skins, unripped in the middle, and stripped from the animal as entire as possible; those made at Soudan are the strongest and best; water may be preserved in them for five days, without acquiring any bad taste: the bags of an inferior manufacture give an ill taste, and a smell of the leather, from the second day. To render the skins flexible and lasting, they are greased on the inside with butter, and by the Arabs sometimes with oil, which latter gives quickly a rancid taste, and to any but an Arab, renders the water scarcely fit for drinking.
[4]The water collected for the caravans is carried in bags made from goat skins, which are left whole and uncut in the middle. The ones made in Sudan are the strongest and best quality; water can be kept in them for five days without taking on a bad taste. However, lower-quality bags give the water a bad flavor and a smell from the leather after just two days. To make the skins flexible and durable, they are greased on the inside with butter, and sometimes the Arabs use oil, which quickly makes the water taste rancid and, for anyone other than an Arab, makes it almost undrinkable.
The sixth day we had again a difficult and tiresome journey of twelve hours, without halting; towards the close of our march, the horse of an Arab near me falling sick, and being unable to proceed at the same pace as the caravan, I kept in the rear to attend him, and give such assistance as might be required. On our coming up with the caravan at its evening encampment, the Arab immediately sent by his slave, two pieces of dried camel’s flesh, with a proper compliment, requesting my acceptance of the present, as some return for the civility I had shewn. I was in an instant surrounded by a number of meaner Arabs, who eyed with avidity the meat I had received, and on my dividing it amongst them, seemed greatly surprised, that I should so readily part with what, in their estimation, was so great a dainty.
On the sixth day, we had another tough and exhausting journey of twelve hours straight. Towards the end of our trek, an Arab’s horse nearby fell ill and couldn’t keep up with the caravan, so I stayed back to help him out. When we caught up with the caravan at its evening campsite, the Arab immediately sent two pieces of dried camel meat through his slave, along with a polite note asking me to accept the gift as a thank you for my kindness. Instantly, I was surrounded by several other Arabs who eagerly stared at the meat I had received. When I shared it with them, they seemed very surprised that I would so easily give away what they considered such a delicacy.
Circumstances light and trivial often delineate manners, and characterize nations: the method of equipment, and the means of sustenance which the Arab uses in journeying through these deserts, may furnish a subject of just curiosity, and certainly of special use to such as may undertake a similar expedition.
Circumstances that are light and trivial often shape behaviors and define nations: the way the Arab equips himself and the means of food he relies on while traveling through these deserts may spark curiosity and will definitely be useful for anyone planning a similar journey.
[5]The Arab sets out on his journey with a provision of flour, kuskasa, onions, mutton suet, and oil or butter; and some of the richer class add to this store, a proportion of biscuit, and of dried flesh. As soon as the camels are halted and the baggage unladen, the drivers and slaves dig a small hole in the sands wherein to make a fire, and then proceed in search of wood, and of three stones to be placed round the cavity, for the purpose of confining the embers and supporting the cauldron. The cauldron, (which is of copper,) being set over, the time till the water begins to boil is employed first in discussing, and then in preparing, what the mess of the day shall consist of. The ordinary meal is of hasside, a stiff farinaceous pap, served up in a copper dish, which, in due economy of utensils and luggage, is at other times used for serving water to the camels: when this pap or pudding is thus served on table, it is diluted with a soup poured on it, enriched or seasoned with the monachie dried and finely pulverized. At other times, the dinner consists of flour kneaded into a strong dough, which being divided into small cakes and boiled, affords a species of hard dumplins called mijotta. A yet better repast is made of dried meat boiled together with mutton suet, onions sliced thin, crumbled biscuits, salt, and a good quantity of pepper. The meat is at dinner time taken out and reserved for the master, and the broth alone is the mess of his followers. The slaughtering of a camel affords a feast to the camel drivers and slaves. The friends of the owner of the beast have a preference in the purchase; and after dividing the carcase, every slave comes in for a share: no part of the animal capable of being gnawed by human tooth, is suffered to be lost; the very bones pass through various hands and mouths, before they are thrown away. They make sandals of the skin, and they weave the hair into twine.
[5]The Arab begins his journey with supplies of flour, couscous, onions, mutton fat, and oil or butter. Some of the wealthier travelers also bring biscuits and dried meat. Once the camels are stopped and the baggage unpacked, the drivers and helpers dig a small hole in the sand to make a fire and go off to gather wood and three stones to place around the hole to hold the embers and support the pot. The copper pot is set over the fire, and the time until the water boils is spent discussing and planning what the meal will be for the day. The typical meal is hasside, a thick flour porridge served in a copper dish, which is also used for giving water to the camels at other times. When this porridge is served, it's topped with a soup poured over it that’s enriched or seasoned with ground monachie. At times, the dinner consists of flour kneaded into a stiff dough, which is divided into small cakes and boiled, creating a type of hard dumpling called mijotta. A better meal consists of dried meat boiled with mutton fat, thinly sliced onions, crumbled biscuits, salt, and a good amount of pepper. At dinner time, the meat is taken out for the master, and the broth is what his followers eat. When a camel is slaughtered, it provides a feast for the camel drivers and laborers. The friends of the owner get priority in buying the meat, and after splitting the carcass, every laborer gets a portion: nothing that can be chewed is wasted; even the bones are passed around before being discarded. They use the skin for sandals and weave the hair into twine.
It is not on every occasion that time can be allowed, or materials[6] found, for dressing victuals: in the anticipation of such an exigency, the traveller provides a food called simitée: it consists of barley boiled until it swells, then dried in the sun, and then further dried over the fire; and lastly, being ground into a powder, it is mixed with salt, pepper, and carraway-seed, and put into a leather bag: when it is to be used, it is kneaded into a dough, with just water enough to give it consistency, and is served up with butter or oil. If further diluted with water, then dates are added to the meal, and it is called rouin. Such is the food of the traveller when there is a scarcity of fuel or of water; and none can be expended in boiling. I was often, for days together, without other food than this cold farinaceous pap, mixed with a few dates. Onions and red Spanish pepper are the general and the only seasonings of each meal, with the addition of salt.
It’s not always possible to find time or ingredients for cooking, so travelers prepare a food called simitée. It’s made from barley that’s boiled until it swells, dried in the sun, then dried over a fire, and finally ground into a powder. This powder is mixed with salt, pepper, and caraway seeds, and stored in a leather bag. When it's ready to eat, it's kneaded into a dough with just enough water to hold it together, and served with butter or oil. If it’s mixed with more water, dates are added, and it’s called rouin. This is what travelers eat when fuel or water is scarce, and they can't boil anything. I often went for days without anything but this cold grain porridge mixed with a few dates. Onions and red Spanish pepper are the main, and sometimes the only, seasonings for every meal, along with salt.
On the seventh day, after a march of four hours, we reached Biljoradec, commonly called Jahudie, a term implying that the water is bad, or that other water is not to be found but at a considerable distance.
On the seventh day, after a four-hour march, we arrived at Biljoradec, usually referred to as Jahudie, a name suggesting that the water is poor, or that finding other water requires traveling a long way.
The three following days, travelling occasionally in the night, we were forty hours in actual journey. On the first of these, (being the ninth day since leaving the vicinity of Cairo,) we reached the chain of mountains which bounded the uniform desert through which we had passed. On the tenth, mounting these hills, I observed the plain on their summit to consist of a saline mass spread over so large a tract of surface, that in one direction no eye could reach its termination, and what might be called its width, I computed at several miles. The clods of salt discoloured with sand lay thick and close, and gave to this vast plain the appearance of a recently ploughed field.
The next three days, traveling sometimes at night, we spent forty hours on the journey. On the first of these days, which was the ninth day since we left Cairo, we arrived at the mountain range that bordered the uniform desert we had crossed. On the tenth day, climbing these hills, I noticed that the flat area at the top was covered with a salt mass so extensive that in one direction, you couldn't see where it ended, and I estimated its width to be several miles. The clumps of salt, mixed with sand, were thickly scattered, making this vast plain look like a recently plowed field.
[7]On the summit of this eminence, and almost in the middle of this saline tract, (on computation of its width) I discovered a spring; and the passage of Herodotus[2] occurring to my mind, in which he mentions springs of fresh water on the salt hills, I eagerly made up to its brink. I found it edged with salt: some poor pilgrims attending me tasted the water, but it was so saturated with saline matter, as to be wholly unfit for drink.
[7]At the top of this rise, almost in the center of this salty area, I found a spring. Remembering a passage from Herodotus[2] where he talks about fresh water springs on the salt hills, I hurried over to check it out. I discovered it was surrounded by salt. Some weary travelers with me tried the water, but it was so full of salt that it was completely undrinkable.
On the eleventh day (September the 15th), we came to an inhabited spot; after five hours march arriving at the small village of Ummesogeir.
On the eleventh day (September 15th), we reached a populated area; after walking for five hours, we arrived at the small village of Ummesogeir.
[8]SECTION II.
Observations on the Desert, from the Valley of Natron to the Mountains of Ummesogier.
The Desert forms a natural boundary to Egypt, on the west extending from the Natron Valley to the mountains of Ummesogier; to the north, the dreary and barren plain is bounded by a chain of lofty hills, in view during the whole course of the caravan; and to the south, extends a journey, probably, of several days, by the ordinary mode of computation in these countries; but in this direction its limits are not defined, or are not known.
The Desert serves as a natural boundary for Egypt, stretching west from the Natron Valley to the Ummesogier mountains; to the north, a bleak and desolate plain is bordered by a range of high hills visible throughout the entire caravan route; and to the south, there's a journey that likely takes several days by the usual standards in these regions, but in that direction, its boundaries are unclear or unknown.
In this vast tract of sands, petrified wood is found, of various forms and size: sometimes are seen whole trunks of trees, of twelve feet circumference or more; sometimes only branches and twigs, scarcely of a quarter of an inch diameter; and sometimes merely pieces of bark of various kinds, and in particular of the oak, are to be found. Many of the great stems yet retain their side branches, and in many the natural timber has undergone so little change, that the circular ranges of the wood are discernible, and especially in those trunks which apparently were of oak. The interior of other bodies of timber was become a petrifaction, shewing no distinctions of grain or fibre, but bearing the appearance of mere stone; though the outward coat and form of the substance clearly denoted the tree.
In this vast area of sand, you can find petrified wood in various shapes and sizes: sometimes you'll see whole tree trunks with a circumference of twelve feet or more; other times, there are just branches and twigs that are barely a quarter of an inch thick; and sometimes you'll come across pieces of bark from different types of trees, particularly oak. Many of the large trunks still have their side branches, and in many cases, the original wood has survived so well that you can still see the circular patterns, especially in those trunks that seem to be oak. The insides of some pieces of wood have turned entirely to stone, showing no signs of grain or fiber, but the outer layer and shape still clearly indicate that it was once a tree.
Several Arabs informed me, that in travelling over this Desert, petrified trees were often found upright, and as if growing in the soil; but I presume, respecting those I did not see, from those I inspected, that they were merely trunks raised by hand, round the[9] base of which the sand had quickly gathered before the winds, and formed a mound, as if heaved up by a root. The colour of the petrified wood is in general black, or nearly so; but in some instances it is of a light gray, and then so much resembling the wood in its natural state, that our slaves would often collect, and bring it in, for the purposes of firing.
Several Arab people told me that while crossing this desert, they often found petrified trees standing up, as if they were growing in the ground. However, based on what I examined, I suspect that the ones I didn't see were just trunks propped up by hand, with sand quickly accumulating around the base, creating a mound that looked like it was pushed up by roots. The petrified wood is generally black or close to it; in some cases, it’s a light gray and resembles natural wood so closely that our slaves would frequently gather it and bring it back for use as firewood.
These petrifactions are sometimes scattered in single pieces, but are oftener found in irregular layers, or strata, covering together a considerable space of ground.
These fossils are sometimes found as individual pieces, but they're more often located in irregular layers or strata that cover a significant area of land.
If there yet remains any trace of a western branch of the Nile, as mentioned by ancient writers,[3] it is probably to be discovered in some part of this Desert. I observed no channel, or vestige of such course of river, on the route taken by the caravan. I would direct the researches of any future traveller specially to the tract of country round where we encamped on the nights when we halted at the foot of the sand hill west of Wadey-el-Latron, and in the district of Muhabag: these places we reached not till after sunset, and departing before day, I myself had no opportunity of examining the country. The term Bahr-bella-ma, commonly rendered river without water, by no means designates or points to any specific channel or tract in which any ancient channel may be more probably discovered: for if petrified trees fit for masts, or petrified timbers suited to other purposes of ship-building, said to be found in the[10] Bahr-bella-ma, characterize and give the name (as we are told) to the tract of land throughout which they are to be found, then the appropriate translation is not river, but sea without water, for such petrifactions are scattered over the whole Desert. Indeed the general appearance of this vast and barren tract, well accords to the title of sea without water; its sandy surface resembling that of a leeshore, over which the waters streaming before the storm have, on their ebb, deposited timber, or what else was carried on by the tide. I say not wreck of vessels, for I saw no wood that had the least appearance of the tool, or of having been wrought for any purpose of man. Such as, by light observers, have been taken for fragments of masts, are merely trunks of trees of from thirty to forty feet in length, broken and shivered into large splinters, which lying near each other, shew in their forms and grain of timber, the mass they formerly belonged to and composed.
If there’s still any sign of a western branch of the Nile, as mentioned by ancient writers,[3] it’s likely to be found somewhere in this Desert. I didn’t notice any riverbed or signs of such a river along the route taken by the caravan. I would suggest that any future traveler focus their search specifically on the area around where we camped on the nights we stopped at the foot of the sand hill west of Wadey-el-Latron, and in the area of Muhabag: we only reached these places after sunset, and left before dawn, so I didn’t have a chance to explore the area. The term Bahr-bella-ma, often translated as river without water, doesn’t specifically indicate any channel or area where an ancient riverbed could be found: if petrified trees suitable for masts, or petrified wood useful for other shipbuilding purposes, are said to be found in the[10] Bahr-bella-ma, and this characterizes the land where they are found, then a more fitting translation would be sea without water, since these petrified remains are scattered throughout the entire Desert. In fact, the overall look of this vast and barren area matches the name sea without water; its sandy surface resembles that of a shore, where the waters that rushed in before a storm left behind timber as they receded. I’m not talking about wrecked vessels, as I didn’t see any wood that appeared to be shaped or crafted for any human purpose. What some quick observers have mistaken for pieces of masts are actually just tree trunks, about thirty to forty feet long, broken into large splinters, which lie near each other and show, in their shapes and wood grain, the mass they once belonged to.
To the north of the Desert runs a chain of steep and bare calcareous mountains, which were in constant view of our caravan travelling at the distance of three to seven miles in like direction. At the foot of these, runs a flat tract of moorish swampy land, from one to six miles in breadth, abounding in springs, and to which we resorted every second or third day for a supply of water; but at the period of our journey, the springs throughout the whole valley were nearly dried up. The water which remained, and run or spread on the surface, was bitter;[4] yet digging wells near to these rivulets or marshes, we found water at the depth only of five or six feet, which was sweet and palatable.
To the north of the desert, there’s a range of steep, bare limestone mountains, always visible to our caravan traveling about three to seven miles in the same direction. At the base of these mountains lies a flat area of marshy land, varying from one to six miles wide, filled with springs, where we went every second or third day for water. However, by the time of our journey, the springs across the entire valley were nearly dried up. The remaining water that flowed or pooled on the surface was bitter; [4] but when we dug wells near these streams or marshes, we found water at a depth of only five or six feet that was sweet and drinkable.
[11]SECTION III.
Ummesogeir and the Journey to Siwah.
Ummesogeir is situated on a sandy plain stretching into the recess between two diverging branches of the mountain. In the valley thus formed, appear vast isolated masses of rock, on the largest of which the village is built; it is small, and contains few inhabitants, furnishing only thirty men capable of bearing arms. The houses are low, constructed of stones cemented with a calcareous earth, and thatched with the boughs of date trees. I was informed, that some of these buildings covered caves or chambers cut in the rock; probably ancient catacombs. Our camp was pitched at the foot of the rock, among date trees, through which the way leads up to the town. Its inhabitants, poor as they appeared, received us with hospitality; they came down, almost to a man, from their houses, and assisted us in watering our camels, or whatever service was required. Towards evening I walked up to the village by a path of very difficult access. Coming to a kind of market-place, in its centre I observed bargains making with such eagerness, noise, and altercation, that one should suppose the dealings to be of the first moment; but I soon perceived the sellers to be only a few poor pilgrims of our caravan, and their articles of trade to be merely henna hoechel, rings of lead or glass, and such like ornaments for women; which, with a little shot and gunpowder, they were bartering for dates: the merchandise on either side was not altogether worth a crown.
Ummesogeir is located on a sandy plain that stretches into the gap between two branching sections of the mountain. In the valley formed here, there are large isolated rock formations, with the village built on the largest one. It’s small, with only a few residents—just thirty men who can fight. The houses are low, made of stones glued together with earthy cement, and topped with date tree branches. I was told that some of these buildings cover caves or chambers carved into the rock; likely ancient tombs. Our camp was set up at the base of the rock, among date trees, leading the way up to the village. The residents, despite their poor appearance, welcomed us warmly; almost everyone came down from their homes to help us water our camels or assist with whatever we needed. In the evening, I climbed up to the village via a difficult path. When I reached a sort of marketplace, I noticed people making deals with such enthusiasm, noise, and argument that it seemed like the transactions were of great importance; but I quickly realized the sellers were just a few poor pilgrims from our caravan, and their goods were merely henna hoechel, rings made of lead or glass, and other small trinkets for women. They were trading these items, along with a bit of shot and gunpowder, for dates; the value of the goods on both sides was hardly worth a crown.
The people of Ummesogeir are indeed in every respect poor, depending wholly for subsistence on their dates, which they in part[12] sell to the Arabs of the Desert, and in part carry to Alexandria, and exchange for corn, oil, or fat. Their manners are rude and simple, as might be expected, from a society so small, and separated from every other, by vast tracts of desert in every direction. Thus sequestered from the world, too weak in numbers for attack, and too poor to be attacked, these people derive, from their situation and habits of life, a simple and peaceful disposition. An old man told me, that the Bedouins once attempted to deprive them of their rock, and pittance which the date trees around furnished; and would have succeeded, had not a marabut (or holy man) who lies buried in the village, so dazzled the eyes of the invaders, that they could not find the place, though constantly roving round it. A like miracle was hoped for, and (in vain certainly) expected in favour of Cairo, when the French invaded Egypt. The idea of miraculous interposition of this kind appears to have been common to the Oriental nations.
The people of Ummesogeir are truly poor in every way, relying entirely on their dates for survival. They sell some to the Bedouins of the Desert and take the rest to Alexandria to trade for grain, oil, or fat. Their customs are rough and straightforward, as you might expect from such a small community, cut off from others by vast stretches of desert in every direction. Isolated from the outside world, too few in number to be attacked, and too impoverished to attract much attention, these people have developed a simple and peaceful way of life. An old man shared with me that the Bedouins once tried to take their land and the small amount of resources provided by the date palms. They might have succeeded if it weren't for a marabut (or holy man) buried in the village, who dazzled the invaders so much that they couldn't find the place, even as they wandered around it. A similar miracle was hoped for, albeit in vain, for Cairo when the French invaded Egypt. The notion of miraculous intervention like this seems to have been a common belief among Eastern nations.
During our stay at this place, the effects of a Twater, who died on the journey were sold by auction. Another man, during our route, was killed by a fall from his camel, pitching with his head on a pointed stone, and which caused his instant death. Two others, poor pilgrims from Mecca, fell victims to the fatigue and difficulties of so long a journey, and for which their scanty means were ill suited, either as to food or rest; and this completes our bill of mortality.
During our stay at this place, the belongings of a Twater who died on the journey were sold at auction. Another man was killed when he fell off his camel, landing headfirst on a sharp stone, causing his instant death. Two other unfortunate pilgrims from Mecca succumbed to the exhaustion and hardships of such a long journey, which their limited resources couldn't support, whether in terms of food or rest; and that concludes our count of fatalities.
After some days of repose, we proceeded on our journey towards Siwah, distant from Ummesogeir a journey of twenty hours. We soon passed the skirts of the broad sandy plain, and reascended the mountains connected with, and stretching from, those which cover the vale of Ummesogeir to the west. A long and tedious passage over these hills led us finally to a green and fertile valley,[13] towards which, as we descended from the mountain, we perceived people gathering provender for their cattle. Our train of heavy laden camels readily denoted that we were no troop of hostile Arabs; and the people leaving their work, ran to meet and congratulate us on our arrival. They told us that the whole neighbourhood was at peace, and that we might encamp safely and without apprehension. They mounted their asses and conducted us to a plain west of Siwah, and not far distant from that town, where we pitched our tents.
After a few days of rest, we continued our journey to Siwah, which was twenty hours away from Ummesogeir. We quickly crossed the edge of the wide sandy plain and climbed back up the mountains that connect to those overlooking the valley of Ummesogeir to the west. The long and exhausting trek over these hills finally brought us to a green and fertile valley,[13] where we saw people gathering food for their cattle as we descended from the mountain. Our train of heavily loaded camels clearly showed that we weren’t a group of hostile Arabs, and the people left their work to come meet us, welcoming us warmly. They informed us that the entire area was peaceful, and we could set up camp safely and without fear. They hopped on their donkeys and guided us to a plain west of Siwah, not far from the town, where we set up our tents.
[14]SECTION IV.
Siwah.
Siwah is a small independent state; it acknowledges, indeed, the grand Sultan paramount, but it pays him no tribute. Round its chief town called Siwah, are situated at one or two miles distance, the villages of Scharkie, (in Siwahian dialect termed Agrmie,) Msellem, Menschie, Sbocka, and Barischa. Siwah is built upon, and round, a mass of rock; in which, according to tradition, the ancient people had only caves for their habitation. Indeed the style of building is such, that the actual houses might be taken for caves; they are raised so close to each other, that many of the streets, even at noon, are dark, and so intricate, that a stranger cannot find his way into or out of the town, small as it is, without a guide. Many of the houses built on the declivity of the rock, and especially those terminating the descent towards the plain, are of more than ordinary height, and their walls particularly thick and strong, so as to form a circumvallation of defence to the town within.
Siwah is a small independent state; it recognizes the grand Sultan as the highest authority, but it doesn’t pay him any tribute. Surrounding its main town, also called Siwah, are villages like Scharkie (known as Agrmie in the Siwahian dialect), Msellem, Menschie, Sbocka, and Barischa, located one or two miles away. Siwah is built on and around a large rock; according to tradition, the ancient people only had caves for shelter. In fact, the buildings are designed in a way that they could easily be mistaken for caves. They are so closely packed that many of the streets remain dark even at noon, and they are so complex that a stranger would struggle to navigate in or out of the town, however small, without a guide. Many of the houses on the slope of the rock, especially those at the bottom of the descent towards the plain, are taller than usual, with particularly thick and strong walls that create a defensive barrier around the town.
The people of our caravan compared Siwah to a bee-hive, and the comparison is suitable, whether regarding the general appearance of the eminence thus covered with buildings, the swarm of its people crowded together, or the confused noise, or hum and buz from its narrow passages and streets, and which reach the ear to a considerable distance.
The people in our caravan likened Siwah to a beehive, and that comparison fits well, whether it's about the overall look of the area filled with buildings, the crowd of people packed closely together, or the chaotic sounds—the buzz and hum—from its narrow alleys and streets, which can be heard from quite a distance.
Round the foot of the eminence are erected stables for the[15] camels, horses, and asses, which could not ascend to, or could not be accommodated in, the town above.
At the base of the hill, there are stables for the[15] camels, horses, and donkeys that couldn’t make it up to, or fit in, the town above.
The territory of Siwah is of considerable extent;[5] its principal and most fruitful district is a well watered valley of about fifty miles in circuit, hemmed in by steep and barren rocks. Its soil is a sandy loam, in some places rather poached or fenny; but, assisted by no great industry of the natives, it produces corn, oil, and vegetables for the use of man or beast: its chief produce, however, consists in dates, which, from their great quantity and excellent flavour, render the place proverbial for fertility among the surrounding Arabs of the Desert. Each inhabitant possesses one or more gardens, making his relative wealth; and these it is his whole business to water and cultivate. A large garden yielding all such produce as is natural to the country, is valued at the price of from four to six hundred imperial dollars, there termed real-patuacks. The gardens round the towns or villages, are fenced with walls from four to six feet high, and sometimes with hedges; they are watered by many small streams of salt or sweet water, falling from the bordering rocks and mountains, or issuing from springs rising in the plain itself, and which, for the purposes of irrigation, being diverted into many small channels, expend themselves in the vale, and in no instance flow beyond the limits of this people’s territory. The dates produced are preserved in public magazines, of which the key is kept by the Sheik: to these storehouses the dates are brought in baskets closely rammed down, and a register of each deposit is kept.
The area of Siwah is quite large; [5] its main and most productive region is a well-watered valley that spans about fifty miles, surrounded by steep, barren rocks. The soil is sandy loam, occasionally muddy or marshy; however, with little effort from the locals, it produces grains, oil, and vegetables for both people and animals. The main product, though, is dates, which are so abundant and flavorful that the area is well-known among nearby desert Arabs for its fertility. Each person owns one or more gardens, which determine their wealth, and they focus all their efforts on watering and tending to these gardens. A large garden that grows all the local produce is worth between four to six hundred imperial dollars, known locally as real-patuacks. Gardens around the towns or villages are enclosed by walls that stand four to six feet tall, and sometimes by hedges; they are irrigated by numerous small streams of either salt or fresh water that flow from the surrounding rocks and mountains or emerge from springs in the plains. For irrigation purposes, the water is channeled into small ditches, which direct it into the valley, and it never flows beyond the community's territory. The dates collected are stored in public warehouses, with the key held by the Sheik; dates are brought in tightly packed baskets, and a record of each deposit is maintained.
North-west of Siwah, there is a stratum of salt extending a full mile, and near it salt is found on the surface, lying in clods or small lumps. On this spot rise numerous springs, and frequently a spring[16] of water perfectly sweet is found within a few paces from one which is salt. North of Siwah, on the road leading to El-Mota, I found many of these salt springs quite close to others which were sweet.
Northwest of Siwah, there’s a layer of salt that stretches for a full mile, and near it, salt can be found on the surface, appearing in clumps or small lumps. In this area, many springs emerge, and often there’s a fresh water spring found just a few steps away from a salt one. North of Siwah, along the road to El-Mota, I came across many of these salty springs right next to others that had fresh water.
It is not easy to ascertain the general population of a place, with so little police, and so little regularity of government as Siwah, unless opportunity occurred of seeing its people assembled at some general meeting or festival. The number of its warriors, however, is more easily known; and on such data, further estimate of its population may be made. According to the ancient constitution and laws of the state, the government should be vested in twelve Sheiks, two of whom were to administer its powers in rotation; but a few years past, twenty other wealthy citizens, forced themselves into a share of authority, assumed the title of Sheik, and enlarging the circle of aristocracy, increased the pretensions and disputes for power. On each matter of public concern, they now hold general councils. I attended several of these general meetings, held close to the town wall, where the chiefs were squatted in state; and I observed, that a strong voice, violent action, great gesticulation, abetted by party support and interest, gained the most applause, and carried the greatest influence: perhaps such result is not uncommon in most popular meetings. Whenever these councils cannot agree ultimately on any point, then the leaders and people fly to arms, and the strongest party carries the question. Justice is administered according to ancient usage, and general notions of equity. Fines, to be paid in dates, constitute the punishments: for instance, the man who strikes another, pays from ten to fifty kaftas or baskets of dates; these baskets, by which every thing in this place is estimated and appraised, are about three feet high, and four in circumference.
It’s not easy to figure out the general population of a place like Siwah, with so few police and such a lack of consistent government, unless you get a chance to see its people gathered at a public meeting or festival. The number of its warriors is easier to determine, and from that, you can make a better guess about the overall population. According to the old constitution and laws, the government is supposed to be run by twelve Sheiks, with two of them taking turns to handle the powers; however, a few years ago, twenty other wealthy citizens pushed their way into a share of the power, claimed the title of Sheik, and expanded the aristocracy, which increased the competition and conflicts over power. Now, for every public issue, they hold general councils. I attended several of these meetings near the town wall, where the leaders sat in a formal manner. I noticed that loud voices, aggressive gestures, and strong party backing attracted the most attention and had the most influence; this outcome is probably common in most public gatherings. Whenever these councils can’t reach an agreement on any issue, the leaders and people take up arms, and the strongest side wins the argument. Justice is delivered based on ancient customs and general ideas of fairness. Fines, paid in dates, are the punishments: for example, a person who hits someone else pays between ten to fifty kaftas or baskets of dates; these baskets, which are how everything is measured here, are about three feet tall and four feet around.
[17]The dress of the men consists of a white cotton shirt and breeches, and a large calico cloth, striped white and blue, (manufactured at Cairo,) which is folded and thrown over the left shoulder, and is called melaye. On their heads they wear a cap of red worsted or cotton. These caps, chiefly made at Tunis, are a covering, characteristic of the Mussulman; and no Jew or Christian on the coasts of Barbary is permitted to wear them. At times of festival, the Siwahans dress themselves in kaftans and a benisch, such as the Arabs commonly wear when in towns.
[17]The men wear a white cotton shirt and pants, along with a large striped cloth in white and blue, made in Cairo, which is draped over their left shoulder and called melaye. On their heads, they sport a cap made of red wool or cotton. These caps, primarily produced in Tunis, are a typical head covering for Muslims; no Jews or Christians along the Barbary coast are allowed to wear them. During festivals, the Siwahans dress in kaftans and a benisch, similar to what Arabs typically wear in towns.
The women of Siwah wear wide blue shifts, usually of cotton, which reach to the ankles, and a melaye (as above described), which they wrap round their head, from which it falls over the body in manner of a cloak.
The women of Siwah wear loose blue dresses, typically made of cotton, that go down to their ankles, and a melaye (as previously described), which they wrap around their heads, letting it drape over their bodies like a cloak.
They plait their hair into three tresses, one above the other; in the lowermost tress they insert various ornaments of glass, or false coral, or silver, and twist in long stripes of black leather, hanging down the back, and to the ends of which they fasten little bells. On the crown of their heads, they fix a piece of silk or woollen cloth, which floats behind. As ear-rings they wear two, and some women three, large silver rings, inserted as links of a chain: their necklace is glass imitating coral; those of the higher class wear round their necks a solid ring of silver, somewhat thicker than the collar usually worn by criminals in some parts of Europe; from this ring, by a chain of the same metal, hangs pendant a silver plate, engraved with flowers and other ornaments, in the Arabian taste. They further decorate their arms and legs, (just above the ancle,) with rings of silver, of copper, or of glass.
They braid their hair into three sections, one on top of the other; in the bottom braid, they add various decorations made of glass, fake coral, or silver, and weave in long strips of black leather that hang down their backs, with little bells attached to the ends. On the tops of their heads, they secure a piece of silk or wool fabric that flows behind them. For earrings, they wear two, and some women wear three, large silver rings linked together like a chain: their necklace is made of glass that looks like coral; those from the higher class wear a solid silver ring around their necks, which is somewhat thicker than the collars often worn by criminals in some parts of Europe; from this ring, a silver plate hangs by a chain of the same metal, engraved with floral and other decorative designs in the Arabian style. They also adorn their arms and legs (just above the ankle) with silver, copper, or glass rings.
I can give no favourable account of the character of the people of[18] Siwah, either from general repute, or from my own observation. I found them obtrusive and thievish. Our tents, and especially my own, were constantly surrounded and infested by this people; and our merchants were under the necessity of guarding their bales of goods, with more than ordinary attention, under apprehension not merely of pillage, but of general and hostile attack.
I can't say anything positive about the character of the people of[18] Siwah, based on what I've heard or what I've seen myself. I found them pushy and dishonest. Our tents, especially mine, were always surrounded and bothered by these people; our merchants had to keep a closer eye on their bales of goods because they were worried not just about theft, but also about an overall hostile attack.
I was told much of the riches of this people, and should suppose there must be men of considerable property amongst them; as they have a very extensive traffic in dates with different and remote countries, pay no tribute, and have little opportunity of dissipating the money they receive. The policy of the Siwahans leads them to cultivate a strict and close amity with the Arabs to the north of their country, and who occasionally visit Siwah in small troops or parties, and carry on a trade of barter for the dates. Here our caravan disposed of part of its merchandize, receiving in exchange, dates, meat, and small baskets, in the weaving and context of which, the women of Siwah are remarkably neat and skilful, and in the making of which consists their chief employment. Diseases incident to the country and climate, and from which the natives most suffer, are the ague and fever, and opthalmic affections, or disorders of the eyes.
I heard a lot about the wealth of these people and figured there must be some fairly wealthy individuals among them; they have a large trade in dates with various far-off countries, pay no taxes, and have little chance to waste the money they earn. The strategy of the Siwahans is to maintain a close friendship with the Arabs to the north of their territory, who occasionally come to Siwah in small groups to trade for dates. Our caravan sold some of its goods here, exchanging them for dates, meat, and small baskets, which the women of Siwah are particularly skilled at making with great care, and this is their main occupation. The main health issues in the area, which affect the locals the most, are fevers and eye disorders.
The language of Siwah, whatever words or expressions may have crept in, from various intercourse of people, is not fundamentally Arabic; and this has led me to various conjectures. At first I looked for the root or origin of this language to the East; but on maturer consideration, and from communications with one of the Tuaricks from Twat, with whom I was in habits of intimacy, I am now satisfied of my former error,[6] and that the language of Siwah is a[19] dialect of that used throughout the great nation of Africa, to which my friend, the Tuarick, belonged, and which may be considered as the aboriginal.
The language of Siwah, no matter what words or phrases have come in from various interactions with people, is not fundamentally Arabic; and this has led me to various theories. At first, I searched for the root or origin of this language in the East; but after further thought and discussions with one of the Tuaricks from Twat, whom I was close with, I now see that I was mistaken,[6] and that the language of Siwah is a[19] dialect of the one used across the vast nation of Africa, to which my friend, the Tuarick, belonged, and which can be considered the indigenous language.
The larger collection of Siwahan words, which I had first made, was lost with other papers, by an accident which I shall hereafter have occasion to mention.
The larger collection of Siwahan words that I initially created was lost along with other documents due to an accident that I will mention later.
The following list I had from a man of Siwah, whom I afterwards got acquainted with at Augila.
The following list I received from a man from Siwah, who I later got to know in Augila.
Sun, | Itfuct. | Horse, | Achmar. |
Clouds, | Logmam. | Horses, | Ickmare. |
Ear, | Temmesocht. | Have you a horse? | Goreck Achmar. |
Head, | Achfé. | Milk, | Achi. |
Eye, | Taun. | Flesh or Meat, | Acksum. |
Eyebrow, | Temauin. | Bread, | Tagora. |
Beard, | Itmert. | Oil, | Tsemur. |
Hand, | Fuss. | Water, | Aman. |
Penis, | Achmum. | Dates, | Tena. |
Camel, | Lgum. | House, | Achbén. |
Sheep, | Jelibb. | Houses, | Gebeun. |
Cow, | Ftunest. | Sand, | Itjeda. |
Mountain, | Iddrarn. | Cap, | Tschatschet. |
Sabre, | Aus. | Catacombs, | Tum-megar. |
Sword, | Limscha. |
[20]SECTION V.
Ancient artifacts of Siwah.
As we approached the spot destined for our encampment in the Vale of Siwah, I descried to the westward some ruins of an extensive building, a few miles distant from the road, and concluded them to be the same as noticed by a late English traveller, (Mr. Brown,) of whose discoveries I heard first in London, and afterwards, when in Egypt. Circumstances rendered it necessary for me to be particularly on my guard, and to defer any visit to, or actual inspection of, these antiquities, until I had retrieved the confidence of the natives, who, on my very first appearance, (as I was informed,) had taken me and my interpreter, for Christians; and to this supposition they were induced, from our fairer complexion, from our gait and manners, and from our Turkish dresses. When I took advantage of the disturbances at Cairo and its environs, to get introduced as a Mahomedan to the caravan, I could not indeed speak readily, either Turkish or Arabic; but in this, I flattered myself, the assumed character of a young Mameluke might be my excuse; and I further derived confidence from the experience and abilities of my interpreter, who (a German by birth,) had been forced, twelve years past, to embrace the Mahommedan religion at Constantinople, and whose address and knowledge, I hoped, might preclude, or extricate me from, any consequences of jealousy or suspicion.
As we got closer to the place where we would camp in the Vale of Siwah, I spotted some ruins of a large building a few miles off the road to the west. I figured they were the same ones mentioned by a recent English traveler, Mr. Brown, whose discoveries I first heard about in London and later in Egypt. I needed to be particularly cautious and put off any visit to these ancient sites until I regained the trust of the locals, who, as I was told, initially thought I and my interpreter were Christians. They based this assumption on our lighter skin, our way of walking and behaving, and our Turkish clothing. When I took advantage of the unrest in Cairo and the surrounding areas to get introduced as a Muslim to the caravan, I couldn't speak Turkish or Arabic very well. However, I hoped that playing the part of a young Mameluke would cover for that. I also felt more confident because of my interpreter's experience and skills. He was originally from Germany and had been forced to convert to Islam in Constantinople twelve years earlier, and I hoped his knowledge and charm would help me avoid any jealousy or suspicion.
Considering the importance of my mission, and the great purpose of exploring the whole of Northern Africa, with which I was[21] entrusted, perhaps it had been more wise and prudent on my part, not to have exposed myself to general intercourse, until better qualified to sustain the character I had assumed; had I so done in the present instance, and abstained from visiting the curiosities of Siwah, and exposing myself in the novelty of the attempt, to examinations and suspicions, I might have avoided a danger which (as will appear in the sequel) nearly proved fatal to myself, and therewith to the object of my voyage.
Given how important my mission is and the significant goal of exploring all of Northern Africa, which I was[21] assigned to, it might have been wiser and more cautious for me not to engage in general interactions until I was better prepared to uphold the role I had taken on. If I had done this in this situation and skipped visiting the attractions of Siwah, avoiding the risks of scrutiny and suspicion that came with trying something new, I might have steered clear of a danger that (as will be revealed later) nearly turned deadly for me and jeopardized the purpose of my journey.
Making such candid admission of not having the requisite forbearance, with objects of so just curiosity in view, I proceed to state the course of my inquiries, and the result.
Making this honest admission of not having the necessary patience, with such legitimate curiosity in mind, I will now outline my investigations and their outcome.
I first visited the ruins of the extensive edifice before observed. I accosted some men working in the gardens near, and questioning them as to what they knew of this building, they answered, “that in former times Siwah was inhabited by infidels, most of whom lived in caves, but some inhabited these buildings.” One spokesman, pointing to a building in the centre, said, “tradition tells us, that edifice was the hall in which the divan used to assemble; at time of its construction men were stronger than I am; for those huge stones serving as a roof to the fabric, were lifted up and placed there by two men only: there is much gold buried under the walls.” When I then entered into the ruins, I was followed by all the people near, and thus prevented examining the place with any accuracy. On a second visit I was not more successful; and when, after a few days, I returned thither again, some Siwahans directly said to me, “thou undoubtedly art yet a Christian in thy heart, else why come so often to visit these works of Infidels.” In order to maintain the character I had assumed, I was thus necessitated to abandon any further project of nice examination or admeasurement,[22] and restrict myself to general observations, such as I now submit in detail as they occurred.
I first visited the ruins of the large building I had seen before. I approached some men working in the nearby gardens and asked them what they knew about this structure. They replied, “In the past, Siwah was home to infidels, most of whom lived in caves, but some lived in these buildings.” One spokesman pointed to a building in the center and said, “Tradition says that building was the hall where the council used to meet; when it was built, men were stronger than I am. Those huge stones that form the roof were lifted and placed there by just two men. There’s a lot of gold buried under the walls.” When I entered the ruins, I was followed by everyone nearby, which made it hard to examine the place closely. On a second visit, I had no better luck, and when I returned a few days later, some Siwahans said to me, “You must still be a Christian at heart; otherwise, why do you keep coming to see these works of infidels?” To keep up the persona I had adopted, I had to give up any further plans for a detailed examination or measurement,[22] and limit myself to general observations, which I now present in detail as they occurred.
Ummebeda (the name given to the site of those ruins by the natives) lies near a village called Scharkie or Agrmie, between that place and an isolated mountain, on which a copious spring of fresh water is said to rise. The buildings are in such a state of delapidation, that a plain observer, who forms an opinion only from what he sees, and does not accommodate the object in application and conjecture to preconceived notions of a particular structure which he is to look for, and trace out, could scarcely, (I think) from these rude heaps, and mouldered and disjointed walls, suggest the precise form or original purpose of the building when first raised. Its materials might suggest, that it was built in the rudest ages, and when the Troglodytæ[7] of these parts first left their caves, and in their first attempt of building, took their scheme and plan of architecture from their old mansions, heaping rock on rock, in imitation of the dwelling places which nature had before furnished.
Ummebeda (the name given to the site of those ruins by the locals) is located near a village called Scharkie or Agrmie, situated between that village and an isolated mountain, where a plentiful spring of fresh water is said to emerge. The buildings are so dilapidated that a casual observer, who forms an opinion solely based on what they see and doesn't match the object with preconceived ideas of a specific structure they expect to find, could hardly, I think, from these rough piles and crumbling, broken walls, identify the original shape or purpose of the building when it was first constructed. The materials might suggest that it was built in ancient times, when the Troglodytæ[7] of this area first left their caves, and in their early attempts at building, took their design and architectural plans from their previous homes, stacking rock upon rock, mimicking the habitats that nature had once provided.
I ascertained the general bearings of the building by my compass, and found the outward walls constructed with aspects facing the four cardinal points, the aberration being only of twelve degrees, and which might have occurred from variation of the needle. The total circumference may be several hundred yards, and is to be traced out and followed by the foundations of a wall, in most parts visible, and which, from the masses remaining, appears to have been very strong. The outward wall, in most places, has been thrown down, and the materials carried away, and the interior ground has been every where turned up, and dug, in search of treasure.
I determined the general direction of the building using my compass and found that the outer walls were aligned with the four cardinal points, with only a twelve-degree deviation, which might have been caused by magnetic variation. The total perimeter could be several hundred yards, and it's marked by the foundations of a wall that is mostly visible and, from the remaining sections, seems to have been very strong. In many places, the outer wall has collapsed, and the materials have been removed, while the interior ground has been dug up everywhere in search of treasure.
[23]In the centre of this extensive area, are seen the remains of an edifice, which perhaps may be regarded as the principal building,[8] and to which all around may have been mere appendage, and subordinate.
[23]In the middle of this large area, you can see the ruins of a building that might be seen as the main structure,[8] and everything else around it may have been just additional and lesser parts.
The northern part of this building stands on a native calcareous rock, rising above the level of the general area, within the outer walls, about eight feet. The height of the edifice appears to be about twenty-seven feet; its width twenty-four, and its length ten or twelve paces. The walls are six feet in thickness, the exterior of which within and without is constructed of large free stones, filled up in the interstice with small stones and lime. The ceiling is formed by vast blocks of stone, wrought and fitted to stretch over and cover the entire building. The breadth of each such mass of stone is about four feet, and the depth or thickness three feet. One of these stones of the roof has fallen in, and is broken; the entire southern wall of the building hath likewise tumbled, and the materials have mostly been carried away. But the people have not been able to remove the large fragments fallen from the roof, which their ancestors were enabled to bring from the quarry, and to raise entire to the summit of the edifice. Such are the vicissitudes of art, of knowledge, and of human powers and means, as well as of human happiness and fortunes!
The northern part of this building sits on a natural limestone rock, rising about eight feet above the surrounding area, within the outer walls. The structure seems to be around twenty-seven feet tall, twenty-four feet wide, and ten to twelve paces long. The walls are six feet thick, and both the inside and outside are made of large stones, filled in with smaller stones and lime. The ceiling consists of huge stone blocks that are shaped and fitted to cover the entire building. Each stone block is about four feet wide and three feet thick. One of the roof stones has collapsed and is broken; the entire southern wall of the building has also fallen down, and most of the materials have been taken away. However, the people haven't been able to remove the large pieces that fell from the roof, which their ancestors managed to transport from the quarry and raise intact to the top of the building. Such are the ups and downs of art, knowledge, human abilities, and human happiness and fortunes!
The stones that have fallen, lie sunk, with their surface lower than the base of the yet standing part of the building, and their bottom almost on a level with the area of the great inclosure. The appearance of these fallen stones of the southern wall, leads to a conjecture, that this extremity of the original edifice had its floor or base lower than that of the northern part. The entrances to this[24] building are three, the principal one to the north, and the others to the east and west. The inside walls (beginning at half their height from the ground) are decorated with hieroglyphics sculptured in relief, but the figures seem not to have been sufficiently engraved in alt, or salient, to resist the ravages of time and weather; and in some places they are wholly mouldered and defaced, and especially on the ceiling.
The fallen stones are sunk, with their surface lower than the base of the remaining part of the building, and their bottom nearly level with the area of the large enclosure. The way these fallen stones from the southern wall look suggests that this end of the original structure had its floor or base lower than that of the northern part. There are three entrances to this[24] building: the main one to the north and the others to the east and west. The interior walls, starting from halfway up, are decorated with hieroglyphics carved in relief, but the figures don’t seem to have been deeply carved in alt or salient, making them vulnerable to the effects of time and weather; some areas are completely worn away and damaged, especially on the ceiling.
On different parts of the wall appear marks of paint, and the colour seems to have been green. I could no where discover traces of the edifice having in any part been lined or inlaid with a finer stone or material. A few paces from the chief entrance, I observed two round stones, of about three feet diameter, each indented, as if to receive the base of some statue or other ornament. The general material of which the building is constructed, is a lime-stone, containing petrifactions of shells and small marine animals; and such stone is to be found and dug up in the vicinity.
On different sections of the wall, there are paint marks, and the color appears to have been green. I couldn’t find any signs that the building had been lined or inlaid with a more valuable stone or material. A short distance from the main entrance, I noticed two round stones about three feet in diameter, each shaped as if to hold the base of a statue or some other decoration. The building is made of limestone that contains fossils of shells and small marine creatures, and this type of stone can be found and quarried nearby.
On examining the country around these ruins, I found the soil contiguous to the foundations of the outward wall on the south to be marshy, and was informed that it contained salt springs. I asked if no considerable spring of fresh water was to be seen near; and was shewn a fine rivulet of sweet water, about half a mile from the ruins, which takes its rise in a grove of date trees, and in a most romantic and beautiful situation: it is not, however, its delightful scene that recommends it to the native of Siwah, but an opinion that it is a specific against certain diseases.
While exploring the area around these ruins, I noticed that the soil next to the outer wall on the south side was marshy, and I was told there were salt springs. I asked if there was any significant source of fresh water nearby, and I was shown a lovely stream of fresh water, about half a mile from the ruins, which originates in a grove of date palms in a truly picturesque and charming spot. However, it’s not just the beautiful scenery that makes it appealing to the locals of Siwah; they believe it has healing properties for certain diseases.
I am conscious that the above description of the remains of antiquity near Siwah, is by far too cursory and incomplete, for any purpose of just and accurate inference; and that it must yet remain[25] a mere conjecture, whether these ruins are those of the famous Temple of Jupiter Ammon. It must be obvious, from many points I have adverted to in my description, that I had the site of this renowned temple in view, and that it was a principal object of my research. Circumstances I was under, and of which the reader is already apprised, prevented my pursuing this great subject of just and learned curiosity with the nicety of inspection, and care in the consideration, which I could have wished to employ. Supposing, on reference to ancient writers, the comparison of the buildings not to bear me out in the idea which I entertain; yet on many other grounds I should contend, that Siwah had been a residence of the ancient Ammonites. I draw my conclusion from the relative situation of the country; from the quality of the soil, from its fertility; from the information of its inhabitants, that no other such fruitful tract is to be found any where near; and, in addition to the certainty, at least, that some great and magnificent building once here stood, I derive a further conclusion from the numerous catacombs to be found in the vicinity, and which I shall have occasion more particularly to notice. In regard to the memorable Temple of Ammon, should even my own description of the existing vestiges of building not accurately agree with general accounts of that edifice, yet, notwithstanding, I must continue to hold an opinion, from the general appearance and from the situation of those ruins, that they may be remains of the Temple of Jupiter Ammon. A delineation and decipher of the hieroglyphic figures, which adorn the inner walls of the building, might be conclusive on this question.
I realize that the description of the ancient remains near Siwah above is far too brief and incomplete for drawing just and accurate conclusions. It still has to remain[25] a mere guess as to whether these ruins are those of the famous Temple of Jupiter Ammon. It should be clear from several points I mentioned in my description that I had the location of this renowned temple in mind, and that it was a primary focus of my research. The circumstances I faced, which the reader is already aware of, prevented me from exploring this important and scholarly topic with the attention to detail and care that I would have liked to have. Even if the comparison of the buildings doesn't support my theory when I refer to ancient writers, I still argue that Siwah was a residence of the ancient Ammonites based on various other factors. I base my conclusion on the geographical context, the quality of the soil, its fertility, and the residents’ information that no other such productive area is nearby. Additionally, it’s certain that there was once a grand and magnificent structure here, and I also draw conclusions from the numerous catacombs in the area, which I will discuss further. Regarding the famous Temple of Ammon, even if my own description of the existing remains doesn't match general accounts of that structure, I must still hold the opinion that, based on the overall appearance and location of these ruins, they may be remains of the Temple of Jupiter Ammon. An illustration and interpretation of the hieroglyphic figures that decorate the inner walls of the building could provide a definitive answer to this question.
I will further add on this subject, that on inquiry after Edrisi’s Santrich, no one knew it even by name; but I was told that at a distance of seven days journey from Siwah, six from Faiume, and[26] two or three[9] from Biljoradec, there exists a country, similar to that of Siwah, its inhabitants less in number, and speaking the same language. That region I should take to be the Minor Oasis of the ancients. I speak of this place from mere report, and could gain no more accurate, or further account; perhaps it lies among the mountains which traverse the great Desert near Ummesogeir, extending towards the south.
I will add to this topic that when I asked about Edrisi’s Santrich, no one even recognized the name; however, I was informed that there is a place seven days' journey from Siwah, six from Faiume, and[26] two or three[9] from Biljoradec, which is similar to Siwah. Its population is smaller, and they speak the same language. I believe this area is what the ancients referred to as the Minor Oasis. I mention this location based on reports alone, and I couldn’t find any more precise or detailed information; it might be situated among the mountains that cross the great Desert near Ummesogeir, stretching toward the south.
I come now to the subject of the various catacombs, to be found in the territory of Siwah, and which I was enabled more fully to examine, as lying in more sequestered spots, and where I was less liable to observation.
I now turn to the topic of the various catacombs located in the Siwah area, which I was able to investigate more thoroughly since they are in more secluded locations, and I was less likely to be observed.
If I well understood my companion, an inhabitant of Siwah, there are four principal places, where catacombs are found. The first, Belled-el-Kaffer; the second, Belled-el-Rumi; both these terms, denote one and the same thing, namely, “place or town of infidels;” the third is, El-Mota, or place of burial; the fourth, Belled-el-Chamis, or Gamis. My inquiries were in particular directed to El-Mota, situated at the distance of about one mile north-east from Siwah. It is a rocky hill, with a number of catacombs on the declivity, but the most remarkable, are on the summit. There is a separate entrance to each, and the descent inwards is gentle and gradual. The passage from the aperture, leads to a door-way, from which the space of the room is enlarged, and on each side, are smaller excavations for containing the mummies. The stones rising from the threshold are cut in a form that shews a door to have been formerly hung, and to have closed the entrance. The catacombs are of different extent, and each is wrought with great labour and neatness of work, and especially the uppermost, which contains no traces of any mummy.[27] In others are found various remains. I long, but in vain, searched for an entire head: I found fragments, and especially of the occiput in abundance, but none with any investiture remaining; and even in the occiputs most entire I could not discover any stain or mark of their once having been filled with resin. The cloth still adhered to some ribs, but so decayed, that nothing could be further distinguished, than that the stuff in which the mummy had been wrapt, was of the coarsest kind.
If I understood my friend correctly, who lives in Siwah, there are four main places where catacombs can be found. The first is Belled-el-Kaffer; the second is Belled-el-Rumi; both terms mean the same thing: “place or town of infidels.” The third is El-Mota, which means place of burial; the fourth is Belled-el-Chamis, or Gamis. My questions were especially aimed at El-Mota, located about a mile northeast of Siwah. It’s a rocky hill with several catacombs on the slope, but the most impressive ones are on the peak. Each has its own entrance, and the descent inside is smooth and gradual. The passage from the opening leads to a doorway, which opens into a larger room, and on either side are smaller niches for storing mummies. The stones rising from the threshold are shaped as if a door was once hung there, closing off the entrance. The catacombs vary in size, and each has been worked on with great effort and skill, especially the one at the top, which shows no signs of any mummy. In others, various remains are found. I searched for a complete skull for a long time but found none; I only found fragments, particularly of the occiput, in abundance, but none with any wrappings left; even in the most intact occiputs, I couldn’t see any evidence of having been filled with resin. Some cloth was still attached to some ribs, but it was so decayed that the only thing I could tell was that the material used to wrap the mummy was very coarse. [27]
The ground in all these catacombs has been dug and explored in search of treasure, and I was told, by my guide, that in every one of these sepulchres gold has been, and is yet sometimes, found.
The ground in all these catacombs has been excavated and searched for treasure, and my guide told me that in each of these tombs, gold has been found in the past and is still occasionally discovered.
There is every probability that entire mummies might be discovered in the catacombs at a greater distance to westward of Siwah. I was credibly informed, that besides the open catacombs on the mountains, there are others under ground, and the entrance of which is to be found at no great depth; and that Biut-el-Nazari, (houses of Christians, synonymous here to Infidels,) exist on both sides of a long subterraneous passage, forming a communication, between two catacomb-mountains. The catacombs met with on Gibel-el-belled, being the hill on which Siwah is built, are small, and consist of a little antichamber, leading generally to two caverns where the mummies were deposited. Of these the two most remarkable are two large and high caverns on the north side; the one is twenty, the other sixteen feet square, and both are open to the north.
There’s a good chance that whole mummies could be found in the catacombs further to the west of Siwah. I was reliably informed that, aside from the open catacombs on the mountains, there are others underground, with entrances not far below the surface; and that Biut-el-Nazari (houses of Christians, equivalent to Infidels here) exist on both sides of a long underground passage, connecting two catacomb mountains. The catacombs on Gibel-el-belled, the hill where Siwah is located, are small and consist of a small antechamber, usually leading to two caverns where the mummies were kept. The two most notable are large and high caverns on the north side; one is twenty feet square, and the other is sixteen feet square, both open to the north.
There are likewise two other caverns, of similar dimensions, but not so lofty, to be seen westward of Siwah, and leading to Augila;[28] their entrance is low and narrow, and the two excavations are so near, that the partition, as appears from a small perforation, is only ten inches thick.
There are also two other caves, similar in size but not as high, located to the west of Siwah, which lead to Augila;[28] their entrances are low and narrow, and the two chambers are so close together that the wall between them, as noted by a small hole, is only ten inches thick.
Quitting the subject of antiquities in the territory of Siwah, I have only to add, that in the nearest plain west of the town, there are other massive remains of some building, but which bear no token or note of remote antiquity, such as may be attributed to the ruins I first described.
Quitting the topic of ancient artifacts in the area of Siwah, I just want to add that in the nearest plain to the west of the town, there are other large remnants of some structure, but these show no signs or indications of ancient history, unlike the ruins I first described.
[29]SECTION VI.
Leaving Siwah.—Trip to Schiacha, and the danger the traveler faced there.
Having remained eight days at Siwah; on the 29th of September, at three in the afternoon, we broke up our encampment, and proceeded a three hours march, when we again pitched our tents at foot of a hill. The next day we began our journey late, being delayed till one o’clock, in search of a slave who belonged to a court-officer of the Sultan of Fezzan, and who had absconded from the caravan. Whilst the man was looking for, I set out with a view of inspecting some catacombs which I descried on the neighbouring hills, but was stopped at some distance by a lake of seven or eight miles in circumference, formed at the base of the mountain by the conflux of springs and small pools of water, which the rains at this season had swollen and brought together. Returning to the camp, I took my telescope to examine the appearances I was not enabled closely to inspect, when the first object on the mountain which presented itself to my view was the Negro after whom the search was making. I gave no notice of my discovery, the poor fellow having a good character, and having been driven to the attempt of flight by the extreme severity of his master. I am sorry to say there was little hope of his final escape, the Siwahans having promised to deliver him up. This day we travelled till half an hour after sun-set. The next day we marched at two hours before day-break, and halted at nine. The fourth day brought us to the fruitful valley of Schiacha.
Hhanging out stayed at Siwah for eight days, we packed up our camp on September 29th at three in the afternoon and set off for a three-hour march, where we set up our tents again at the base of a hill. The following day, we started our journey late, being delayed until one o’clock while searching for a slave who belonged to a court-officer of the Sultan of Fezzan and had run away from the caravan. While they were looking for him, I headed out to check out some catacombs I saw on the nearby hills, but I was stopped at a distance by a lake about seven or eight miles around, formed at the base of the mountain by the joining of springs and small pools of water, swollen from the recent rains. When I returned to camp, I grabbed my telescope to get a better look at what I couldn’t see clearly, and the first thing I spotted on the mountain was the slave everyone was looking for. I didn’t mention it, as the poor guy had a good reputation and was pushed to flee because of the harshness of his master. Unfortunately, there was little hope for his escape since the people of Siwah promised to turn him in. We traveled until half an hour after sunset this day. The next morning, we marched at two hours before dawn and took a break at nine. On the fourth day, we arrived at the fertile valley of Schiacha.
[30]The mountains by which we travelled from Siwah to this spot, are branches of those which I have mentioned as appearing, at all times, to north of our way through the Desert, and often at but little distance. They rise abruptly, and as precipices, from the level ground, and shew a face of mere rock, without the least covering of soil or even of sand. Their appearance, taken together with that of the sea-sand which covers the Desert, indicate this vast tract to have been flooded, and at a period later than the great deluge. In the sandy plain below these mountains is seen the surface of a vast calcareous rock, containing no substance of petrifaction, whereas the mountains near consist of limestone, crowded and filled with fragments of marine animals and shells. The strata of all these rocky hills lay horizontal.
[30]The mountains we traveled through from Siwah to this spot are branches of those I mentioned that consistently appear to the north of our route through the Desert, often not far off. They rise steeply and like cliffs from the flat ground, showing only sheer rock, with no soil or even sand covering them. Their appearance, along with that of the sea-sand covering the Desert, suggests that this vast area was once flooded, and that this happened after the great flood. In the sandy plain below these mountains, you can see the surface of a large calcareous rock that has no signs of petrified substances, while the nearby mountains are made of limestone, filled with fragments of marine animals and shells. The layers of all these rocky hills lie flat.
Westward of Siwah, I found two banks or heaps of calcined shells, some of the size of two inches over. My interpreter told me, that taking his road at some distance from me, he saw a mountain standing singly and unconnected with others, composed entirely of shells. Many such vast isolated mounds are to be seen throughout the whole of this district, and the bed-joints or interstices of their strata of stone (always horizontal), being filled up with a reddish, friable, calcareous substance, they often resemble pyramids, and in so exact and illusive a manner, that more than once I was deceived into expectation of arrival at such building. The architecture of the ancient Egyptians was of the vast and gigantic kind; and builders of such ambitious temper and stupendous scheme, might readily entertain the idea of transforming a mountain into a pyramid, shaping the huge rock, already in form partly adapted, and casing it with wrought stones on the outside, as they might prefer. Some of the learned have given an opinion, that the Pyramids of Giza and of Saccara, were not originally erections[31] from the base, but merely hills of earth or stone, shaped and covered by the labour of man. The idea is plausible, though certainly to be controverted, by reasons to be drawn from history, and from other the best sources of fact and argument.
West of Siwah, I discovered two piles of burned shells, some about two inches in diameter. My interpreter mentioned that while he was taking a different route, he spotted a mountain standing alone, completely made up of shells. Throughout this region, there are many similar large isolated mounds, and the gaps between their layers of stone (which are always horizontal) are filled with a reddish, crumbly, chalky material, making them often appear like pyramids. This resemblance is so convincing that I was deceived multiple times, expecting to arrive at such structures. The ancient Egyptians built on a grand and monumental scale; with their ambitious spirit and immense plans, they might have easily entertained the idea of turning a mountain into a pyramid, reshaping the large rock that was already somewhat suited for the purpose, and covering it with carved stones on the outside, as they saw fit. Some scholars have suggested that the Pyramids of Giza and Saccara were not originally built from the ground up but were instead mounds of earth or stone that were shaped and covered by human effort. This idea is reasonable, although it can certainly be challenged by historical evidence and other reliable sources of fact and argument.
I now proceed to the recital of an event in which I was personally and principally concerned. I shall give the recital in detail, as, in its consequences, being of the highest import to the future safety of myself, and therewith to the progress of discovery which I have engaged in; and, as it has afforded me self-confidence and new encouragement, ever favourable to the success of enterprize, so will it, I trust, give satisfaction to those who have employed me, inspiring just and well-founded hopes of my finally accomplishing the great purpose entrusted to my care.
I’m now going to share an event that I was directly and mainly involved in. I’ll explain it in detail, as its consequences are extremely important for my future safety and the progress of the discoveries I’m working on. This experience has given me confidence and fresh motivation, which I believe will contribute to the success of my endeavors. I hope that it will also satisfy those who have hired me, inspiring realistic and well-founded hopes that I will ultimately achieve the significant goal entrusted to me.
The state of quiet and security usually attending our encampments was interrupted, whilst at Schiacha, by the arrival of some Siwahans, who, about eight o’clock in the evening, came with intelligence, that a numerous horde of Arabs from the vicinity of Faiume were hovering in the Desert, ready to fall upon our caravan. These messengers at the same time assured us, that the people of Siwah had resolved to come to our assistance, and to escort us to the next watering-place; adding, “that their little army would arrive in a few hours, determined to risk with us every thing in opposing the attack of the Bedouins, whose force they represented as consisting of from 800 to 1000 men. Our leader, the Sheik of the Twaters, immediately assembled the principal people of the caravan, when it was decided not to desert our post, but to await the enemy. Scarcely was our little council broke up, when we heard from afar the braying of some hundred asses, giving notice of the approach of the Siwahans. They use this animal on their military excursions, from[32] the advantage it affords of more easily proceeding by narrow and rugged passes among the mountains, and evading or attacking any enemy, who from ignorance of the country, or from the nature of its cattle requiring safer roads, is obliged to confine its march to broader defiles or vallies. Some men were immediately dispatched from the caravan, requiring the Siwahans to halt at half a mile distance from our post. The night passed in disquietude and alarm: each got his arms in readiness, and prepared for a battle on the ensuing day. A little before sun-rise, the Siwahans advanced on foot, and gave apprehension of immediate attack. Some Augilans rode forward, to inquire their intentions, and were answered, “that the caravan had nothing to fear;” on reporting this to the Sheik, he sent the messengers back, to say he should consider and treat them as enemies, if they advanced a step further. On this message the Siwahans halted, formed a circle, and invited some Augilans to a conference. During all this time, I remained quiet with my baggage, having sent my interpreter to collect intelligence of what was passing. Seeing him return, and judging from his manner and haste, that he had something of importance to communicate, I ran to meet him. He immediately accosted me with, “cursed be the moment, when I determined upon this journey; we are both of us unavoidably lost men; they take us for Christians and spies, and will assuredly put us to death.” With these words he left me, and ran to the baggage, where he exchanged his single gun for my double barrelled one, and armed himself with two brace of pistols. I upbraided him with his want of firmness, told him “a steady and resolute conduct could alone preserve ourselves and friends, and reminded him that his present behaviour was precisely such as to give weight to the suspicions entertained:” I further urged, “that on his own account he had nothing to fear, having for twelve years been a Mahommedan, and perfectly acquainted with the[33] religion and customs; that myself alone was in danger, and that I hoped to avert it, provided he did not intermeddle with my defence.” “Friend, (answered he,) you will never hear of danger: but this time you will pay for your temerity.”
The peaceful and secure atmosphere that usually surrounded our camp at Schiacha was disrupted when some Siwahans arrived around eight in the evening with news that a large group of Arabs from near Faiume was lurking in the desert, ready to attack our caravan. They assured us that the people of Siwah had decided to help us and would escort us to the next watering place, adding, “their small army would arrive in a few hours, willing to risk everything to fight against the Bedouin attack, which they claimed had between 800 and 1000 men.” Our leader, the Sheik of the Twaters, quickly gathered the key members of the caravan, and it was decided that we wouldn’t abandon our position but would wait for the enemy. Hardly had our little council concluded when we heard the distant braying of some hundred donkeys, signaling the approach of the Siwahans. They relied on these animals for their military trips because they could navigate narrow and rugged mountain paths more easily, allowing them to either avoid or confront any enemy that, due to unfamiliarity with the terrain or needing safer routes for their cattle, could only travel on wider paths or valleys. Some men were sent from the caravan to ask the Siwahans to stop half a mile away from our camp. The night passed with tension and anxiety; everyone readied their weapons, preparing for a possible battle the next day. Just before sunrise, the Siwahans approached on foot, raising concerns of an imminent attack. Some Augilans rode ahead to ask about their intentions, and were told, “the caravan has nothing to fear.” When this was reported back to the Sheik, he sent the messengers back, saying he would treat them as enemies if they moved any closer. Upon receiving this message, the Siwahans stopped, formed a circle, and invited some Augilans to talk. Throughout this time, I stayed with my baggage, having sent my interpreter to gather news about what was happening. When I saw him returning and noticed his demeanor and urgency suggested he had important information, I hurried to meet him. He immediately exclaimed, “cursed be the day I decided to take this trip; we are both surely doomed; they think we are Christians and spies and will definitely kill us.” After saying this, he rushed to the baggage, traded his single gun for my double-barreled one, and armed himself with two pairs of pistols. I scolded him for his lack of composure, telling him that “only steady and determined behavior could protect us and our friends,” and reminded him that his current actions only fueled their suspicions. I further insisted that he had nothing to worry about since he had been a Muslim for twelve years and fully understood the [33] religion and its customs; that I alone was in danger, and that I hoped to avoid it as long as he didn’t interfere with my defense. “Friend,” he replied, “you will never hear of danger: but this time you will pay for your recklessness.”
Perceiving that terror had wholly deprived him of the necessary temper and recollection, I now left him to himself, and walked up unarmed, but with a firm and manly step, to this tumultuous assembly.
Seeing that fear had completely taken away his composure and focus, I decided to leave him alone and approached the chaotic group unarmed, but with a confident and strong stride.
I entered the circle, and offered the Mahometan salutation, “Assulam Alckum,” but none of the Siwahans returned it. Some of them immediately exclaimed,—“You are of the new Christians from Cairo, and come to explore our country.” Had I at this time, been as well acquainted with Mahometan fanaticism, and the character of the Arabs, as I have been since, I should have deduced my defence from the very terms of the accusation, and stated that I was indeed from Cairo, having fled from the Infidels; as it was, I answered nothing to this general clamour, but sat down and directed my speech to one of the Chiefs, whose great influence I knew, and who had been often in my tent whilst at Siwah. “Tell me, brother, (said I,) hast thou ever before known 300 armed men take a journey of three days, in pursuit of two men, who dwelt in their midst for ten days, who had eaten and drank with them as friends, and whose tents were open to them all? Thyself hast found us praying and reading the Koran; and now thou sayest we are Infidels from Cairo; that is, one of those from whom we fly! Dost thou not know, that it is a great sin to tell one of the faithful that he is a Pagan?” I spoke this with an earnest and resolute tone, and many of the congregation seemed gained over by it, and disposed to be favourable to me: the man replied, “that he was convinced we[34] were not Infidels, that he had persuaded no one to this pursuit, and as far as depended on him alone, he was ready to return to Siwah.” On this I turned to one of the vulgar, who was communicating some of the accusations against me to the people of our caravan. “Be thou silent, (said I,) would to God, that I were able to speak well the Arabic, I would then ask questions of thee, and of hundreds like thee, who are less instructed in the Islam than I am.” An old man on this observed, “This man is younger than the other, and yet more courageous!” I immediately continued, “My friend is not afraid of thee, but thou oughtest to have fears of my friend: dost thou know what it is to reproach a man, who lives with sultans and with princes, with being an Infidel?” I was then asked for what purpose we carried Christian papers. I now found that my interpreter had unwarily shewn a passport which I had obtained from General Bonaparte, with a view not to be detained at the French posts through which I was to pass to the caravan. My interpreter at this moment came up, and finding me alive, and the assembly less angry and violent, than when on being first questioned, he had exasperated them by inconsiderate and perplexed answers; he recovered himself, and stood sufficiently composed and collected, whilst I explained partly in German, partly in Arabic, what had passed. Knowing, however, that the paper in question would be demanded, and not choosing to trust to his prudence in the manner of producing it; I went myself for it to the tent, and returning, brought likewise a Koran with me. I immediately tendered the paper to a Chief of the Siwahans, who having unfolded it, asked, “if any by-stander could read it.” I could not help smiling at the question, perilous as was my situation. The same question was then put to us, when I answered, “that we did not understand what it contained, but were told, it would allow us to quit Cairo without being molested.” “This is the book, (interrupted my interpreter,) which I understand:”[35] and immediately took the Koran from my hand. We were ordered, by reading in it, to give proof of our being truly of the religion. Our learning in this respect went far indeed beyond the simple ability of reading. My companion knew the entire Koran by heart, and as for me, I could even then write Arabic, and well too: which with these people, was an extraordinary proficiency in learning. We had scarcely given a sample of our respective talents, when the chiefs of our caravan, who to this moment had been silent, now took loudly our part; and many of the Siwahans too, interfered in our favour. In short, the inquiry ended to our complete advantage, though not without the murmuring of some in the multitude, who lost the hopes of plunder which the occasion might have afforded.
I stepped into the circle and greeted them with the Muslim salutation, “Assalamu Alaikum,” but none of the Siwahans replied. Some of them quickly shouted, “You’re one of the new Christians from Cairo, here to scout our land.” If I had been more familiar with Muslim fanaticism and the nature of the Arabs at that time, as I am now, I would have defended myself right from their accusation, explaining that I was from Cairo and had fled from the Infidels. Instead, I said nothing to the general uproar but sat down and addressed one of the Chiefs, whose significant influence I was aware of and who had often been in my tent while I was at Siwah. “Tell me, brother,” I said, “have you ever known 300 armed men to travel for three days in search of two men who lived among them for ten days, who had shared meals and drinks as friends, and whose tents were open to them? You have seen us praying and reading the Koran; yet now you say we are Infidels from Cairo—that is, one of those we are fleeing from! Don’t you know it’s a great sin to tell one of the faithful that he is a Pagan?” I spoke with earnestness and determination, and many in the crowd seemed swayed and more favorable toward me. The man replied, “I’m convinced we[34] are not Infidels; I did not persuade anyone to pursue you, and as far as it depends on me, I’m ready to return to Siwah.” With that, I turned to one of the crowd, who was sharing some accusations against me with members of our caravan. “Be quiet,” I said, “I wish I could speak Arabic well so I could ask you and hundreds like you, who know less about Islam than I do, some questions.” An old man then remarked, “This man is younger than the other, and yet more courageous!” I immediately continued, “My friend isn’t afraid of you, but you should be afraid of my friend. Do you know what it means to accuse a man who lives with sultans and princes of being an Infidel?” I was then asked why we had Christian papers. I soon realized my interpreter had unwittingly shown a passport I had received from General Bonaparte to avoid being detained at the French posts I was to pass through to reach the caravan. My interpreter came near, and seeing that I was okay and the crowd was less angry and violent than they were when they first questioned us, he gathered himself and managed to appear calm while I explained things partly in German and partly in Arabic. However, knowing that they would demand the paper and not wanting to rely on his judgment about how to present it, I went to the tent myself to get it and returned with a Koran as well. I handed the paper to a Chief of the Siwahans, who, after unfolding it, asked, “Can anyone here read it?” I couldn’t help but smile at the question, risky as my situation was. The same question was then posed to us, and I answered, “We don’t understand what it says, but we were told it would let us leave Cairo without being bothered.” “This is the book,” my interpreter interrupted, “that I understand:” [35] and he immediately took the Koran from my hand. We were told to read from it to prove that we truly followed the religion. Our knowledge in this area went well beyond just reading. My companion knew the entire Koran by heart, and I could even write Arabic fluently, which was quite an impressive skill among these people. Just as we showcased our abilities, the chiefs of our caravan, who had been silent until then, began to speak in our defense, and many of the Siwahans also rallied to support us. In short, the inquiry ended in our favor, but not without some grumbling from parts of the crowd who had lost their hopes of plunder from this situation.
Thus the character of Mussulman which I assumed was firmly established, and I shall not be subjected in future, to like inquiries, on which, perhaps, more decisive proofs might be required, and which I could not give. The security of my future voyage is thus assured, and so great an advantage more than compensates for some losses attending the above incident, but which yet I must regret.
Thus, the Muslim identity I adopted is now firmly established, and I shouldn’t have to deal with similar questions in the future, for which, perhaps, I would need to provide more concrete evidence that I couldn’t give. The safety of my upcoming journey is now guaranteed, and this significant benefit more than makes up for some losses related to the earlier incident, which I still regret.
During the time I was first in conference with the people of Siwah, and those of the caravan, my baggage was left with my interpreter; who in the paroxysms of his fears, and indeed with no light apprehensions of our bales of goods being searched, took my remains of mummies, my specimens of mineralogy, my more detailed remarks, made on my way from Cairo to Schiacha, and generally my books, and gave them to a confidential slave of my Arab inmate, to bury them in a bog; this was done, and I never afterwards could retrieve them.
During the time I was first meeting with the people of Siwah and those from the caravan, my luggage was left with my interpreter. In a panic, and fearing that our load might be searched, he took my remaining mummies, my mineral samples, my detailed notes made on my journey from Cairo to Schiacha, and all my books, and handed them over to a trusted slave of my Arab host to bury them in a bog. This was done, and I was never able to recover them afterward.
[36]SECTION VII.
Departure from Schiacha—arrival at Augila.
On the fifth day (reckoning by our departure from Siwah,) we left Schiacha, and travelled about four hours, when we encamped. The next morning in two hours and a half, we came to a district called Torfaue, where we halted to collect fresh water: from this place we departed at four in the afternoon of the same day, and continued our march until eight the next morning, through a desert, the level of which was interrupted by numerous sand-hills; at eight o’clock we stopped to refresh, and rested till two o’clock, when we again pressed forward, and continued our march till eight in the morning, when we encamped till one. At one we again proceeded, travelled all night, and till three o’clock the next morning, when the party with whom I travelled, discovered, that during the night, we had wandered from the caravan; we resolved thereon to halt and await the return of day. We placed our baggage by the side of each camel, to be enabled on emergency, to load again with dispatch, and I laid me down to sleep on the sand, with the bridle in one hand, and my firelock in the other, and slept soundly till sunrise.
On the fifth day (counting from when we left Siwah), we left Schiacha and traveled for about four hours before setting up camp. The next morning, after two and a half hours, we reached a place called Torfaue, where we stopped to collect fresh water. We left there at four in the afternoon and continued on until eight the next morning, moving through a desert that had many sand dunes. At eight o'clock, we took a break to refresh ourselves and rested until two o'clock, when we pressed on again and marched until eight in the morning, where we set up camp until one. At one, we continued our journey, traveled all night, and until three o'clock the next morning, when the group I was with realized that we had strayed from the caravan during the night. We decided to stop and wait for morning light. We set our baggage beside each camel to be able to quickly load it again if needed, and I lay down to sleep on the sand, with the bridle in one hand and my firearm in the other, sleeping soundly until sunrise.
We now discovered our caravan; and at the same time, that we were not above half a mile from a spot, fruitful and abounding in water. We immediately made up to the place and encamped. The journey from Torfaue to this spot, was the most disagreeable and fatiguing that in the course of all my travels I had experienced. Both men and cattle were so wearied and exhausted, that as soon as the[37] baggage was unladen, all resorted to sleep. We here reposed the whole day, and the next set forth for Augila, by short marches, (altogether not amounting to more than nine hours travel); we used no haste, as having nothing to apprehend, being now in the country of our friends.
We finally found our caravan, and at the same time, we realized we were just under half a mile from a place that was rich in resources and had plenty of water. We quickly made our way there and set up camp. The journey from Torfaue to this location was the most unpleasant and tiring I had ever experienced in all my travels. Both the men and the animals were so worn out that as soon as the[37] baggage was unloaded, everyone went straight to sleep. We rested here for the entire day, and the next day, we left for Augila, taking short breaks that added up to no more than nine hours of travel. We didn't rush since we had nothing to worry about, being in the land of our friends now.
Our entry into Mojabra, one of the three places belonging to the dominion of Augila, was solemn and affecting, as the greater part of the merchants of our caravan had here habitations and families. The Bey of Bengasi, Vicegerent for the Bashaw of Tripoly, and at that time resident at Augila, sent about twenty of his Arabs to note in writing the burden of the camels, and for which they demanded a small duty. These Arabs then ranged themselves, and formed a right wing to our caravan, drawn up for procession. The merchants who had horses formed the left, and the pilgrims and ordinary Arabs formed the centre, headed by the Sheik preceded by a green flag. The pilgrims marched on singing; and the Arabs made their horses prance and curvet, and so continued until we approached near to Mojabra; where a number of old men and children met us, to felicitate and get a first embrace of their sons and relations, whom, on hearing of the French invasion in Egypt, they had given over as lost.
Our arrival in Mojabra, one of the three places in the region of Augila, was solemn and emotional, as most of the merchants in our caravan had homes and families here. The Bey of Bengasi, representative for the Bashaw of Tripoly and living in Augila at that time, sent about twenty of his Arabs to document the loads of the camels, for which they requested a small fee. These Arabs then positioned themselves, creating a right wing for our caravan, which was organized for the procession. The merchants with horses made up the left side, while the pilgrims and local Arabs formed the center, led by the Sheik, who was carrying a green flag. The pilgrims walked along singing; the Arabs made their horses prance and jump, continuing this way until we got close to Mojabra, where a group of old men and children welcomed us to greet and embrace their sons and family members, who they had assumed were lost after hearing about the French invasion in Egypt.
We pitched our tents in a spot adjoining the town, and were most hospitably entertained. The following night I proceeded on my journey towards Augila, in company with two merchants, one of whom procured me a lodging on my arrival, it being the intention of the caravan to stop longer than usual at this place.
We set up our tents near the town and were warmly welcomed. The next night, I continued my journey to Augila with two merchants, one of whom arranged a place for me to stay upon my arrival, as the caravan planned to stay longer than usual in this location.
There are three towns within the territory of Augila; Augila, the capital, and Mojabra, and Meledila. The two last are near to[38] each other, and both about four hours from Augila; Mojabra to the south, and Meledila to north of the road by which we passed. Mojabra and Meledila are occasionally comprehended in the general name of Fallo, designating the district.
There are three towns in the area of Augila: the capital, Augila, and Mojabra and Meledila. The last two are close to[38] each other, both about four hours from Augila; Mojabra is to the south, and Meledila is to the north of the road we took. Mojabra and Meledila are sometimes referred to collectively as Fallo, which denotes the region.
Augila, a town well known in the time of Herodotus,[10] covers a space of about one mile in circumference. It is badly built, and the streets are narrow and not kept clean. The houses are built of a limestone, dug from the neighbouring hills, and consist only of one story or ground floor. The apartments are dark, there being no aperture for light but the door; and are generally ranged round a small court, to which the entrance of each room faces, for purpose of collecting the more light. The public buildings, comparatively, are yet more mean and wretched. Mojabra is of smaller extent, but appears proportionally more populous than Augila. The inhabitants of Meledila are chiefly employed in agriculture; those of Mojabra engage mostly in trade, and pass their lives in travelling betwixt Cairo and Fezzan. The people of Augila are of a more sedentary disposition; though some of these too, were with our caravan.
Augila, a town famous during the time of Herodotus,[10] has a circumference of about one mile. It's poorly constructed, with narrow streets that aren't well maintained. The houses are made of limestone extracted from the nearby hills and are typically just one story or ground level. The rooms are dark since the only source of light is the door; they usually surround a small courtyard, with each room facing the entrance to maximize light. Compared to them, the public buildings are even more shabby and miserable. Mojabra is smaller but seems to be more populated than Augila. The people of Meledila mostly work in agriculture, while those from Mojabra are mainly involved in trade, spending their lives traveling between Cairo and Fezzan. The residents of Augila are more settled, although some were also part of our caravan.
The men of the above places, who engage in the caravan trade, generally keep three houses; one at Kardaffi, near Cairo; one at Mojabra, and a third at Zuila, or sometimes at Mourzouk. Many have a wife and family establishment at each of these houses; and others take a wife for the time, if the stay of the caravan is longer than usual. The men from their very youth devote themselves to such traveller’s life. Boys from thirteen to fourteen years of age, accompanied our caravan the long and toilsome journey from Augila[39] to Fezzan on foot, or at least seldom mounting a horse. In observing the general character of this people, I could not but remark a degradation, self-interestedness, and mean and shuffling disposition, derived from early habits of petty trade, and the manner in which it was conducted, as contra-distinguishing those engaged in this traffic, and those who remained at home.
The men from the places mentioned above, who participate in the caravan trade, usually own three houses: one in Kardaffi, near Cairo; another in Mojabra; and a third in Zuila, or sometimes in Mourzouk. Many have a wife and family at each of these locations, while others take a temporary wife if the caravan stays longer than expected. From a young age, these men dedicate themselves to a life of travel. Boys around thirteen to fourteen years old often joined our caravan on the long and exhausting journey from Augila[39] to Fezzan, mostly walking and rarely riding a horse. While observing the general nature of these people, I couldn't help but notice a decline in character, self-interest, and a petty, shifty demeanor stemming from early habits of small-scale trade and the way it was conducted, which set apart those involved in this trade from those who stayed at home.
The men of the country are engaged in gardening and agriculture; but in the last to no great extent. The women are very industrious in manufacturing coarse woollen cloths of five yards in length and a yard and a half wide, which are called Abbe, and are sent in considerable quantities to Fezzan. These constitute the chief clothing of this people; they wrap them about their bodies, and without even a shirt or shift under.
The men of the country are involved in farming and gardening, but not to a large degree in the latter. The women work hard making coarse woolen fabrics that are five yards long and a yard and a half wide, known as Abbe, which are sent in large amounts to Fezzan. These materials are the main clothing for the people; they wrap them around their bodies without even wearing a shirt or shift underneath.
Round Augila the country is level and the soil sandy, yet, being well watered, is tolerably fertile. Corn is not cultivated in quantity sufficient for subsistence of the people. The Arabs of Bengasi, distant about thirteen days journey, import annually both wheat and barley; and this their corn caravan is generally accompanied by flocks of sheep for sale.
Round Augila, the land is flat and the soil is sandy, but since it's well-watered, it's fairly fertile. They don't grow enough corn for the people to live on. The Arabs from Bengasi, which is about a thirteen-day journey away, bring in wheat and barley every year; and their grain caravan usually comes with flocks of sheep for sale.
The inhabitants of this region can generally speak the Arabic but their vulgar language is a dialect similar to that of Siwah, above noticed.
The people in this area can usually speak Arabic, but their everyday language is a dialect similar to the one used in Siwah, as mentioned earlier.
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[2]In hoc supercilio sunt frusta salis, ferè grumi grandes in collibus, et singulorum collium vertices è medio sale ejaculantur aquam dulcem pariter et gelidam. Herodot. ed. Wesseling. p. 181.
[2]On this brow, there are bits of salt, almost large lumps on the hills, and the tops of each hill shoot out sweet and icy water. Herodot. ed. Wesseling. p. 181.
[3]Ῥέει γὰρ ἐκ Λιβύης ὁ Νεῖλος, καὶ μέσην τάμνων Λιβύην. Herodot. Euterpé, § 33. The Editor rather supposes that Herodotus using the term Lybia, comprised all Africa, west of Egypt and Ethiopia; and that the river, or branch of river, alluded to, is the great stream flowing from the west, described by the Nasamones, and supposed to be a part of the Nile, by Etearchus: in such case the traveller may in vain look for its channel in the country suggested by Mr. Horneman, it being undoubtedly far to the south,—the Joliba or Niger.
[3]The Nile flows from Libya, cutting through the heart of Libya. Herodot. Euterpé, § 33. The Editor believes that when Herodotus used the term Lybia, he was referring to all of Africa west of Egypt and Ethiopia; and that the river he mentioned is the major stream flowing from the west, described by the Nasamones, which Etearchus thought was part of the Nile. In this case, the traveler may search in vain for its course in the area suggested by Mr. Horneman, as it is undoubtedly much further south—the Joliba or Niger.
[4]So too Alexander, on his march to the Fane of Ammon, found the water bitter: κατήντησεν ἐπὶ ΠΙΚΡΑΝ καλουμένην λίμνην.
[4]Similarly, Alexander, on his way to the Temple of Ammon, encountered water that was bitter: κατήντησεν ἐπὶ ΠΙΚΡΑΝ καλουμένην λίμνην.
Did. Sic. Tom. I. p. 198, edit. Wesseling.
Did. Sic. Tom. I. p. 198, edit. Wesseling.
[5]Vide Note, Appendix, No. I.
[6]Vide Appendix, No. IV.
[8]Vide Note, Appendix, No. I.
[10]Herodotus places Augila at ten days journey from the city of the Ammonians. Melpom. 182. N. B. Mr. Horneman was nine days on journey from Augila to Siwah, partly by forced marches.
[10]Herodotus states that Augila is a ten day trip from the city of the Ammonians. Melpom. 182. N. B. Mr. Horneman took nine days to travel from Augila to Siwah, partly on forced marches.
[40]CHAPTER II.
SECTION I.
Augila, to the Limits of Temissa.
Soon after our arrival at Augila, a man was sent off by the chief of the caravan to examine the watering-places as far the borders of the kingdom of Fezzan. This precaution became necessary from the increased number of people and camels, now forming this great caravan, and the possibility that, from want of rain or other causes, the springs on the usual route might not afford sufficient water for so large a body. The messenger being ordered to use the utmost dispatch, returned on the twelfth day with the happy intelligence, that water was in plenty, and that he met with nothing to impede our journey.
Ssoon after we arrived at Augila, the chief of the caravan sent a man to check the watering spots all the way to the borders of the kingdom of Fezzan. This was necessary due to the growing number of people and camels now part of this big caravan, along with the chance that, due to lack of rain or other reasons, the usual springs might not provide enough water for such a large group. The messenger was told to hurry, and he returned on the twelfth day with the great news that there was plenty of water and no obstacles to our journey.
Accordingly, the 27th of October was the day fixed for our departure from Augila, and myself and party quitted the town the preceding evening, and encamped in the open air, to be among the first at the breaking up and movement of the caravan. The next morning we set out before sunrise, and proceeded in a direction west by south. Our caravan was increased by companies of merchants from Bengasi, Merote, and Mojabra, in all about 120 men. Many of the inhabitants of Augila and Fallo, accompanied us part of the way,[41] and, as a mark of honour and attention, pranced their horses and fired their muskets round us. This party had scarcely taken their leave, when an Arab riding to us in haste, gave information, that we were pursued by a large body of horse, and that they were even then close upon our rear. On this intelligence the camels were immediately driven by the slaves and boys to a rising ground, and those who had arms mustered to cover the retreat, and prevent the enemy’s irruption and pillage. At the moment we were preparing for action, we were happily undeceived. The horsemen were troops of the Bey of Bengasi (then resident at Augila as I before mentioned), and who, hearing the complimentary discharge of firelocks by the friends who had just left us, thought we might have been attacked, and came out to our assistance.
On October 27th, we were set to leave Augila, so my group and I left the town the evening before and camped outside to be among the first to join the caravan as it got ready to move. The next morning, we departed before sunrise, heading west by south. Our caravan grew with groups of merchants from Bengasi, Merote, and Mojabra, totaling about 120 men. Many people from Augila and Fallo accompanied us part of the way,[41] and as a sign of respect and attention, they showed off their horses and fired their muskets around us. Just as this group was leaving, an Arab rode up in a hurry to warn us that we were being chased by a large group of horsemen who were right on our tail. Upon hearing this, the slaves and boys quickly moved the camels to higher ground, and those of us with weapons gathered to protect the retreat and prevent the enemy from overrunning us. Just as we were getting ready for a fight, we were relieved to find out that the horsemen were actually troops from the Bey of Bengasi (who was staying in Augila as I mentioned earlier). They had heard the celebratory gunfire from our friends who had just left and thought we might be in danger, so they came to help us.
We now resumed our march, and continued it till sunset, each boasting of his prowess, and what feats of arms he had before done, and what he would have done had the Bey’s troops been hostile.
We picked up our march again and kept going until sunset, each of us bragging about our skills and the battles we had fought in the past, and what we would have done if the Bey’s troops had been against us.
The evening we encamped in the open Desert, on a spot devoid of water, and so completely barren, that not even a single blade of herb for our camels was to be found, and we were obliged to feed them with what provender we had with us.
The evening we set up camp in the open desert, on a spot with no water and so completely barren that not even a single blade of grass for our camels could be found, we had to feed them whatever supplies we brought with us.
On the second day we advanced for twelve hours through the Desert, the plain consisting of soft limestone, sometimes bare, but more frequently covered with quicksand.
On the second day we moved forward for twelve hours across the desert, the land made up of soft limestone, sometimes exposed, but more often blanketed with quicksand.
On the morning of the third day, the scene somewhat altered; detached hills rose here and there, taking from the uniformity of the before level desert. These mounds seemed to derive their origin from a base of calcareous rock, round, and on which the sands had[42] gathered, and been heaped up by the winds, and on some to a considerable height. From this district of hillocks and hills, commences a range of mountains called Morai-je, stretching far to SSW, and seemingly also branching towards the north. This day we encamped two hours before sunset, for the purpose of awaiting the return of some Twaters, who separated from us about noon, to seek pasture for their camels. Our camp was pitched on the summit of a hill, at foot of which were spread a quantity of petrified shells and marine substances imbedded in a soft limestone.
On the morning of the third day, the scenery changed a bit; isolated hills appeared here and there, breaking up the uniform flatness of the desert we had seen before. These mounds seemed to originate from a base of rounded calcareous rock, where the sands had[42] accumulated and been piled up by the winds, some reaching a significant height. From this area of small hills and larger mounds, a mountain range called Morai-je begins, extending far to the southwest and also branching toward the north. That day, we set up camp two hours before sunset to wait for some Twaters, who had separated from us around noon to find grazing for their camels. Our camp was pitched on the top of a hill, where we found a number of fossilized shells and marine materials embedded in soft limestone at the base.
On the fourth day we struck our tents very early in the morning, with the view of reaching a particular spot for our next encampment, where fresh water was to be found. The first part of our day’s journey we travelled on a continued plain on the heights of the mountain. The ascent from the east had been gentle, but coming to the western declivity, we found the way down most steep and difficult. It is noted by the name of Neddeek by the Arabs. The way down is not only steep, but so narrow that the whole caravan was obliged to travel in single file, camel after camel. The perpendicular height of this (almost) precipice was about eighty feet. From the verge of the summit the prospect was most beautiful. A narrow vale, extending far beyond the reach of the eye, was illumined at some distance by the rise of sun, whose beams slanted over the mountain we had to pass: in regarding the level and brightness of the distant scene, we looked over a fore-ground of craggy rocks, and abrupt and frightful chasms yet remaining in gloomy shade; and the contrast of bright and terrific scene made the stronger impression on our minds, whilst from this awful height we had to meditate on the difficulty and danger of our passage down to the plain. I followed not the narrow track of the caravan, but picked myself out a way down the mountain with some difficulty[43] and risk. Coming to its base, I observed a piece of petrified wood, of about two feet long and eight inches broad; it was the only such fragment I saw in these parts. Forward in the plain to some distance, lay huge stones, or rather rocks. They probably have been there from the time of some great flood,[11] which, on every consideration of what I now and before saw, I must suppose to have inundated these countries, at some distant period, distinctively and subsequent to the deluge mentioned in Scripture. At some distance I cast a look back to the Neddeek; its appearance of wild forms of rock broken into or rent asunder, confirmed my idea of irruption of waters, and that the deluge had rushed from the west. Our march was now directed along the valley, skirted by mountains nearly of the same height and form as those we had passed; at length it expanded into a wider plain called Sultin, where, at one o’clock, and after ten hours journey we encamped, and with water in plenty to replenish our bags for the ensuing days.
On the fourth day, we packed up our tents early in the morning, aiming to reach a specific spot for our next campsite, where we could find fresh water. For the first part of our journey, we traveled across a flat area on the mountain's heights. The climb from the east had been gentle, but when we reached the western slope, we found the descent to be very steep and challenging. The Arabs refer to this place as Neddeek. The path down was not only steep but so narrow that the entire caravan had to move in single file, camel by camel. The sheer drop of this almost cliff was about eighty feet. From the edge of the summit, the view was stunning. A narrow valley stretched far beyond what the eye could see, lit up by the morning sun, whose rays slanted over the mountain we needed to cross. As we took in the flat and bright scenery in the distance, we looked over a foreground of jagged rocks and deep, intimidating chasms still cast in shadow; the contrast of the bright and terrifying landscape left a strong impression on us, as we contemplated the challenges and dangers of our descent to the plain. I didn’t follow the narrow track of the caravan but found my own path down the mountain with some difficulty[43] and risk. At the base, I noticed a piece of petrified wood, about two feet long and eight inches wide; it was the only fragment of its kind I saw in the area. Further ahead in the plain, there were large stones, or rather rocks. They likely have been there since some massive flood,[11] which, based on everything I had seen before, I must assume inundated this region at some point far in the past, distinctively and after the flood mentioned in Scripture. Looking back at the Neddeek, the sight of its rugged, shattered rock formations reinforced my belief that waters once surged through here, coming from the west. We then continued our march through the valley, flanked by mountains similar in height and shape to those we had passed earlier; eventually, it opened up into a larger plain called Sultin, where, at one o’clock, after a ten-hour journey, we set up camp, with plenty of water to fill our bags for the days ahead.
The fifth and sixth days we journied on through this Desert; for so, from its barrenness and appearance, it may be justly termed, though throughout abounding in springs. The waters I should, however, suppose to be bitter, as the Arabs dig no wells in this district.
The fifth and sixth days we traveled on through this desert; it's really what you’d call it because of its emptiness and look, even though it has plenty of springs. However, I’d guess the water is bitter since the Arabs don’t dig wells in this area.
The seventh day our way lay between ranges of hills, and in the evening we came to a spot affording not only verdure but trees, and that to a considerable extent of country: under these trees we encamped, and continued travelling through a very grove the best part of the ensuing day, when our road opened to a desert checquered with hills, and scabeous calcareous rocks. From one of these eminences I first observed the mountainous region Harutsch, so known[44] to and dreaded by travellers. The marvellous narratives of calamity therein suffered, and which had been recited to me on our way; and the black and dreary appearances which the face of the country offered to my view, roused my curiosity, and I pressed on before the caravan to examine a lower mountain, which, like a promontory jutted towards us before the rest. The soil of the desert near was stony, the stones consisting of calcareous limestone. The mountain presented the form of an imperfect cone: its strata I take to have lain originally horizontal, as those of the hills passed on our route, but from some convulsion, they are now broken, turned over, and promiscuously confused. The substance of which the mountain consists, on fracture, and as to colour, resembles the ferruginous basalt; and such I take it to be. Range upon range of dreary and black mountains succeed, and form the only prospect!
The seventh day, our journey took us through hilly terrain, and in the evening we arrived at a place that offered not just greenery but also trees, stretching over a large area. We set up camp beneath these trees and continued traveling through a lovely grove for most of the next day. Eventually, our path opened up to a desolate landscape filled with hills and craggy limestone rocks. From one of these heights, I first spotted the mountainous area of Harutsch, well-known[44] and feared by travelers. The incredible stories of misfortune that had been shared with me on our way, along with the dark and grim sight of the landscape, sparked my curiosity. I pushed ahead of the caravan to explore a lower mountain that jutted out towards us like a promontory. The ground in the surrounding desert was rocky, with stones made of calcareous limestone. The mountain took on the shape of an imperfect cone; its layers seemed to have originally been horizontal, similar to those of the hills we had passed, but due to some upheaval, they are now shattered, overturned, and in disarray. The material of the mountain, when fractured and in terms of color, resembles ferruginous basalt, and I believe that’s what it is. Range after range of bleak, dark mountains followed, forming the only view!
As the caravan was approaching, I dismounted, and sat me down close to a large stone which formed my table, whilst I partook of such frugal fare as the Arab carries with him on these occasions. When I rose up the caravan had passed the prominence of the mountain and disappeared. The ground, however, being firm, and thence the road to be easily traced, I was under no anxiety; though after half an hour’s march, somewhat surprised at not yet discovering my old companions, I took out my spy-glass, when I descried at a little distance four Moroccans, whom I rode up to and accosted: they told me that the caravan had already encamped at a short distance from the road, to pasture their camels, and that they themselves were in search of water to satisfy their thirst. I was inclined to be of their party, but was fearful of giving uneasiness to my people by longer absence from the caravan, which, from its fires now kindled, I easily discovered and rejoined.
As the caravan was getting close, I got off my horse and sat down near a big stone that served as my table while I ate the simple food that Arabs bring with them on these trips. When I stood up, the caravan had already passed over the hill and disappeared. However, the ground was solid, and the path was easy to follow, so I wasn't worried; though after half an hour of walking, I was a bit surprised not to see my old companions yet. I pulled out my binoculars and spotted four Moroccans a little way off, so I rode over to them and greeted them. They told me that the caravan had already set up camp not far from the road to let their camels graze and that they were looking for water to quench their thirst. I thought about joining them but was concerned that my people might worry about my longer absence from the caravan, which I easily spotted by the fires they had started, so I went back to join them.
[45]The ninth day we travelled between black and dreary hills; our road meandering through narrow and dismal ravines, now and then spreading to some width, having some grass and even a tree, and sometimes opening to a space of valley, of which the herbage looked fresh, and even luxuriant, from the copious rains which fall in this mountainous region, fertilizing the soil after it is washed down.
[45]On the ninth day, we traveled between dark and gloomy hills; our path winding through narrow and bleak ravines, occasionally widening to reveal some grass and even a tree. Sometimes it opened up to a valley, where the greenery looked vibrant and even lush from the heavy rains that fall in this mountainous area, enriching the soil after being washed down.
Our watering-place consisted of pools of mere rain water from the hills, and was situate at the edge of a valley of about six miles circuit, shewing not only a rich verdure, but bearing shrubs and trees. Here we saw some gazelles, but so shy, that we could not get a shot at them.
Our vacation spot was made up of small pools of rainwater from the hills, located at the edge of a valley about six miles around, showcasing not just lush greenery but also featuring various shrubs and trees. Here, we spotted some gazelles, but they were so elusive that we couldn't manage to take a shot at them.
We passed our tenth, eleventh, and twelfth days incessantly almost in march through this dreary solitude; yet we could not expedite our journey as we wished. Sometimes we were obliged to wander from our direct line with the windings of our only path; at other times we were forced to move on slowly and with difficulty, over layers of loose stone for half a mile together: in the course of one of those days, I ventured on a walk to the south, accompanied by my Arabian servant and some Twaters. We could easily, on foot, outstrip the caravan under all its impediments of march. Every where I found the mountains of like appearance as exhibited to the traveller on the common road, with the only difference that views even more dreary and terrific occasionally caught the eye: it having been matter of course to work and conduct the road along the least rugged vallies.
We spent our tenth, eleventh, and twelfth days almost constantly marching through this bleak solitude; yet we couldn’t speed up our journey as we hoped. Sometimes we had to deviate from our straight path due to the twists and turns of our only route; at other times, we were forced to move slowly and with difficulty over loose stones for half a mile at a time. One of those days, I decided to take a walk to the south, accompanied by my Arabian servant and some Twaters. On foot, we could easily outrun the caravan despite all its marching difficulties. Everywhere I found the mountains looking just like those seen by travelers on the usual roads, with the only difference being that even more bleak and terrifying views occasionally caught my eye, as it was standard to work and lay the road along the least rugged valleys.
On the afternoon of the thirteenth day, we broke at length from[46] this dark region into an extensive plain. Here we continued on march for some hours, when we came to ranges of low calcareous mountains, and about sunset encamped at the entrance of the defile which leads through them.
On the afternoon of the thirteenth day, we finally broke free from[46] this dark area and entered a wide plain. We marched for several hours until we reached some low limestone mountains, and around sunset, we set up camp at the entrance of the pass that goes through them.
On the morning of the fifteenth I placed myself among the foremost of the caravan, consisting chiefly of poor pilgrims, hastening to precede the other company, with a view of first quenching their thirst at the spring, which on that day we were to arrive at. On coming to the watering-place called Ennaté I perceived a well already cleaned and in order, and several Twaters lying round. I placed myself near and prepared for breakfast. An old man had laboured a shorter cut across the sand to be sooner at the well; after mutual salutation, I offered him a handful of dates and some meat; these he thankfully accepted, kissing them and rubbing them on his forehead. Putting the provisions down on the ground, he got to the spring, and continued drinking for a considerable time, and recited his prayer Elham-Dulillah with great devotion. He told me, that for three days past he had been without his requisite portion of water. This man (as himself told me), was above sixty years old; and this was his third voyage from Fez to Mecca, without possessing the least means of accommodation for the journey; without preparation of food for his subsistence; nay, even without water, excepting what commiseration and the esteem in which his pilgrimage was held, might procure for him, from the charity and regard of travellers better provided in the caravan.
On the morning of the fifteenth, I joined the front of the caravan, which mainly consisted of poor pilgrims eager to reach the spring first and quench their thirst. When we arrived at the watering place called Ennaté, I noticed a well that had already been cleaned and prepared, with several Twaters lying around. I settled down nearby and got ready for breakfast. An old man had taken a shortcut across the sand to reach the well sooner; after greeting each other, I offered him a handful of dates and some meat, which he gratefully accepted, kissing them and rubbing them on his forehead. After placing the food on the ground, he went to the spring and drank for a while, reciting his prayer Elham-Dulillah with deep devotion. He told me he hadn't had enough water for the past three days. This man, as he mentioned himself, was over sixty years old and this was his third journey from Fez to Mecca, without any means of accommodation for the trip, without any food prepared for his needs, and even without water, except for what sympathy and the respect for his pilgrimage might bring him from the charity of better-equipped travelers in the caravan.
We reposed the rest of the day on this spot, distant from our last encampment four hours march, and our chief dispatched a messenger to Mourzouk, to give notice of arrival of the caravan on the[47] frontier of the kingdom, and to bear a letter of respect to the sultan from each merchant individually.
We spent the rest of the day at this location, about four hours' walk from our last camp, and our leader sent a messenger to Mourzouk to inform them of the caravan's arrival at the[47] border of the kingdom, along with a letter of respect from each merchant to the sultan.
And now, on the sixteenth, (dating by our departure from Augila), we came again to the society of men: a march of nine hours bringing us to Temissa, situated within the territory of Fezzan.
And now, on the sixteenth (counting from our departure from Augila), we rejoined human company: a nine-hour march took us to Temissa, located in the territory of Fezzan.
[48]SECTION II.
Observations on the Harutsch Region.
The mountainous desert of Harutsch is the most remarkable region that came within scope of my observation during this journey; its extent has been stated to me at seven days journey over, from north to south; and at five days from east to west: but in a subsequent voyage from Fezzan to Tripoly, I fell in again with a branch or tract of the Harutsch, and was there told, that it yet extended further to the west. At Mourzouk, too, I was informed of black mountains on the road leading southward to Bornou, on whose heights the climate was of very cold temperature, and whence the people of Mourzouk obtained their iron; and I conjecture that such mountainous tract may be a further branch of the Harutsch, though having indeed no positive information or proof of the immediate junction or connection of these regions.
The mountainous desert of Harutsch is the most striking area I observed during this journey; it has been described to me as spanning seven days’ travel from north to south and five days from east to west. However, during a later trip from Fezzan to Tripoly, I encountered another part of the Harutsch and was informed that it extends even further to the west. In Mourzouk, I also learned about black mountains along the road leading south toward Bornou, where the climate was quite cold, and the people of Mourzouk sourced their iron. I suspect that this mountainous area could be another section of the Harutsch, although I don't have definitive evidence of the direct connection between these regions.
The rugged, broken, and altogether wild and terrific scene which this desert tract affords, leads strongly to the supposition that its surface at some period took its present convulsed form and appearance from volcanic revolution. Its inequalities of ground are no where of great altitude. The general face of country shews continued ranges of hills, running in various directions, rising from eight to twelve feet only above the level of the intermediate ground; and between which branches, (on perfect flats, and without any gradual ascent of base or fore-ground,) rise up lofty insulated mountains, whose sides are exceeding steep from the very base. A mountain[49] of this description, situated midway on journey over this desert, and north of our caravan road, is by the Arabs termed Stres; it has the appearance of being split from the top down to the middle. I was prevented from particular examination of it, but soon, on our caravan halting, had the opportunity of inspecting another of the same kind.
The rugged, broken, and completely wild and incredible landscape of this desert area strongly suggests that its surface underwent some major volcanic activity to achieve its current chaotic shape and look. The ground isn’t particularly high anywhere. Generally, the land shows continuous ranges of hills that run in various directions, rising only between eight to twelve feet above the level of the surrounding ground. In between these hills, on perfectly flat land with no gradual incline, rise tall isolated mountains with very steep sides right from the base. One such mountain, located midway on our journey across this desert and north of our caravan route, is called Stres by the Arabs; it looks like it was split from the top down to the middle. I didn’t get a chance to examine it closely, but once our caravan stopped, I had the chance to check out another mountain just like it.
This mountain I perceived, from the foot to the summit, to be covered with detached stones, such as wholly constitute the lower hills. The small plain from which this mountain rose, was encompassed by rows of hills, such as above described, closely running into each other, and connected as a wall. The flat within was overspread with white quicksand, on which lay, irregularly scattered, large blocks of stone, of like nature and substance as that generally throughout this desert. With some trouble I procured a sample of the earthy stratum beneath the sand: it seemed to me, at the time, to have the appearance of ashes thrown out from a volcano; but I have since lost the paper which contained the specimen, and cannot further confirm the accuracy of my first observation. In the vicinity of this mountain, I found stones of smaller bulk and a reddish colour, resembling that of burnt bricks; some of these were one-half red, the other blackish; the red part had not the same weight or density, on fracture, as the black: the former is more porous and spongy, and bears a general resemblance to slags or scoriæ.
This mountain I saw, from the base to the peak, was covered in loose stones, just like the lower hills. The small plain that this mountain rose from was surrounded by rows of hills that were closely packed together, forming a wall. The flat land inside was covered with white quicksand, on which large blocks of stone lay scattered irregularly, made of the same material as that commonly found throughout this desert. With some effort, I managed to take a sample of the soil beneath the sand: it appeared to me, at the time, to look like ash from a volcanic eruption; however, I've since lost the paper with the specimen, so I can't confirm the accuracy of my initial observation. Near this mountain, I found smaller stones that were reddish in color, similar to burnt bricks; some of these were half red and half blackish; the red part was neither as heavy nor as dense as the black when broken: the former was more porous and spongy, resembling slags or scoria.
The stony substance, of which the mass of these mountains consists, varies in colour and density; in some parts heavy and compact, in others having small holes and cavities. These species of stone are intermingled, and I could not discover in either, any extraneous matter or substance.
The rocky material that makes up these mountains varies in color and density; in some areas, it's heavy and solid, while in others, it has small holes and cavities. These types of stone are mixed together, and I couldn't find any foreign matter or substances in either.
[50]The stratification or lay of these stones is perfectly horizontal, but often disturbed; parts of the first layer sinking into and mixing with the second below, and the second with the third. Sometimes the strata take an oblique direction; sometimes are promiscuously confused, and sometimes no strata appear at all; and a series of low hills is formed of one solid mass of rock, with fissures in direction to the north. The plain too shews occasionally level rock of the like nature and substance, in parts where bare of sand or soil. The whole of this region of hillocks, hills, rocks, and mountains, is, in parts, intersected by vales, occasionally having water; and though the soil is of white sand, yet it is so far fertile as to produce single trees, and pasturage for beasts; in these productive spots are frequently to be seen the tracks and slots of game. Often, when I thought I could so do without danger of losing my way, I struck into one of the narrow vales running apparently in the same direction as our caravan road; and occasionally led away to defiles becoming more narrow and rugged, I repented my indiscretion, whilst thus separated from my company, and exposed to attack from Bedouins, with dependence for safety on my single sabre and pistols. On regaining the caravan, it yet occurred that my danger had not been great, for what Arab robber could look for a traveller in such a tract, or suppose any hardy enough to wander therein from his troop, excepting, indeed, some wretched Moroccan pilgrim in search of water!
[50]The layers of these stones are completely horizontal, but often disturbed; parts of the top layer sink into and mix with the second layer below, and the second mixes with the third. Sometimes the layers are tilted at an angle; at other times they are chaotically confused, and occasionally there are no visible layers at all, creating a series of low hills made up of solid rock, with cracks running northward. The plain also shows flat rock of the same type and material in places where it’s free of sand or soil. This entire area of hills, rocks, and mountains is, in parts, crossed by valleys that sometimes have water; and although the soil is white sand, it’s still fertile enough to support single trees and grazing for animals; in these productive areas, you can frequently see tracks and footprints of game. Often, when I thought I could do so without risking losing my way, I ventured into one of the narrow valleys that seemed to run in the same direction as our caravan route; but sometimes these paths led me into increasingly narrow and rugged passes, and I regretted my foolishness as I found myself separated from my group and vulnerable to attacks from Bedouins, relying on just my sabre and pistols for protection. When I finally rejoined the caravan, it became clear that my danger hadn’t been as severe as I feared, since what Arab robber would expect to find a traveler in such a remote area, or think anyone would be brave enough to wander away from their group, except perhaps some unfortunate Moroccan pilgrim in search of water!
In the course of these excursions, on the side of one of these narrow vales, winding among the mountains, I observed a narrow branch or inlet, towards the termination of which the rocky heights from each side closed, and formed a cavern of about nine feet deep, and five feet wide; and, considering its appearance and situation in this desolate, obscure, and mournful region, I was inspired with[51] feelings, as on viewing the entrance to the subterraneous world, and very passage, ad inferos.
During these trips, along the edge of one of these narrow valleys, winding through the mountains, I noticed a small inlet where the rocky cliffs on each side narrowed to form a cave about nine feet deep and five feet wide. Given its look and location in this lonely, dark, and sorrowful area, I felt a strong sense of emotion as if I was gazing at the entrance to the underworld, a true passage, ad inferos.
My interpreter told me, that at some time when I had taken another path, and when the caravan was travelling about midway through the mountains, he saw a cavern in which the stones to a considerable depth were black, and that under these lay a stratum of white stones. On travelling afterwards from Fezzan to Tripoly, in continuation of the Harutsch, (as I supposed it), I myself observed ranges of basaltic hills, alternate with ranges of calcareous hills. My interpreter brought me a specimen of the white stone taken from the cave himself had seen, but I think was not happy in its selection, it consisting of a mere lump of indurated argillaceous earth, such as often adheres to limestone.
My interpreter told me that at one point when I had taken a different route and the caravan was traveling through the mountains, he spotted a cave where the rocks were black for quite a depth, and beneath those, there was a layer of white stones. Later, while traveling from Fezzan to Tripoli, continuing on what I thought was the Harutsch, I noticed ranges of basalt hills alternating with calcareous hills. My interpreter brought me a sample of the white stone from the cave he had seen, but I think he chose poorly; it was just a chunk of hardened clay, similar to what often sticks to limestone.
In respect to the many hills, and their curious ranges and direction, the Harutsch exhibits a similitude to the excrescences on the bordering mountains I refer to in a subsequent journey; it agrees too in the circumstance of single stones scattered on the surface, which, in the Harutsch, are distinguished as being only of one species or substance, peculiar to the district. There is too a further analogy in the plains formed of bare rock; and in the white quicksand covering other levels, and laying round the mountains, and up their base, though to no considerable height.
In terms of the numerous hills, along with their interesting shapes and orientations, the Harutsch resembles the growths on the nearby mountains that I'll mention in a later journey. It also shares the feature of individual stones scattered across the ground, which in the Harutsch, are all of a single type or material unique to the area. Additionally, there’s a similar aspect in the flat areas made of bare rock and in the white quicksand that covers some surfaces, surrounding the mountains and extending up their base, although not reaching a significant height.
Contiguous to the Harutsch-el-assuat, or black Harutsch, lies the white Harutsch, or Harutsch-el-abiat. The country denoted by this appellation is a vast plain, interspersed with mounds or isolated hills, and spreads to the mountains rising towards Fezzan. The stones covering the surface of this plain have the appearance of being glazed, and so too every other substance, and even the rocks[52] which occasionally rise or project from the level. Among the stones are found fragments of large petrified marine animals, but mostly shells closed up and insolidated. These shells struck or thrown forcibly on others, give a shrill sound, and the fracture presents a vitreous appearance.
Adjacent to the Harutsch-el-assuat, or black Harutsch, is the white Harutsch, or Harutsch-el-abiat. The area referred to by this name is a vast plain with mounds or isolated hills scattered throughout, extending to the mountains leading toward Fezzan. The stones covering this plain look glazed, as do many other materials, including the rocks[52] that occasionally stick out from the ground. Among the stones, you can find fragments of large petrified marine creatures, but mostly there are shells that are closed up and solidified. When these shells are struck or thrown forcefully against each other, they produce a sharp sound, and their broken edges have a glassy appearance.
The low, bare, calcareous hills which border the plain, are, by the Arabs, comprised in the Harutsch-el-abiat; but they are of a nature very different. Of all that I have seen, this range of hills contains the most petrifactions. These mountains rise immediately steep from the level, and the matter of which they are formed is alone friable limestone, in which the petrifactions are so loosely imbedded, that they may be taken out with ease; they consist of petrified conchs, snail-shells, fish, and other marine substances. I found heads of fish that would be a full burthen for one man to carry. In the adjacent vallies are shells in great number, and of the same kind as those found on the great plain, and which, as I before mentioned, have the appearance of being glazed.
The low, bare, chalky hills that border the plain are referred to by the Arabs as the Harutsch-el-abiat; however, they are quite different in nature. Of all the places I've visited, this range of hills has the most fossils. These mountains rise steeply from the flat land, and they're made up of soft limestone, where the fossils are so loosely embedded that you can easily take them out. They include petrified shells, snail shells, fish, and other marine fossils. I found fish heads that would be too heavy for one person to carry. In the nearby valleys, there are numerous shells that are the same type as those found on the vast plain, and, as I mentioned earlier, they appear to be glazed.
[53]SECTION III.
Arriving at Temissa and continuing the journey.
We were yet an hour’s march distant from Temissa, when the inhabitants of that place greeted the caravan with welcome and congratulation on arrival. They put questions without number, concerning our health, intermingling wishes for peace in the Arabian stile and manner. The incessant repetition of the same words appeared to me extraordinary, but I was soon given to understand, that it denoted polite manners, according to usage of the country. The more noble and educated the man, the oftener did he repeat his questions. A well dressed young man attracted my particular attention, as an adept in the perseverance and redundancy of salutation. Accosting an Arab of Augila, he gave him his hand, and detained him a considerable time with his civilities, when the Arab being obliged to advance with greater speed to come up again with his companions, the youth of Fezzan thought he should appear deficient in good manners if he quitted him so soon: for near half a mile he kept running by his horse, whilst all his conversation was, How dost thou fare? Well, how art thou thyself? Praised be God thou art arrived in peace! God grant thee peace! How dost thou do, &c. &c.
We were about an hour's walk away from Temissa when the locals welcomed the caravan with cheers and congratulations on our arrival. They asked countless questions about our well-being, mixing in wishes for peace in the Arabian way. The constant repetition of the same phrases struck me as unusual, but I soon learned that it was a sign of politeness according to local customs. The more noble and educated a person was, the more often he repeated his questions. A well-dressed young man caught my attention as an expert in persistent and excessive greetings. When he approached an Arab from Augila, he shook his hand and kept him busy with his politeness for quite a while. The Arab, needing to move faster to catch up with his friends, made a move to leave, but the young man from Fezzan felt he would seem rude if he let him go so quickly. For nearly half a mile, he kept running alongside the Arab's horse, continually asking, "How are you doing? And how are you yourself? Thank God you arrived safely! May God grant you peace! How are you, etc., etc."
On our approach to Temissa, the pilgrims arranged themselves with their kettle drum and green flag. The merchants formed a troop, at head of the caravan, and pranced and curvetted their horses as they led on, and in this manner we passed on to our place of encampment near the town, whilst the women assembled without the walls, welcomed us in their Arabian custom with[54] reiterated and joyful exclamation, to which we answered by discharge of our fire-arms; and these compliments continued till we pitched our tents in a grove of date trees.
As we approached Temissa, the pilgrims organized themselves with their drum and green flag. The merchants formed a group at the front of the caravan, showing off and prancing with their horses as they led us on. This is how we made our way to our camping spot near the town, while the women gathered outside the walls, greeting us in their Arabian way with repeated joyful shouts, which we responded to by firing our guns. These exchanges continued until we set up our tents in a grove of date trees.
All was gladness and felicitation this day throughout the caravan, and especially amongst the merchants. Perhaps for years past the caravan had not left Cairo with so gloomy and fearful a prospect as on the present occasion, when an army of Infidels had so suddenly assailed and taken the principal city of Africa, destroyed the ruling power of the Mamelukes, and threatened immediate abolition to the trade for slaves, on which the caravan principally subsists. It was but a few days after our leaving Cairo, that the appearance of an horde of Bedouins gave alarm to our caravan; indeed it was extraordinary that we should reach Siwah without attack, as the Arabs had of late been so bold, as even to pass the French posts, and rob near to the very capital. Whilst at Siwah, we were apprised of the movements of different hordes of Bengasi and other Arabian tribes; and not far from our road between Augila and the frontiers of Fezzan, we descried numerous vestiges of their depredation, viewing some hundreds of dead camels and beasts of burthen which they had plundered and left, probably from deficiency of water for their support. They had robbed in the neighbourhood, and even made an attack on Temissa, and had waited for us in these parts for a considerable time, till they concluded that, from the conquest of Cairo, our caravan would not this year proceed. Being therefore now in no immediate danger, and our future route laying through the inhabited districts of the realm of Fezzan, our fears at once vanished.
All was joy and celebration this day throughout the caravan, especially among the merchants. Perhaps for years, the caravan hadn't left Cairo with such a gloomy and fearful outlook as on this occasion, when an army of Infidels had so suddenly attacked and captured the principal city of Africa, destroyed the ruling power of the Mamelukes, and threatened to immediately end the slave trade, on which the caravan primarily depends. It was just a few days after we left Cairo that the sight of a group of Bedouins alarmed our caravan; it was remarkable that we reached Siwah without being attacked, as the Arabs had recently been bold enough to pass the French posts and rob near the very capital. While at Siwah, we were informed about the movements of different groups of Bengasi and other Arabian tribes; not far from our route between Augila and the borders of Fezzan, we saw numerous signs of their plundering, including hundreds of dead camels and pack animals they had stolen and abandoned, likely due to a lack of water for their support. They had robbed in the area and even attacked Temissa, waiting for us in this region for quite some time, until they concluded that, after the conquest of Cairo, our caravan wouldn't proceed this year. Since we were now in no immediate danger, and our future route lay through the populated areas of Fezzan, our fears disappeared.
Temissa is at present a place of little importance, containing not more than forty men bearing arms. It is built on a hill, and[55] surrounded by a high wall, capable of securing it against hostile incursion if in due repair, but in many parts the wall is decayed and fallen. I was told there were inscriptions to be discovered on some of the buildings, but I found none, and rather suppose none such ever existed, the ruins consisting of mere dilapidated houses, built with limestone, and cemented with a reddish mortar. These remains, however, shew that the ancient inhabitants of Temissa were more expert in the art of building than the present, who have patched up dwelling places in and among the ruins scarcely so comfortable as our sheds for cattle in Europe.
Temissa is currently a place of little significance, with no more than forty armed men. It sits on a hill and[55] is surrounded by a tall wall that could defend it from attacks if it were maintained properly, but in many areas, the wall is crumbling and has fallen apart. I was told that there were inscriptions to be found on some of the buildings, but I didn't see any and I suspect none ever existed; the ruins are simply dilapidated houses made of limestone, held together with reddish mortar. These remains, however, indicate that the ancient people of Temissa were more skilled at building than the current residents, who have thrown together living spaces among the ruins that are hardly more comfortable than our cattle sheds in Europe.
These people have many sheep and goats. Their only beast of burden is the ass. The place is surrounded with groves of date trees, which furnish the chief subsistence; corn is produced, but in very small quantity.
These people have a lot of sheep and goats. Their only pack animal is the donkey. The area is surrounded by date palm groves, which provide their main source of food; they grow some corn, but only in small amounts.
Having visited the town; on my return to camp, I found there a number of the natives, bartering sheep, fowls and dates, for tobacco, butter, female ornaments, and the coarse woollen stuffs with which the Arabs are generally cloathed. The evening closed in mutual congratulation and festivity, and the younger slaves and boys of the camp made a bonfire.
After visiting the town, when I returned to camp, I found several locals trading sheep, chickens, and dates for tobacco, butter, women's jewelry, and the rough woolen fabrics that the Arabs usually wear. The evening ended with everyone congratulating each other and celebrating, and the younger slaves and boys from the camp built a bonfire.
Our journies from this place being intended to be short, we did not decamp the following morning till half an hour after sunrise, and moved on slowly between date trees, on a generally level ground, interspersed here and there with low hills formed by the wind, which had gathered and heaped a deep sand round some of the trees, so that only the top branches appeared. At two in the afternoon, we came in sight of Zuila, and proceeded towards the place destined for our encampment SW. of the town.
Our journeys from this place were meant to be brief, so we didn’t leave the next morning until half an hour after sunrise. We moved slowly between date palms on mostly flat ground, occasionally interrupted by small hills formed by the wind that had piled up deep sand around some of the trees, leaving only the top branches visible. By two in the afternoon, we spotted Zuila and made our way to the area we planned to camp, southwest of the town.
[56]SECTION IV.
Of Zuila.
Zuila being a place of importance in the territory of Fezzan, and the place of residence, not only of many leading and wealthy men, but of relations to the family of the Sultan; we halted at some little distance from the town, and prepared to do the proper honours of our arrival.
Zuila, a significant location in the Fezzan region and home to many influential and wealthy individuals, as well as relatives of the Sultan's family, we stopped a short distance from the town to prepare to properly honor our arrival.
The merchants, their pages and slaves dressed themselves in their best apparel; and the Sheik ordered his green flag to be borne before him, in honor to the Shereefs who live in this place. We had scarcely formed ourselves in procession, when we perceived twenty horsemen, mounted on white horses, with a green flag carried in their centre. It was the Shereef Hindy, the principal man of the town, who with his eight sons and other relations, was come out to meet us: at some distance followed a great number of men and boys on foot. They joined our caravan, and we passed together near the town, with huzzas and discharge of muskets, till we reached our place of encampment and pitched our tents.
The merchants, their assistants and servants dressed in their best clothes; and the Sheik had his green flag carried in front of him, in honor of the Shereefs who live here. We had just organized ourselves into a procession when we saw twenty horsemen on white horses, with a green flag in the center. It was the Shereef Hindy, the main leader of the town, who came out to greet us with his eight sons and other relatives; a large group of men and boys on foot followed behind at a distance. They joined our caravan, and we moved together near the town, with cheers and the sound of muskets firing, until we reached our campsite and set up our tents.
Many other inhabitants then came out to us, some from curiosity, and some to barter their goods; all behaved with the greatest decorum and regularity; but the family of the Shereef was distinguished by its particular complacency and politeness of manners: they wore the Tripolitan dress, but over it a fine Soudan shirt or Tob. The dealings of the caravan, on this occasion, were[57] considerable, and especially with the women, who purchased various articles of ornament, in exchange for garden-stuff, milk, and poultry.
Many other people then came out to us, some out of curiosity and others to trade their goods; all acted with great decorum and order. However, the family of the Shereef stood out for their particular friendliness and politeness. They wore the Tripolitan outfit but had a nice Soudan shirt or Tob over it. The caravan's transactions during this time were[57] considerable, especially with the women, who bought various decorative items in exchange for vegetables, milk, and poultry.
Zuila has received the name of Belled-el-Shereef, or town of the Shereefs: in former times it was an important place, and its circumference appears to have been thrice the extent of what it is now. Some of the Shereef’s family told me, that some centuries past Zuila had been the residence of the sultans, and the general rendezvous of the caravans: and even yet the voyage to Fezzan is termed, the voyage to Seela, by the caravan from Bornou.
Zuila is now known as Belled-el-Shereef, or the town of the Shereefs. In the past, it was a significant location, and its size was about three times what it is today. Some members of the Shereef’s family told me that centuries ago, Zuila was the home of the sultans and the main meeting point for caravans. Even today, the journey to Fezzan is still referred to as the voyage to Seela by the caravan from Bornou.
This little city stands on a space of about one mile in circuit; as in Augila, the houses have only a ground floor, and the rooms are lighted from the door. Near the centre of the town, are the ruins of a building several stories high, and of which the walls are very thick; and report says, this was formerly the palace. Without the town near the southern wall, stands an old mosque, little destroyed by time, serving as a sample of the ancient magnificence of Zuila; it contains in the middle a spacious hall or saloon, encompassed by a lofty colonnade, behind which runs a broad passage, with entrances to various apartments belonging to the establishment of the mosque. At some little distance further from the city, appear ancient and very lofty edifices, which are the tombs of shereefs, who fell in battle, at time the country was attacked by Infidels.
This small city covers about a mile around; like in Augila, the houses are just one story high, and the rooms get light from the door. In the center of town, there are ruins of a multi-story building with very thick walls, which is said to have once been the palace. Outside the town, near the southern wall, there's an old mosque that's barely affected by time, showcasing the ancient grandeur of Zuila. It has a large hall in the middle, surrounded by a tall colonnade, behind which is a wide passage leading to various rooms associated with the mosque. A bit further from the city, you can see ancient, very tall structures that are the tombs of shereefs who died in battle when the country was invaded by Infidels.
The environs of Zuila are level, supplied with water, and fertile. The groves of date trees are of great extent; and its inhabitants appear to pay more attention to agriculture than those of adjoining places.
The surroundings of Zuila are flat, have plenty of water, and are fertile. The date tree groves are very large, and the people here seem to focus more on farming than those in nearby areas.
[58]In the evening we had further proof of the Arab hospitality of yore. A slave of the Shereef’s, brought to each tent a dish of meat and broth, and ten small loaves; this most ancient custom the Sheik of the Sultan keeps up and strictly adheres to on arrival of each caravan; soon after, he sent to each of us three small loaves for the morrow’s breakfast.
[58]In the evening, we experienced more of the traditional Arab hospitality. A servant of the Shereef brought a dish of meat and broth, along with ten small loaves, to each tent. This ancient custom is maintained and strictly followed by the Sheik of the Sultan whenever a caravan arrives. Shortly after, he sent each of us three small loaves for breakfast the next day.
[59]SECTION V.
Further journey—and arrival at Mourzouk.
We left the hospitable Zuila the ensuing morning, and having passed through a grove of date trees, came to an extensive and open plain over which we marched seven hours, and then arrived at Hemara; a small village, thin in people, and wretched in appearance, though the country round is most fertile. Here for the first time I was regaled with the great Fezzan dainty of locusts or grass-hoppers, and a drink called lugibi. The latter is composed of the juice of date trees, and when fresh is sweet and agreeable enough to the taste, but is apt to produce flatulencies and diarrhœa. At first I did not relish the dried locusts, but when accustomed, grew fond of them: when eaten, the legs and wings are broken off and the inner part is scooped out, and what remains has a flavour similar to that of red herrings, but more delicious.
We left the welcoming Zuila the next morning, and after passing through a grove of date trees, we reached a vast open plain where we marched for seven hours before arriving at Hemara; a small village, sparsely populated and looking quite shabby, even though the surrounding land is very fertile. Here, for the first time, I enjoyed the local delicacy of locusts or grasshoppers and a drink called lugibi. This drink is made from the juice of date trees and is sweet and pleasant when fresh, but can lead to gas and diarrhea. At first, I didn't like the dried locusts, but as I got used to them, I began to enjoy them: when eaten, the legs and wings are removed, and the inner part is scooped out. What’s left tastes somewhat like red herring, but even better.
The succeeding day we were on march before sunrise; our road crossed a plain, with date trees to the south, among which I descried several small villages. I was till noon separated from my usual party, the Sultan’s Sheik of Zuila being pleased to select me as his particular companion. His ordinary clothes were very much worn, and even ragged; he had a cloak, the badge of his high office; he chose to ride with me (as he said) because he deemed it dishonour to ride with the merchants. When permitted to quit him and rejoin my old comrades, I found them in great glee and spirits, at being so near the place where they had houses and families;[60] their gladness, however, soon received alloy, for the officers of the Sultan met us to take account of the bales and merchandize, which had not being usually done till arrival at the gates of Mourzouk; and the merchants had been in the habit of previously disposing of at least a third of their goods, in order to evade the duties. Some however, had contrived to intermingle their baggage with that of the pilgrims, who pay no duties. Rather out of humour with what had passed, our traders of the caravan agreed with a proposal of the Sheik to make a forced march to Tragen, where we arrived at sunset.
The next day, we started marching before sunrise. Our path crossed a plain with date trees to the south, where I spotted several small villages. Until noon, I was separated from my usual group, as the Sultan’s Sheik of Zuila had chosen me as his special companion. His usual clothes were quite worn and even ragged; he had a cloak that signified his high position. He preferred to ride with me because he thought it was beneath him to ride with the merchants. Once I was allowed to leave him and rejoin my old friends, I found them in high spirits, happy to be so close to their homes and families; however, their joy was soon dampened when the Sultan's officers met us to check the bales and merchandise. This usually happened only upon arrival at the gates of Mourzouk, and the merchants typically managed to sell at least a third of their goods beforehand to avoid the duties. Some, however, had cleverly mixed their baggage with that of the pilgrims, who paid no duties. Annoyed by what had happened, the caravan traders agreed with the Sheik's proposal to make a forced march to Tragen, where we arrived at sunset.[60]
At this place we reposed the whole of the ensuing day, employed in preparation for honourable appearance before the Sultan, who usually rides out to meet the caravan, in pious respect to the pilgrims returning from Mecca. The Sultan sent forward some camels laden with meat and bread, which were here distributed. The next morning we proceeded, and after eight hours march, pitched our camp near to the chapel and tomb of Sidibischir, a holy man of great renown in ancient times, and from whom the village near is likewise named Sidibischir. The following day was to be that of our interview with the Sultan. On that day, the 17th of November, we finished our long and perilous journey, arriving, after a three hours march, in the immediate vicinities of Mourzouk.
At this spot, we rested for the entire next day, getting ready to make a good impression on the Sultan, who usually rides out to greet the caravan in respectful acknowledgment of the pilgrims returning from Mecca. The Sultan sent some camels ahead, loaded with meat and bread, which were distributed here. The next morning, we continued on, and after an eight-hour march, we set up our camp near the chapel and tomb of Sidibischir, a holy man famous in ancient times, and from whom the nearby village is also named Sidibischir. The next day was when we would meet the Sultan. On that day, the 17th of November, we completed our long and dangerous journey, arriving after a three-hour march, right near Mourzouk.
The Sultan had posted himself on a rising ground, attended by a numerous court, and a multitude of his subjects.
The Sultan had positioned himself on elevated land, surrounded by a large court and a crowd of his people.
Our caravan halted, and every person of the caravan, of any importance, dismounted to salute him. With others I approached, and found the sultan seated on an old-fashioned elbow chair, covered with a cloth striped red and green, and placed at extremity of an[61] oval area, round which soldiers were drawn up, of but mean appearance. The sultan himself wore the Tripolitan vest, and over it a shirt or frock, embroidered with silver, in the Soudan manner. Close to him, on each side, were white Mamelukes and Negro slaves, with drawn sabres; behind these were six banners, and black and half-naked slaves, holding lances and halberds, of a fashion as old perhaps, as the times of Saladin. We entered the circle by an opening left facing the sultan, and about the middle of the area: according to the ceremonial of his court, we pulled off our slippers, and approached barefoot to kiss his imperial hand. Each having paid his compliment, alternately passed to right or left, and seated himself behind the sultan: the merchants being thus ranged in two equal groups on either side the throne; lastly entered the Sheik of the pilgrims, with his sabre drawn, and kettle-drum, and green flag of Mecca borne before him. The pilgrims followed, chaunting praises to God, who had so far conducted them in safety; and continued their hymns until the Sultan was pleased to dismiss their leader, with a gracious promise of sending his royal present of dates and meat to every tent. This ceremony of audience being over, the Sultan remounted his horse and rode back to the city of Mourzouk, preceded by kettle-drums and banners, and amidst his lance-men and halberdiers; whilst his courtiers, joined by the Arabs of our caravan, pranced and curvetted their horses on each flank of the procession.
Our caravan stopped, and everyone important got off to greet him. Along with others, I walked over and found the sultan sitting in an old-fashioned armchair, covered with a red and green striped cloth, at one end of an[61] oval area. Around him stood soldiers who didn’t look very impressive. The sultan himself wore a Tripolitan vest and over it, a shirt or frock embroidered with silver in the Sudanese style. On either side of him were white Mamelukes and Black slaves holding drawn sabers; behind them were six banners and more Black and half-naked slaves holding lances and halberds, which looked as ancient as the times of Saladin. We entered the circle through an opening facing the sultan, at the center of the area. Following the court's traditions, we took off our slippers and approached him barefoot to kiss his royal hand. After each of us showed our respect, we alternated to the right or left and sat behind the sultan, with the merchants lined up in two equal groups on either side of the throne. Finally, the Sheik of the pilgrims entered, sword drawn, with a kettle drum and the green flag of Mecca carried in front of him. The pilgrims followed, chanting praises to God for keeping them safe so far, and continued their hymns until the Sultan graciously dismissed their leader, promising to send a royal gift of dates and meat to every tent. Once the audience was over, the Sultan got back on his horse and rode back to the city of Mourzouk, accompanied by kettle drums and banners, surrounded by his spearmen and halberdiers, while his courtiers, joined by the Arabs of our caravan, pranced around on their horses on each side of the procession.
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[62]CHAPTER III.
Some Account of Fezzan.
A Brief History of Fezzan.
The greatest length of the cultivated part of the kingdom of Fezzan, is about 300 English miles from north to south, and the greatest width 200 miles from east to west; but the mountainous region of Harutsch to the east, and other deserts to the south and west, are reckoned within its territory.
The largest cultivated area of the kingdom of Fezzan is about 300 miles from north to south, and the widest part is 200 miles from east to west; however, the mountainous region of Harutsch to the east, along with other deserts to the south and west, is considered part of its territory.
The borderers on the north are Arabs, nominally dependant on Tripoly, but their obedience is merely nominal, and they take each opportunity of public weakness or commotion to throw off the yoke. Fezzan to the east is bounded by the Harutsch, and line of deserts. To the south and south-east is the country of the Tibboes. To the south-west that of the Nomadic Tuaricks. On the west are Arabs.
The people living on the northern border are Arabs, who are officially reliant on Tripoli, but their loyalty is just for show, and they seize any chance of public weakness or turmoil to break free. To the east, Fezzan is bordered by the Harutsch and a line of deserts. To the south and southeast is the region of the Tibboes. To the southwest is the territory of the Nomadic Tuaricks. To the west, there are more Arabs.
The kingdom contains a hundred and one towns and villages, of which Mourzouk is the capital. The principal towns next in order to the imperial residence are Sockna, Sibha, Hun, and Wadon to the north; Gatron to the south; Yerma to the west; and Zuila to the east.
The kingdom has a hundred and one towns and villages, with Mourzouk as the capital. The main towns following the imperial residence are Sockna, Sibha, Hun, and Wadon to the north; Gatron to the south; Yerma to the west; and Zuila to the east.
The climate of Fezzan is at no season temperate or agreeable. During the summer the heat is intense; and when the wind blows from the south is scarcely supportable, even by the natives. The[63] winter might be moderate were it not for the prevalence of a bleak and penetrating north wind during that season of the year, and which chilled and drove to the fire not only the people of the place, but even myself, the native of a northern country.
The climate in Fezzan is never pleasant or mild at any time of year. In the summer, the heat is extreme, and when the wind comes from the south, it’s almost unbearable, even for the locals. The[63] winter could be mild if it weren't for the harsh and biting north wind that dominates that time of year, which not only makes the locals seek warmth by the fire but also affects me, someone from a northern country.
It rains at Fezzan seldom, and then but little in quantity. From November 1798 to June 1799, there was not a single thunder storm; the 31st of January, 1799, there were some faint lightnings without thunder. Tempests of wind are however frequent, both from the north and the south, whirling up the sand and dust, so as to tinge the very atmosphere yellow. There is no river, nor indeed a rivulet deserving note throughout the whole country. The soil is a deep sand covering calcareous rock or earth, and sometimes a stratum of argillaceous substance.
It rarely rains in Fezzan, and when it does, it's usually just a small amount. From November 1798 to June 1799, there wasn't a single thunderstorm; on January 31, 1799, there were a few faint flashes of lightning without any thunder. Strong winds are common, coming from both the north and south, swirling up sand and dust to turn the atmosphere a yellow color. There are no rivers, or even small streams, that are worth mentioning in the entire region. The soil is made up of deep sand covering limestone rock or earth, and sometimes there's a layer of clayey material.
Dates may be termed the natural and staple produce of Fezzan. In the western parts of the kingdom some senna is grown, and of a quality superior to that imported from the country of the Tibboes. Pot-herbs, and generally vegetables of the garden, are plentiful. Wheat and barley are suited to the soil and climate, but from inexpertness or difficulties attending the mode of tillage, and generally from indolence of the people and oppressions of the government, corn is not raised sufficient for the inhabitants, and they rely for subsistence on importations from the Arab countries bordering Fezzan to the north.
Dates are known as the primary and essential crop of Fezzan. In the western parts of the kingdom, some senna is cultivated, and it’s of a better quality than what is imported from the Tibboes region. Pot herbs and generally garden vegetables are abundant. Wheat and barley grow well in the soil and climate, but due to inexperience, challenges in farming methods, and generally the laziness of the people along with government oppression, there isn’t enough corn produced for the local population, so they depend on imports from the Arab countries to the north of Fezzan for their food.
Very little attention is bestowed on the rearing of beasts. Horned cattle are to be found only in the most fertile districts; and are even there but few in number; they are employed in drawing water from the wells, and are slaughtered only in cases of extreme necessity. The ordinary domestic animal is the goat. Sheep are bred in the[64] southern parts of the kingdom; but the general supply is furnished by the bordering Arabs. The wool is manufactured into abbes, or coarse woollen cloths, the general clothing throughout the country; with the meat the very skins are roasted, whilst fresh, and eaten. The horses are but few: asses are the beasts of general use, whether for burthen, draught, or carriage. Camels are excessively dear, and only kept by the chief people, or richer merchants. All these animals are fed with dates or date kernels.
Very little attention is given to raising livestock. Horned cattle are found only in the most fertile areas and are still quite rare; they're used to draw water from wells and are slaughtered only in extreme situations. The most common domestic animal is the goat. Sheep are raised in the[64] southern regions of the kingdom, but most come from the neighboring Arabs. The wool is made into abbes, or coarse woolen fabrics, which are the main clothing throughout the country; the meat is cooked, and the skins are also roasted and eaten while fresh. There aren't many horses; donkeys are the animals most commonly used for heavy loads, work, or transportation. Camels are very expensive and are only owned by prominent individuals or wealthy merchants. All these animals are fed with dates or date pits.
The commerce of Fezzan is considerable, but consists merely of foreign merchandize. From October to February, Mourzouk is the great market and place of resort for various caravans from Cairo, Bengasi, Tripoly, Gadames, Twat, and Soudan, and for other smaller troops of traders, such as Tibboes of Rschade, Tuaricks, and Arabs. The trade from Cairo is carried on by the merchants of Augila; that from Tripoly, chiefly by the inhabitants of Sockna, and but by few either of Fezzan or Tripoly. The commerce with Soudan, is conducted by way of the Tuarick Kolluvi, by the native Agades; the trade with Bornou is managed by the Tibboes of Bilma. The caravans coming to Mourzouk from the south or west, bring, as articles of commerce, slaves of both sexes, ostrich feathers, zibette, tiger skins, and gold, partly in dust, partly in native grains, to be manufactured into rings and other ornaments, for the people of interior Africa. From Bornou copper is imported in great quantity. Cairo sends silks, melayes (striped blue and white calicoes), woollen cloths, glass, imitations of coral, beads for bracelets, and likewise an assortment of East India goods. The merchants of Bengasi, who, usually join the caravan from Cairo at Augila, import tobacco manufactured for chewing, or snuff, and sundry wares fabricated in Turkey.
The trade in Fezzan is significant but mostly involves foreign goods. From October to February, Mourzouk becomes the main marketplace for various caravans from Cairo, Bengasi, Tripoly, Gadames, Twat, and Soudan, along with smaller groups of traders like the Tibboes from Rschade, Tuaricks, and Arabs. The trade from Cairo is primarily handled by merchants from Augila, while trade from Tripoly mainly involves locals from Sockna, with few traders from either Fezzan or Tripoly participating. The commerce with Soudan is carried out through the Tuarick Kolluvi by natives of Agades, and the trade with Bornou is managed by the Tibboes of Bilma. Caravans arriving in Mourzouk from the south or west bring goods like slaves of both sexes, ostrich feathers, zibette, tiger skins, and gold—some in dust form, others as native grains, which are made into rings and other jewelry for the people of interior Africa. A large quantity of copper is imported from Bornou. Cairo supplies silks, melayes (striped blue and white calicoes), woolen fabrics, glass, fake coral, bracelet beads, and a variety of goods from East India. Merchants from Bengasi, who typically connect with the caravan from Cairo at Augila, import chewing and snuff tobacco, along with various products made in Turkey.
[65]The caravan from Tripoly, chiefly deals in paper, false corals, fire-arms, sabres, knives, and the cloths called abbes, and in red worsted caps. Those trading from Gadames, bring nearly the same articles. The smaller caravans of Tuaricks and Arabs, import butter, oil, fat, and corn; and those coming from the more southern districts, bring senna, ostrich feathers, and camels for the slaughterhouse.
[65]The caravan from Tripoli mainly trades in paper, fake corals, weapons, sabers, knives, fabrics called abbes, and red woolen caps. The traders from Gadames offer almost the same goods. The smaller caravans of Tuaricks and Arabs bring in butter, oil, fat, and grain; while those coming from the more southern regions deliver senna, ostrich feathers, and camels for slaughter.
Fezzan is governed by a sultan, descendant from the family of the Shereefs. The tradition is, that the ancestors of the reigning prince, coming from western Africa, invaded and conquered Fezzan about 500 years past. The sultan reigns over his dominions with unlimited power, but he holds them tributary to the Bashaw of Tripoly: the amount of tribute was formerly 6000 dollars, it is now reduced to 4000; and an officer of the bashaw comes annually to Mourzouk, to receive this sum, or its value in gold, senna, or slaves. This officer, whilst in commission, is called Bey-el-nobe. On his departure from Tripoly, which is every year in November, he takes all travelling merchants under his protection; and returning from Tripoly to Mourzouk, I shall avail myself of the opportunity.
Fezzan is ruled by a sultan, who is a descendant of the Shereefs. The story goes that the ancestors of the current prince came from western Africa and invaded Fezzan about 500 years ago. The sultan exercises absolute authority over his territories, but he owes tribute to the Bashaw of Tripoly. The tribute used to be 6,000 dollars, but it's now been cut down to 4,000. An officer from the Bashaw visits Mourzouk every year to collect this amount or its equivalent in gold, senna, or slaves. This officer is known as Bey-el-nobe while on duty. When he leaves Tripoly every November, he provides protection for all traveling merchants, and I plan to take advantage of this opportunity on his return from Tripoly to Mourzouk.
The present sultan assumes the title “Sultan Muhammed-ben Sultan Mansur;” and this title is engraved on a large seal, which he applies to acts of authority or correspondence within his realm, but when writing to the bashaw of Tripoly, he uses a smaller seal, on which, instead of the name Sultan, that of Sheik only, is engraved.
The current sultan holds the title “Sultan Muhammed-ben Sultan Mansur,” which is stamped on a large seal that he uses for official documents and communications within his territory. However, when he writes to the bashaw of Tripoli, he uses a smaller seal that only has the title Sheik engraved instead of Sultan.
The throne of Fezzan is hereditary: the crown, however, descends not in all cases, directly from father to son: it is the eldest prince of the royal family, who succeeds; and such may be a[66] nephew, in preference to a son who is younger. This custom frequently occasions bloodshed: the son of the deceased sultan may be of sufficient age to govern, though younger than the collateral heir; and having interest and adherents formed by his past high connections and situation, will often be ready to controvert the law of succession, as inapplicable in principle to the case of himself and competitor, equally arrived at the age of manhood and discretion: the question of right is then decided by the sword.
The throne of Fezzan is passed down through inheritance, but the crown doesn’t always go directly from father to son. Instead, the eldest prince in the royal family takes over; this can be a nephew rather than a younger son. This tradition often leads to violence: the son of the deceased sultan might be old enough to rule, even if he’s younger than his cousin, who is next in line. With connections and supporters from his previous position, he might challenge the succession law, arguing that it doesn’t apply to his case and that both he and his rival are equally mature and capable. In these situations, the question of who has the right to the throne is often settled through conflict.
The Sultan’s palace (or house) is situate within the circumvallation of the castle or fortress of Mourzouk: he lives there retired, and with no other inmate but the eunuchs, who wait upon him. His Harem is contiguous; he never enters it, but the female whom he at any time wishes to see, is conducted to his apartment. The Harem consists of a Sultana, who, by rules of the empire, must be of the family of the Shereefs of Wadan or Zuila, and of about forty slaves. These last are often sold and replaced by others, if they do not bear children to the sultan, or do not otherwise endear themselves to him by superior charms and accomplishments.
The Sultan's palace is located within the walls of the castle or fortress of Mourzouk. He lives there in seclusion, with only the eunuchs who serve him. His Harem is nearby; he never goes in, but whenever he wants to see a woman, she is brought to his quarters. The Harem includes a Sultana who, according to the empire's rules, must be from the family of the Shereefs of Wadan or Zuila, along with about forty slaves. These slaves are often sold and replaced if they don’t have children for the sultan or don’t win his affection with their beauty and talents.
There is a place set apart within the precincts of the castle, for those who attend on public business, from which a long narrow vestibule leads to a door which opens into the principal apartment of the sultan. The opening of that door is announced by the beating of kettle-drums, as a signal of audience. The door of audience is opened three times in each day. Those who on account of respect or business, attend for introduction, are conducted by the long narrow passage between slaves, who incessantly repeat, “May God prolong the life of the sultan!” On coming to the door, the sultan appears opposite, seated on an old fashioned elbow chair raised some steps, and forming his throne. The person introduced, approaches,[67] kisses the hand of the sultan, raises it so as to touch his forehead, then quits it, and kneels before him. He is permitted to state his case, and address the sultan in ordinary and plain language, but particular attention must be given, that the expressions, “God prolong thy life;” “God protect thy country, &c.” be frequently intermingled; and at each presentation, it is customary to offer a small present. It is only on Fridays, or on some solemn festival, that the sultan appears without the castle walls, and then he is attended by his whole court. He goes on Fridays to the great mosque, on horseback: on other days of solemnity or public occasion, he rides on a plain without the town, where his courtiers prance and run their horses round him, and exhibit their skill in equestrian exercises, and in the art of shooting.
There is a separate area within the castle for those who come for official matters, which leads through a long, narrow hallway to a door that opens into the main room of the sultan. The opening of that door is signaled by the sound of kettle drums, indicating that it's time for an audience. This audience door is opened three times a day. Those who come to be introduced out of respect or business are guided through the narrow passage by attendants who continually chant, “May God prolong the life of the sultan!” As they reach the door, the sultan is seen seated in an old-fashioned armchair elevated a few steps, which serves as his throne. The person being introduced approaches, kisses the sultan's hand, raises it to touch his forehead, releases it, and then kneels before him. They are allowed to present their case and speak to the sultan in straightforward language, but they must remember to frequently include phrases like “God prolong your life” and “God protect your country.” It is customary to present a small gift at each introduction. The sultan only appears outside the castle walls on Fridays or during special festivals, accompanied by his entire court. On Fridays, he rides horseback to the grand mosque; on other significant days, he rides outside the town where his courtiers showcase their horses and demonstrate their riding and archery skills.
The sultan’s court or official attendants are, the kaledyma, or first minister; the keijumma, or second minister, and the general of his forces; a number of black slaves, and a few white slaves, who are by the Mahometans termed Mamelukes. The kaledyma and keijumma must both be free-born men; whatever their nominal rank, they at present have but little influence. All the interest and power rests with the Mamelukes, who are mostly Europeans, Greeks, Genoese, or their immediate descendants. The black slaves, are purchased whilst yet boys, and are educated for the court according to their dispositions and talents; some of these too have gained great ascendancy with the sultan.
The sultan’s court or official attendants include the kaledyma, or first minister; the keijumma, or second minister; and the general of his forces; alongside several black slaves and a few white slaves, who are referred to as Mamelukes by the Muslims. Both the kaledyma and keijumma must be free-born men; however, despite their titles, they currently wield very little influence. Most of the interest and power lies with the Mamelukes, who are mostly Europeans, Greeks, Genoese, or their direct descendants. The black slaves are bought while they are still boys and are educated for the court based on their abilities and talents; some of them have also gained significant influence with the sultan.
The apparel of the sultan, on days of state and ceremony, consists of a large white frock or shirt, made in the Soudan manner, of stuff, and brocaded with silver and gold, or of satin interwoven with silver. Under this frock, he wears the ordinary dress of the Tripolitans; but the most remarkable appearance is that of his turban,[68] which, from the fore to the hinder part, extends a full yard, and is not less than two thirds of a yard in breadth.
The sultan's outfit for state occasions and ceremonies features a large white robe or shirt, designed in the Soudan style, made of fabric and embellished with silver and gold or satin mixed with silver. Under this robe, he wears the typical clothing of the Tripolitans; however, the most striking element is his turban,[68] which measures a full yard from front to back and is at least two-thirds of a yard wide.
The revenues of the sultan are produced from certain assessments of tax on all gardens and cultivated lands, and from arbitrary fines and requisitions. The slaves employed in collecting these imposts, are most exorbitant and oppressive, if not bribed. The sultan derives further income from duties on foreign trade, paid by the several caravans. That from Cairo pays from six to eight dollars for each camel load. The caravans from Bornou and Soudan pay two matkals, for each slave on sale. He further possesses a territorial revenue, collected from domains of the crown; from salt-pools; from the natron lakes; and from the royal gardens and woods. The present sultan has made great addition to his treasures by predatory expeditions, which he occasionally directs against the Tibboes of the tribe of Burgu.
The sultan's income comes from various taxes on gardens and farmland, as well as arbitrary fines and demands. The people collecting these taxes are often extremely greedy and harsh, unless they are bribed. The sultan also earns money from trade duties paid by different caravans. For example, the caravan from Cairo pays between six to eight dollars for each camel load. The caravans from Bornou and Soudan pay two matkals for each slave they sell. Additionally, he has revenue from his royal estates, salt pits, natron lakes, and from the crown's gardens and forests. The current sultan has significantly increased his wealth through raids he occasionally leads against the Tibboes of the Burgu tribe.
The public expenditure consists chiefly in maintenance of the sultan, his court, and palace. The cadi and department of justice, those of the religious order, and the great officers of government, are severally supported from the produce of date-tree woods and gardens, granted as usufruct to those holding the respective offices. The princes of the royal family are supported from the proceeds of appropriate territory, and by certain proportions of corn delivered weekly from the sultan’s stores, and from occasional exactions on the people, levied by their personal authority, and by means of their slaves. Such oppression is a natural result of the powers of collection, and means of enforcement, and adjudication of right, being vested in each occasional lord of the domain.
The public spending mainly goes towards supporting the sultan, his court, and his palace. The cadi, the justice system, the religious leaders, and the senior officials in government are each funded by the profits from date-palm groves and gardens, which are granted as usufruct to those in their respective positions. The princes of the royal family are provided for through the revenue from designated lands, along with a regular supply of grain delivered weekly from the sultan’s stores, and through occasional levies on the people that they impose personally, often with the help of their slaves. This kind of oppression naturally occurs because the power to collect taxes and enforce laws, as well as to settle disputes, is held by each temporary lord of the land.
Justice is administered by an officer, termed the cadi: his decisions[69] are directed by the Mahometan law, old customs, and established practice; with exception to criminal cases, in which judgment is arbitrary, or referred to the sultan. In the absence of the cadi, his secretary or scribe, performs the office.
Justice is carried out by an official known as the cadi; his decisions[69] are guided by Islamic law, traditional customs, and established practices, except in criminal cases, where judgment is discretionary or passed up to the sultan. If the cadi is not available, his secretary or scribe takes over his duties.
The dignity of a cadi, or chief judge, is hereditary in a certain family, ever since the present race of sultans was established on the throne. The sultan, in each instance of demise or vacancy, selects from this family, such individual to fill the office of cadi, as is noted for learning; or in other words, who can best read and write.
The dignity of a cadi, or chief judge, is inherited by a specific family, since the current line of sultans took the throne. Whenever there is a death or vacancy, the sultan chooses someone from this family to take on the role of cadi, preferably someone known for their knowledge; in other words, who can read and write the best.
Besides the cadi, all the princes of the sultan’s family, claim a right of jurisdiction, and even of imposing corporal punishments.
Besides the cadi, all the princes in the sultan's family claim the right to administer justice and even to impose physical punishments.
The cadi is, at the same time, chief of the clergy, and possesses great influence and authority with the people; the next to him in rank, is the iman kbir, or great Iman.
The cadi is both the head of the clergy and has significant influence and authority over the people; next in rank is the iman kbir, or great Iman.
The population of Fezzan is not easily determined. On loose estimate, I should state the inhabitants throughout, at about 70, or 75,000 souls. All of them, without exception, profess the Mahometan religion. The colour or complexion of the people varies; those of the northern parts of the country, for the most part, have a complexion and features, similar to those of the Arabs. In the southern districts, they have mixed with the natives of the great nations bordering on that quarter, and bear a resemblance to the Tibboes and to the Tuaricks. The genuine or indigenous race of Fezzans, may be described as a people of but ordinary stature, and their limbs by no means muscular or strong, their colour a deep brown, their hair black and short, their form of face such as, in[70] Europe, we should term regular, and their nose less flattened than that of the negro.
The population of Fezzan is hard to pin down. Roughly speaking, I would estimate the number of people living there to be about 70,000 to 75,000. All of them, without exception, follow the Muslim faith. The skin tones of the people vary; those in the northern parts of the region mostly have complexions and features similar to those of Arabs. In the southern areas, they’ve mixed with the native populations of the larger neighboring nations and look like the Tibboes and Tuaricks. The original or indigenous people of Fezzan can be described as having an average height, with limbs that are not particularly muscular or strong, a deep brown skin tone, black short hair, and facial features that, in[70] Europe, we would consider regular, with noses that are less flat than those of Black Africans.
The mein, the walk, and every motion and gesture of the people of Fezzan, denote a want of energy, either of mind or body. The tyrannic government, the general poverty of the country, and their only food consisting of dates, or a kind of farinaceous pap, with no meat, and rarely with even a little rancid oil or fat, contribute at once to weakness of frame, and dejection of spirit. Even in those parts, where the race may be supposed to be ameliorated by a mixture with the Arabs, there is no energy of character, no industry. Arts and manufactures, will of course supply but a poor and scanty chapter, exhibiting few articles, and no ingenuity: throughout Mourzouk, I could not find one single skilful artificer in any trade or work; indeed, there are no other tradesmen, but shoemakers and smiths. The latter work every metal without distinction; and the same man who forges shoes for the sultan’s horse, makes rings for his princesses. The women, indeed, fabricate coarse woollen cloths, called abbes; but for the goodness or value of their manufacture the reader may form his own estimate, when told, that the weaver’s shuttle is unknown, and that the woof is inserted into the warp thread by thread, and the whole worked solely by hand.
The demeanor, the way they walk, and every movement and gesture of the people of Fezzan show a lack of energy, either mentally or physically. The oppressive government, the widespread poverty in the region, and their limited diet of dates or a type of grain-based mush, with little to no meat and hardly ever any rancid oil or fat, all contribute to their physical weakness and low spirits. Even in areas where the population might be thought to be improved by mixing with the Arabs, there’s still a lack of energy, and no drive. The arts and crafts are obviously minimal, with only a few items made and little creativity: throughout Mourzouk, I couldn’t find a single skilled craftsman in any trade or craft; in fact, there are only shoemakers and blacksmiths. The blacksmiths work with all kinds of metal; the same person who makes shoes for the sultan’s horse also makes rings for his princesses. The women do make rough woolen fabrics called abbes; however, for the quality or value of their products, one can form their own opinion knowing that the weaver's shuttle is not used, and that the weft is added to the warp thread by thread, with the entire process done by hand.
The dress of the people of Fezzan consists of a shirt or frock, made of a coarse linen or cotton cloth, brought from Cairo, and the abbe so often mentioned. The middling classes wear frocks made at Soudan, of dyed blue cloth. The richer people and the Mamelukes of the sultan are clothed in the Tripolitan habit, over which they wear a Soudan shirt of variegated pattern and colours, and likewise the abbe. The ornamental distinctions of dress are chiefly confined to the head-dress, and to rings on the arms and legs. The[71] lady of a chief or wealthy man of Fezzan divides her hair into seven long curls or tresses; one of these is interbraided with long slips of gilt leather, terminating in a bow; the other six tresses are bound round by a gilt leather strop, and at the end of each is a trinket, which a sketch will best describe.
The clothing of the people of Fezzan includes a shirt or dress made from a rough linen or cotton fabric sourced from Cairo, along with the often-mentioned abbe. The middle class wears dresses made in Sudan from dyed blue fabric. Wealthier individuals and the Sultan's Mamelukes wear the Tripolitan style, topped with a Sudanese shirt featuring a mix of patterns and colors, and also the abbe. The main decorative features of their attire are focused on headgear and rings worn on the arms and legs. The[71] wife of a chief or a wealthy man in Fezzan styles her hair into seven long curls or braids; one of these is interwoven with long strips of gold-colored leather, ending in a bow. The other six braids are wrapped with gold-colored leather bands, and each one has a decorative charm at the end, which would be better described with a sketch.
No. | 1. | A long stick of coral. |
2, 2. | Small pieces of amber. | |
3, 3, 3. | Little silver bells. | |
4, 4. | Silver or brass wire. |
![[Illustration]](images/i1.jpg)
In addition to these ornaments, the Fezzan woman fastens to the top of her head silken cords, on which are strung a number of silver rings, and which hang on each side pendant to her shoulder. The ears of ladies of rank are bored in two places, and in each hole is fixed a thick silver ring. In ordinary dress they wear nine or ten rings of horn or glass on each arm, four or five of which are taken off on all great occasions, to make room for a silver armillary of four inches breadth. They wear at the same time strong rings of brass or silver just above the ankle bones. The necklace consists of a silk riband, to which are fixed ten or twelve pieces of agate, and in front a round silver plate. The meaner women wear merely a string of glass beads, and curl their hair above the forehead into large ringlets, into which severally is stuffed a paste made of lavender, carraway-seeds, cloves, pepper, mastick, and laurel leaves, mixed up with oil.
In addition to these ornaments, the Fezzan woman ties silken cords to the top of her head, strung with several silver rings that hang down on each side to her shoulders. Women of high status have their ears pierced in two places, with a thick silver ring in each hole. In casual dress, they wear nine or ten rings made of horn or glass on each arm, but they take off four or five of these on special occasions to make room for a silver arm band that is four inches wide. They also wear solid rings made of brass or silver just above their ankles. The necklace is made of a silk ribbon, which holds ten or twelve pieces of agate, with a round silver plate in the front. More common women simply wear a string of glass beads and curl their hair above their foreheads into large ringlets, into which they stuff a paste made of lavender, caraway seeds, cloves, pepper, mastic, and laurel leaves mixed with oil.
[72]The women of Fezzan generally have a great fondness for dancing and every amusement, and the wanton manners and public freedoms which, although Mahometans, they are permitted, astonishes the Mahometan traveller. They dance publicly in the open places of the town, not only in the day-time, but even after sunset. Two or three men stand together with their tambourines; the women immediately form a circle round; the men beat a tune, and those in the circle accompany it with singing and clapping of hands; a girl then advances dancing towards the drummers; the men, as she approaches near, join in the dance and press towards her; on which she makes some steps backwards, and then falls on her back with her body and limbs stiff and perfectly straight, when the women behind catch her in the fall, a few spans from the ground, and toss her in the air, whence she descends on her feet. The men then resume their station in the centre, and a second female dancer repeats the sport, which is successively engaged in by each brisk damsel of the circle.
[72]The women of Fezzan really love dancing and all sorts of entertainment. Their carefree behavior and public freedoms, which they enjoy even as Muslims, surprise Muslim travelers. They dance openly in town squares not only during the day but also after sunset. A few men gather with their tambourines, and the women quickly form a circle around them. As the men play a tune, those in the circle join in with singing and clapping hands. A girl then steps forward, dancing toward the drummers. As she gets closer, the men join in the dance and move toward her, at which point she takes a few steps back and then falls onto her back with her body and limbs stiff and straight. The women behind her catch her just before she hits the ground and toss her into the air, allowing her to land on her feet. The men return to their spot in the center, and another female dancer performs the same act, continuing with each lively young woman in the circle.
The men of Fezzan are much addicted to drunkenness. Their beverage is the fresh juice of the date tree, called lugibi, or a drink called busa, which is prepared from the dates, and is very intoxicating. When friends assemble in the evening, the ordinary amusement is mere drinking; but sometimes a singing girl, or kadanka, is sent for: kadanka is a Soudan word, and answers to the term almé used at Cairo.
The men of Fezzan are very into drinking. Their drink is the fresh juice from the date tree, called lugibi, or a beverage called busa, which is made from dates and is quite intoxicating. When friends get together in the evening, the usual entertainment is just drinking; but sometimes they call for a singer, or kadanka: kadanka is a Sudanese term, similar to the word almé used in Cairo.
The song of these Fezzan girls is Soudanic. Their musical instrument is called rhababe: it is an excavated hemisphere, made from a shell of the gourd kind, and covered with leather; to this a long handle is fixed, on which is stretched a string of horse hairs longitudinally closed and compact as one cord, about the thickness[73] of a quill. This is played upon with a bow. I was once of a party with Sidi Mintesser, the brother of the sultan, at a small house, some distance from the palace, when he ordered a Kadanka to be brought, and with whom he soon after withdrew. On her return to the company, she was asked with a significant smile where she had been. She immediately took up her instrument, played upon it, and sung, in the Arabian language, “Sweet is Sidi Mintesser, as the waters of the Nile, but yet sweeter is he in his embraces; how could I resist?” As a natural consequence of the great freedoms allowed to the sex in Mourzouk, there are more women of a certain description to be found in that capital, than in any other of the same extent and population; and the general character of improvidence, and consequent misery and distress, belong as fully to the frail sisterhood of this place, as of any other.
The song of these Fezzan girls is Soudanic. Their musical instrument is called rhababe: it’s a hollow hemisphere made from a gourd shell, covered with leather; a long handle is attached, and a string made of horse hairs is stretched tightly along it, about the thickness[73] of a quill. It’s played with a bow. I once attended a gathering with Sidi Mintesser, the sultan's brother, at a small house not far from the palace, when he ordered a Kadanka to be brought in and then stepped away with her. When she returned to the group, someone asked with a knowing smile where she had been. She immediately picked up her instrument, played it, and sang in Arabic, “Sweet is Sidi Mintesser, like the waters of the Nile, but even sweeter is he in his embraces; how could I resist?” Because of the significant freedoms allowed to women in Mourzouk, there are more women of a certain kind found in that city than in any other of similar size and population; and the general tendency toward irresponsibility, along with the resulting misery and hardship, affects the women in this place just as it does in any other.
There are various sorts of venereal disorders prevalent in Fezzan; that imported from Soudan is the worst. The common lues venerea brought from Tripoly and Cairo, is called franzi, or the frank evil. For the cure of either species they use salts, and the fruit handal, (colycinth), as powerful cathartics; and the sores, if any, are at the same time washed with natron water, or dissolved soda. These remedies seldom fail, unless the disease has taken a very deep root.
There are different types of sexually transmitted infections common in Fezzan; the one brought in from Sudan is the worst. The common syphilis brought from Tripoli and Cairo is referred to as franzi, or the frank evil. To treat either type, they use salts and the fruit handal (colocynth) as strong laxatives; any sores, if present, are also washed with natron water or dissolved soda. These remedies usually work, unless the infection has become very severe.
The other maladies prevalent here are hæmorrhoides, no doubt greatly increased by the immoderate use of red pepper; and a fever and ague, which is particularly dangerous to foreigners. In these disorders there is no remedy whatever known or used but amulets, consisting of certain sentences, transcribed from the Koran, on a slip of paper, which the patient wears about his neck, and in bad cases is made to swallow. Phlebotomy is unknown; but blood is occasionally drawn by means of cupping. As to surgery, I heard[74] there were people at Mourzouk who had sufficient ability to cure a simple fracture.
The other common problems here are hemorrhoids, which are likely made worse by the excessive use of red pepper, and a fever and chills that can be particularly dangerous for foreigners. For these issues, there are no known remedies other than amulets, which are made up of certain phrases copied from the Quran on a piece of paper that the patient wears around their neck and, in severe cases, swallows. Bloodletting is unknown, but blood is sometimes drawn using cupping. As for surgery, I heard[74] that there are people in Mourzouk who are skilled enough to treat a simple fracture.
The houses of the Fezzans are miserably built; they are constructed with stones or bricks made of a calcareous earth mixed with clay, and dried in the sun. No other tools are used in the building but the hands of the labourer. When the walls are completely raised, the friends of the proprietor assemble, and assist him to incrust and cover them with a mortar made with a white calcareous earth. This work too is done only by the hand. The houses are all extremely low, and the light enters by the door only.
The homes of the Fezzans are poorly built; they're made from stones or bricks made of a chalky earth mixed with clay and dried in the sun. The only tools used to build are the workers' hands. Once the walls are fully constructed, the proprietor's friends gather to help cover them with a mortar made from white chalky earth. This task is also done solely by hand. The houses are all very low, and light only comes in through the door.
As to diet, I never knew a more abstemious people than those of Fezzan. Meat indeed is a food they can at no time abstain from when set before them; but meat is not an article of food with the people in general: to indicate a rich man, at Mourzouk, the usual expression is, “that he eats bread and meat every day.”
As for diet, I've never known a more self-restrained people than those of Fezzan. They can't refuse meat when it's offered to them, but meat isn't a common part of the average person's diet. In Mourzouk, the typical way to describe a wealthy person is, “that he eats bread and meat every day.”
POSTSCRIPT.
P.S.
The particulars above communicated may give some general idea of Mourzouk, and of the people and kingdom of Fezzan. Proposing shortly to return into that country, I may have an opportunity of gaining more satisfactory intelligence, and of enlarging on some points, and of rectifying any mistake in others; I will then draw up for the Society a more full and amended account, having in view the means of conveyance through one of my country-friends, who is going with the caravan to Mourzouk, and proposes returning to Tripoly in May or June 1800, when he will consign my papers to the care of the British Consul.
The details shared above might give a general idea of Mourzouk and the people and kingdom of Fezzan. Since I plan to return to that area soon, I might have the chance to gather more accurate information, elaborate on some aspects, and correct any errors in others. I will then prepare a more comprehensive and revised report for the Society, using the means of transport arranged through a friend from my country who is traveling with the caravan to Mourzouk and plans to return to Tripoly in May or June 1800, at which point he will hand over my documents to the British Consul.
(Signed) | FREDERICK HORNEMAN. |
[75]APPENDIXX. No. I.
Observations on F. Horneman’s Description of the Country and Antiquities of Siwah, with Reference to ancient Accounts of the Oasis, and Temple of Ammon. By Sir William Young, Bart. Secretary.
Observations on F. Horneman’s Description of the Country and Antiquities of Siwah, with Reference to ancient Accounts of the Oasis, and Temple of Ammon. By Sir William Young, Bart. Secretary.
The papers alluded to in Mr. Horneman’s Postscript have never been received; and nearly two years having elapsed since the date from which our expectation was referred, the above more summary account of his Travels (as probably the only one extant) is offered for perusal. Opportunities of correspondence from the interior of Africa can rarely occur, but by the caravans passing at certain, but distant, periods of time; and even by such conveyance, any communication from an European and Christian traveller, must be conducted with so particular a caution in avoidance of offence to the bigotry and prejudices of the people, that Mr. Horneman’s intentions of again writing may not only have been delayed, but wholly precluded, by the circumstances of his situation. The necessity of sustaining the character of a Mussulman unconnected with those termed “the Infidels of Christendom,” is strongly impressed in his letters from Cairo, Aug. 31, 1798, wherein he earnestly deprecates even inquiry concerning him, as liable to awaken jealousies and suspicions in the natives who may be so questioned; and any farther communications at present, from himself, may be matter of similar apprehension.
The papers mentioned in Mr. Horneman’s Postscript have never been received; and nearly two years have passed since the date we were referring to, so the above summary of his Travels (likely the only one that exists) is presented for your reading. Opportunities for communication from the interior of Africa are rare and depend on caravans that pass at certain, but infrequent, times; and even through such means, a message from a European and Christian traveler must be handled with extreme care to avoid offending the biases and prejudices of the local people. This may have not only delayed Mr. Horneman's intention to write again but also completely prevented it due to his circumstances. The need to maintain the image of a Muslim detached from those called “the Infidels of Christendom” is clearly emphasized in his letters from Cairo, dated Aug. 31, 1798, where he passionately warns against any inquiries about him, as this could provoke jealousy and suspicion among the locals who might be questioned; and any further communications from him at this time may raise similar concerns.
Under these considerations, it is become a duty to his public-spirited employers, that such curious intelligence as their traveller has already given, should no longer be withheld, even in its present state, and for which they will make a just and candid allowance.
Under these circumstances, it is now a responsibility to his public-spirited employers that the interesting information their traveler has already provided should no longer be kept from them, even in its current form, and for which they will be understanding and fair.
[76]It is however presumed, that the Reader will not have found in perusal of this Journal, that there is much which may require his favour or excuse: yet some details appear to need explanation, and which (if a reference to the traveller himself were possible) might be given in a manner the most clear and satisfactory.
[76]However, it's assumed that the reader hasn't found much in this journal that requires their favor or forgiveness. Still, there are some details that seem to need clarification, and that could be explained in the clearest and most satisfying way if we could reference the traveler directly.
In default of such advantage, the Editor offers an annotation or comment on two subjects of peculiar interest, treated of in this Journal, and in a manner apparently incorrect, or contradictory to accounts given by other writers.
In the absence of such a benefit, the Editor provides a note or commentary on two topics of particular interest discussed in this Journal, and in a way that seems inaccurate or contradicts what other authors have reported.
Page 15; the extent of the Oasis of Siwah, (as represented by Mr. Horneman) differs widely from that stated by every other writer ancient or modern.
Page 15; the size of the Oasis of Siwah, (as described by Mr. Horneman) is very different from what every other writer, both ancient and modern, has reported.
Page 23; the admeasurements of the sacred Egyptian building appear to vary in every proportion from those given by a late traveller of allowed accuracy, Mr. Brown.
Page 23; the measurements of the sacred Egyptian building seem to differ in every way from those provided by a recent traveler of recognized accuracy, Mr. Brown.
In the first instance, it is the purpose of the Annotator to ascertain the error, and to shew whence it has arisen.
In the first instance, it is the purpose of the Annotator to identify the error and show where it originated.
In the second case, he will have to place the subject in a point of view, by which an apparent variation in the two accounts may not only be reconciled, but even matter of new and just inference, as to the ancient construction and purpose of the building in question, be shewn to arise, from the very elucidation which corrects and compares these differences.
In the second case, he will need to position the subject in such a way that any apparent differences in the two accounts can not only be reconciled but also lead to new and valid conclusions about the original design and purpose of the building in question. This understanding will come from the very clarification that corrects and compares these discrepancies.
Page 15; Mr. Horneman states “the principal and fertile territory of Siwah to be fifty miles in circuit:” in this he disagrees with every[77] account given by the writers cited by Mr. Rennell, and with that latterly given by Mr. Brown, who, in conformity with the descriptions by other authors, states the extent of the Oasis, or fertile spot, to be six miles in length, and four miles and a half in breadth; not exceeding eighteen miles in circumference at the utmost. It will further appear that, in this respect, Horneman is not only at variance with the writings of others, but with his own, and that his own journal furnishes the strongest internal evidence in refutation of the fact he asserts.
Page 15; Mr. Horneman states “the main and fertile area of Siwah is fifty miles around:” here he disagrees with every[77] account given by the authors cited by Mr. Rennell, as well as with the more recent account by Mr. Brown, who, in line with the descriptions from other writers, claims the size of the Oasis or fertile area is six miles long and four and a half miles wide; not exceeding eighteen miles in total circumference at the most. Additionally, it will become clear that in this regard, Horneman not only conflicts with the writings of others but also with his own, and that his own journal provides strong evidence that contradicts the claim he makes.
Horneman names all the towns within the territory of Siwah,—Scharkie, Msellem, Menschie, Sbocka, and Barischa, and he places all these villages, or towns, within one or two miles of Siwah the capital, which proximity could not be the case, if the rich and fertile land extended each way sixteen miles in traverse, as a circle of fifty miles implies. On a small and most fertile tract of country, surrounded on all sides by barren and sandy deserts, the rich and productive soil infers a population commensurate with, and in proportion to, its extent. Diodorus Siculus tells us, that the ancient Ammonians dwelt κωμηδὸν, i. e. vicatìm. (Ed. Wesseling, Tom. II. p. 198.) And so too the people at present (on grounds probably of convenience and defence against the Arabs of the Desert) appear to live chiefly in towns; and hence those towns must have been more distant, as more widely diffused over so great a space of country from its very character and description, to be supposed in every part occupied and appropriate. Society must have gathered and increased till it fully covered a country of such exclusive fertility and means of subsistence. Generally, increase of population is to be measured by the means of subsistence; and in converse of the proposition, whatever of country was productive and habitable situated as the Oasis of Siwah, must be considered as inhabited and[78] turned to account: the general reasoning and estimate of increase of people is further strengthened by the special argument of probable resort, from the barren yet partially inhabited districts which encompassed it.
Horneman lists all the towns in the Siwah area—Scharkie, Msellem, Menschie, Sbocka, and Barischa—and he indicates that these villages or towns are within one or two miles of the capital, Siwah. This wouldn’t make sense if the rich, fertile land extended sixteen miles in every direction, as a circle of fifty miles suggests. In a small, highly fertile area completely surrounded by barren, sandy deserts, the rich and productive soil implies a population that matches its scale. Diodorus Siculus tells us that the ancient Ammonians lived κωμηδὸν, i. e. in villages (Ed. Wesseling, Tom. II. p. 198). Similarly, the current residents (likely for convenience and to defend against the desert Arabs) seem to primarily live in towns. Therefore, these towns must have been more spread out, given the character of the region, suggesting that every part of the land was occupied. Society must have grown and expanded until it fully populated such exclusive fertile land with ample resources. Generally, population growth is determined by available resources, and conversely, any productive and habitable land like the Oasis of Siwah is considered populated and utilized. This reasoning is further supported by the likelihood of people coming from the surrounding barren, yet somewhat inhabited areas. [78]
Horneman’s description of the territory of Siwah tallies with, and confirms, the speculation: he represents the country as consisting of so many gardens walled or fenced on every side, and cultivated with so nice attention and labour, and with such care in irrigation, that the water directed in various cuts and channels from each spring, was in no case suffered to flow beyond the territory; but was made to lose and expend itself in the cultivated grounds of the Siwahans: and he describes the people as a swarm, and their residence as a crowded hive.
Horneman’s description of the Siwah region matches and supports the speculation: he depicts the area as filled with gardens surrounded by walls or fences on all sides, tended to with great care and effort, and meticulously irrigated. The water flowing through various channels from each spring is never allowed to leave the territory; instead, it is intentionally used up in the farmland of the Siwahans. He also describes the people as a bustling group, and their homes as a busy hive.
Let us now advert to his more particular enumeration of these Siwahans, and to the practicability of such number (as under any computation can be supposed labourers in the field) being competent to work the ground of fifty miles in circuit, with the nice agriculture he describes.
Let’s now turn our attention to his specific list of these Siwahans and whether it's realistic to think that such a number (as can be counted among laborers in the field) could effectively cultivate land spanning fifty miles in circumference, using the careful farming methods he describes.
Horneman states 1500 warriors, or men bearing arms, as the data for estimating the population of the country: he must mean to say, men capable of bearing arms, or there are no data, and he means nothing. Calculate a population on the widest latitude from such data, and apply it to a well-cultivated district of 127,360 square acres, and there will not be more than one cultivator to at least 50 cultivated acres: for the women, our journalist has otherwise engaged. They (as he tells us,) are employed in manufacture, and chiefly in that of wicker-work and baskets, which they work with great neatness and ingenuity. These statements carry self-contradiction.[79] These lands cannot be so extensive, or cannot be so cultivated.
Horneman mentions 1500 warriors, or men bearing arms, as the data for estimating the country's population: he must actually mean men capable of bearing arms, otherwise there’s no data, and he says nothing meaningful. If you calculate a population based on such data and apply it to a well-cultivated area of 127,360 square acres, there can’t be more than one farmer for at least 50 cultivated acres: as for the women, our journalist has mentioned that they are busy elsewhere. According to him, they are engaged in manufacturing, mainly making wickerwork and baskets, which they do with great skill and creativity. These statements contradict each other.[79] These lands can't be that large, or they can't be that well-cultivated.
Thus from Mr. Horneman’s own account, we may infer, that the rich spot of country termed the Oasis of Siwah, must be of much less extent indeed, than that which he directly states.
Thus from Mr. Horneman’s own account, we can infer that the rich area known as the Oasis of Siwah is likely much smaller than what he directly claims.
Observing particular expressions in the Journal relative to this subject, the cause of error may possibly appear. The traveller says, “the territory of Siwah is of considerable extent; its principal and most fertile district is a well watered valley of about fifty miles in circuit, hemmed in by steep and barren rocks.”
Observing certain statements in the Journal regarding this topic, the reason for the mistake might become clear. The traveler says, “the area of Siwah is quite large; its main and most productive region is a well-watered valley of around fifty miles in circumference, surrounded by steep and barren rocks.”
Now, referring to other descriptions of the fertile district or Oasis of Siwah, it is to be remarked, that such rich and productive spot of country is no where described, as immediately bounded and hemmed in by steep rocks and mountains. Diodorus, lib. xvii. speaking of the Oasis of Ammon, says, it was surrounded on all sides by barren and arid sands: so too, Mr. Brown mentions the fertile soil or Oasis, of from four miles and an half in breadth, to six in length, as bordered and encompassed by “desert land;” intimating plain. In truth, it is such desert border of plain, which further on is bounded by rocky mountains. Mr. Horneman appears to have made no excursions from the town of Siwah, further than of a mile and a half to the ruins, and of one mile to the catacombs of El-Mota. From all these considerations, it may be surmised, that our traveller looking from Siwah, or its adjacencies, to the hills or rocks surrounding him at a distance, comprized in his estimate of rich country, the whole intermediate plain, not having directed due inquiry or consideration in the ascertaining of, to what extent within the area of that plain, the rich and cultivated soil might reach? Or,[80] perhaps, he did make enquiries; but of some patriotic Siwahan, who thought proper to exaggerate the richness and extent of his petty commonwealth, and confirm his hyperbole, by pointing to the lofty boundary in view: or, perhaps, from not sufficiently understanding the dialect of Siwah, (as the traveller himself allows,) he may have confounded the ideas of country occupied, and of territory claimed.
Now, looking at other descriptions of the fertile district or Oasis of Siwah, it's worth noting that no one describes such a rich and productive area as being directly surrounded by steep rocks and mountains. Diodorus, in book 17, mentions the Oasis of Ammon as being enclosed on all sides by barren and dry sands. Similarly, Mr. Brown describes the fertile land or Oasis, ranging from four and a half miles wide to six miles long, as being bordered and enclosed by “desert land,” suggesting an open plain. In reality, it is this desert border of plain that is further surrounded by rocky mountains. Mr. Horneman seems to have ventured only a mile and a half from the town of Siwah to the ruins and one mile to the catacombs of El-Mota. Considering all this, it can be inferred that our traveler, looking from Siwah or its nearby areas to the hills or rocks in the distance, included in his assessment of the fertile land the entire intervening plain, without thoroughly investigating how far the rich and cultivated soil actually extends within that area. Or, perhaps he did ask around, but only from a patriotic local who chose to exaggerate the wealth and size of his small community, bolstered by pointing to the tall boundary in sight. Alternatively, the traveler might not have fully understood the local dialect (as he himself admits), which could have led him to confuse the notions of occupied land and claimed territory.
Be these surmises and explanations founded or not, our journalist’s representation of the extent of the Oasis of Siwah, is not only at variance with every other account, but with the internal evidence to be extracted from his own account, and must be rejected as erroneous.
Whether these assumptions and explanations are accurate or not, our journalist’s portrayal of the size of the Oasis of Siwah not only contradicts every other account but also conflicts with the internal evidence found in his own description, and must be considered incorrect.
Page 23, of the Journal, to which this note refers, a further subject of inquiry and explanation occurs, where Mr. Horneman, describing the ruins of an ancient edifice in the vicinity of Siwah, gives us dimensions and proportions, in every respect differing from those before stated by Mr. Brown, in description of the same building.
Page 23 of the Journal, which this note refers to, presents another area for investigation and clarification. Mr. Horneman, while describing the ruins of an ancient structure near Siwah, provides dimensions and proportions that are significantly different from those previously mentioned by Mr. Brown regarding the same building.
The length in feet. | The width. | The height. | |
---|---|---|---|
By Mr. Brown, | 32 | 15 | 18 |
By Mr. Horneman, | 30 to 36 | 24 | 27 |
Mr. Horneman informs us, that he was successively interrupted on entrance into the area of these ruins, and was altogether prevented by the jealousy of the natives, from pursuing any plan of accurate examination or admeasurement. The dimensions which he gives us, are therefore to be taken as the result of computation on mere view; and from these and other circumstances, it is further to be presumed, that such computation by view, was made from without; whilst Mr. Brown expressly tells us, that he took his measurements in the clear, or inside of the building.
Mr. Horneman tells us that he was repeatedly interrupted when entering the area of these ruins and was completely blocked by the locals' jealousy from carrying out any detailed examination or measurements. The dimensions he provides should therefore be considered as rough estimates based on what he could see; and from this and other factors, it can also be assumed that these estimates were made from outside; while Mr. Brown clearly states that he took his measurements inside the building.
[81]In this case, a deduction equal to the thickness of the walls, is to be made from the length and the breadth of the building, as described by Mr. Horneman.
[81]In this case, you need to subtract the thickness of the walls from the length and width of the building, as Mr. Horneman explained.
The thickness of the end walls may be supposed to be much less than that of the side walls, which being constructed to support the vast and ponderous blocks of stone which formed the roof, must have been built with a proportionate strength and solidity, not necessary, and probably therefore not used, at the entrance or end of the building. Mr. Horneman, indeed, when stating the thickness of the walls to be six feet, makes no such discrimination; but it may be fairly presumed, that adverting particularly (as he does,) to the massive roof, he meant to note exclusively, the strength of that part of the fabric by which it was supported.
The thickness of the end walls can be assumed to be much less than that of the side walls, which were built to support the heavy stone blocks that made up the roof. These walls had to be constructed with the right strength and sturdiness, which wasn’t necessary—thus probably not utilized—at the entrance or end of the building. Mr. Horneman, in fact, when stating the thickness of the walls to be six feet, doesn’t make this distinction; however, it’s reasonable to assume that he was specifically referring to the strength of the part of the structure that supported the massive roof.
Under such probable conjecture, the length and breadth of the building given by Mr. Brown from the inside, and by Mr. Horneman from the outside, may so far agree, as fully to exculpate our Journalist from any charge of inattention in his survey, or inaccuracy in his representations; making those allowances which his situation and circumstances, and (above all,) his own declarations of want of precision, fully intitle him to.
Under such likely assumptions, the dimensions of the building provided by Mr. Brown from the inside, and by Mr. Horneman from the outside, may agree enough to clear our Journalist of any accusations of negligence in his observations or inaccuracies in his descriptions, taking into account the allowances that his situation and circumstances, and (most importantly) his own statements about lacking precision, fully entitle him to.
The comparative height of the building is a part of the subject, which suggests matter of new and interesting investigation.
The relative height of the building is part of the topic, which indicates a matter for new and interesting exploration.
Page 23, Mr. Horneman informs us, “that the northern part of the building is erected on a native calcareous rock, rising about eight feet above the level of the area, within a circumvallation,” which he particularly and exclusively describes, and which will be a subject of further dissertation. He then mentions, “that two vast stones of[82] the roof have fallen in from the southern part of the building, and lay with their bottom nearly on a level with the plain of the outward enclosure;” and he was thence led to conjecture, that the base or floor of the southern division, was originally lower than that of the northern end.
Page 23, Mr. Horneman tells us, “that the northern part of the building is built on native calcareous rock, which rises about eight feet above the surrounding area, within a circumvallation,” which he describes in detail and will be a topic for further discussion. He then notes, “that two large stones from[82] the roof have fallen from the southern part of the building and are resting almost level with the ground of the outer enclosure;” and this led him to speculate that the base or floor of the southern section was originally lower than that of the northern end.
The difference in measurement or estimate of height stated by the two travellers, strongly corroborates the fact.
The difference in the height measurements or estimates given by the two travelers strongly supports the fact.
It may be premised, that when an object is of no great altitude, an estimate of height may be made on mere inspection or view, with much more accuracy than any other line of dimension. A comparison with known objects, the stature of any human figure near, nay, the very person of the observer himself, will furnish a sort of scale for reference, by which he may compute from four to five times his own height with considerable precision.
It can be assumed that when an object is not very tall, we can estimate its height just by looking at it, with much more accuracy than with any other measurement. Comparing it to familiar objects, like the height of a nearby person or even the observer's own height, provides a kind of scale for reference, allowing for a fairly precise estimate that's about four to five times the observer's own height.
A difference so great as that of from eighteen to twenty-seven feet in estimating the altitude of the building at Siwah, could not occur between two the most hasty and inaccurate observers, in noting the height of the same object. The object itself, therefore, must be considered as different; and in the one case, to be that of the wall within, and in the other case, that of the temple from without.
A difference as significant as from eighteen to twenty-seven feet in measuring the height of the building at Siwah couldn't happen even between the most rushed and careless observers when noting the same structure's height. Therefore, the object must be regarded as different; in one instance, it's the wall inside, and in the other, it's the temple from outside.
Mr. Brown taking his measurements in the clear, would ascertain the perpendicular of the wall from a part of the pediment or floor, the most clear and perfect; and this was, at the northern end. The dilapidations in the southern part of the building, do not appear to have attracted his notice in any other consideration, than as mere ruins: and merely as such, the unequal and broken surface would[83] not be preferred for placing a rod in measurement to the summit, or from whence to look up and make a calculation of height. Mr. Brown accordingly measured the height from a proper base at the northern end, and found it to be eighteen feet. It has been already cited from the journal of Mr. Horneman, that the northern end was built on an isolated rock, rising eight feet above the plain of the general enclosure. The top of the wall from north to south, must have run on a level, and in a direct line: and the actual building of the southern part must have been eight feet higher than that of the northern end; and the entire building from without must have appeared, and in truth, have been, twenty-six feet high, even to conform with Mr. Brown’s description from within.
Mr. Brown, taking his measurements clearly, determined the vertical distance of the wall from a section of the pediment or floor that was the clearest and most perfect, which was at the northern end. The damage in the southern part of the building didn’t seem to catch his attention, other than being seen as mere ruins. And merely as such, the uneven and broken surface wouldn’t be ideal for placing a measuring rod to the summit or for looking up to calculate height. Mr. Brown measured the height from a suitable base at the northern end and found it to be eighteen feet. It has already been noted from Mr. Horneman's journal that the northern end was built on an isolated rock, rising eight feet above the level of the general enclosure. The top of the wall running from north to south must have been level and in a straight line; and the actual construction of the southern part must have been eight feet higher than that of the northern end. The entire building, viewed from outside, must have appeared, and indeed was, twenty-six feet high, consistent with Mr. Brown’s description from within.
The two travellers in other points agree, as to the architecture of the building, and sculpture on the walls, concurring in proof, that it was of the highest antiquity, and of Egyptian origin.
The two travelers agree on other points, specifically the architecture of the building and the sculptures on the walls, both confirming that it was very ancient and of Egyptian origin.
The division of the edifice exclusively noticed by Mr. Horneman, may give some further indication of its use and purpose, and perhaps may be found to strengthen the conjecture, “that these are the very ruins of the once famous oracular temple consecrated by the Egyptian Danaus, to the divinity of Ammon.”
The separation of the building that Mr. Horneman specifically observed might offer additional insight into its use and purpose, and could potentially reinforce the theory that “these are the very ruins of the once-famous oracular temple dedicated by the Egyptian Danaus, to the god Ammon.”
The writer of this note will on no account, and in no degree, discuss the position of country, within which the renowned temple of Ammon was erected. He considers that question as concluded, and for ever set at rest, in the acute and learned comment on the Geography of Herodotus, by Mr. Rennell. The facts, the arguments, and the inferences stated in that admirable work, indisputably shew the Oasis of Siwah, to have been the Oasis of Ammon. The precincts are thus narrowed, within which our researches are to be[84] directed, for ascertaining the locality, and even the very remains of the temple itself: and this concurrent circumstance will be held in mind, whilst certain details in the description given us of the ruins discovered at Siwah, are examined and brought to the test, by reference to such few particulars as are recorded by ancient writers concerning the temple of Ammon.
The writer of this note will not discuss the location of the area where the famous temple of Ammon was built. He believes that question has been settled once and for all in the insightful and scholarly commentary on Herodotus's Geography by Mr. Rennell. The facts, arguments, and conclusions presented in that excellent work clearly show that the Oasis of Siwah was the Oasis of Ammon. This narrows down the areas we should focus on for identifying the location and even the actual remains of the temple itself: and this relevant point will be kept in mind while examining certain details in the description of the ruins found at Siwah, tested against the limited information recorded by ancient writers about the temple of Ammon.
The general description of the materials, of the architecture, and of the sculptures, may render it unnecessary to prolong this essay, by discussing the question of when, and by whom was the building erected? Those who may yet entertain a doubt, that it was a most ancient Egyptian edifice, are referred to the writings of Norden, of Pocock, of Lucas, and above all, to the treatise of Major Rennell above cited. The annotator ventures to assume the fact; and merely add, τὸ μὲν τέμενος φασὶν ἰδρύσασθαι Δαναὸν τον Αιγύπτιον. Diod. Sic. Tom. II. Ed. Wesseling. page 198.
The general description of the materials, architecture, and sculptures may make it unnecessary to extend this essay by discussing the question of when and by whom the building was constructed. Those who still doubt that it is a very ancient Egyptian structure are referred to the writings of Norden, Pocock, Lucas, and especially to Major Rennell's treatise mentioned earlier. The annotator assumes this fact and adds, τὸ μὲν τέμενος φασὶν ἰδρύσασθαι Δαναὸν τον Αιγύπτιον. Diod. Sic. Tom. II. Ed. Wesseling. page 198.
So much as to the building and its antiquity being taken for granted; the following comment will advert to circumstances exclusively noticed by Mr. Horneman, and which may lead to further inferences, as to its original purpose and designation.
So much for the building and its age being assumed; the following comment will refer to details specifically pointed out by Mr. Horneman, which may lead to additional conclusions about its original purpose and name.
First, In ascertaining the supposed remains of an oracular temple, vestiges of the adytum, would be an object of particular research: and perhaps such may be discovered in that part of Mr. Horneman’s description, where he mentions the different levels of the basement or floor of the ancient edifice at Siwah.
First, when trying to determine the supposed remains of an oracular temple, the traces of the adytum would be a specific focus of research: and perhaps such traces may be found in the part of Mr. Horneman’s description where he mentions the different levels of the basement or floor of the ancient building at Siwah.
Hen. Steph. in Thesaur. art. “Adytum,” ἄδυτον, locus secretior templi, ad quem non nisi sacerdotibus dabatur accessus, nam ex eo oracula reddebantur.
Hen. Steph. in Thesaur. art. “Adytum,” ἄδυτον, a more private area of the temple, to which only priests were allowed access, since oracles were delivered from there.
[85]The adytum, was not only a recess, rendered secret by the reverential awe which forbad approach of the vulgar; but was actually a kind of crypt, or place of concealment: among the prodigies forerunning the victories of Cæsar in Asia, “Pergami in occultis ac remotis templi, quæ Græci ἄδυτα appellant, tympana sonuêre. Bell. Civil. lib. iii. cap. 105.
[85]The adytum was not just a hidden room that inspired deep respect, preventing ordinary people from approaching it; it was also a type of crypt, or secret place. Among the wonders leading up to Caesar's victories in Asia, "In the secret and remote parts of the temple, which the Greeks call ἄδυτα, drums sounded." Bell. Civil. lib. iii. cap. 105.
In the itinerary of Pausanias, the ἄδυτα of the oracular temples appear to have been sunk beneath, and under the basement or floor of the building. This was so generally the case, that in Bœoticis, the word adytum is used as synonymous for the cave of Trophonius. In Corinthracis, cap. i. the entrance and passage to the adytum of Palæmon at Chronium, is represented as subterraneous; ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἄλλο ἄδυτον καλούμενον, κάθοδος δὲ ἐς ἀυτὸ ὑπὸ γεως. edit. Kuhn. p. 113, and in the Achaicis, the entrance of the adytum of the temple of Minerva, at Pellené, is from under the base of the statue of the goddess, and the recess is hyperbolically represented, as penetrating to the very centre of the earth.
In Pausanias's itinerary, the inner sanctums of the oracular temples seem to have been located beneath the building's floor. This was so common that in Bœoticis, the term adytum is used as a synonym for the cave of Trophonius. In Corinthracis, cap. i, the entrance and passage to the adytum of Palæmon at Chronium is described as underground; there is also another adytum known, with a descent to it being under the ground. edit. Kuhn. p. 113, and in the Achaicis, the entrance to the adytum of Minerva's temple in Pellené is beneath the statue of the goddess, and the recess is exaggeratedly depicted as reaching all the way to the center of the earth.
The purposes of these crypts, or concealed recesses in the oracular temples, may readily be surmised: and to conduct their oracle with proper mystery and imposition of respect, was a necessary policy in the priesthood, to prevent any visit or examination of these hallowed places: the hand of the deity was denounced as punishing the trespasser with instant death. Of the many examples that offer, we will take one from Egypt: Pausanias in Phocicis, mentions, “That a Roman Prefect having from impious curiosity, sent a person to inspect the adytum of Isis at Coptos, the unhallowed intruder was struck dead on the spot.
The purposes of these crypts, or hidden spaces in the oracle temples, can easily be guessed: to manage the oracle with a sense of mystery and enforced respect was essential for the priests to keep people from visiting or examining these sacred areas. They believed that the deity would punish anyone who trespassed with instant death. One of many examples comes from Egypt: Pausanias in Phocicis mentions that “a Roman Prefect, driven by impious curiosity, sent someone to inspect the adytum of Isis at Coptos, and the unholy intruder was struck dead on the spot."
[86]The oracle was given ex adyto.
The oracle was given from the shrine.
It was given too imo adyto, or as others express it, from the depth of the adytum.
It was given too imo adyto, or as others say, from the depth of the adytum.
Diod. Sic. lib. xvii. says, that when Alexander required an oracle from Ammon, the chief priest retired back to the sanctuary or holy place, and gave the answer, ex adyto; so the Latin version of Wesselingius expresses it: in truth, there is no Greek word in the original, immediately corresponding with ex adyto; yet the priest retiring εις σήκον, i. e. to the fane or secret recess of the temple; his giving the oracle from such secret recess may be implied.
Diod. Sic. lib. xvii. states that when Alexander asked for an oracle from Ammon, the chief priest went back to the sanctuary or holy place and provided the answer, ex adyto; the Latin version by Wesselingius expresses it this way: in fact, there isn't a Greek word in the original that directly matches ex adyto; however, the priest going εις σήκον, i. e. to the shrine or hidden area of the temple; his delivering the oracle from such a hidden area may be implied.
Applying the accounts of the adytum to the building under consideration, it may be observed, that to form such recess, the rock rising in the centre of the enclosure described at Siwah, offered a peculiar accommodation to the architect. The soil around is represented as wet and marshy, and not therefore suited to excavation. The erecting the Προνὰος, or forepart of the temple, on the elevation of the rock, admitted of the interior end or penetrale being built over a crypt, or artificial cave of eight feet deep, suitable to the purpose and mysteries of an oracular temple.
Applying the accounts of the adytum to the building in question, it's noteworthy that the rock rising in the center of the enclosure described at Siwah provided a unique advantage to the architect for creating such a recess. The surrounding soil is described as wet and marshy, making it unsuitable for excavation. Constructing the Προνὰος, or front part of the temple, on the elevation of the rock allowed the interior end or penetrale to be built over a crypt, or artificial cave, that is eight feet deep, which was appropriate for the functions and mysteries of an oracular temple.
The entrance to the ancient edifice described by Mr. Horneman was to the north; and from the northern end or division of the building there was a descent of eight feet, in coming to the southern or interior extremity.
The entrance to the old building described by Mr. Horneman was to the north, and from the northern end or section of the structure, there was a drop of eight feet when reaching the southern or inner end.
[87]Whether anciently the pavement was level and continued, “covering the adytum as a cave;” or whether it was an open vault or recess, from which the priest (as mentioned by Diodorus) might utter the predictions of the oracle unseen by the vulgar; in either case the construction may agree with the ideas to be derived from ancient authority, of the oracular Fane of Ammon; and more strongly warrant a conjecture, that the ruins described by Horneman, may be those of that renowned temple.
[87]Whether in ancient times the pavement was flat and extended, “covering the adytum like a cave;” or if it was an open vault or alcove, from which the priest (as noted by Diodorus) could deliver the oracle's predictions out of sight from the common people; in either case, the structure might align with the concepts derived from ancient sources about the oracular Fane of Ammon; and it strongly supports the idea that the ruins described by Horneman could be those of that famous temple.
Secondly, Mr. Horneman, observing on the rude and stupendous architecture of the building at Siwah, says, “that he could in no part discover any mark or trace on the walls, of their having been incrusted or lined with marbles, or of any ornament having been once affixed.” Indeed the building appears not to have been large, and could little admit of such.
Secondly, Mr. Horneman, commenting on the rough and impressive architecture of the building at Siwah, says, “that he could in no part discover any mark or trace on the walls, of their having been incrusted or lined with marbles, or of any ornament having been once affixed.” Indeed, the building seems to be small and wouldn’t really allow for such features.
Niches, or pedestals were not required; the most ancient Egyptian temples had no statues: Lucian says,—τὸ δὲ παλαιὸν καὶ παρὰ Αἰγυπτίοισι αξόανοι νηοὶ ἔσαν· edit. Bourdelot. p. 1057. The sole interior decoration of the ancient Egyptian temple at Heliopolis, described by Strabo, was a rude sculpture on the walls in the old Tuscan taste, apparently similar to that observed by Mr. Horneman on the walls at Siwah. Strabo’s words are,—ἀναγλυφὰς δ᾿ ἔχουσιν οἱ τοῖχοι οὗτοι μεγάλων ειδώλων ομοίων τοῖς Τυῤῥενικοῖς, καὶ τοῖς αρχαίοις σφόδρα των παρὰ τοῖς Ελλησὶ δημιουργημάτων· edit. Casaub. p. 806. This, and the indications of rude simplicity observable in the remains of the ancient building at Siwah, may thus strengthen the conjecture that it was the one sacred to Ammon. Diodorus, Arrian, and Curtius, all indeed talk of gold and ornaments, and even of a statue in procession, displayed on the visit of Alexander: but Strabo directly taxes Callisthenes (and therewith those writers who followed him) with[88] exaggerations and additions, introduced to do honour to their hero. Edit. Casaub. p. 813.
Niches or pedestals weren't necessary; the oldest Egyptian temples didn't have statues. Lucian states, “The ancient temples of the Egyptians were unadorned.” The only interior decoration of the ancient Egyptian temple at Heliopolis, which Strabo described, was a rough sculpture on the walls in the old Tuscan style, apparently similar to what Mr. Horneman saw on the walls at Siwah. Strabo says, “These walls have carvings of large statues resembling those of the Tyrrhenians, and those very much like the ancient creations among the Greeks.” This, along with the signs of rough simplicity found in the remains of the ancient building at Siwah, may support the idea that it was dedicated to Ammon. Diodorus, Arrian, and Curtius all mention gold and decorations, and even a statue in a procession during Alexander's visit. However, Strabo directly accuses Callisthenes (and the writers who followed him) of exaggerations and embellishments meant to honor their hero.
The poet Lucan, in his description of the Temple (and its being a fiction will be taken in aid of the argument), states the people of Lybia to be “beati,” i. e. rich; and he had all the gold of Africa before him, if the general account and actual knowledge of this temple at the time he wrote, could have bore him out in a luxuriant description of its splendour and magnificence. From this he appears to have abstained, in deference to fact and to what was generally known, of the rudeness and simplicity of this holy place. His being a poet thus strengthens his authority, whilst he foregoes the splendour of description specially suited to his genius; and gives up matter too of fine poetical contrast, with the simple and pure morals and religion of his Cato. He had no other inducement but truth when he says,
The poet Lucan, in his description of the Temple (and its being a fiction will be taken in aid of the argument), states that the people of Libya are “beati,” meaning rich; and he had all the gold of Africa in front of him, if the general understanding and actual knowledge of this temple at the time he wrote could have supported a lavish description of its beauty and grandeur. From this, he seems to have held back, respecting the reality and what was commonly known about the rudeness and simplicity of this holy place. His status as a poet thus strengthens his credibility, even as he forgoes the grandeur of description that is especially suited to his talent; and he gives up the opportunity for fine poetic contrast, along with the simple and pure morals and religion of his Cato. He had no other motive but truth when he says,
The Temple of Ammon further may be presumed, to have been of small dimension. When Alexander alone enters the building, it is mentioned by his historians, that such exclusive permission was a mark of high respect; but Strabo further informs us, that all who attended on Alexander, “heard the Oracle from without:” ἔξωθὲν τε τῆς θεμεστείας ΑΚΡΟΑΣΑΣΘΑΙ πάντας πλὴν Αλεξάνδρου, Τουτον δ᾿ ἔνδοθὲν εἶναι. edit. Casaub. p. 814. The Oracle given from the extreme recess of the interior, (to which the priest retired for the purpose,[89] as before cited from Diodorus), could be heard and distinguished from without, only under supposition, that the entrance was at no great distance from the adytum, and the temple, of course, not large.
The Temple of Ammon was likely small. When Alexander entered the building alone, his historians noted that this special permission was a sign of great respect. However, Strabo tells us that everyone who accompanied Alexander “heard the Oracle from outside:” ἔξωθὲν τε τῆς θεμεστείας ΑΚΡΟΑΣΑΣΘΑΙ πάντας πλὴν Αλεξάνδρου, Τουτον δ᾿ ἔνδοθὲν εἶναι. edit. Casaub. p. 814. The Oracle, delivered from the farthest part of the interior (where the priest went for this purpose, as previously mentioned from Diodorus), could only be heard and understood from outside if the entrance was relatively close to the adytum, implying that the temple itself wasn’t large.
Thirdly, It is exclusively stated by Mr. Horneman, that the building at Siwah is situated in the centre of an inclosure, surrounded at some distance by ancient foundations of a strong and massive wall. Not to lengthen this note by unnecessary citations, it may be sufficient to refer generally to the Itinerary of Pausanias, wherein scarcely a temple is mentioned throughout Greece, without noticing, at the same time its inclosure and circumvallation: and even the sacred grove, distinctively from the temple, was often surrounded by a wall, as was that of Venus in Eliacis, cap. xxv.
Thirdly, Mr. Horneman clearly states that the building at Siwah is located in the center of an enclosure, surrounded at some distance by the ancient foundations of a strong and massive wall. To keep this note from being too long with unnecessary citations, it’s enough to generally refer to the Itinerary of Pausanias, where hardly a temple is mentioned throughout Greece without also noting its enclosure and surrounding wall: even the sacred grove, separate from the temple, was often enclosed by a wall, as was that of Venus in Eliacis, cap. xxv.
These walls may be considered, in one respect, as marking the boundary of the holy ground; but further, they were built with a view to protecting not only the sanctity, but the wealth too of the temple.
These walls can be seen, in one way, as marking the boundary of the sacred ground; but more than that, they were built to protect not just the holiness, but also the riches of the temple.
The statues were often of gold and ivory; and the offerings of golden shields and goblets, and other votive presents, given by those who consulted the oracles, formed a treasure considerable in proportion to the character and renown of the sacred place. Cicero, in his accusation of Verres, notices that the treasures of a state were often deposited too in sanctuaries, not only as protected by the abhorrence of sacrilege, but by the strength of the place: thus the general subsidies collected by the Athenians, at the close of the Persian wars, were kept in the Parthenon; and the wealth pillaged from the temple at Phocis, by Philomelus, and which occasioned the holy war, was immense. On these accounts the greater temples[90] were often placed in actual fortresses. The Temple of Minerva at Syracuse, was in the Ortygia; the Parthenon of Athens, in the Acropolis; the Roman Temple of Jupiter, in the Capitol; and the Editor, when in Sicily, remarked the circumvallations inclosing the temples at Selinunté, and the almost impregnable situations of those at Agrigentum and Segesté.
The statues were often made of gold and ivory, and the offerings of golden shields, goblets, and other votive gifts given by those who consulted the oracles created a considerable treasure, reflecting the significance and reputation of the sacred site. Cicero, in his accusation against Verres, points out that the treasures of a state were often stored in sanctuaries, not only because they were protected by the fear of sacrilege but also by the strength of the location. For example, the general funds collected by the Athenians after the Persian wars were kept in the Parthenon, and the wealth plundered from the temple at Phocis by Philomelus, which led to the holy war, was immense. For these reasons, the larger temples[90] were often situated within actual fortresses. The Temple of Minerva in Syracuse was in the Ortygia, the Parthenon in Athens was in the Acropolis, the Roman Temple of Jupiter was in the Capitol, and the Editor, while in Sicily, noted the walls surrounding the temples at Selinunté and the nearly impregnable locations of those in Agrigentum and Segesté.
The foundations of ancient circumvallation at Siwah may thus be considered, in some degree, as indications of the origin and purpose of the building within the inclosure.
The ancient wall foundations at Siwah can be seen, to some extent, as signs of the origin and purpose of the structure inside the enclosure.
The Ammonian temple was certainly surrounded by a strong wall; “triplici muro circumdatum,” as Diodorus, lib. xvii. and Q. Curtius, lib. iv. cap. 7, both inform us. Curtius uses the word munitio, and the Ἀκρόπολις, or arx of Diodorus, answers in description to the mount of Siwah itself; and the temple of Ammon being represented as being erected within the third or more distant inclosure of wall, its distance from the citadel may well correspond with that of the ruins in question, from the town of Siwah.
The Ammonian temple was definitely surrounded by a strong wall; “triplici muro circumdatum,” as Diodorus, lib. xvii. and Q. Curtius, lib. iv. cap. 7, both tell us. Curtius uses the word munitio, and the Ἀκρόπολις, or arx of Diodorus, matches the description of the mount of Siwah itself; and since the temple of Ammon is described as being built within the third or outermost enclosure of walls, its distance from the citadel likely corresponds with that of the ruins in question, from the town of Siwah.
Horneman further informs us, that the ancient building which he describes, stood in the centre of the area, and partly on a rock; and at the same time observes, that the ground generally throughout the area was broken and dug up in search of treasure; from which may be inferred that formerly there were other buildings within the inclosure. On this head it is almost unnecessary to cite ancient authorities; it will appear from a view of the well known ruins in Greece, Sicily, and the Magna Græcia, &c. that the ancients often availed themselves of one and the same circumvallation, and erected different temples within the general inclosure; so, in the Achaicis of Pausanias, cap. cxx. the temples of Minerva and of Diana Laphia[91] are within the same boundary of wall, without enumerating the many other instances in that curious journal; or to the three temples actually remaining at Pæstum, &c. within the inclosure of one and the same wall. In reference to the subject more immediately under consideration, the Ammonian temples of Juno and Mercury were in high repute with the Greeks, as mentioned in the Eliacis, p. 416, edit. Kuhn: and these temples were probably within the same inclosure as that of Ammon. The temple of Ammon being the principal, might be supposed to be erected in the centre and on the rock, which strong foundation may have in part yet preserved it, whilst the foundations of the others more easily dug and broken up, have brought those edifices low to the ground; and hence the very materials (as we are told) have been carried away, and no vestiges remain but of the area of the earth having been disturbed and heaped, as the work of search, dilapidation, and pillage was carried on.
Horneman further informs us that the ancient building he describes stood in the center of the area and partly on a rock. He also notes that the ground throughout the area was generally broken and dug up in search of treasure, which suggests that there were likely other buildings within the enclosure. It’s almost unnecessary to cite ancient sources on this; a look at the well-known ruins in Greece, Sicily, and Magna Græcia, etc., shows that the ancients often used the same fortifications and built different temples within the same enclosure. For example, in Pausanias's Achaics, cap. cxx, the temples of Minerva and Diana Laphia[91] are within the same wall, not to mention many other examples in that intriguing journal, or the three temples still standing at Pæstum, etc., within the same wall. Regarding the more specific subject at hand, the Ammonian temples of Juno and Mercury were highly regarded by the Greeks, as mentioned in the Eliacis, p. 416, edit. Kuhn; and these temples were probably within the same enclosure as that of Ammon. Since the temple of Ammon was the main one, it might have been built in the center and on the rock, and this solid foundation may have partially preserved it, while the foundations of the others, which were easier to dig up and break, have caused those buildings to collapse. Consequently, the very materials (as we are told) have been removed, leaving no traces except for the disturbed and heaped earth, as the work of searching, destruction, and looting was carried out.
Fourthly, Mr. Horneman was shewn, at the distance of half a mile from the ruins, “a spring of fresh water, which takes its rise in a grove of date trees, and in a most romantic and beautiful situation.”
Fourthly, Mr. Horneman was shown, half a mile away from the ruins, “a spring of fresh water, which comes from a grove of date trees, set in a really romantic and beautiful spot.”
This description precisely answers to that of the Fountain of the Sun, mentioned by ancient writers: and the distance from the chief temple too, seems to agree. “Haud procul arce extrinsecùs alterum Hammonis fanum jacet, quod multæ arbores proceræ inumbrant, et fons proximus est, ὀνομαζομένη Ἠλίου κρήνη·” Diod. Sic. Tom. II. p. 199. So too Curtius, “Est etiam aliud Hammonis nemus; in medio habet fontem; Aquam Solis vocant.” Lib. iv. cap. 7.
This description precisely matches that of the Fountain of the Sun, referenced by ancient writers, and the distance from the main temple also seems to fit. “Not far from the citadel lies another temple of Hammon, shaded by many tall trees, and there is a nearby spring, called the Helios fountain.” Diod. Sic. Tom. II. p. 199. Similarly, Curtius states, “There is also another grove of Hammon; in the center, there is a spring; they call it Water of the Sun.” Lib. iv. cap. 7.
Thus far the merely descriptive accounts agree. If a further point can be ascertained, it will be conclusive, and the beautiful spot visited by our traveller, be identified as that of the Fountain of the Sun,[92] situated extrinsecùs, or without the inclosure, in which stood the principal temple of Ammon.
So far, the purely descriptive accounts match up. If we can determine one more point, it will be definitive, and the beautiful location visited by our traveler will be identified as the Fountain of the Sun,[92] located extrinsecùs, or outside the enclosure where the main temple of Ammon stood.
The water of the Fountain of the Sun was, at different periods of each twenty-four hours, successively hot and cold: “Aquam enim habet, cum horis diei miris subinde vicibus re variantem. Nam sub lucis ortum tepidam emittit. Die hinc progrediente pro horarum succedentium ratione, frigescit. Sub æstum vero meridianum frigedo ejus summa est. Quæ rursùs parili modo remittit usque ad vesperam. Tunc appetente nocte rursùs incalescit, ad mediam usque noctem, ubi exæstuat. Exinde calor sensìm deficit: donec unà cum exortâ luce pristinam teporis vicem recuperârit.” Diod. Sic. Tom. II. edit. Wesseling, p. 199.
The water of the Fountain of the Sun was, at different times each day, alternately hot and cold: “It has water that changes temperature at remarkable times throughout the day. In the morning, it releases warm water. As the day progresses, according to the hours that follow, it cools down. During the midday heat, its temperature is at its lowest. Then, in a similar way, it warms up again until the evening. As night approaches, it heats up again, reaching its peak warmth by midnight. After that, the heat gradually decreases until it regains its warmth with the rising light.” Diod. Sic. Tom. II. edit. Wesseling, p. 199.
Mr. Horneman appears to have made no inquiries on this curious subject; but tells us, that having asked, “if there was any spring of fresh water near?” he was shewn to the one he describes, undoubtedly the nearest, and probably the same as seen by Mr. Brown, who says, (p. 24 of his Volume of Travels), “that one of the springs which rise near the ruins described, is observed by the natives, to be sometimes cold and sometimes warm.” Mr. Brown does not appear to have considered the Oasis of Siwah as that of Ammon. He had no favourite discovery to set forth and confirm by particular remarks and circumstances: he had not an interest in his account of the changeable temperature of this spring, but that of truth. The periodical variation from hot to cold, and from cold to heat, may rather, therefore on his relation, be assumed as fact; and be taken as a matter of proof concurrent with the grove, the spring itself, the distance from the ruins, and the beauty of the situation, all answering to the descriptions of the Fountain of the Sun, given by ancient writers, and, in reference to the ruins, rendering[93] the conjecture more probable, that they are those of the Temple of Ammon.
Mr. Horneman doesn’t seem to have made any inquiries on this interesting topic; however, he tells us that when he asked, “Is there any spring of fresh water nearby?” he was shown the one he describes, which is definitely the closest, and likely the same one that Mr. Brown mentions, who states (p. 24 of his Volume of Travels) that “one of the springs near the ruins described is noted by the locals to be sometimes cold and sometimes warm.” Mr. Brown doesn’t seem to have considered the Oasis of Siwah to be the same as that of Ammon. He didn’t have a favorite discovery to present and confirm with specific observations and details; he wasn’t trying to support his account of the changing temperature of this spring for any reason other than to state the truth. The periodic shift from hot to cold and from cold to hot can, therefore, based on his account, be considered a fact; and it aligns with the grove, the spring itself, the distance from the ruins, and the beauty of the location, all matching the descriptions of the Fountain of the Sun provided by ancient writers, making the idea more likely that these are the ruins of the Temple of Ammon.
Fifthly, Mr. Horneman says, “that the material of which the building is constructed, is a limestone, containing petrifactions of shells and small marine animals; and that such stone is to be found and dug up in the neighbourhood:” so too Strabo tells us, p. 49, that sea fossils and shells were spread on the Oasis of Ammon; κατὰτὴν μεσόγαιαν ὁρᾷται πολλαχου κόχλων καὶ ὀστρέων καὶ χηραμίδων πληθος, καὶ λιμνοθάλαττοι καθάπερ φησὶ περὶ τὸ ἱερον τοῦ Ἄμμωνος. Strabo, p. 50, further noticing the marine substances scattered on the Oasis of Ammon, cites Eratosthenes, supposing that the sea once reached to that interior spot of Africa, and supporting his conjecture by observing, that the oracle could not anciently, and in the first instance, have been so renowned and visited, if difficult of access, by being far inland. Casaubon’s version expresses it, “fortassis etiam Ammonis templum, aliquando in mari jacuisse, quod nunc maris effluxu sit in mediâ terrâ; ac conjicere se, oraculum illud optimâ ratione tam illustre ac celebre factum, esse quòd in mari esset situm, neque ejus gloriam probabile esse tantam potuisse existere, quanta nunc est, si tam longè fuisset a mari dissitum.” P. 50. The poet follows the geographer’s idea, and derives a fine sentiment for the mouth of Cato.
Fifthly, Mr. Horneman says, “the building is made of limestone, which contains fossils of shells and small marine animals; and this stone can be found and dug up in the local area:” Similarly, Strabo mentions on page 49 that sea fossils and shells were found throughout the Oasis of Ammon; κατὰτὴν μεσόγαιαν ὁρᾷται πολλαχου κόχλων καὶ ὀστρέων καὶ χηραμίδων πληθος, καὶ λιμνοθάλαττοι καθάπερ φησὶ περὶ τὸ ἱερον τοῦ Ἄμμωνος. On page 50, Strabo, further noting the marine materials scattered across the Oasis of Ammon, references Eratosthenes, who believed that the sea once reached this interior part of Africa, backing up his theory by arguing that the oracle couldn't have been so famous and frequently visited if it was hard to reach due to being far inland. Casaubon’s version puts it this way: “perhaps even the temple of Ammon once lay under the sea, which now has receded to land; and he conjectures that the oracle gained its remarkable and celebrated status because it was located by the sea, and that its fame likely couldn’t have been as great as it is now if it had been so far removed from the sea.” P. 50. The poet aligns with the geographer’s idea and derives an eloquent sentiment for Cato’s speech.
Now, taking the simple fact, the stones with which the Temple of Ammon was built, might be supposed to contain fragments of marine animals and shells, such as those mentioned by Horneman. For the rest, Strabo’s (or rather Eratosthene’s) conjecture is scarcely admissible.
Now, considering the simple fact, the stones used to build the Temple of Ammon might be thought to contain pieces of marine animals and shells, like those described by Horneman. As for the rest, Strabo’s (or rather Eratosthenes') theory is hardly acceptable.
[94]The Libyan Ammon had long been venerated in Greece, and throughout the then civilized world. A subordinate temple was consecrated to Ammon in Laconia, and the god was yet more anciently worshipped by the Aphytæi. Paus. Kuhn, p. 293. Another temple was raised to Ammon in Bœotia, and in which Pindar dedicated a statue of the god; and the same great poet wrote a hymn to the Lybian deity, and sent the copy to its priesthood in Africa. Bœotica, p. 741. So anciently and so highly as the oracle of Ammon was revered, and so much as it was resorted to by the most enlightened nations of Greece, Asia, and Egypt, the circumstance of its once having been situated on the coasts of the sea, could not have escaped tradition or direct historical account, if such had ever been the fact.
[94]The Libyan Ammon had long been respected in Greece and throughout the civilized world of that time. A smaller temple was dedicated to Ammon in Laconia, and the god was also worshipped by the Aphytæi even earlier. Paus. Kuhn, p. 293. Another temple was built for Ammon in Bœotia, where Pindar dedicated a statue of the god; this renowned poet also wrote a hymn to the Libyan deity and sent a copy to its priests in Africa. Bœotica, p. 741. Given how ancient and highly regarded the oracle of Ammon was, and how much it was sought after by the most enlightened nations of Greece, Asia, and Egypt, any history of it being located on the coast would have been preserved in tradition or historical records if it were ever true.
The above remarks are with deference submitted to the reader, as adding probability to the conjecture, that the ruins seen by Mr. Horneman, in the vicinity of Siwah, may be the actual remains of the ancient oracular temple of Ammon.
The comments above are respectfully shared with the reader, as they add weight to the idea that the ruins observed by Mr. Horneman near Siwah might be the actual remains of the ancient oracular temple of Ammon.
Having in the above comment cited a passage from the Pharsalia, not as authority, but for purpose of inference; and having further adverted to a sentiment attributed to the philosophic hero of the poem, in reference to the inland and sequestered situation of the temple of Ammon; the annotator is induced to close this essay with a version of the admirable speech of Cato at length, as deriving a peculiar interest from connection with the subject under discussion, appearing to terminate, (and leave as it were, in ruins,) the superstitions of the oracle, with the fabric of its temple.
Having referenced a passage from the Pharsalia above, not as a source of authority but for inference; and having also mentioned a thought attributed to the philosophical hero of the poem about the remote and isolated location of the temple of Ammon; the annotator feels compelled to conclude this essay with a full version of Cato's impressive speech, as it holds particular relevance to the topic being discussed, seemingly bringing to an end (and leaving, in a way, in ruins) the superstitions surrounding the oracle, along with its temple.
Lucan tells us, that Cato approaching the Fane of Jupiter Ammon in Lybia, was requested by Labienus to demand of the[95] oracle,—“What was to be the fate of Cæsar?—whether Rome was to be enslaved or free?—and in what consisted virtue, &c. &c.”
Lucan tells us that Cato, when he got close to the Temple of Jupiter Ammon in Libya, was asked by Labienus to consult the[95] oracle: “What will happen to Caesar? Will Rome be enslaved or free? And what is true virtue, etc.”
[96]
[96]
[99]POSTSCRIPT.
[99]PS.
It may be satisfactory to his Employers and to the Public, to receive some further account of Mr. Horneman, on termination of the travels more immediately the subject of his Journal.
It may be satisfactory to his employers and to the public to get some more information about Mr. Horneman after the travels that are the main focus of his journal.
By a letter from Mr. Horneman, dated at Tripoly, August 19, 1799, it appears, that on coming to Mourzouk, the end of October, 1798, he was informed that a caravan was preparing to set out for Soudan in three divisions, of which the first was to depart in three days after his arrival. The period fixed for departure of the last division, allowed time for the necessary preparations, and Mr. Horneman had intended to proceed with it on a journey to the Agades and Cashna; but informations he afterwards received induced him to alter his purpose. He was told that the caravan was likely to meet with obstruction or attack in passing through a country of the Tuaricks, then at war with Fezzan; and he observed that the caravan consisted wholly of black traders, from whose intercourse or connection he was not likely to derive either useful consequence or patronage, which might facilitate his friendly reception with the Moors of interior Africa. These and other circumstances induced him to forego the present opportunity, and with the less regret, as, at no distant period, a great caravan was expected from Bornou, with which, on its return, he might travel to the greatest advantage. Whilst remaining at Mourzouk, himself and his servant Frendenburgh were seized with the country fevers: Horneman recovered, but his servant died.
In a letter from Mr. Horneman, dated August 19, 1799, in Tripoly, he mentioned that when he arrived in Mourzouk at the end of October 1798, he learned that a caravan was getting ready to depart for Soudan in three parts, with the first leaving just three days after he arrived. The last division's scheduled departure allowed time for necessary preparations, and Mr. Horneman planned to join it on a journey to Agades and Cashna; however, information he received later made him change his mind. He was informed that the caravan might face delays or attacks while passing through Tuarick territory, which was at war with Fezzan. He also noted that the caravan was made up entirely of black traders, and he didn't think he would gain any beneficial connections or support that could help him be welcomed by the Moors in interior Africa. These and other factors led him to pass on this opportunity, feeling less regret because a large caravan from Bornou was expected soon, with which he could travel advantageously on its return. While staying in Mourzouk, he and his servant Frendenburgh contracted local fevers. Horneman recovered, but his servant did not survive.
[100]On the re-establishment of his health, Horneman found that some months yet must elapse before the caravan could be expected from Bornou: and in the interval of public resort from the arrival or passage of the caravans, Mourzouk affording no further objects of curiosity or interest, he determined to proceed to Tripoly, for the purpose of transmitting to the Committee of the African Association, such intelligence as he had hitherto collected in their service. He arrived at Tripoly, after a journey of two months, about the middle of August; transacted the business he had in view, and on the 1st of December, 1799, set out on his return to Mourzouk, where he arrived January 20th, 1800.
[100]After getting his health back, Horneman realized that it would still take a few months before the caravan from Bornou would arrive. Since there wasn't much to see or do in Mourzouk during the downtime between caravan arrivals, and with nothing else of interest there, he decided to head to Tripoly. His goal was to share the information he had gathered for the Committee of the African Association. He reached Tripoly after a two-month journey, around mid-August, completed his business, and then left on December 1, 1799, to return to Mourzouk, where he arrived on January 20, 1800.
Two letters from Mourzouk have been since received, and at date of writing the last, Mr. Horneman was on the eve of setting out with the caravan for Bornou; and with intention from that remote kingdom to prosecute further discoveries to the westward, and in the heart of Africa.
Two letters from Mourzouk have been received since then, and as of the last update, Mr. Horneman was about to leave with the caravan for Bornou; with plans to continue exploring further to the west and into the heart of Africa.
The letters from Mourzouk are as follow:
The letters from Mourzouk are as follows:
“Mr., | “Mourzouk, February 20, 1800. |
“I left Tripoly the 1st of December, 1799, and arrived here (the capital of Fezzan) January 20th, 1800, after a safe and good journey, though protracted and slow. I am in the best health, and with fair probability of its continuance.
“I left Tripoly on December 1, 1799, and arrived here (the capital of Fezzan) on January 20, 1800, after a safe and good journey, though it was long and slow. I am in great health and have a good chance of staying that way.”
“The route from hence to Soudan, is not yet secure enough for me to undertake proceeding by way of the Agades.
“The route from here to Sudan is not secure enough for me to proceed via Agades.”
“There is now at this place, a Shereef of Bornou, a man of sense, and very much considered by the Sultan of that country. I have made him my friend, and it is in his company I shall depart from[101] this place about the 15th of March for Bornou, whence in the months of August or September, I think to reach Cashna, distant from Bornou about fifteen days journey.
“There is currently a Shereef from Bornou here, a wise man who is highly regarded by the Sultan of that region. I have become friends with him, and I plan to leave this place in his company around the 15th of March for Bornou. From there, I expect to reach Cashna in August or September, which is about a fifteen-day journey from Bornou.[101]”
“I shall write as often as opportunity offers, that at least some letters may arrive for your information, and the tranquillity of my family.
“I will write whenever I get the chance, so at least some letters can reach you for your information and the peace of mind of my family."
“I remain, with great esteem,
"I remain with great respect,"
“Sir,
“Mr.,
“Your most obedient,
"Yours sincerely,"
“FREDERICK HORNEMAN.”
“Frederick Horneman.”
Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, K. B. President of the Royal Society, &c.
Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, K. B. President of the Royal Society, etc.
“Sir, | “Mourzouk, April 6, 1800. |
“Our caravan is on the point of setting off for Bornou, myself shall join it in the evening.
“Our caravan is about to leave for Bornou; I'll join it in the evening.”
“Being in an excellent state of health, perfectly inured to the climate, sufficiently acquainted with the manners of my fellow-travellers, speaking the Arabic language, and somewhat of the Bornou tongue, and being well armed and not without courage, and under protection of two great Shereefs, I have the best hopes of success in my undertaking.
“Being in great health, completely used to the climate, familiar with the customs of my fellow travelers, speaking Arabic and a bit of the Bornou language, well-armed, courageous, and protected by two important Shereefs, I have high hopes for success in my mission."
“The Soudan caravan left this place about a month ago; I did well not to join it, as some time past a number of Tibbo were seen hovering, with an intention of attacking that caravan.
“The Soudan caravan left this place about a month ago; I was right not to join it, as a while ago, several Tibbo were spotted lurking nearby, planning to attack that caravan."
[102]“Being the first European traveller undertaking so long a journey in this part of the world, I will not put my discoveries to the hazard, by exposing myself to the casualties of long and unnecessary residence and delays in any one place, and propose staying no longer at Bornou than till the month of September, when I shall proceed to Cashna with the great caravan, which always about that time of the year sets out from Bornou for Soudan.
[102]“As the first European traveler to take such a long journey in this part of the world, I won’t risk my discoveries by exposing myself to the unpredictability of staying too long and facing unnecessary delays in one place, and I plan to stay in Bornou only until September, when I will travel to Cashna with the large caravan that usually departs from Bornou for Soudan around that time of year.
“I cannot yet decide on my further procedure on leaving Soudan, or Cashna, but you may depend on my best intentions and wishes to give full satisfaction to the Society.
“I still can’t decide what to do next after leaving Soudan or Cashna, but you can count on my best intentions and efforts to fully satisfy the Society.
“Consider this letter as the last for this year, or perhaps as the last before my arrival at some port on the coast of Africa. March the 24th I sent a long letter from Tripoly, and being by a good opportunity, have no doubt of its arriving safe.[12]
“Think of this letter as the final one for this year, or maybe the last before I reach some port on the coast of Africa. On March 24th, I sent a lengthy letter from Tripoly, and since there was a good opportunity, I’m confident it will arrive safely.[12]
“In addition to what I stated in my letter of the 24th of March, I have to observe, that in the small-pox, the application used here to preserve the eyes of children, consists of what they term samsuc, (tamarinds,) and zurenbula zigollan, (onions,) and this with good effect, as I am told.
“In addition to what I mentioned in my letter dated March 24th, I want to point out that for smallpox, the method used here to protect children’s eyes involves what they call samsuc (tamarinds) and zurenbula zigollan (onions), and I’ve been informed that this is effective.”
“I have more particularly made inquiry respecting venereal disorders, and can confirm what I before wrote, that salts and coloquintida, (in Arabic handal) are specific remedies for that disease in this country, and used in the manner I described.
“I have specifically looked into venereal disorders and can confirm what I wrote earlier: salts and coloquintida (in Arabic handal) are effective treatments for that condition in this country and are used as I described.”
“From every information I can collect, the natives of Fezzan are not susceptible of venereal infection more than once in their lives. It is singular, that notwithstanding there is a great difference as to[103] the nature of this disease, between poxes brought here by the caravan from Soudan, and by those from Tripoly and Cairo, yet never (or at least very seldom,) can a man get these two sorts one after the other in the course of his life.
“From all the information I can gather, the people of Fezzan can only be infected with sexually transmitted diseases once in their lives. It's unusual that, despite the significant differences in the nature of this disease—between the strains brought by caravans from Soudan and those from Tripoli and Cairo—men very rarely, if ever, contract both types in their lifetime.[103]”
“Some days past I spoke to a man who had seen Mr. Brown in Darfoor; he gave me some information respecting the countries he travelled through, and told me, that the communication of the Niger with the Nile was not to be doubted, but that this communication before the rainy season was very little in those parts; the Niger being at the dry period reposing, or non fluens.
“Some days ago, I talked to a man who had seen Mr. Brown in Darfoor. He shared some information about the countries he traveled through and told me that the connection between the Niger and the Nile was undeniable, but that this connection was quite limited in those areas before the rainy season, with the Niger being at the dry period nearly stagnant, or non fluens.
“Not long ago, the same custom was observed at Bornou as in ancient times at Cairo, ‘a girl very richly dressed, was thrown into the river Niger.’
“Not long ago, the same tradition was practiced in Bornou as in ancient times in Cairo, ‘a girl dressed in very elaborate clothing was thrown into the river Niger.’”
“Comparing my enquiries as to Soudan, and its communication with the western and south-western coasts of Africa, it must lay generally by the way of Nyffé and Jerba, and be twelve times greater than that between Fezzan and Soudan.
“Comparing my inquiries about Sudan and its connections with the western and southwestern coasts of Africa, it generally seems to follow the route through Nyffé and Jerba, and is about twelve times greater than the distance between Fezzan and Sudan."
“I recommend myself to your remembrance, and assuring you of my great esteem, am
“I ask you to remember me, and I want to assure you of my high regard, am
“Sir,
"Sir,"
“Your most obedient,
"Yours sincerely,"
“FREDERICK HORNEMAN.”
“FREDERICK HORNEMAN.”
Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, K. B. President of the Royal Society, &c.
Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, K. B. President of the Royal Society, etc.
[104]Mr. Horneman, previous to setting out for Bornou, had availed himself of the intimacies he had formed with intelligent pilgrims and merchants of the Egyptian caravan, and with others at Mourzouk, who were natives of, or had traded to, different regions of Africa, to collect every possible information respecting the countries he was about to visit; and, together with his Journal, transmitted the following result of his enquiries.
[104]Before heading out to Bornou, Mr. Horneman took advantage of the relationships he had built with knowledgeable pilgrims and merchants from the Egyptian caravan, as well as others in Mourzouk who were either from or had traded in various regions of Africa, to gather as much information as possible about the countries he was about to visit. Along with his Journal, he shared the following findings from his inquiries.
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[12]It never came to hand.
It never arrived.
[105]SMARTNESS
ABOUT THE
North Africa Interior.
SECTION I.
Westward from Fezzan, and to the south and south-west, the country is inhabited by the Tibbo, who command also the country from Fezzan towards Egypt, from which it is said to be separated by a large desert. The nearest inhabited places north of Tibbo are Augila and Siwah. On the south they are bounded by wandering Arabs; and on the west beyond Fezzan, by the dominions of the Tuaricks.
Wwestward from Fezzan, and to the south and southwest, the area is occupied by the Tibbo, who also control the land from Fezzan to Egypt, which is said to be divided by a vast desert. The closest inhabited locations north of the Tibbo are Augila and Siwah. To the south, they are bordered by nomadic Arabs; and to the west, beyond Fezzan, by the territories of the Tuaricks.
The Tibbo are not quite black; their growth is slender; their limbs are well turned; their walk is light and swift; their eyes are quick, their lips thick, their nose is not turned up, and not large; their hair is not very long, but less curled than that of the Negroes. They appear to have much natural capacity, but they have too few opportunities of improving it, being surrounded by barbarous nations, or Mahometans. Their intercourse with the Arabs, to whom they convey slaves, has probably corrupted them; they are accused of being mistrustful, treacherous, and deceitful. The Fezzanians do not travel singly with them, for they are afraid of being surprised and[106] murdered at the instigation of the company with whom they travel. The language of the Tibbo is spoken with extraordinary rapidity, and has many consonants, particularly the L and S. They number thus:
The Tibbo aren't exactly black; they're slim and have well-formed limbs. They walk lightly and quickly; their eyes are sharp, their lips are thick, their noses are neither upturned nor large; their hair isn't very long and is less curly than that of Black people. They seem to have a lot of natural ability, but they have too few chances to develop it, as they are surrounded by uncivilized nations or Muslims. Their dealings with the Arabs, to whom they sell slaves, have likely corrupted them; they're seen as untrustworthy, treacherous, and deceitful. The Fezzanians don't travel alone with them because they fear being ambushed and killed at the suggestion of the group they’re with. The Tibbo language is spoken at an amazingly fast pace and has many consonants, especially L and S. They count as follows:
One, | Trono. |
Two, | —. |
Three, | Agesso. |
Four, | Fusso. |
Five, | Fo. |
Ten, | Markum. |
Their cloathing consists of sheep-skins, which they dress with or without the wool; the former for winter, the latter for summer; but the inhabitants of the principal places, or others, when they go to Fezzan, clothe themselves like the Burmuans, in large blue shirts; their head is wrapt in a dark blue cloth in such a manner, that their eyes only are seen. Their weapons are a lance about six feet long, and a knife from fifteen to twenty inches long, which they carry on their left arm, the sheath being fastened to a ring of leather about three inches wide, which they bear on their wrist.
Their clothing is made from sheepskins, which they process with or without the wool; they use the wool for winter and go without it in summer. However, the residents of the main cities, or others who travel to Fezzan, dress like the Burmuans, wearing large blue shirts and wrapping their heads in a dark blue cloth so that only their eyes are visible. Their weapons include a lance about six feet long and a knife measuring between fifteen and twenty inches, which they carry on their left arm. The sheath is attached to a leather ring about three inches wide that they wear on their wrist.
The Tibbo are divided into several tribes, the principal of which are, the Tibbo of Bilma, whose chief resides at Dyrke, about one day’s journey from Bilma. This tribe is a good deal mixed, having established itself forcibly among the Negroes who lived in that district: to this day, the inhabitants of Bilma are mostly Negroes; in Dyrke, on the contrary, they are Tibbo. This tribe carries on a commerce between Fezzan and Burnu, and apparently with great safety to themselves; for they travel in small companies of six or eight men; but on account of their bad character, the slaves of either sex, from Burnu, who have been freed, do not return with[107] them, as the poor people are afraid of being plundered and sold again, or murdered by them.
The Tibbo are split into several tribes, the main one being the Tibbo of Bilma, whose leader lives in Dyrke, about a day's journey from Bilma. This tribe is quite mixed, having forcibly established themselves among the local Black population in that area. To this day, most people in Bilma are Black, while in Dyrke, they are Tibbo. This tribe engages in trade between Fezzan and Burnu, seemingly with great safety; they travel in small groups of six or eight men. However, because of their bad reputation, freed slaves from Burnu, regardless of gender, do not return with them, as these individuals fear being robbed, sold back into slavery, or even killed by the Tibbo.
The religion of the Tibbo of Bilma, is the Mahometan; but it is said they hold it very cheap.
The Tibbo people of Bilma practice Islam, but it's said they don't value it highly.
The tribe of the Tibbo Rschade, or the Rock Tibbo, is so called from their houses being built under rocks, and they frequently live even in caves, before which they build huts of rushes in a very coarse manner, for their summer residence. The chief of this tribe lives in Abo; next to which Tibesty is the largest place. The Tibbo Rschade go in multitudes to Fezzan, at which time they clothe themselves like the Tuarick; however, I have seen several wearing their sheep-skins. This tribe is reported to be good Mahometans.
The Tibbo Rschade tribe, also known as the Rock Tibbo, gets its name from the fact that their homes are built under rocks, and they often live in caves. In front of these caves, they construct simple huts made of rushes for their summer living. The tribe's leader resides in Abo, with Tibesty being the next largest settlement. The Tibbo Rschade travel in large groups to Fezzan, during which time they dress like the Tuarick; however, I've seen several of them wearing their sheepskins. This tribe is said to be good Muslims.
The Tibbo Burgu are said to be still Pagans: the district which they inhabit, abounds in dates, corn, and grass.
The Tibbo Burgu are said to still be pagans; the area they live in has plenty of dates, grain, and grass.
A company of Fezzanians having this year been plundered by some of the people of Burgû, as they were travelling from Bergami to Mourzouk, the sultan of Fezzan sent a small army into their country: it consisted of thirty-two men on horseback, seventy Arabs on foot, and about two hundred Tibbos of the Rschade tribe. The Arabs went from Mourzouk into Gatron, fifty-four miles south of that place; to Fegherie thirty-three miles south-south-east of Gatron; then to Abo seven days, and Tibesty three days, in an easterly direction; then to Burgu eighteen days, (reckoning a day’s journey eighteen miles.) They stole about two hundred people, the greatest part of whom were sold in a treacherous manner.
A group of people from Fezzan was robbed this year by some locals from Burgû while they were traveling from Bergami to Mourzouk. In response, the sultan of Fezzan sent a small army into their territory: it included thirty-two mounted men, seventy foot soldiers from Arabia, and around two hundred Tibbos from the Rschade tribe. The Arab soldiers set out from Mourzouk to Gatron, which is fifty-four miles south, then traveled to Fegherie, thirty-three miles south-southeast of Gatron; after that, they headed to Abo for seven days and Tibesty for three days in an easterly direction. Finally, they reached Burgu after eighteen days (counting each day’s journey as eighteen miles). They captured about two hundred people, the majority of whom were sold in a deceitful manner.
[108]The women of the Burgu tribe, wear their hair in plaits, which hang down from their heads, but the hair on the fore-part of their heads is cut off. The girls are accused of becoming pregnant by their brothers. The slave of one of my friends, who spoke the Tibbo language, assured me, that he had questioned a young woman who was with child, and that she did not deny it.
[108]The women of the Burgu tribe wear their hair in braids that hang down from their heads, but the front part of their hair is cut short. The girls are accused of getting pregnant by their brothers. One of my friends' slaves, who spoke the Tibbo language, told me he had asked a young woman who was pregnant, and she didn’t deny it.
Farther towards the east lies Arna, the principal place of another Tibbo tribe, at the distance of five or six days.
Farther east is Arna, the main settlement of another Tibbo tribe, about five or six days away.
South-south-west of Augila dwell the Febabo, who are exposed to the yearly depredations of the Arabs of Bengasi, who go out with the Arabs of Augila, to steal men and dates; and for that purpose, they convey with them several hundred camels.
South-south-west of Augila live the Febabo, who face annual attacks from the Arabs of Bengasi. These Arabs team up with the Arabs of Augila to kidnap people and steal dates, and for this, they bring along several hundred camels.
The distance to Febabo was stated to me by the Augilarians to be ten days journey, (twenty-one miles per day,) and that during the first six days no water is to be found. The most southerly of the Tibbo tribes are the Nomadic Tibbo, who live in the Bahr-el-Gasel, which is said to be a long and fruitful valley, seven days journey from Bergami northward.
The Augilarians told me that it would take ten days to reach Febabo, traveling about twenty-one miles each day, and that there would be no water available for the first six days. The southernmost of the Tibbo tribes are the Nomadic Tibbo, who reside in the Bahr-el-Gasel, a long and fertile valley that's seven days' journey north of Bergami.
SECTION II.
The west and south of Fezzan is inhabited by the Tuarick, a mighty people, who border south-west on Burnu; south on Burnu, Soudan, and Tombuctoo; eastward on the country of the Tibbo and Fezzan; northward on part of Fezzan, and the Arabs who live behind the regions of Tripoly, Tunis, and Algiers; and westward on the great empire of Fez and Morocco, of whom a few colonies[109] are found in Sockna, (in the dominion of Fezzan), Augila, and Siwah; in which places the language of the Tuarick is the only one spoken by the inhabitants.[13]
The west and south of Fezzan is home to the Tuarick, a strong people who share borders to the south-west with Burnu; to the south with Burnu, Soudan, and Tombuctoo; to the east with the land of the Tibbo and Fezzan; to the north with part of Fezzan and the Arabs living behind the regions of Tripoly, Tunis, and Algiers; and to the west with the large empires of Fez and Morocco, where a few colonies[109] can be found in Sockna (within Fezzan's territory), Augila, and Siwah; in these places, the Tuarick language is the only one spoken by the locals.[13]
The Tuarick are divided into many nations and tribes, who all speak the same language; but, by their colour and manner of living, it is probable that they differ widely in their origin. As I will give only certain informations, on this account I confine myself, in the following relation, to the Tuarick of the nation of Kolluvi and the tribe of Hagara. These are thin in growth, rather tall than short; their walk is swift but firm; their look is stern, and their whole demeanour is warlike. Cultivated and enlightened, their natural abilities would render them, perhaps, one of the greatest nations upon earth. Their character (particularly that of Kolluvi,) is much esteemed. The western tribes of this nation are white, as much as the climate and manner of living will admit. The Kolluvians who reached the region of Asben and conquered Agades, and mixed with the nations, are of different colours; many of them are black; but their features are not like those of Negroes. The Hagara and Matkara are yellowish, like the Arabs; near Soudan there are tribes entirely black. The clothing of this nation consists of wide dark-blue breeches, a short narrow shirt of the same colour, with wide sleeves, which they bring together and tie on the back of their neck, so that their arms are at liberty. They wind a black cloth round their head in such a manner that at a distance it appears like a helmet, for their eyes only are seen. Being Mahometans, they cut off their hair, but leave some on the top of the head, round which those who wear no cap, contrive to fold their black cloth, so that it appears like a tuft on their helmet. Round their[110] waist they wear a girdle of a dark colour; from several cords which fall from their shoulders, hangs a koran in a leather pouch, and a row of small leather bags containing amulets. They always carry in their hands a small lance, neatly worked, about five feet long. Above the left elbow, on the upper part of the arm, they wear their national badge, a thick, black or dark-coloured ring, of horn or stone.
The Tuarick are made up of various nations and tribes, all speaking the same language; however, based on their appearance and lifestyle, it's likely that they have diverse origins. For this reason, I will focus my account on the Tuarick of the Kolluvi nation and the Hagara tribe. They are lean, typically taller rather than shorter; they walk quickly yet steadily; their expressions are serious, and their overall presence is martial. Educated and intelligent, their natural talents could potentially make them one of the greatest nations on Earth. The character of the Kolluvi, in particular, is highly regarded. The western tribes of this nation are fair-skinned, as much as their climate and lifestyle permit. The Kolluvians who arrived in the Asben region and conquered Agades, blending with local populations, exhibit a range of skin tones; many are black, but their features do not resemble those of typical Negroes. The Hagara and Matkara have a somewhat yellowish complexion, similar to Arabs; closer to Sudan, there are entirely black tribes. Their clothing includes wide dark-blue pants, a short narrow shirt of the same color with wide sleeves that they pull together and tie at the back of their neck, freeing their arms for movement. They wrap a black cloth around their heads in a way that makes it look like a helmet from a distance, revealing only their eyes. As Muslims, they shave their hair but leave some on the top of their heads, which those without caps style by folding their black cloth around it, resembling a tuft on their helmet. Around their waist, they wear a dark-colored belt; from various cords that hang from their shoulders, they carry a Koran in a leather pouch and a series of small leather bags containing amulets. They typically hold a small, well-crafted lance, about five feet long, in their hands. Above their left elbow, on the upper part of their arm, they display their national emblem, a thick, black or dark-colored ring made of horn or stone.
Their upper dress is a Soudanian shirt, over which a long sword hangs from the shoulder. The travelling merchants of this nation carry fire-arms; the others use only the sword, the lance, and the knife, which they carry on their left arm, like the Tibbo, but the handle is finely worked; for they have the art of giving to copper as bright a colour as the English artists, and this art they keep very secret.
Their upper clothing is a Soudanian shirt, with a long sword hanging from their shoulder. The traveling merchants of this nation carry firearms; the others only use the sword, the lance, and the knife, which they hold on their left arm, like the Tibbo, but the handle is intricately designed; they have the skill to make copper as shiny as what English artists produce, and they keep this skill very secret.
They carry on a commerce between Soudan, Fezzan, and Gadames. Their caravans give life to Mourzouk, which, without them, is a desert; for they, like the Soudanians, love company, song and music.
They engage in trade between Sudan, Fezzan, and Gadames. Their caravans bring vitality to Mourzouk, which would otherwise be a desert; like the people of Sudan, they enjoy socializing, singing, and music.
The Tuarick are not all Mahometans. In the neighbourhood of Soudan and Tombuctoo live the Tagama, who are white, and of the Pagan religion. This must have occasioned the report, to which my attention has been called, by several learned men, that there are white Christians in the neighbourhood of Tombuctoo. I am convinced that the fable arises solely from the expression Nazary (i. e. Christians), which the Arabs and Mahometans use in general for unbelievers.
The Tuarick aren't all Muslims. In the area around Sudan and Timbuktu live the Tagama, who are white and follow a pagan religion. This must have led to the rumor, pointed out to me by several scholars, that there are white Christians near Timbuktu. I'm convinced that this myth comes solely from the term Nazary (meaning Christians), which the Arabs and Muslims generally use for non-believers.
The greatest part of the eastern Tuarick lead a wandering life.[111] A place, for instance, under the government of Hagara consists of about twenty-five or thirty stone houses only; but at the time of their markets (which are said to be very considerable), many hundred men assemble there with their leathern tents.
The majority of the eastern Tuarick lead a nomadic lifestyle.[111] For example, a region governed by Hagara consists of only about twenty-five or thirty stone houses; however, during market times (which are reportedly quite significant), several hundred people gather there with their leather tents.
![[Illustration]](images/i2.jpg)
SECTION III.
Behind these countries lies Tombuctoo, of which I shall say nothing, as I could not get any well-founded and certain accounts, for there is little intercourse between this region and Fezzan; however, it certainly is the most remarkable and principal town in the interior of Africa.
Behind these countries is Timbuktu, about which I won't say much since I couldn’t find reliable and accurate information, as there is little communication between this area and Fezzan; however, it is definitely the most notable and main town in the heart of Africa.
Eastward from Tombuctoo lies Soudan, Haussa, or Asna; the first is the Arabic, the second is the name used in the country, and the last is the Burnuan name. Of these three names I choose the second, as being the most proper, and understood by the Arabs below Soudan, and all the land southward from Ghaden. The Burnuan name means properly only Kano and Kashna, and the country lying eastward from that region Asna, but incorrectly spoken, it comprehends also Tombuctoo.
East of Timbuktu is Sudan, Hausa, or Asna; the first is the Arabic name, the second is the name used in the region, and the last is the Buruan name. Of these three names, I prefer the second, as it’s the most accurate and understood by the Arabs south of Sudan and across all the land south of Ghaden. The Buruan name specifically refers only to Kano and Kashna, and the area to the east of that region is Asna, but when used incorrectly, it also includes Timbuktu.
As to what the inhabitants themselves call Haussa, I had, as I think, very certain information. One of them, a Marabut, gave me a drawing of the situation of the different regions bordering on each other, which I here give as I received it. (See the Sketch opposite.)
As for what the locals refer to as Haussa, I believe I had pretty reliable information. One of them, a Marabut, provided me with a drawing showing the layout of the different neighboring regions, which I’ve included here as I received it. (See the Sketch opposite.)
The land within the strong line is Haussa; my black friend had added Asben.
The land within the strong line is Haussa; my Black friend had mentioned Asben.
These regions are governed by Sultans, of whom those of Kashna[112] and Kano are the most powerful; but they all (either by constraint or policy) pay tribute to Burnu, except Cabi or Nyffé, their districts being at too great a distance. Guber pays, moreover, a tribute to Asben. Zamtara is united with Guber; the Sultan of the latter having taken possession of it, killed the Sultan, and sold all the prisoners he could take.
These regions are ruled by Sultans, with those of Kashna[112] and Kano being the most influential. However, they all (whether by force or agreement) pay tribute to Burnu, except for Cabi or Nyffé, as their territories are too far away. Guber also pays tribute to Asben. Zamtara is connected to Guber; the Sultan of Guber took control of it, killed the Sultan there, and sold all the prisoners he could capture.
The Haussa are certainly Negroes, but not quite black; they are the most intelligent people in the interior of Africa; they are distinguished from their neighbours by an interesting countenance; their nose is small and not flattened, and their stature is not so disagreeable as that of the Negroes, and they have an extraordinary inclination for pleasure, dancing, and singing. Their character is benevolent and mild. Industry and art, and the cultivation of the natural productions of the land, prevail in their country; and, in this respect, they excel the Fezzanians, who get the greatest part of their clothes and houshold implements from the Soudanians. They can dye in their country any colour but scarlet. Their preparation of leather is as perfect as that of the Europeans, although the manner of doing it is very troublesome. In short, we have very unjust ideas of this people, not only with respect to their cultivation and natural abilities, but also of their strength and the extent of their possessions, which are by no means so considerable as they have been represented. Their music is imperfect, when compared to the European; but the Haussanian women have skill enough to affect their husbands, thereby even to weeping, and to inflame their courage to the greatest fury against their enemies. The public singers are called Kadanka.
The Hausa are definitely of African descent, but they aren't entirely black; they're the most intelligent people in the interior of Africa. They stand out from their neighbors with their interesting features; they have small, well-defined noses, and their height is more pleasing than that of other Africans. They have a strong love for enjoyment, dancing, and singing. Their character is kind and gentle. Their country is known for its industry and artistry, as well as the cultivation of the land's natural resources, and in this regard, they outperform the Fezzanians, who rely on the Soudanians for most of their clothing and household items. They can dye fabrics in every color except scarlet. Their leather processing is as skilled as that of Europeans, even though it's quite labor-intensive. In short, we hold very unfair views of this people, not only regarding their cultivation and natural talents but also concerning their strength and the size of their possessions, which are not nearly as vast as they've been portrayed. Their music may not compare to European standards, but Hausa women have enough skill to move their husbands to tears and ignite their courage to fight fiercely against their enemies. Public singers are called Kadanka.
[113]SECTION IV.
Eastward from Haussa are situated the dominions of the Sultan of Burnu (i. e. the city). It appears to be much increased since the time of Leo Africanus, as other regions belong to it, which he considered as independent; for example, Wangara, also Edrisi’s Cauga, &c. belong to it.
East from Haussa are the territories of the Sultan of Burnu (i. e. the city). It seems to have expanded significantly since the time of Leo Africanus, as other areas that he viewed as independent are now part of it; for instance, Wangara and Edrisi’s Cauga, etc.
The Sultan of Burnu is reckoned the most powerful in that district; all the neighbouring states pay him tribute. He certainly possesses an extensive tract of land, but he gains more by his authority in the unceasing animosity of his neighbours.
The Sultan of Burnu is considered the most powerful in that area; all the neighboring states pay him tribute. He definitely owns a large piece of land, but he benefits even more from his influence due to the constant hostility from his neighbors.
The Burnuans are blacker than the Haussanians, and completely Negroes; they are stronger, and very patient of labour; their constitution is in the greatest degree phlegmatic; they are, altogether, much more rude and uninformed than the Haussanians. Their men are fond of women only of a large size; the Soudanians, on the contrary, prefer those of a slender form.
The Burnuans are darker-skinned than the Haussanians and are entirely of African descent; they are stronger and very tolerant of hard work. Their temperament is quite calm and laid-back. Overall, they are much more unrefined and less educated than the Haussanians. The men there prefer women who are larger, while the Soudanians, on the other hand, favor those who are slimmer.
A paste made of flour and flesh is the only food of the Burnuans; the liquor they drink is an intoxicating kind of beer, which is very nourishing. The best natural production of Burnu is copper, which is said to be found in small native pieces. That which is gold in Tombuctoo and Haussa, is answered by copper in Burnu; the value of all their commodities is fixed by pounds of this metal.
A mixture of flour and meat is the only food of the Burnuans; the drink they consume is a strong type of beer that is quite nourishing. The main natural resource of Burnu is copper, which is said to be found in small, native pieces. What is gold in Tombuctoo and Haussa corresponds to copper in Burnu; the value of all their goods is determined by pounds of this metal.
Northward from the principal town of that district lies Kanena, which is inhabited by the nation Kojam, so called from their food, which is cow’s milk and beef.
North of the main town in that area is Kanena, home to the Kojam people, named after their diet, which consists of cow's milk and beef.
[114]Towards the north-east lies Begarmé, the capital of which is called Mesna. Both these territories are dependants of Burnu. Begarmé is famous for its slave trade, perhaps particularly so, as at that place the greatest number of boys are mutilated.
[114]To the north-east is Begarmé, with its capital named Mesna. Both of these areas are under the control of Burnu. Begarmé is well-known for its slave trade, especially since it's where the highest number of boys are mutilated.
Southward from Burnu lie Margi and Couga; westward, Ungura, (Wangara); they are under the dominion of governors appointed by the Sultan.
South of Burnu are Margi and Couga; to the west is Ungura (Wangara); they are governed by officials appointed by the Sultan.
SECTION V.
Towards east by north lies Lussi; by the natives it is called Fiddri, and by the people who dwell eastward, Cougu. The dominions of the Sultan of Fiddri are situated round a lake which bears the same name. This realm was formerly one of the most powerful, now it is considerably diminished, by the treachery of the Sultans of Begarmé and Wadey. The natives live in small huts, which they prefer to houses; they are said to be in a very low degree of civilization. There is not any salt in their country, but they procure it in the following manner: they burn a great heap of straw of gassab, gather the ashes and put them in a basket, pour water on them, and collect it as it runs through; this water they boil until the salt settles.
Towards the east-northeast lies Lussi; the locals call it Fiddri, and the people living to the east refer to it as Cougu. The territory of the Sultan of Fiddri surrounds a lake of the same name. This kingdom was once one of the most powerful but has now significantly declined due to the treachery of the Sultans of Begarmé and Wadey. The natives live in small huts, which they prefer over houses; they are said to be at a very low level of civilization. There is no salt in their region, but they obtain it in the following way: they burn a large heap of straw from gassab, collect the ashes, place them in a basket, pour water over the ashes, and gather the resulting liquid as it seeps through; they then boil this water until the salt settles.
Towards the south-east of Fiddri lies Metko, a small independent district in a mountainous country. Eastward lies Wadey, which formerly consisted of several small states, but was conquered by the Arabs, who united and made them one realm. The principal language is Arabic; but above ten other languages are spoken in the district. Wandering Arabs occupy the space from Wadey to Begarmé northward.
Towards the southeast of Fiddri is Metko, a small independent district in a mountainous region. To the east is Wadey, which once consisted of several small states but was conquered by the Arabs, who united them into one kingdom. The main language is Arabic, but over ten other languages are spoken in the district. Roaming Arabs occupy the area from Wadey to Begarmé to the north.
[115]Eastward from Wadey lies Darfoor; from whence flows a river, the banks of which are very rich in sugar canes: it runs through Wadey, and falls into the lake Fiddri above-mentioned. I had very different accounts of the circumference of this lake, as in the rainy season it swells to double the extent, which, ordinarily, is from four to eight days journey.
[115]East of Wadey is Darfoor, where a river flows with banks that are very fertile for sugar cane. It runs through Wadey and empties into the lake Fiddri mentioned earlier. I heard various reports about the size of this lake; during the rainy season, it expands to twice its usual size, which typically spans a journey of four to eight days.
SECTION VI.
The river that was seen by Mr. Park on his journey to Tombuctoo, flows southward from Haussa. It waters Nyffé and Cabi, where it is called Julbi; and runs eastward into the district of Burnu, where it takes the name of Zad, which means the great water; in some parts of Haussa, it is called Gaora, or the great water.
The river that Mr. Park saw on his trip to Tombuctoo flows south from Haussa. It feeds Nyffé and Cabi, where it’s called Julbi, and then heads east into the Burnu area, where it’s named Zad, meaning the great water. In some parts of Haussa, it’s referred to as Gaora, or the great water.
All the Burnuans and Haussans whom I questioned about the distant regions of this river, agreed in telling me, “that it ran through the land of Majies, (i. e. Heathens;) by Sennaar: others affirmed that it passes Darfoor, in its course eastward, and flows to Cairo, being one stream with the Egyptian Nile.”
All the Burnuans and Haussans I asked about the far-off parts of this river agreed, saying, “It runs through the land of Majies, (i. e. Heathens;) by Sennaar: others said it goes past Darfoor as it heads east and merges with the Egyptian Nile.”
A native of Egypt from Osuit, who had travelled several times to Darfoor, and southward from that place to collect slaves, and lately returned through Wadey, Fiddri, and Begarmé, to Fezzan, informed me, that the river called Bah-el-Abiad, is this river. I could get no intelligence about a great inland lake, although I made every possible inquiry.
A person from Osuit in Egypt, who had traveled multiple times to Darfoor and further south to gather slaves, and recently came back through Wadey, Fiddri, and Begarmé to Fezzan, told me that the river known as Bah-el-Abiad is this river. I couldn't find out anything about a large inland lake, even though I asked around as much as I could.
Besides these two great rivers here described, there are seven small streams in Haussa, which fall into the Julbi near Berva. Northward from Burnu, there is a river which disappears among[116] the mountains, and is said to rush into the earth. All these rivers are very low in the dry season, and swell amazingly during the rainy season. The breadth of the Zad was given me for one mile, (others said two); but in the rainy season, the breadth is said to be a day’s journey, (i. e. eight hours). The Budumas always keep themselves in the middle of this stream; they are a very savage, heathenish nation.
Besides these two major rivers mentioned, there are seven smaller streams in Haussa that flow into the Julbi near Berva. To the north of Burnu, there is a river that disappears among[116] the mountains and is said to rush into the earth. All these rivers are very low during the dry season and swell significantly during the rainy season. The width of the Zad was reported to me as one mile (some others said two); but in the rainy season, it’s said to be as wide as a day's journey, (i.e. eight hours). The Budumas always keep themselves in the middle of this stream; they are a very fierce, uncivilized people.
These few informations are the best that I have been able to collect, on the interior of Africa. In this relation, I pass over men with tails, without necks, and without hair, without land, and living only on the great sea. It would be an easy matter for me to write you many letters on the interior state of Africa; but I might thereby convey information inaccurate or untrue. Besides, am I not returning to England? and if I do return, should I not reserve something new and interesting to plead my excuse for returning?
These few bits of information are the best I’ve managed to gather about the interior of Africa. In this context, I’ll skip over the tales of men with tails, no necks, and no hair, living only by the great sea. I could easily write you many letters about the inner workings of Africa, but that might lead to sharing inaccurate or false information. Plus, aren’t I heading back to England? If I do go back, wouldn’t I want to save something new and interesting to explain my return?
If I do not perish in my undertaking, I hope in five years, I shall be able to make the Society better acquainted with the people, of whom I have given this short description.
If I don’t fail in my efforts, I hope that in five years, I will be able to make the Society more familiar with the people I've briefly described here.
(Signed) | FREDERICK HORNEMAN. |
1798.
1798.
[117]Excerpts from a letter accompanying the above information, dated Tripoli, August 19, 1799.
“After a journey of eleven days from Siwah, four of which we travelled eighteen hours each day, through a desert, we arrived at Augila, a small miserable town belonging to Tripoly; and after a journey of sixteen days more, we reached Temissa, the first village of Fezzan. Seven of these sixteen days, I was passing a black rocky desert, certainly the worst of all routes in the world; and which has doubtless been formed by some volcanic revolution. It is called Harutsch, and extend very far to the south-west.
Aafter an eleven-day journey from Siwah, during which we traveled eighteen hours a day through a desert, we finally arrived at Augila, a small, miserable town in Tripoli. After another sixteen days of travel, we reached Temissa, the first village in Fezzan. Out of those sixteen days, I spent seven crossing a harsh, rocky desert, definitely the worst route in the world, probably created by some volcanic activity. It's called Harutsch, and it stretches far to the southwest.
“From Temissa, I came by way of Zuila, Tuila, and Tragan, to Mourzouk, (which is also called Fezzan, and by the people of Burnu, Zela). Mourzouk is situated in 25° 54′ 15″ north latitude.
“From Temissa, I traveled through Zuila, Tuila, and Tragan, to Mourzouk, (which is also known as Fezzan, and by the people of Burnu, Zela). Mourzouk is located at 25° 54′ 15″ north latitude.”
“With regard to the interior of Africa, I have made all the inquiries possible, and will send you the result of them by the first opportunities. Accept for the present the following notices on that subject.
“With respect to the interior of Africa, I have made all possible inquiries and will send you the results as soon as I can. For now, please accept the following notes on the subject.”
“The river you call Niger—in Soudan, Gulbi, or Gaora; in Burnu, Zad; is a very large river, into which fall more than twelve other rivers. It comes from Tombuctoo, as I am told, runs to the south of Haussa (or Soudan), in the empire of Burnu; here it takes a more southern direction, and falls (at least I could not find a single man who said to the contrary), south of Darfoor into the Nile. There is another river coming from Darfoor, which passes by Wadey and Metko, and terminates in a large lake called Fiddri,[118] in a kingdom called by the inhabitants Fiddri; by the people to the east of them, Cougu; and by those on the west, Lussi. The lake of Fiddri is four days in circumference, but in the time of the rains much more extensive, inundating the surrounding country, which, after the waters are withdrawn, is sown and cultivated.
“The river you call Niger—in Sudan, Gulbi, or Gaora; in Burnu, Zad; is a very large river, fed by over twelve other rivers. It originates from Timbuktu, as I've been told, flowing south of Hausa (or Sudan), within the Burnu empire; here it turns more southward and flows (at least no one I spoke to said otherwise) south of Darfur into the Nile. There’s another river coming from Darfur, which passes by Wadey and Metko, and ends in a large lake called Fiddri,[118] in a kingdom that the locals call Fiddri; the people to the east refer to it as Cougu; and those to the west call it Lussi. The lake of Fiddri is four days around, but during the rainy season, it's much larger, flooding the surrounding area, which, after the waters recede, is farmed and cultivated."
“Near to Mesna, the capital of Bergamé, is another large river; but it is considerable only in the rainy season. Bahr of Gazelles, or Wad-el-Gazelles, is not a river, but a long and fertile valley, inhabited by Nomadian Tibbo, whose houses are made of skins.
“Close to Mesna, the capital of Bergamé, there’s another big river; but it only really matters during the rainy season. Bahr of Gazelles, or Wad-el-Gazelles, isn’t actually a river, but a long and fertile valley that’s home to the Nomadian Tibbo, whose houses are made from skins.”
“Burnu is the most powerful kingdom in the interior of Africa. The next to it is the sultan of Asben, who resides at Agades. The kings of the countries of which Haussa consists, all pay tribute to Burnu; these are Kashna, Daura, Keeno, Sofau, Noro, Nyffé, Gaauri, Cabi, Guber, (Zanfara belongs to Guber.) Kashna pays every year 100 slaves, &c. Some of them pay to Burnu and Asben. The king of Asben with the greatest part of his nation are Tuaricks of the tribe Kolluvi. Many of the Tuaricks near to Tombuctoo, are white; and another tribe near to Burnu, are also white, like the Arabs of the northern coast of Africa.
Burnu is the most powerful kingdom in the interior of Africa. Next in line is the sultan of Asben, who lives in Agades. The kings of the countries that make up Haussa all pay tribute to Burnu; these include Kashna, Daura, Keeno, Sofau, Noro, Nyffé, Gaauri, Cabi, and Guber. (Zanfara is part of Guber.) Kashna pays 100 slaves annually, among other things. Some of them pay tribute to both Burnu and Asben. The king of Asben and most of his people are Tuaricks from the Kolluvi tribe. Many of the Tuaricks near Tombuctoo are white, and another tribe close to Burnu is also white, similar to the Arabs of the northern coast of Africa.
“Begarmé pays tribute to Burnu; Ungura, (doubtless Wangara, Leo. Afr.) and Cougu, are governed by officers of that sultan.
“Begarmé pays tribute to Burnu; Ungura, (likely Wangara, Leo. Afr.) and Cougu, are led by officials of that sultan.
“There is a general opinion of all Burnu and Fezzan people, that Burnu and Fezzan, according to our manner of speaking, lie under the same meridian. Burnu is distant from Kashna 15 days, by travelling very slow 20 fisturnees, or about 330 English miles. Fiddri from Burnu E by N 25 days. The people of Fiddri have no salt in their country, but what they prepare from straw ashes.
“There’s a common belief among the people of Burnu and Fezzan that Burnu and Fezzan, in our way of speaking, are on the same meridian. Burnu is about 15 days away from Kashna, traveling slowly at 20 fisturnees, which is roughly 330 English miles. Fiddri is located 25 days northeast of Burnu. The people of Fiddri don’t have any salt in their region, except for what they make from straw ashes.”
[119]“A great part of the people of Wadey, together with their king, are Arabs.
[119]“A large portion of the people of Wadey, along with their king, are Arabs.
“In the direction of south by west from Augila, distant ten days, or about 200 miles, are the Febabo, and some days more to the south the Birgu, nations of the Tibbo, whose country is very fine and fertile: they are said to be Pagans. It is singular, that the people of Augila, in speaking of these tribes, make much the same comparison which Herodotus (Melpom. c. 183.) does, when speaking of the Ethiopian Troglodytæ, hunted by the Garamantes, ‘that their language is like the whistling of birds.’
“Southwest from Augila, about ten days away or around 200 miles, are the Febabo, and a bit further south are the Birgu, tribes of the Tibbo, known for their beautiful, fertile land; they are said to be Pagans. Interestingly, the people of Augila make a similar comparison to these tribes as Herodotus (Melpom. c. 183.) does when talking about the Ethiopian Troglodytæ hunted by the Garamantes, saying that their language sounds like the whistling of birds.”
“The most interesting nation of Africa, is the Tuarick. (Leo Afr. calls them Terga, طرجي.) They are in possession of all the country between Fezzan, Gadames, the empire of Morocco, Tombuctoo, Soudan, Burnu, and the country of the Tibbo. They are divided into several nations, of which the Kolluvi in Asben, and the Hagara near to Fezzan, are the chief.
“The most interesting nation in Africa is the Tuarick. (Leo Afr. refers to them as Terga, طرجي.) They occupy all the land between Fezzan, Gadames, the empire of Morocco, Tombuctoo, Soudan, Burnu, and the territory of the Tibbo. They are divided into several nations, with the Kolluvi in Asben and the Hagara near Fezzan being the most prominent.”
“Christians and tailed men, I suppose, never will be found in the interior of Africa. The Mahometans call Nazari (which is properly the name for Christians) not the Christians only, but also every other people who are not of their religion. Of tailed men I heard no accounts, except from one person, (but not a testis fide dignissimus,) who placed them ten days south of Kano; he called them Yem Yem, and said that they were cannibals. In ten months I shall be near to that direction.
“Christians and people with tails, I guess, will never be found deep in Africa. The Muslims refer to Nazari (which is actually the term for Christians) not just for Christians, but for everyone who is not part of their faith. I only heard about tail-bearing people from one individual, (but not a very reliable source,) who said they lived ten days south of Kano; he called them Yem Yem and claimed they were cannibals. In ten months, I'll be heading that way.”
“I shall now, Sir, conclude this letter, which I hope will find you in good health. I am, &c. &c.
“I will now, Sir, wrap up this letter, which I hope finds you well. I am, etc. etc.”
“FREDERICK HORNEMAN.”
"Frederick Horneman."
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[121]Maps and Diagrams
OF
Mr. Horneman's route;
AND
ADDITIONS TO THE GENERAL GEOGRAPHY OF AFRICA.
BY
Major Rennell.
[123]CONSTRUCTION
OF THE
GEOGRAPHY OF MR. HORNEMAN’S
EXPEDITION
IN AFRICA.
[123]BUILDING
OF THE
GEOGRAPHY OF MR. HORNEMAN'S
EXPEDITION
IN AFRICA.
CHAPTER I.
In the discussion of the construction of this Geography, I shall confine myself, as much as possible, to general statements; reserving more particular details to a future time, when more materials may arrive: for it is to be observed that although Mr. Horneman has transmitted much valuable matter, yet that it is not altogether of the kind required for the construction of mathematical geography. Fortunately, however, the observations of Mr. Browne and others, enable me to derive more advantage from those of Mr. Horneman, than could have been obtained from them, alone.
In discussing the creation of this Geography, I'll focus mainly on general points, leaving more specific details for later when I have more information. It's worth noting that while Mr. Horneman has sent over a lot of useful data, it's not entirely the kind needed for making mathematical geography. Fortunately, the observations from Mr. Browne and others allow me to gain more insights from Mr. Horneman’s contributions than I could have gotten from them on their own.
The geographical positions of Cairo, Alexandria, and Fezzan, have undergone some small change in the present maps,[14] in consequence of recent, and it may be supposed, more accurate information. Cairo is placed 2 min. and Alexandria 13, more to the west, in consequence of the French observations: and Mourzouk, the[124] capital of Fezzan, 39 G. miles more to the south-east, on a general result of the authorities; amongst which Mr. Horneman’s is allowed its due weight. Some other trifling changes have been made, in the positions of Siwah, and of El Bareton, or Parætonium: but none of them are more than shades of difference, in respect of the geography at large.
The locations of Cairo, Alexandria, and Fezzan have seen some slight changes in current maps,[14] due to recent and presumably more accurate information. Cairo is now shown 2 minutes and Alexandria 13 minutes further west, based on French observations; Mourzouk, the[124] capital of Fezzan, is positioned 39 geographical miles further southeast, according to general consensus from various sources, including Mr. Horneman’s respected contributions. There have been a few other minor adjustments to the positions of Siwah and El Bareton, or Parætonium: however, these are just minor differences in the broader scope of geography.
The chief alteration is that of Mourzouk, which, by the former accounts, was said to lie directly south from Mesurata: and this alteration is grounded on the line of distance of Mr. Horneman, which does not allow of so great an interval between Egypt and Fezzan, as that position requires, by nearly 25 G. miles; which after all, is no great proportion, in more than 800. It is conceived that Mr. Horneman’s time, although kept in a coarse way, ought still to be preferred to the mere report of the bearing from Mesurata, on a distance of seventeen or eighteen journies.
The main change is the position of Mourzouk, which was previously described as directly south of Mesurata. This revision is based on the distance measured by Mr. Horneman, which suggests that the gap between Egypt and Fezzan is not as large as previously thought, by almost 25 geographical miles; however, this is a small fraction of the total distance of over 800. It is believed that Mr. Horneman’s timing, even though somewhat rough, should still be considered more reliable than just the reported direction from Mesurata over a journey of seventeen or eighteen trips.
I shall begin by tracing in detail the route of Mr. Horneman from Egypt to Fezzan, dividing it into four parts: 1. From Cairo to Siwah: 2. Siwah to Augila: 3. Augila to Fezzan: and 4. Remarks on the position of Mourzouk.
I will start by outlining in detail Mr. Horneman's journey from Egypt to Fezzan, breaking it down into four sections: 1. From Cairo to Siwah; 2. Siwah to Augila; 3. Augila to Fezzan; and 4. Comments on the location of Mourzouk.
I. Cairo to Siwah.
Mr. Horneman’s time may be taken at about 123 hours,[15] which at 2,05 G. miles, the ordinary caravan rate, reduced to direct distance, is equal to 252 G. miles. If taken at 2½ B. miles per hour, which is the ordinary road distance, with an allowance of ¹⁄₂₀ for inflexions,[125] (the Desert routes are remarkably straight,) we have 255. Now, Mr. Browne’s route, along the sea coast from Alexandria, and thence inland from the neighbourhood of Parætonium, gives about 259½, or 6½ more than the lowest of these calculations; 4½ more than the highest. Mr. Browne’s rout lay first along the coast, 75½ hours; from whence he made a course of about S 19 W (true) 62¼ hours, to Siwah, in the parallel of 29° 12′ by observation. Considering the sinuosities of the coast, which he kept to, almost the whole way, perhaps no more than 144, or 145 G. miles, ought to be allowed in direct distance.
Mr. Horneman’s travel time can be estimated at about 123 hours,[15] which, based on the standard caravan rate of 2.05 geographical miles, translates to approximately 252 geographical miles when adjusted for direct distance. If we calculate using 2½ British miles per hour, the usual road distance, and account for a ¹⁄₂₀ allowance for curves,[125] (the desert routes are quite straight), we get 255. In contrast, Mr. Browne’s route, starting along the sea coast from Alexandria and then moving inland from the vicinity of Parætonium, amounts to about 259½, which is 6½ more than the lowest of these estimates and 4½ more than the highest. Mr. Browne’s route initially followed the coast for 75½ hours; then he headed approximately S 19 W (true) for 62¼ hours to Siwah, at a latitude of 29° 12′ based on observations. Given the twists and turns of the coast he followed almost the entire way, a direct distance of no more than 144 or 145 geographical miles should be considered.
His station on the coast, at about 20 miles east of Parætonium, should be in lat. 31° 7′, according to M. D’Anville; so that the bearing of S 19 W cuts the parallel of Siwah, in longitude 26° 24′: and my former position of it, in the Geography of Herodotus, p. 574, is 26° 21′ 30″. And as Mr. Horneman does not profess to be perfectly accurate in his account of the time, (doubtless because he had lost his papers) I shall adopt the position given by[126] Mr. Browne; but which differs, as has been shewn, only 4½ miles from the other.
His location on the coast, about 20 miles east of Parætonium, should be at latitude 31° 7′, according to M. D’Anville; so that the bearing of S 19 W intersects the parallel of Siwah at longitude 26° 24′. My earlier position of it, found in the Geography of Herodotus, p. 574, is 26° 21′ 30″. Since Mr. Horneman doesn’t claim to be completely accurate in his account of the time (likely because he lost his papers), I will use the position provided by[126] Mr. Browne; however, this differs, as shown, by only 4½ miles from the other.
It is proper to be remarked, that the people of Siwah, report the distance of Cairo, from that place, to be twelve journies only: but it becomes necessary to inquire what kind of journies these are, in order to turn this, and other reports of the same kind to use. These journies then, are meant for those of light travellers, going few in number together; and not of caravans, where, amongst a number of camels, there must of course be some of slow pace, (to which the whole caravan must, of necessity, conform,) not to mention the increased number of delays by accidents. The people of Siwah reported the length of the following journies, which are in point:
It's worth noting that the people of Siwah claim the distance to Cairo is only twelve journeys away. However, we need to consider what kind of journeys they mean to make this and similar reports useful. These journeys refer to those made by small groups of light travelers, not by caravans, where there are bound to be some slow camels that the entire caravan has to accommodate, not to mention the extra delays caused by various issues. The people of Siwah reported the length of the following journeys, which are relevant:
Siwah to | Charje, in the Greater Oasis | 12 days. |
Derna | 14 | |
Faiume (through the Lesser Oasis) | 12 | |
Cairo | 12 |
A mean of these, gives about 20,6 per day; the journies to Charje and Faiume giving 19⅔, the others 21½.[16] As Siwah lies directly between Derna and the Greater Oasis, we have one line of 26 days, pretty satisfactorily determined in point of distance, and here the result is 20,6 also. Twelve such days would give only 247, of course, for the distance between Cairo and Siwah: so that a rate of 21½ is required. Pliny, lib. v. c. 9, reports twelve journies between Memphis and Ammon, requiring a rate of 21 per day.
Averages to about 20.6 per day; the trips to Charje and Faiume average 19⅔, while the others average 21½.[16] Since Siwah is directly between Derna and the Greater Oasis, we have one route of 26 days, which is fairly accurately determined in terms of distance, and here the result is also 20.6. Twelve such days would only give 247, of course, for the distance between Cairo and Siwah: so a rate of 21½ is necessary. Pliny, lib. v. c. 9, reports twelve trips between Memphis and Ammon, requiring a rate of 21 per day.
There is yet another statement of the distance, and that is, fifteen ordinary caravan journies, taken at 16¼ or 16½. The result is 247½; about equal to the 12 days of light travelling.
There’s another way to express the distance, which is fifteen regular caravan journeys, measured at 16¼ or 16½. The total comes to 247½; roughly the same as the 12 days of easy traveling.
[127]Possibly, I have taken the distance rather too high, at 259½; but I know not how to do away Mr. Browne’s line from the neighbourhood of Parætonium, considering that Mr. Horneman must have given his time from recollection. At all events, Siwah cannot be many miles out, in its longitude; but whilst the longitudes of the places on the sea coast remain in a state of uncertainty, one is not likely to get nearer the truth.
[127]Maybe I’ve set the distance a bit too high at 259½, but I can't ignore Mr. Browne's line near Parætonium, since Mr. Horneman must have based his measurements on memory. In any case, Siwah shouldn’t be too far off in its longitude; however, as long as the longitudes of the coastal locations are unclear, it’s unlikely we’ll get any closer to the truth.
Mr. Browne appears to have been 17 days from his station in lat. 28° 40′, and not far to the SW of Siwah, to Alexandria. A rate of 15⅓ miles is the result; but Mr. Browne being exceedingly ill, the whole way, it is most probable that his attendants relaxed in their speed.
Mr. Browne seems to have taken 17 days to travel from his location at lat. 28° 40′, not far southwest of Siwah, to Alexandria. This averages out to about 15⅓ miles per day; however, since Mr. Browne was extremely ill the entire time, it's likely that his companions slowed down their pace.
II. Siwah to Augila.
Mr. Horneman’s time from Siwah to Augila is 87½ hours,[17] which, at 2,05 G. miles, give 179,35: but taken on the road distance at 2½ B. miles, as before, 181½. Taken on Horneman’s 11 mean days, at 16½, it is also 181½. The Arabian geographers reckon it 10 days, implied of 19 G. miles each, equal to 190. Herodotus also allows 10 days between Ammon and Augila.
Mr. Horneman's travel time from Siwah to Augila is 87½ hours,[17] which, at 2.05 G. miles, equals 179.35. However, if we consider the road distance at 2.5 B. miles, as before, it becomes 181½. Based on Horneman’s 11 mean days, at 16½, it is also 181½. The Arabian geographers estimate it at 10 days, implying 19 G. miles each day, totaling 190. Herodotus also states that it takes 10 days to travel between Ammon and Augila.
It is certain, that Mr. Beaufoy’s MSS. allow 13 days by the route of Gegabib (the Valley of Dates), which, by Mr. Browne’s information, lies to the NW of Siwah, whilst the ordinary route, by Schiacha,[128] leads by the west; but we can hardly suppose that the northern road is two days farther about than the other. Mr. Horneman, it is true, lost his papers at Schiacha, and may not have recollected the exact account of time during the three first days, to that place. I have accordingly allowed 186, as a mean between Mr. Horneman and Edrisi.
It’s clear that Mr. Beaufoy’s manuscripts indicate that it takes 13 days via the route of Gegabib (the Valley of Dates), which, according to Mr. Browne, is located to the northwest of Siwah, while the usual route through Schiacha,[128] goes to the west. However, we can hardly believe that the northern road is two days longer than the other. It is true that Mr. Horneman lost his papers at Schiacha and may not have remembered the exact timing for the first three days to that point. Therefore, I’ve settled on 186 as an average between Mr. Horneman and Edrisi.
Mr. Horneman could not obtain a satisfactory account of the distance between Augila and Bengasi, on the sea coast. Edrisi allows 10 days from Barca; but these, reckoned at 19 each, meet the line from Siwah, in 30° 7′, which gives a bearing of W 18° N from the latter; whereas it seems to be the universal opinion, that they lie nearly in the same parallel.[18]
Mr. Horneman couldn't get a clear idea of the distance between Augila and Bengasi along the coast. Edrisi suggests it's a 10-day journey from Barca, but if you consider those days as 19 each, they intersect the line from Siwah at 30° 7′, giving a direction of W 18° N from there. However, it seems everyone agrees that they are almost on the same parallel.[18]
Delisle and D’Anville go much beyond Edrisi’s distance. The latter allows 215 from Barca, which is very probable: and he may perhaps have allowed it from the relations of modern travellers. I have accordingly adopted it; and it meets the line of 186 from Siwah, in lat. 29° 30′, lon. 22° 50′. In this position it bears about W ½ N from Siwah.
Delisle and D'Anville go much further than Edrisi's distance. Edrisi states 215 from Barca, which is quite likely; he may have gotten that from the accounts of modern travelers. I have taken this into consideration, and it aligns with the line of 186 from Siwah, at lat. 29° 30′, lon. 22° 50′. In this location, it is positioned about W ½ N from Siwah.
Ptolemy allows 3° 16′ diff. lat. between Derna (Darnis) and Augila, which would place the latter, on our Map, in 29½°. He also makes the line of bearing between Ammon and Augila to be nearly parallel to the sea coast, between Parætonium and Derna; and it is certain, although Ptolemy thought otherwise, that the coast lies much to the north of west.
Ptolemy allows for a 3° 16′ difference in latitude between Derna (Darnis) and Augila, which would place Augila at 29½° on our map. He also states that the bearing line between Ammon and Augila runs nearly parallel to the coastline between Parætonium and Derna; however, it’s clear, even though Ptolemy believed otherwise, that the coast is actually much further north of west.
It may be that the longitudes of the places on the coast of Barca,[129] are too far to the west, in M. D’Anville’s Maps. Lucas appears to reckon Augila 11 days only, from Bengasi.
It might be that the longitudes of the locations along the coast of Barca,[129] are too far west in M. D’Anville’s maps. Lucas seems to calculate that Augila is only 11 days away from Bengasi.
III. Augila to Fezzan.
From Augila to Fezzan, Mr. Horneman’s time is not kept regularly in hours, the whole way; owing, perhaps, to the excessive fatigues he underwent in the Harutsch or Black Desert, in which whole days only, are given; but these were exceedingly long, being usually from morning till night.
From Augila to Fezzan, Mr. Horneman didn’t keep regular hours the entire way; probably due to the extreme exhaustion he experienced in the Harutsch or Black Desert, where only whole days are accounted for; but those days were quite long, usually lasting from morning until night.
All that could be done, was, to reduce these particular days to hours, and add them to the enumerated hours in the Journal; whence there results a total of 195 to 196 hours, at the highest calculation: and these, with proper deductions for the badness of the paths, in the Harutsch, may be taken at 395 G. miles in direct distance.[19]
All that could be done was to convert these specific days into hours and add them to the enumerated hours in the Journal; this leads to a total of 195 to 196 hours, at most. With proper deductions for the poor conditions of the paths in the Harutsch, this can be considered as 395 G. miles in a straight line.[19]
[130]M. Delisle states the distance at about 405, or 10 more than the above result. He probably collected it from the Journals of modern travellers, as the Arabian geographers allow no less than twenty of their journies between Augila and Zuila, which place is about 60 G. miles short of Mourzouk.
[130]M. Delisle mentions the distance is around 405, or 10 more than the earlier figure. He likely gathered this from the journals of current travelers, since Arabian geographers recognize at least twenty of their journeys between Augila and Zuila, which is about 60 geographical miles shorter than Mourzouk.
I shall here set forth the reports of divers persons, respecting the distance between Cairo and Fezzan; which has been taken above, chiefly on the report of Mr. Horneman: and, when reduced to a straight line comes out 829 G. miles.
I will now present the accounts of various individuals regarding the distance between Cairo and Fezzan; this information has been primarily gathered from Mr. Horneman's report: when calculated as a straight line, it measures 829 geographical miles.
Messrs. Browne and Ledyard state the distance to be fifty caravan days; which at 16½, give 825 G. miles.
Messrs. Browne and Ledyard say the distance is fifty caravan days; which at 16½, amounts to 825 geographical miles.
Edrisi allows forty journies, between Cairo and Tamest (Temissa). These, at 19 each, are equal to 760 G. miles: to which, if 73 are added, as Horneman allows, from Temissa to Mourzouk, the total is 833. This route leads through Bahnasa, in the Lesser Oasis; and, by circumstances, near Siwah also; as a river occurs at eight days from Bahnasa. Thence it goes to the south of Augila, and by Seluban, which may be intended for the Plain of Sultin.[20]
Edrisi lists forty journeys between Cairo and Tamest (Temissa). Each journey covers 19 G. miles, totaling 760 miles. If we add 73 miles from Temissa to Mourzouk, as Horneman states, the grand total comes to 833 miles. This route passes through Bahnasa in the Lesser Oasis and, due to certain conditions, also near Siwah, since there's a river about eight days from Bahnasa. From there, it travels south of Augila and by Seluban, which might refer to the Plain of Sultin.[20]
It is obvious, that if Augila should lie yet more to the south, or nearer in a line between Cairo and Fezzan, this would lengthen the given line of distance; and that by 10 or 12 miles.
It’s clear that if Augila were located further south, or directly between Cairo and Fezzan, it would increase the distance by about 10 to 12 miles.
[131]The comparison of the different authorities, then, is as follows:
[131]The comparison of the various authorities, then, is as follows:
By Horneman, | 829 | ⎱ ⎰ |
mean 827 |
By Browne and Ledyard, | 825 | ||
By Edrisi, (direct) | 833 | ||
By Edrisi and Abulfeda, reckoned from Siwah only, and thence through Augila and Zala | 877 | ||
By the bearing and distance from Mesurata | 854[21] |
Thus Horneman’s account falls short of the interval between Cairo and Mourzouk, when the latter is placed in reference to Mesurata, by 25 miles only; and the reported caravan distance falls only four short of Horneman’s. The reports of the Arabian geographers ought not to be put in competition with either.
Thus Horneman’s account is off by just 25 miles regarding the distance between Cairo and Mourzouk when Mourzouk is referenced from Mesurata; and the reported distance for the caravan is only four miles less than Horneman’s. The accounts from the Arabian geographers shouldn’t be compared with either.
IV. Respecting the Position of Mourzouk, Capital of Fezzan.
Mr. Horneman in his Journal transmitted from Tripoly, states the latitude of Mourzouk, by observation, to be 25° 54′ 15″; a parallel so different from the result of the other authorities, that it becomes necessary to examine those authorities, minutely. The reported observation, differs nearly two degrees from the parallel assigned it in the Proceedings of the Association printed in 1798. Without attempting to account for so great an (apparent) error, I shall proceed to adduce the authorities for its parallel, as assumed in the present map.
Mr. Horneman, in his Journal sent from Tripoly, reports that the latitude of Mourzouk, based on his observations, is 25° 54′ 15″; a figure so different from other sources that it’s essential to closely examine those sources. The reported observation is nearly two degrees off from the latitude given in the Proceedings of the Association published in 1798. Without trying to explain such a significant (apparent) error, I will proceed to present the sources for its latitude, as assumed in the current map.
1. Mr. Beaufoy, from the information of certain Tripoline merchants, has given 17½ journies of the caravan, in a direct south[132] bearing, from Mesurata on the sea coast.[22] These journies are given at 8 hours, or 20 British miles per day: and I allowed for them 15 geographical miles, in direct distance; but I shall now, finding by experience that the paths in the Desert are generally very straight, allow 16½; whence the 17½ days will be found to produce 288¾, or say 289 G. miles. If these miles were entirely difference of latitude, Mourzouk would not be lower than 27° 22′ 2″, as Mesurata is said to lie in 32° 10′.
1. Mr. Beaufoy, based on information from some Tripoline merchants, has reported 17½ days of caravan travel directly south from Mesurata on the coast. These journeys are calculated at 8 hours, or 20 British miles per day: I accounted for 15 geographical miles in straight distance; however, I’ve learned from experience that the paths in the Desert are usually quite straight, so I will now allow for 16½. Therefore, the 17½ days will amount to 288¾, or about 289 geographical miles. If these miles were purely a difference in latitude, Mourzouk wouldn’t be lower than 27° 22′ 2″, since Mesurata is said to be at 32° 10′.
2. Another authority adduced by the same gentleman, allows 23 days from Tripoly, by the way of Gwarian and Sockna, which turns out much the same as the former result. The distance from Tripoly to Fezzan, through Mesurata, is 24½ days; consequently that by Sockna, is the shortest, although now generally disused, on account of its being unsafe.[23]
2. Another source cited by the same person suggests it takes 23 days from Tripoli via Gwarian and Sockna, which is pretty similar to the previous finding. The distance from Tripoli to Fezzan through Mesurata is 24½ days; therefore, the Sockna route is the shortest, although it's mostly avoided these days due to safety concerns.[23]
The intersection of the two lines of distance from Augila and Mesurata; that is, 395 G. miles from the former, and 289 from the latter, place Mourzouk in latitude 27° 23′; and at 30 G. miles east of the meridian of Mesurata. Consequently, the bearing will be about S. ½ E, instead of south, as reported.
The intersection of the two distances from Augila and Mesurata—395 geographical miles from the first and 289 from the second—places Mourzouk at latitude 27° 23′ and 30 geographical miles east of the meridian of Mesurata. Therefore, the direction will be approximately S. ½ E, instead of just south as previously reported.
3. Edrisi says, that the distance from Sort to Zuila, is nine journies, which, on his scale of 19 per day, are equal to 171 G. miles: and Abulfeda says that they lie N. and S. from each other. Zuila is a point in Horneman’s route, about 60 G. miles to the E by N or ENE of Mourzouk: and Sort, according to M. D’Anville, lies in about 30° 28′. Consequently, Zuila, if in the same meridian, should be in[133] latitude 27° 37′, or 14 min. to the N. of Mourzouk. By the construction, Zuila bears about S 7° W from Sort, which, in respect of the difference of latitude, is much the same thing: and hence, Mourzouk ought not to be to the south of 27° 23′, or thereabouts.
3. Edrisi states that the distance from Sort to Zuila is nine trips, which, based on his scale of 19 per day, equals 171 geographical miles. Abulfeda mentions that they are located north and south of each other. Zuila is a point on Horneman’s route, about 60 geographical miles east by north or ENE of Mourzouk. According to M. D’Anville, Sort is positioned at about 30° 28′. Therefore, if Zuila is on the same meridian, it should be at a latitude of 27° 37′, or 14 minutes north of Mourzouk. Based on this, Zuila is about S 7° W from Sort, which, considering the latitude difference, is essentially the same. Thus, Mourzouk should not be located south of approximately 27° 23′.
4. Ledyard was told, that Augila lay west from Siwah; and Wadan, (or Zala,) in the way to Fezzan, WSW from Augila. Horneman gives much the same idea; saying that they went W by S from Augila, at setting out. Unfortunately, Mr. Horneman omits to state the distance between Fezzan and Tripoly, although he travelled it.
4. Ledyard was told that Augila was west of Siwah; and Wadan, (or Zala), was on the route to Fezzan, WSW from Augila. Horneman expresses a similar thought, mentioning that they traveled W by S from Augila when they started. Unfortunately, Mr. Horneman fails to mention the distance between Fezzan and Tripoly, even though he traveled that distance.
5. Zala, (called also Wadan,[24]) is said by Edrisi, page 40, to be nine days SE from Sort; and midway between Augila and Zuila; that is ten days from both.[25] A glance at the map will shew how utterly improbable it is, that Mourzouk should be below the parallel of 26°, considering its relative situation to Wadan and Zuila.
5. Zala, also known as Wadan,[24] is described by Edrisi on page 40 as being nine days southeast of Sort; and halfway between Augila and Zuila, which is ten days from both.[25] A look at the map will show how totally unlikely it is that Mourzouk is below the 26° parallel, given its position relative to Wadan and Zuila.
Lastly, if it be admitted that Fezzan is the country of the Garamantes, (and I know not where else to look for it, according to the ancient descriptions,) then, its distance from the sea coast, as stated by Strabo, p. 835, at nine or ten days journey, agrees exactly, if reckoned to Garama, the ancient capital. Pliny confirms it strongly, by placing the Garamantes beyond the Mons Ater, (of which more,[134] under the article Harutsch,) which will be proved clearly to mean the rocky Desert of Souda, between Fezzan and Mesurata.
Lastly, if we accept that Fezzan is the land of the Garamantes (and I don't see where else it could be based on the ancient descriptions), then its distance from the coast, as mentioned by Strabo, p. 835, being a nine or ten days' journey, matches perfectly if we measure it to Garama, the ancient capital. Pliny strongly supports this by stating that the Garamantes are beyond the Mons Ater (which will be discussed more,[134] under the article Harutsch), which will clearly be shown to refer to the rocky Desert of Souda, located between Fezzan and Mesurata.
It should be remarked, that this alteration in the position of Mourzouk, which is about 39 miles to the SE of its position in the map of 1798, does not, in any material degree, affect the interval of space between it and Tombuctoo.[26]
It should be noted that this change in the location of Mourzouk, which is about 39 miles southeast of where it was shown on the 1798 map, doesn't significantly impact the distance between it and Tombuctoo.[26]
[135]CHAPTER II.
General Remarks on the Countries, in the Line of Mr. Horneman’s Route.
General Remarks on the Countries along Mr. Horneman’s Route.
I shall next proceed to offer some geographical, and other, remarks, on certain of the subjects that present themselves in and about the line of Mr. Horneman’s route; as, 1. The Bahr-bela-ma, and Valley of Mogara. 2. Siwah. 3. The Lesser Oasis. 4. The Valleys of Schiacha and Gegabib. 5. Augila. 6. The Harutsch. 7. Fezzan and Gadamis.
I will now move on to share some geographical and other observations about certain topics related to Mr. Horneman’s route, including: 1. The Bahr-bela-ma and Valley of Mogara. 2. Siwah. 3. The Lesser Oasis. 4. The Valleys of Schiacha and Gegabib. 5. Augila. 6. The Harutsch. 7. Fezzan and Gadamis.
I. The Bahr-bela-ma, and Valley of Mogara.
The term Bahr is well known to signify (in Arabic) an expanse of water, whether sea, lake, or river: and Bahr-bela-ma, a hollow space that is supposed to have contained them: in other words, the sea, lake, or river, without water. In its application to the present subject, it has been understood by some great authorities, to be the ancient bed of a river; and that river, the Nile of Egypt; which they suppose to have quitted its present course, at Benjusef, and, passing through the province of Faiume, and the lake Kairun, entered the sea at the Gulf of the Arabs. Having already given an opinion on this subject, I shall say no more concerning it in this place, than that it is by no means weakened by any thing that has appeared since: that opinion was, “that in ancient times the bed of the[136] Nile lay lower than the province of Faiume:” and it is certain, that the gap, or outlet at Sakkara, is still above the level of the Nile.
The term Bahr is widely recognized in Arabic to mean an area of water, whether it’s a sea, lake, or river: and Bahr-bela-ma refers to an empty space that is thought to have held them: in other words, the sea, lake, or river without water. In relation to the current topic, some prominent experts have interpreted it as the ancient riverbed; and that river is the Nile of Egypt, which they believe changed its course at Benjusef, flowing through the province of Faiume, and the lake Kairun, before entering the sea at the Gulf of the Arabs. Having already shared my thoughts on this matter, I won’t elaborate further here, except to note that my opinion remains unshaken by any new information: that opinion was, “that in ancient times the bed of the [136] Nile was lower than the province of Faiume:” and it is clear that the gap, or outlet at Sakkara, is still above the level of the Nile.
Mr. Horneman’s observations, added to those of General Andreossy, and of Mr. Browne, throw some further light on the course of the hollow bed, or channel in question.
Mr. Horneman’s observations, along with those of General Andreossy and Mr. Browne, provide additional insight into the path of the hollow bed, or channel in question.
It appears that the General, as well as Mr. Browne,[27] came to the Natron Valley at about 32 G. miles to the westward of Terané: and that the General also found, adjacent to it, on the west, separated only by a narrow ridge, a second and larger valley, which the Arabs name Bahr-bela-ma; and also Bahr-el-farigh, which signifies the empty river. These he found to run parallel to each other, in a direction of about NNW ½ W and SSE ½ E, for about 30 miles; and without any appearance of termination, either way. The Natron Valley, he reckons 2½ French leagues, or about 6½ G. miles, in breadth; the other, 3 leagues, or 7¾ such miles; or, both together, from one extreme to the other, more than 14¼. See the Mémoires, p. 239, 240, and also the map.
It seems that the General and Mr. Browne came to the Natron Valley, located about 32 geographic miles to the west of Terané. The General also discovered a second, larger valley nearby to the west, separated only by a narrow ridge, which the Arabs call Bahr-bela-ma and Bahr-el-farigh, meaning the empty river. He noted that these valleys run parallel to each other in a direction of about NNW ½ W and SSE ½ E for approximately 30 miles, with no visible end in either direction. The Natron Valley is approximately 2½ French leagues or about 6½ geographic miles wide; the other valley is about 3 leagues or 7¾ such miles; together, they span more than 14¼ miles from one end to the other. See the Mémoires, p. 239, 240, and also the map.
Mr. Horneman, in his way westward from Cairo, passed the Natron Valley, at the distance of about 40 G. miles from Cairo; and, by circumstances, not more than 9 or 10 from the extreme southern part seen by General Andreossy. At the distance of about 8 miles from the Natron Valley he descended, and came to what he calls the foot of a sand hill; but it being dark, he could not form[137] any idea of the place itself, or of the adjacent country: he however observes, that it will be proper for future travellers to look in this place, for the course of the Bahr-bela-ma: doubtless, because he found a deep and capacious hollow; but concerning which, he gives no farther intimation. Adverting, therefore, to the description of General Andreossy, I regard the sand hill rather as the ridge that separates the two valleys or hollows, than as the thing Mr. Horneman took it for. He says, that they descended the sand hill, in indescribable disorder;[28] which seems to imply a long, as well as a steep descent: and, leaving the place, before it was light enough to form a judgment of the nature of it, he only directs the attention of others to it: surely, because it was a hollow tract.
Mr. Horneman, on his way west from Cairo, passed the Natron Valley, which is about 40 geographical miles from Cairo, and, due to circumstances, only about 9 or 10 from the southernmost part observed by General Andreossy. Approximately 8 miles from the Natron Valley, he descended and arrived at what he refers to as the foot of a sand hill; however, it was dark, and he couldn't get a clear picture of the area or the surrounding landscape. He does note that future travelers should check this spot for the course of the Bahr-bela-ma, likely because he discovered a deep and wide hollow there, but he doesn't provide any more details on that. Referring back to General Andreossy’s description, I see the sand hill more as the ridge separating the two valleys or hollows rather than what Mr. Horneman thought it was. He mentions that they descended the sand hill in indescribable chaos;[28] which suggests a long and steep descent: and after leaving the location, before there was enough light to assess it properly, he only suggests others take note of it, likely because it was a sunken area.
It may be allowed, therefore, that the Bahr-bela-ma and Natron Valleys extend 40 or more G. miles, pointing northward to the Lake Mareotis, or to the Gulf of the Arabs; and on the other hand, towards the quarter of the lake of Kairun; from whence they seem to be less than 30 miles distant.
It can be accepted that the Bahr-bela-ma and Natron Valleys extend 40 or more geographical miles, pointing north toward Lake Mareotis or the Gulf of the Arabs; and on the other hand, toward the area of Lake Kairun, from which they appear to be less than 30 miles away.
The four hours of travelling, between the station at the Natron Valley, and the foot of the sand hill, does not ill agree with the ground. The breadth of the Natron Valley, 6½ G. miles, is, reckoning the ascent on the west, equal to 3¼ hours travelling; and General Andreossy says, that he was 40 minutes in descending the slope, to the bottom of the Bahr-bela-ma. (Mem. p. 240.) Here then we have made out nearly the four hours: besides, it is not certain that the hollows may not have been crossed obliquely, by Mr. Horneman.
The four hours of travel between the station at Natron Valley and the base of the sand hill actually lines up pretty well with the terrain. The width of Natron Valley, 6½ geographic miles, adds up to about 3¼ hours of travel when you factor in the climb on the west side. General Andreossy mentions that it took him 40 minutes to go down the slope to the bottom of Bahr-bela-ma. (Mem. p. 240.) So, we’re close to the four-hour mark here; plus, it’s not clear if Mr. Horneman might have crossed the dips at an angle.
It appears that M. D’Anville believed the existence of, and has expressed on his map of Egypt, a hollow or valley, extending the[138] whole way from the lake Kairun, to the neighbourhood of the Gulf of the Arabs. The French, it seems, have never had an opportunity of determining the questions; which appears extraordinary. I shall now proceed to the description of another valley, which may possibly be a branch of the Bahr-bela-ma.
It seems that M. D’Anville thought there was a hollow or valley that stretched all the way from Lake Kairun to the area near the Gulf of the Arabs, as shown on his map of Egypt. The French apparently haven’t had a chance to investigate these questions, which is quite surprising. Now, I’ll move on to describe another valley that might be a branch of the Bahr-bela-ma.
Valley of Mogara.
Mr. Horneman states, that the morning on which he left the foot of the sand hill, he entered the Desert which may be considered as “the natural limit of Egypt.” This Desert extends more than 150 G. miles from east to west: its extent southward, is not known, but it probably borders on the Lesser Oasis. Whether it be a part of that great sandy desert of twelve journies across, between the Greater Oasis and Siwah, Mr. Horneman had no opportunity of knowing; as he remained in uncertainty respecting the course of the Ummesogeir hills, southward.
Mr. Horneman says that on the morning he left the foot of the sand hill, he entered the desert, which can be considered “the natural boundary of Egypt.” This desert stretches more than 150 geographic miles from east to west; its southern extent is unknown, but it likely borders the Lesser Oasis. Mr. Horneman had no chance to determine if it’s part of the massive sandy desert that spans twelve journeys between the Greater Oasis and Siwah, as he was uncertain about the direction of the Ummesogeir hills to the south.
This Desert, perfectly flat, and covered with shifting sand, is bounded northward by a chain of bare calcareous hills, running nearly east and west, in the line of our traveller’s route. On the side towards the Desert, they are steep, and are bordered by a remarkable valley or hollow, known to extend from the neighbourhood of the Bahr-bela-ma, to the length of a journey of seven days westward. Its breadth is from one mile, to six; it had much standing water in it, at certain seasons; but when Mr. Horneman saw it (in September 1798,) it had only some small lakes or ponds, at intervals; and in several places, tracts of marshy or swampy land, extending for several miles together. The water of the pools was bitter; but sweet water was found close to them, on digging to the depth of four to six feet. (See above, p. 10.) The caravans in this route, keep along the edge of the valley, availing themselves of its[139] resources of water, every two or three days; but preferring the sandy path, as being best adapted to the feet of the camels.
This Desert, completely flat and covered with shifting sand, is bordered to the north by a series of bare limestone hills that run almost east to west along our traveler's route. On the side facing the Desert, the hills are steep and surrounded by a notable valley or depression, known to stretch from the vicinity of the Bahr-bela-ma to about a seven-day journey to the west. Its width varies from one to six miles; it often has standing water during certain seasons, but when Mr. Horneman visited in September 1798, it only had some small lakes or ponds at intervals, along with several patches of marshy or swampy land stretching for miles. The water in the pools was salty, but fresh water could be found nearby by digging about four to six feet deep. (See above, p. 10.) The caravans on this route travel along the edge of the valley, taking advantage of its water resources every two to three days, while still favoring the sandy path as it's better suited for the camels' feet.
How far the valley extends westwards, is not known to us: whether it terminates at the place where Mr. Horneman ascended the hills of Ummesogeir, (which form a continuation of the range of calcareous hills before-mentioned;) or whether it communicates with those valleys, which contain the Greater or Lesser Oasis. Be it as it will, it seems to partake of the nature of those valleys; being situated at the foot of steep calcareous hills, and below the level of the flat Desert beneath them. It is remarked, that the steep sides of all these ranges face the south or west.[29] In one particular, however, this valley of Mogara, differs very widely from those which contain the Oasis, (although it seems very much akin to that of Schiacha; of which more in the sequel,) in that no water springs up to the surface; to which cause we may probably attribute the absence of such tracts of land, as are denominated Oases. The springs indeed, appear to me, to be a characteristic feature of the Oases.
How far the valley stretches westward is unknown to us: whether it ends where Mr. Horneman climbed the hills of Ummesogeir (which are connected to the previously mentioned calcareous hills) or if it links up with those valleys that contain the Greater or Lesser Oasis. Regardless, it seems to share characteristics with those valleys; it sits at the base of steep calcareous hills and is below the level of the flat desert beneath them. It’s noted that the steep sides of all these ranges face south or west.[29] However, this valley of Mogara differs significantly from those that contain the Oasis (although it feels quite similar to that of Schiacha; more on that later) in that no water springs to the surface. This may explain the lack of areas commonly referred to as Oases. In fact, the springs seem to be a defining feature of the Oases.
We learn a curious particular from General Andreossy, whilst speaking of the Bahr-bela-ma. He says, (Mém. sur l’Egypte, p. 246,) that the people of Terané on the Nile, transport from a valley situated three days journey beyond the Bahr-bela-ma, a species of rushes, which are manufactured into mats at Menouf, in the Delta. The General supposes the place in question to be a continuation of the Bahr-bela-ma, into the interior of Africa; and indeed it may well be, that the valley of Mogara is a branch of the former: separating from it, at, or near, the place where Mr. Horneman[140] crossed it. The place alluded to by the General, may be about Biljoradek, and in one of the swampy tracts spoken of above: or if the three journies are meant from Terané, as is not impossible, that it will be about Mogara. At all events, we must regard this valley as the place intended by General Andreossy.
We discover an interesting detail from General Andreossy while he talks about the Bahr-bela-ma. He mentions (Mém. sur l’Egypte, p. 246) that the people of Terané on the Nile transport a type of rushes from a valley located a three-day journey past the Bahr-bela-ma, which are then made into mats at Menouf in the Delta. The General thinks this location might be an extension of the Bahr-bela-ma into the interior of Africa, and it’s quite possible that the valley of Mogara is a branch of the former, separating from it around the point where Mr. Horneman[140] crossed it. The spot the General refers to could be around Biljoradek, within one of the swampy areas mentioned earlier; or if the three journeys refer to Terané, as is also possible, it could be near Mogara. In any case, we should consider this valley as the one intended by General Andreossy.
This gentleman’s description of the Bahr-bela-ma is well worthy of attention, but is too long to be inserted here. He found in it, petrified wood, of the same kind with that seen by Horneman, in the adjacent sandy Desert:[30] but both of them remark, that the wood has not any mark of a tool on it, as some have fancifully imagined, and have thence regarded the valley as an ancient bed of the Nile, deserted about the date of the foundation of Memphis.
This gentleman's description of the Bahr-bela-ma is definitely worth noting, but it's too lengthy to include here. He discovered petrified wood, similar to what Horneman noticed in the nearby sandy desert:[30] but both of them point out that the wood shows no signs of being worked by tools, as some have fancifully suggested, and have therefore considered the valley to be an ancient riverbed of the Nile, abandoned around the time Memphis was founded.
No doubt the hollow in question very much resembles a water-course, both as to form, and from its having pebbles in it; but where is the body of fresh water that could have scooped it out, or have filled it? General Andreossy reckons it nearly nine British miles in breadth, and exceedingly deep; and the Nile does not at any time carry a body of water, equal to one mile in breadth! What the state of things was, at an earlier period of the world, we know not, but within the reach of history, the Nile appears to have been much of the same bulk, as at present.
No doubt the hollow in question looks a lot like a stream, both in shape and because it has pebbles in it; but where is the body of fresh water that could have carved it out or filled it? General Andreossy estimates it to be nearly nine British miles wide and extremely deep; yet the Nile never carries a flow of water that is even a mile wide! We don’t know what things were like at an earlier time in the world, but within the scope of history, the Nile seems to have been about the same size as it is today.
But this is not the only difficulty. The province of Faiume, through which the supposed issue of the Nile must have been, is separated from the valley of the Nile, by a continuation of the ridge of hills that forms the western wall of Egypt; and through which, (if I understand the matter right,) the passage to the lake of Kairun, by Illahon and Hawara, has been made by art. At all events, this[141] canal or passage cannot be regarded as the continuation of the ancient bed of the Nile from Upper Egypt into the Bahr-bela-ma, because of its confined dimensions: and of course, all idea of the Nile having detached a western branch, or thrown itself into the bed of the lake of Kairun and Bahr-bela-ma, is done away; for even admitting the continuity of these, the hollow that contains the lake, and also constitutes the province of Faiume, must be regarded as a kind of cul de sac to the Bahr-bela-ma, whilst the hills by Illahon existed. And hence I took occasion to remark, elsewhere,[31] that it is possible, that the famous work of the lake Moeris, which now forms a kind of enigma amongst the learned, might have been formed by the very act of cutting through a low part of the western wall of Egypt, and letting the water into the hollow space which now contains the lake of Kairun. But had the Nile ever formed its alluvions adjacent to the Gulf of the Arabs, there would surely be some traces of them remaining, either along the shore, or in the sea itself.
But this isn’t the only issue. The Faiume region, through which the supposed outlet of the Nile must have been, is separated from the Nile valley by a ridge of hills that acts as the western boundary of Egypt. From what I understand, the route to Lake Kairun, through Illahon and Hawara, has been created artificially. In any case, this[141] canal or passage can’t be seen as a continuation of the ancient Nile bed from Upper Egypt into Bahr-bela-ma due to its narrow size; therefore, the idea that the Nile split off a western branch or flowed into the lake of Kairun and Bahr-bela-ma is eliminated. Even if we accept the connection of these, the depression that holds the lake and also makes up the Faiume province must be seen as a sort of cul de sac to Bahr-bela-ma while the hills by Illahon were present. This led me to comment elsewhere,[31] that it’s possible the famous construction of Lake Moeris, which is now somewhat of a mystery among scholars, was created by cutting through a lower part of the western wall of Egypt and allowing water to flow into the depression that now holds Lake Kairun. But if the Nile had ever deposited its silt near the Gulf of the Arabs, there would undoubtedly be some traces of it left, either along the shore or in the sea itself.
It may be remarked, that there are other valleys or hollows along the course of the Nile, almost equally extensive with that of Faiume, but to whose level the Nile is not yet risen. And here it may not be out of the way to repeat what has been said in another place,[32] that although the Nile in these times, when swoln, flows into the lake Kairun, yet there must have been a time, when its bed was too low to reach it: for it cannot be doubted, that its bed has been gradually rising, by deposition; a necessary effect of the protrusion of the lands of the Delta into the sea: and, of course, that it will continue to rise.[33]
It can be noted that there are other valleys or depressions along the Nile that are almost as extensive as Faiume, but the Nile hasn't risen to their level yet. It’s worth mentioning again what has been said elsewhere,[32] that while the Nile, during its swollen state, flows into Lake Kairun, there must have been a time when its bed was too low to reach it. It’s clear that the riverbed has been gradually rising due to sediment deposition, which is a natural result of the Delta's land pushing into the sea; and, of course, it will continue to rise.[33]
[142]The progress of the moving sands of Lybia, eastward, into the Bahr-bela-ma, &c. is treated of by General Andreossy, Mem. page 247, and is also well worthy of attention. This movement appears to take place, very generally; and Mr. Horneman remarks, that in their line of course, every obstruction gives rise to a sand hill; but he more particularly remarks a smaller kind of sand hill, formed by the obstruction of the trunks of palm trees; and so high as to leave to the view, nothing more than the topmost branches.
[142]The movement of the shifting sands of Libya, moving eastward into the Bahr-bela-ma, etc., is discussed by General Andreossy in his Memoirs, page 247, and is definitely worth noting. This movement seems to happen quite frequently; Mr. Horneman points out that along their path, any obstacle results in a sand hill. He specifically notes a smaller type of sand hill formed by the blockage created by palm tree trunks, which can be tall enough to hide everything from view except for the tips of the branches.
II. Siwah.
The geographical position of this remarkable place, considered generally, cannot now be questioned; since we possess, in addition to the information communicated by Mr. Browne, that of Mr. Horneman; both in respect of the time employed on his way thither, and of the reports of the natives, concerning its relative position to Cairo, the Oases, Faiume, and Derna: and when it is considered that these new authorities differ from the former ones, by a few minutes of longitude only.
The geographical location of this remarkable place is now widely accepted; we have, in addition to the information shared by Mr. Browne, details from Mr. Horneman regarding the time he took to get there and the reports from the locals about its position relative to Cairo, the Oases, Faiume, and Derna. When you note that these new sources differ from the earlier ones by just a few minutes of longitude, it further solidifies the accuracy.
The report of Mr. Horneman is no less favourable to the former idea, of its being the Oasis of Ammon; and the remains of the Egyptian structure within it, those of the famed Temple of Jupiter Ammon: the honour of which original discovery is due to Mr. Browne. For, in addition to what may be deemed the inner temple, Mr. Horneman has viewed the foundations indicated by Mr. Browne, in circumference some hundred paces; and even some remains of the walls themselves, of what may be supposed to have been the including temple; the materials of which are probably existing in the construction of the stone houses of a town, estimated to contain[143] a population of six to seven thousand[34] persons. We need no longer to entertain a doubt, founded on the disappearance of the materials of the temple and palace described by the ancients. Besides, on a review of the subject, so many particulars accord with the ancient descriptions; such as the dimensions, and accordance of geographical situation; the fruits, the copious fountains, fertility of soil; and finally, although a negative proof, perhaps one of the strongest circumstances of all, the declaration of the inhabitants, that “no other fertile spot exists in the vicinity; or nearer than the Lesser Oasis.”
Mr. Horneman's report strongly supports the idea that this is the Oasis of Ammon, particularly with the Egyptian ruins found there, including the famous Temple of Jupiter Ammon. The credit for the original discovery goes to Mr. Browne. In addition to what might be considered the inner temple, Mr. Horneman has also explored the foundations identified by Mr. Browne, which measure several hundred paces around; plus, there are some remnants of the walls that may have been part of the including temple. The materials from this structure are likely incorporated into the stone houses of a town that is estimated to have a population of six to seven thousand[143] people. We no longer need to doubt the existence of the temple and palace mentioned by ancient writers, even considering the disappearance of their materials. Moreover, a closer look at the evidence reveals that many details align with historical descriptions, such as the size, geographical matches, abundant fruits, plentiful springs, and fertile soil; and finally, although it may be a negative proof, one of the strongest arguments is the statement from the locals that "no other fertile spot exists nearby, except for the Lesser Oasis."
A proof of the populousness and affluence of the ancient state of Ammon, exists in the numerous catacombs pointed out to, or visited by, Browne and Horneman: and by the probability that the rocky hill on which the modern town stands, is also full of catacombs. Such are indeed known to exist within the habitations of the people of the neighbouring village of Ummesogeir; which may thence be supposed, notwithstanding its present miserable state, to have been a flourishing appendage to ancient Ammon: and might probably have been the Siropum of Ptolemy.
A sign of the population and wealth of the ancient state of Ammon can be seen in the many catacombs that Browne and Horneman pointed out or visited, and in the likelihood that the rocky hill where the modern town is located is also filled with catacombs. These are known to exist within the homes of the nearby village of Ummesogeir, which, despite its current poor condition, might be thought to have been a thriving part of ancient Ammon and could possibly have been the Siropum mentioned by Ptolemy.
One particular requires discussion. Mr. Horneman differs very widely from Mr. Browne, in his estimation of the extent of the territory of Siwah. Mr. Browne reckons it six miles by four: but Mr. Horneman a circumference of 50 miles. His words are, “a well-watered valley of 50 miles in circuit, surrounded by naked steep rocks.” (Abulfeda also says, that the territory is environed[144] by hills.) Very probably, Mr. Horneman’s idea goes to the whole space inclosed by the hills; Mr. Browne’s to the fertile part of it only; and it must be acknowledged, that the dimensions given by the latter, accord with those of the ancients.
One particular point needs to be discussed. Mr. Horneman has a very different view from Mr. Browne regarding the size of the territory of Siwah. Mr. Browne estimates it to be six miles by four, while Mr. Horneman believes it has a circumference of 50 miles. He states, “a well-watered valley of 50 miles in circuit, surrounded by bare, steep rocks.” (Abulfeda also mentions that the territory is surrounded[144] by hills.) It's likely that Mr. Horneman is referring to the entire area enclosed by the hills, while Mr. Browne is only considering the fertile part of it; and it must be noted that the dimensions provided by the latter align with those from ancient sources.
Mr. Horneman says, that all the waters of the springs, are consumed in the irrigation of the gardens and fields; so that no stream flows beyond the district. It is certain, that Edrisi describes a river named Costara, at eight journies from Bahnasa, in the Lesser Oasis, towards Fezzan; agreeing almost exactly with the distance to Siwah from Cairo, fifteen days; which, at 19 G. miles, are equal to 285; and the construction has 275. According to Mr. Horneman’s description of the copious and numerous springs in Siwah, one of which alone, he says, forms a considerable rivulet, and another, several rivulets, it might be expected that some of the waters flowed to a considerable distance before they were entirely absorbed in the sands. The Costara river, may, however, flow from a distinct fountain in the Desert: but the coincidence of position is remarkable.
Mr. Horneman states that all the spring waters are used for watering the gardens and fields, so no stream flows beyond the area. It's true that Edrisi mentions a river called Costara, located eight journeys from Bahnasa, in the Lesser Oasis towards Fezzan; which matches almost exactly with the distance from Cairo to Siwah, fifteen days; equating to 285 miles at 19 G. miles, and the calculation totals 275. Based on Mr. Horneman’s description of the abundant and numerous springs in Siwah, one of which he claims creates a significant stream, and another that produces several streams, it would be reasonable to expect that some of the waters flowed a considerable distance before being completely absorbed by the sands. However, the Costara river might originate from a separate fountain in the Desert, though the similarity in location is striking.
The description of the lands of Siwah, by Mr. Horneman, and of the Greater Oasis, by Mr. Browne, appear to be of the same nature; each possessing copious fountains and verdant fields, fitted either for pasture or cultivation. The lands of the Lesser Oasis are said to be much the same, though rather inferior: whence it would seem, that the Valley of Mogara, which has good water at the depth of four feet, only wants that it should spring up to the surface, in order to form it into an Oasis, like the others!
The descriptions of the lands of Siwah by Mr. Horneman and the Greater Oasis by Mr. Browne seem quite similar; both have plenty of fountains and lush fields suitable for both grazing and farming. The lands of the Lesser Oasis are said to be somewhat similar but slightly less fertile: this suggests that the Valley of Mogara, which has good water at a depth of four feet, just needs the water to rise to the surface to create an Oasis similar to the others!
[145]III. The Lesser Oasis.
Mr. Horneman was told that at the distance of seven journies from Siwah, five from Faiume, and at only a few from Biljoradek, there existed a country, similar to Siwah, and whose inhabitants, who are less numerous, spoke the same language. He with reason, concluded it to be a part of the Lesser Oasis of the ancients; and, from its position, it ought to be the northern extremity.
Mr. Horneman was informed that seven journeys from Siwah, five from Faiume, and just a few from Biljoradek, there was a region similar to Siwah, whose inhabitants, though fewer in number, spoke the same language. He reasonably concluded that this was part of the ancient Lesser Oasis, and given its location, it should be the northernmost point.
If by a few days journey, when five and seven have been mentioned before, we may understand three, or thereabouts, the place in question, should lie in the parallel of 28° 50′; at about midway between Cairo and Siwah;[35] and 89 G. miles to the westward of Bahnasa, at the canal of Joseph. Hence it falls very near to Bahnasa, in the Oasis, which has been already placed,[36] at 83 from the forementioned place.
If we consider a journey of a few days and interpret the previous mentions of five and seven as indicating about three days, then the location we're talking about should be around the latitude of 28° 50′; roughly halfway between Cairo and Siwah,[35] and about 89 geographical miles west of Bahnasa, near the canal of Joseph. Therefore, it is very close to Bahnasa, in the Oasis, which has already been located,[36] at 83 from the previously mentioned site.
Ptolemy places the Lesser Oasis in lat 28° 45′: and at 75 G. miles to the west of Oxyrinchus, taken for the last mentioned Bahnasa. He no doubt meant to express some particular point in the Oasis; and that point, probably, the principal town, which may have been on the site of Bahnasa in the Oasis. So that there is a general agreement between the ancient and the modern accounts of it.[37]
Ptolemy locates the Lesser Oasis at latitude 28° 45′ and 75 geographic miles west of Oxyrinchus, which is identified with Bahnasa. He likely intended to indicate a specific location in the Oasis, probably the main town, which might have been where Bahnasa is situated in the Oasis. Therefore, there is a general consensus between the ancient and modern descriptions of it.[37]
But Mr. Browne, when at Charje in the Greater Oasis, was told, that the southern part of the Lesser Oasis, named by the inhabitants[146] Al-wah-el-Gherbi, was only forty miles distant to the northward. This being the case, the Lesser Oasis should have an extent of more than 100 miles from north to south: that is, more than the other tract, of the same name, denominated the Greater; but which may, nevertheless, be true, as the term greater or lesser, may refer to other qualities than dimensions. Mr. Browne describes the Greater Oasis (which he had traversed throughout) to consist of large detached spots or islands, like Siwah, extending in a chain from N to S, and separated by intervals of desert from two to fourteen hours of travelling. The Lesser Oasis, most probably, is much of the same nature; but is, by general report, inferior to the other, and vastly inferior to Siwah. See an account of the Oases in the Geog. of Herodotus, Sections xx. and xxi.
But Mr. Browne, while at Charje in the Greater Oasis, was informed that the southern part of the Lesser Oasis, called by the locals Al-wah-el-Gherbi, was only forty miles to the north. If that's the case, the Lesser Oasis should cover more than 100 miles from north to south, which is greater than the other area of the same name called the Greater; however, this could still be accurate, as the terms greater or lesser might refer to different qualities rather than just size. Mr. Browne describes the Greater Oasis (which he had explored fully) as being made up of large, separate patches or islands, like Siwah, extending in a chain from north to south, and separated by stretches of desert ranging from two to fourteen hours of travel. The Lesser Oasis is likely similar in nature but is generally considered to be inferior to the Greater Oasis and much less impressive than Siwah. For more details, see the account of the Oases in Herodotus' Geography, Sections xx. and xxi.
Mr. Browne adds, that the Lesser Oasis is a kind of capital settlement of the Muggrebine (or western) Arabs, who pass from it, to the western extremity of the lake Kairun; whose shore, on that side, is also in their possession. (Pages 132, 170.)
Mr. Browne adds that the Lesser Oasis serves as the main settlement for the Muggrebine (or western) Arabs, who travel from there to the western edge of Lake Kairun, with that shore also under their control. (Pages 132, 170.)
Thus, our modern travellers have fixed, pretty satisfactorily, in the view of general geography, the positions of all the three Oases: but it would be more satisfactory to have correctly the latitude of the northern extremity of the Lesser one, as well as some account of the number and position of the islands contained in it.
Thus, our modern travelers have pretty much settled, in terms of general geography, the locations of all three Oases: but it would be more satisfying to have the exact latitude of the northern tip of the Lesser one, as well as some information about the number and location of the islands within it.
IV. Valleys of Schiacha, and Gegabib.
At the distance of about three days journey to the westward of Siwah, Mr. Horneman came to Schiacha, a fruitful valley on the right; and, as appears from a circumstance that occurred during the unpleasant visit of the Siwahans, there were many little bogs,[147] in the neighbourhood of their camp, in that valley. Again, at six hours farther, was Torfaue, where they also obtained fresh water. Moreover, in the way from Siwah to Schiacha, at the distance of 6 or 7 miles from the former, he saw at the foot of the hills, a lake, implied to be of fresh water, (see Journal, page 57,) of several miles in extent.
About three days' journey west of Siwah, Mr. Horneman arrived at Schiacha, a fruitful valley to the right. From an incident that happened during the unpleasant encounter with the Siwahans, it was clear there were many small bogs nearby their camp in that valley. Traveling another six hours brought them to Torfaue, where they found fresh water. Additionally, on the way from Siwah to Schiacha, about 6 or 7 miles from Siwah, he spotted a lake at the foot of the hills, which appeared to be fresh water, (see Journal, page 57,) and stretched for several miles.
Combining with this, the remark of Mr. Horneman, that they had travelled by a chain of hills from Siwah; that these hills were a continuation of those which they had always seen to the northward of their route through the Desert; and that they “rose immediately from the level ground of the Desert, without any declivity, and without any arenacious, or other cover, only the bare rock being seen;” one may conclude, that the valley described, at the foot of these hills, is much of the same nature, with that of Mogara. Moreover, it appears, that he considered the whole extent of the hills, from the Bahr-bela-ma to Schiacha, at least, as one continued ridge; and which has an abrupt declivity to the south. The continuity, however, remains to be proved.
Combining with this, Mr. Horneman's observation that they traveled by a chain of hills from Siwah, which are a continuation of the hills they had always seen to the north of their route through the Desert, indicates that these hills “rise directly from the flat ground of the Desert, without any slope, and without any sandy or other cover, only the bare rock being visible;” one can conclude that the valley described at the base of these hills is quite similar to that of Mogara. Moreover, he seemed to view the entire stretch of the hills, from the Bahr-bela-ma to Schiacha, at least, as one continuous ridge, which has a steep drop to the south. However, the continuity still needs to be proven.
The remarkable valley of Gegabib, famous for its dates, cannot be far from the neighbourhood of Schiacha and Torfaue; since Mr. Browne says, page 26, that when he had advanced two journies to the north-westward of Siwah, he was not far from Gegabib. Mr. Beaufoy calls it, from the description of Ben Ali, “a narrow plain, sandy, and uninhabited, but fertile in dates;” which, he adds, are gathered by the people of Duna on the sea coast, eight journies distant.[38] As Mr. Horneman remarked no date trees on his way[148] from Siwah to Augila, his route must have been wide of this valley or plain, and no doubt to the south of it. This seems proved by Ben Ali’s description of the route from Augila to Siwah, which lay “across the extensive mountains of Gerdoba,” to this valley; since Mr. Horneman left the mountains to the northward of him, the whole way.
The incredible valley of Gegabib, known for its dates, is likely not far from the area of Schiacha and Torfaue; Mr. Browne mentions on page 26 that after traveling two journeys northwest from Siwah, he was not far from Gegabib. Mr. Beaufoy describes it, based on Ben Ali's account, as “a narrow, sandy plain that has no inhabitants but is rich in dates;” he adds that the people from Duna on the coast, which is eight journeys away, gather these dates.[38] Since Mr. Horneman noted the absence of date trees during his journey[148] from Siwah to Augila, his path must have been far from this valley or plain and likely to the south of it. This is supported by Ben Ali’s description of the route from Augila to Siwah, which went “across the extensive mountains of Gerdoba” to reach this valley; Mr. Horneman kept the mountains to his north the entire way.
As the dates of Gegabib are now gathered by the people of the sea coast; and those of Augila in ancient times, by the Nasamones of the coast of the Syrtis; so the people of the same coast, aided by the modern Augilans, undertake expeditions ten days journey inland from Augila, to steal men and dates, at present![39] So that this system of inroad, from the quarter towards the coast, inland, seems to have been practised at all times; and I shall have occasion to remark it again, hereafter. Augila was an inhabited place in the time of Herodotus, and yet the dates were carried off by strangers: and it seems the present Augilans retaliate on others, the injuries sustained by their ancestors.
As the dates from Gegabib are now collected by the coastal people, and those from Augila in ancient times by the Nasamones of the Syrtis coast, so the people of the same coast, with help from the modern Augilans, undertake expeditions ten days journey inland from Augila to steal men and dates, even today![39] This pattern of raids, coming from the coast inland, seems to have been practiced throughout history, and I will mention it again later. Augila was a populated area during Herodotus's time, yet strangers would steal the dates; it appears that the current Augilans retaliate against others for the losses their ancestors experienced.
V. Augila.
This small, but celebrated territory, is situated nearly midway between Egypt and Fezzan; and somewhat less than 170 miles from the nearest coast of the Mediterranean. It seems to possess much of the character of an Oasis, being flat, well watered, fertile, and surrounded by arid deserts, either sandy or rocky; in particular, that to the west is so destitute of herbage, that the camels of Mr. Horneman’s caravan, carried their provender with them. Its extent from east to west, seems to be little more than a long day’s journey. The agriculture of the Augilans is confined more to[149] gardening, than to raising of corn: but Mr. Horneman is silent respecting the culture of dates, for which it has been so celebrated both in ancient and modern times.[40]
This small but famous territory is located almost halfway between Egypt and Fezzan, and just under 170 miles from the nearest Mediterranean coast. It has a lot of the characteristics of an oasis—flat, well-watered, fertile, and surrounded by dry deserts, which are either sandy or rocky. The desert to the west is particularly barren, to the point that Mr. Horneman's caravan camels had to carry their food with them. The area from east to west seems to stretch just a little more than a long day’s journey. The agriculture of the Augilans leans more towards gardening rather than growing grain; however, Mr. Horneman doesn’t mention the cultivation of dates, for which this area has been well-known both in ancient and modern times.[149][40]
It appears that the Augilans are the merchants who carry on the commerce between Egypt and Fezzan; for which, their middle situation, and ready communication with the port of Bengasi, qualify them. The people of one of their most populous towns,[41] Mojabra, are solely occupied with this commerce: and Mr. Horneman contrasts, in a most unfavourable light, the character of these traders, with the people of the other towns, whose employment is agriculture. In a few short remarks, we are shewn, in the most pointed manner, the natural, and almost necessary effect, of the occupations of mankind on their moral habits. Notwithstanding the possession of this commerce, Augila is still a very poor place indeed.
It seems that the Augilans are the merchants who facilitate trade between Egypt and Fezzan; their central location and easy access to the port of Bengasi make them well-suited for this task. The residents of one of their largest towns, [41] Mojabra, are fully dedicated to this trade. Mr. Horneman highlights, in a quite unfavorable manner, the character of these traders compared to those in other towns, whose focus is on agriculture. In just a few brief comments, we are shown clearly how people's occupations can significantly influence their moral behavior. Despite this trade activity, Augila remains a very impoverished place.
It may be remarked, that Augila is one of the few places in Africa that has preserved its ancient name entire.
It can be noted that Augila is one of the few places in Africa that has kept its original name intact.
VI. The Harutsch, White and Black.
These remarkable tracts (of which see the description above, page 48 et seq.) had been noticed by Ben Ali, to Mr. Beaufoy, who has recorded them (in chap. x. of the Proceed. Afr. Assoc. for 1790;) the one under the description of the rocky Desert of black and naked[150] rock, of four days extant; the other, of soft and sandy stone, of three days extent: but they are described in a very obscure manner, and their respective positions are transposed.
These remarkable areas (see the description above, page 48 et seq.) had caught Ben Ali's attention, as mentioned to Mr. Beaufoy, who documented them (in chap. x. of the Proceed. Afr. Assoc. for 1790;). One is described as a rocky desert of black and naked[150] rock, lasting four days; the other, made of soft and sandy stone, lasting three days. However, these descriptions are quite vague, and their respective locations are mixed up.
Mr. Horneman appears to have employed nearly fifty hours in crossing the black Harutsch; fourteen more in the white Harutsch; or altogether sixty-four hours, equal to eight ordinary caravan days; which does not differ very widely from the report of Ben Ali, who allowed seven.
Mr. Horneman seems to have spent almost fifty hours crossing the black Harutsch; another fourteen in the white Harutsch; totaling sixty-four hours, which is equivalent to eight regular caravan days; this isn’t too far off from Ben Ali’s report, who estimated it at seven.
The white Harutsch forms the extreme boundary of Fezzan, and extends southward, into the district of the Tibbo Rshade; of which more in the sequel. The black Harutsch appears to be much more extensive. Horneman was told, that it was in breadth five journies from east to west; (he crossed it in WSW direction;) and in length seven, from north to south. However, Mr. Horneman justly observes, that it must be more extensive, since he crossed a tract of the same nature, in his way from Fezzan to Tripoly; and even from that point it was said to extend a considerable distance to the west. He adds, that he learnt at Mourzouk, that there were black mountains also in the road from that place to Bornou: that is, to the south-east.
The white Harutsch forms the farthest edge of Fezzan and stretches south into the district of the Tibbo Rshade; more details on that later. The black Harutsch seems to be much larger. Horneman was told that it was about five journeys wide from east to west (he crossed it heading southwest) and seven journeys long from north to south. However, Mr. Horneman wisely notes that it must be even larger since he crossed a similar area while traveling from Fezzan to Tripoli; and it was also said to extend quite a distance to the west from that point. He adds that he learned in Mourzouk that there are black mountains along the road from there to Bornou, which is to the southeast.
Mr. Beaufoy was also informed, (See chap. iv. Afr. Proceed. 1790,) that a desert named Souda, (that is, black,) is crossed in the way from Mesurata to Fezzan; agreeing with Mr. Horneman’s report. The breadth, in a north and south direction, is given at four days, or somewhat narrower than in Mr. Horneman’s line of route from Augila.
Mr. Beaufoy was also informed, (See chap. iv. Afr. Proceed. 1790,) that there is a desert named Souda, (which means black,) that is crossed on the route from Mesurata to Fezzan; this matches Mr. Horneman’s report. The width, going north and south, is described as taking about four days to cross, which is slightly narrower than what Mr. Horneman reported for his route from Augila.
Mr. Horneman describes the black Harutsch to consist of matter,[151] that, in his idea, was volcanic, or had undergone the action of fire: and its conformation appears very singular indeed. There exists in Pliny, an evident proof that it was known to the Romans; for they had crossed it, in their expeditions to Fezzan, and towards the Niger, &c.; and had even explored and remarked the shortest route across the same mountains.
Mr. Horneman describes the black Harutsch as made of matter that he believes is volcanic or has been affected by fire, and its shape is quite unusual. Pliny provides clear evidence that the Romans knew about it; they crossed it during their expeditions to Fezzan, and toward the Niger, etc., and even explored and noted the shortest path through those mountains.[151]
Pliny says, that “from Cydamus (i. e. Gadamis, which, by the bye, he says lies opposite to Sabrata, on the sea coast) there extends a mountain a long way to the east, called by the Romans, Mons Ater; and which appears as if it were burnt or scorched by the rays of the sun.” (Lib. v. c. 5.) And he adds, that beyond those mountains, are deserts, and the towns of the Garamantes, which were conquered by the Romans under Balbus. In this description, we clearly recognise the Souda, or Black Desert, to the north of Fezzan; and which Mr. Horneman saw, both there, and to the east, of the same country; and also learnt, that it continued far westward, beyond the line of the road from Fezzan to Mesurata: in other words, towards Gadamis.
Pliny says that “from Cydamus (i.e., Gadamis, which he mentions is located across from Sabrata on the coast) there extends a mountain far to the east called by the Romans, Black Mountain; and it looks like it has been burned or scorched by the sun's rays.” (Lib. v. c. 5.) He adds that beyond those mountains are deserts and the towns of the Garamantes, which the Romans defeated under Balbus. In this description, we can clearly identify the Souda, or Black Desert Online, to the north of Fezzan; which Mr. Horneman saw, both there and to the east in the same region; and also discovered that it extended far westward, beyond the route from Fezzan to Mesurata: in other words, towards Gadamis.
Sockna, which is a town of some consideration, lies midway between this road and Gadamis: and it is known that the Desert of Souda passes to the south of it. So that there is little doubt but that Pliny is right, in extending the Mons Ater westward to Cydamus, (i. e. Gadamis) and to a long extent eastward of it.
Sockna, a notable town, is located halfway between this road and Gadamis, and it’s known that the Desert of Souda lies to the south of it. Therefore, it’s pretty clear that Pliny is correct in extending the Mons Ater westward to Cydamus (i.e., Gadamis) and for a considerable distance to the east of it.
VII. Fezzan.
It has been said, that there is no material difference between the position of the capital of this country (Mourzouk), as given by Mr. Horneman, and the former assumed position in the maps, drawn[152] for the African Association, in 1790 and 1798; considered in the view of general geography. It is for this reason, that I have not altered it in the general Map, but have accommodated the positions eastward to it; instead of altering the entire Map. But in the Map of Mr. Horneman’s Route, all the positions affected by his observations, are given according to those observations.
It has been said that there is no real difference between the location of the capital of this country (Mourzouk), as indicated by Mr. Horneman, and the previous position shown on the maps created[152] for the African Association in 1790 and 1798, when looking at it from a general geography perspective. For this reason, I haven't changed it on the general Map, but instead adjusted the positions to the east of it; rather than altering the entire Map. However, in the Map of Mr. Horneman’s Route, all the positions influenced by his observations are presented according to those observations.
Neither do the boundaries and extent, as given by Mr. Horneman, differ materially from those given by Mr. Beaufoy; which is remarkable, considering under what disadvantage he collected his materials, compared with the mode of collecting them on the spot. But in arranging the boundaries, a distinction is to be made between the proper country of Fezzan, and its dependencies.
Neither do the boundaries and extent, as stated by Mr. Horneman, differ significantly from those provided by Mr. Beaufoy; this is noteworthy, considering the challenges Mr. Horneman faced in gathering his materials compared to the process of collecting them on-site. However, when outlining the boundaries, it's important to differentiate between the proper country of Fezzan and its dependencies.
Mr. Horneman says, that the cultivated part of Fezzan has an extent of 300 British miles from north to south; by 200 from east to west: which dimensions have a general agreement with Mr. Beaufoy’s, in respect of the area of the whole; but Mr. Beaufoy makes it a circle, whilst Mr. Horneman makes it an oval. It would appear, also, that Mr. Horneman reckons the whole extent thus given by himself and Mr. Beaufoy as cultivated land; and we know too little of the actual geography to attempt any detail. Mr. Horneman came to the eastern border of Fezzan at 44 to 45 hours, equal to about 110 B. miles by the road, from Mourzouk. In order to justify Mr. Horneman’s calculation, Mourzouk ought to stand nearly in the centre, between the eastern and western limits; but Mr. Beaufoy says, that the territory does not extend far to the west of the capital.
Mr. Horneman states that the cultivated area of Fezzan stretches 300 British miles from north to south and 200 miles from east to west. These measurements generally align with Mr. Beaufoy's regarding the total area, but Mr. Beaufoy describes it as circular, while Mr. Horneman sees it as oval. It also seems that Mr. Horneman considers the entire extent mentioned by himself and Mr. Beaufoy to be cultivated land, and we lack enough knowledge about the actual geography to provide any details. Mr. Horneman reached the eastern edge of Fezzan after about 44 to 45 hours, which is roughly 110 British miles by road from Mourzouk. To support Mr. Horneman’s estimate, Mourzouk should be almost centrally located between the eastern and western boundaries; however, Mr. Beaufoy claims that the territory doesn't stretch far to the west of the capital.
Again, Mr. Beaufoy allows five days from the northern boundary, at the edge of the black Desert, to Mourzouk: that is, about[153] 100 B. miles by the road. And from Mourzouk southward to the mountains of Eyre, the southern boundary, fourteen days; equal to 280 such miles: total 380: or perhaps, in direct distance, 350 such miles. But there lies in the midway, a desert of five journies in breadth; and it is uncertain to what point Mr. Horneman reckons.
Once again, Mr. Beaufoy estimates that it takes five days from the northern boundary, at the edge of the black Desert, to Mourzouk, which is about[153] 100 British miles by road. From Mourzouk heading south to the Eyre mountains, the southern boundary, it takes fourteen days, which equals 280 miles. This totals 380 miles, or possibly about 350 miles in a straight line. However, in between, there's a desert that's five journeys wide, and it's unclear where exactly Mr. Horneman is measuring from.
The dependencies are very extensive. The regions of the Harutsch, together with Wadan, Houn, (or Hun), and Sockna, all of which lie beyond the Harutsch, Mr. Horneman classes as belonging to Fezzan. Sockna should be a place of note, as its merchants are in possession of the chief part of the commerce, between Fezzan and Tripoly.
The dependencies are quite extensive. The areas of Harutsch, along with Wadan, Houn (or Hun), and Sockna, all of which are located beyond the Harutsch, are classified by Mr. Horneman as part of Fezzan. Sockna should be considered significant, as its merchants control a major portion of the trade between Fezzan and Tripoly.
Mr. Horneman was informed that there are 101 inhabited places in Fezzan; and it is remarkable that this is precisely the number stated in M. Delisle’s Map of Africa, drawn in 1707; and Mr. Beaufoy’s informant said, little less than 100. But amongst these, there are few places of note, and still fewer whose positions are given; and in the report of these, Mr. Beaufoy’s informant differs in some respect, from Mr. Horneman.
Mr. Horneman was told that there are 101 inhabited places in Fezzan; and it's interesting that this matches the number on M. Delisle’s Map of Africa, created in 1707; while Mr. Beaufoy’s source mentioned nearly 100. However, among these, there are few notable locations, and even fewer whose positions are specified; additionally, in this report, Mr. Beaufoy’s source differs somewhat from Mr. Horneman.
Of the position of the capital, Mourzouk, I have already spoken, very fully.
Of the location of the capital, Mourzouk, I've already discussed it in detail.
Zuila, or Zawila, (probably the Cillaba of Pliny, lib. v. c. 5.) is placed, by Mr. Horneman’s route, at 59 G. miles to the eastward of Mourzouk. Mr. Beaufoy was told that it was 7 days journey distant, and the bearing, in his reports, varies from east to ENE. I have allowed E by N. This was the capital in the time of Edrisi:[42][154] and probably, from this circumstance, some of the neighbouring nations still call the country of Fezzan, Seela, as we are told by Mr. Horneman.
Zuila, or Zawila, (likely the Cillaba mentioned by Pliny, lib. v. c. 5.) is located, according to Mr. Horneman's route, 59 geographical miles to the east of Mourzouk. Mr. Beaufoy was informed that it was a 7-day journey away, and the direction in his reports varies from east to ENE. I've designated it as E by N. This was the capital during Edrisi's time:[42][154] and likely because of this, some neighboring nations still refer to the region of Fezzan as Seela, as noted by Mr. Horneman.
Temissa, another principal town, is placed by Mr. Horneman about 7 hours travelling, to the eastward of Zuila. This appears to be the Tamest of Edrisi, situated at 40 journies (of his scale) from Cairo.
Temissa, another main town, is located by Mr. Horneman about 7 hours east of Zuila. This seems to be the Tamest mentioned by Edrisi, situated 40 journeys (according to his scale) from Cairo.
Germa, or Jermah, is placed, by Mr. Beaufoy, southward from Zuila, and at nearly the same distance from Mourzouk. This is unquestionably the Garama of the Romans,[43] the capital of Fezzan, or Phazania, at the time of the Roman conquest; and which appears to have given the name of Garamantes to the whole nation. (As the discussion of this subject is already before the Public, in the Geography of Herodotus, Section XXII. the Author begs leave to refer to it). Mr. Horneman, who names this place Yerma, places it to the west of the capital: however, M. D’Anville has placed it under the name of Gherma, to the SE, with Tessoua (or Tosaûa) between the two; and this is Mr. Beaufoy’s arrangement of it. It should be noticed that M. D’Anville places these towns out of all proportion too far to the south-east of Mourzouk; being unconscious that Gherma, or Garama, was situated within Fezzan, although he recognises it as the capital of the Garamantes.
Germa, or Jermah, is located, according to Mr. Beaufoy, south of Zuila and almost the same distance from Mourzouk. This is definitely the Garama of the Romans,[43] the capital of Fezzan, or Phazania, during the Roman conquest, and it seems to have inspired the name Garamantes for the entire nation. (Since this topic is already discussed in the public domain, in the Geography of Herodotus, Section XXII, the author would like to refer to it). Mr. Horneman, who calls this place Yerma, places it to the west of the capital; however, M. D’Anville has marked it as Gherma, located to the SE, with Tessoua (or Tosaûa) in between, which matches Mr. Beaufoy’s arrangement. It's important to note that M. D’Anville situates these towns much too far to the southeast of Mourzouk; he seems unaware that Gherma, or Garama, was located within Fezzan, even though he recognizes it as the capital of the Garamantes.
Kattron is placed SE from the capital, by Mr. Beaufoy, distant 60 road miles. This is the Gatron of Mr. Horneman, placed by him directly south. D’Anville names it Catron, and places it about[155] SSW, distant 75 G. miles. In another place, where Mr. Horneman describes a march of troops from Fezzan to Burgu, he reckons Gatron S 54 miles from Mourzouk, in the way to Teghery; which being, by every account, to the west of south, from Mourzouk, it may be inferred that Katron lies to the southward, rather than to the south-eastward. The report of the distance differs but little between Mr. Horneman and Mr. Beaufoy. M. D’Anville probably was not so well informed as either of these gentlemen, in respect of the distance.
Kattron is located southeast of the capital, as noted by Mr. Beaufoy, and is 60 road miles away. This is the Gatron identified by Mr. Horneman, positioned directly south. D’Anville refers to it as Catron and places it about[155] south-southeast, at a distance of 75 geographic miles. In another instance, where Mr. Horneman describes a troop movement from Fezzan to Burgu, he states that Gatron is 54 miles south of Mourzouk on the way to Teghery; since this direction is, according to all accounts, west of south from Mourzouk, it can be inferred that Katron is farther south rather than southeast. The reported distances are fairly consistent between Mr. Horneman and Mr. Beaufoy. M. D’Anville likely had less accurate information than either of these gentlemen regarding the distance.
Mendra is said, by Mr. Beaufoy, to be 60 miles nearly south, from the capital. But this is the position of Katron, according to Horneman, and which, as we have seen, appears probable: and Mendra being a province, as well as a town, must be in some other situation. Possibly, it ought to change places with Katron, in Mr. Beaufoy’s description.
Mendra is described by Mr. Beaufoy as being about 60 miles south of the capital. However, this matches the location of Katron, according to Horneman, which seems likely based on what we've seen. Since Mendra is a province as well as a town, it has to be located elsewhere. It might need to swap places with Katron in Mr. Beaufoy's account.
Teghery is given by Mr. Beaufoy, as the most westerly, or rather south-westerly town of Fezzan; and he places it SW 80 road miles from the capital. The same place appears in a route (mentioned before) from Mourzouk to Burgu, by Mr. Horneman, who places it SSW 33 such miles, from Katron; whence the position of Teghery would be about S ¾ W, 85 miles. But D’Anville places it at SSW ½ W 116 G. miles from Mourzouk; and although the distance in this case, as in that of Katron, is excessive, yet some regard ought to be had to the bearing. Accordingly, a mean of the three gives S 26 W; and the mean distance of Beaufoy and Horneman 68 G. miles, reduced to a direct line.
Teghery is described by Mr. Beaufoy as the most westerly, or more accurately, south-westerly town in Fezzan; he places it 80 road miles southwest of the capital. The same location appears in a previously mentioned route from Mourzouk to Burgu, noted by Mr. Horneman, who states it is 33 miles south-southwest from Katron; therefore, the position of Teghery would be approximately ¾ south-west, 85 miles. However, D’Anville locates it at ½ south-southwest, 116 geographic miles from Mourzouk; and while the distance in this case, similar to that of Katron, seems excessive, some consideration should be given to the direction. Thus, an average of the three gives a direction of 26° south-west, and the average distance from Beaufoy and Horneman is 68 geographic miles, adjusted to a straight line.
A place named Tai-garee appears in a route from Tunis to Kashna, communicated by Mr. Magrah, at fifteen journies from[156] Gadamis.[44] It appears highly probable that this is the same place with Teghery in Fezzan: but the distance arising on the fifteen journies falls very short of the position of Teghery, placed as above. Could this point be ascertained, it would operate as a check on the position of Mourzouk; and I cannot but suspect, that this capital is somewhat more to the west, or north-west, than it now stands in the Map.
A place called Tai-garee appears on a route from Tunis to Kashna, reported by Mr. Magrah, fifteen journeys from[156] Gadamis.[44] It seems very likely that this is the same location as Teghery in Fezzan; however, the distance from the fifteen journeys falls quite short of the position of Teghery, as stated above. If this point could be confirmed, it would serve as a reference for the location of Mourzouk; and I can't help but think that this capital is situated slightly more to the west or northwest than it currently appears on the map.
These facts are particularly noticed here, that future geographers may inquire, whether the route of the Tunis caravan, to Soudan, passes through Teghery in the western skirt of the country of Fezzan; as I conceive it doth: and also that there is some error in the combination of the geographical context, between Tunis, and the eastern positions, which prevents the closing of the lines, to the aforesaid town of Teghery.
These points are noted here so that future geographers can investigate whether the route of the Tunis caravan to Sudan passes through Teghery, located in the western part of Fezzan, which I believe it does. Additionally, there seems to be a mistake in how the geographical details align between Tunis and the eastern locations, which hinders the connection to the town of Teghery.
One cannot dismiss the subject of Fezzan, without remarking,[157] that the observations of Mr. Horneman have added another proof of its being the country intended by the ancient authors, for that of the Garamantes. For he has shewn us, that the black rocky Desert, the continuation of the black Harutsch, passes between Fezzan and Tripoly, and extends yet farther west, towards Gadamis; and as Pliny places the Mons Ater in this position, with a desert and the cities of the Garamantes beyond them, these cities cannot well be any others than those of Fezzan. (See above, page 151). I shall also mention, in its place, another circumstance brought to light by Mr. Horneman, concerning the Troglodytæ mentioned by Herodotus, in the neighbourhood of the Garamantes; and which induces a very strong belief that the people bordering on the south-east of Fezzan, are meant.
One cannot overlook the topic of Fezzan without pointing out,[157] that Mr. Horneman's observations provide further evidence that this is the area referred to by ancient writers regarding the Garamantes. He has shown us that the black rocky desert, which is part of the black Harutsch, lies between Fezzan and Tripoli, stretching further west toward Gadamis. Since Pliny identifies the Mons Ater in this location, alongside a desert and the cities of the Garamantes beyond, it's likely that these cities correspond to those in Fezzan. (See above, page 151). Additionally, I will point out another detail brought to light by Mr. Horneman regarding the Troglodytæ mentioned by Herodotus, in the vicinity of the Garamantes, which strongly suggests that the people living southeast of Fezzan are what he refers to.
A Map,
shewing the Progress of
DISCOVERY & IMPROVEMENT,
in the Geography
of
North Africa:
Compiled by J. Rennell,
1798.
Corrected in 1802.
A Map,
showing the Progress of
DISCOVERY & IMPROVEMENT,
in the Geography
of
North Africa:
Compiled by J. Rennell,
1798.
Updated in 1802.

Published according to Act of Parliament by James Rennell May 25th. 1798. | J. Walker Sculp. |
(Large-size; Largest size: top-left, top-right, bottom-left, bottom-right)
(__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Extra large: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__)
[158]CHAPTER III.
Improvements in the general Geography of North Africa.—Remote Sources of the Nile, and Termination of the Niger.—Lake of Fittré, or Kauga.
Improvements in the general geography of North Africa.—Remote sources of the Nile and the end of the Niger.—Lake Fittré, or Kauga.
This division of the present subject respects the improvements of the general geography of the eastern quarter of North Africa. Since the construction of the General Map, in 1798,[45] much new matter has appeared in the Travels of Mr. Browne: and to these are now to be added, the observations and inquiries of Mr. Horneman. These important notices will be found mutually to explain and confirm each other, as far as they go, over the same ground; and which is to a very considerable extent.
This section of the current topic covers the advancements in the general geography of the eastern part of North Africa. Since the General Map was created in 1798,[45] a lot of new information has emerged from Mr. Browne's travels, and now we can also include Mr. Horneman's observations and inquiries. These significant findings will be found to support and clarify each other over the same area, and this is quite extensive.
Mr. Browne has the advantage in point of materials proper for mathematical geography; whilst Mr. Horneman’s range of inquiry, though equally extended, consists more of general notices, in the nature of sketches. Both possess very great merit; both appear indefatigable in collecting the most useful matter that either presented itself, or could be procured: and how much soever a person at his ease, and in a state of perfect security, may blame the want of a clear and connected series of notices, respecting the geography and present state of the countries treated of; yet it should be considered,[159] under what disadvantages, and at what hazard, a European traveller in the interior of Africa, collects his information: and which, the histories of these gentlemen’s proceedings, now before the Public, as well as those of their old acquaintance Mr. Park, abundantly shew.
Mr. Browne has the advantage when it comes to the materials suitable for mathematical geography, while Mr. Horneman’s scope of inquiry, though similarly extensive, is more about general observations and sketches. Both have significant merit and seem tireless in gathering the most useful information they can find or procure. And no matter how much someone in a comfortable and secure position might criticize the lack of a clear and connected series of notes on the geography and current state of the countries discussed, it should be acknowledged, [159] the challenges and risks a European traveler faces when collecting information in the interior of Africa. This is clearly demonstrated in the accounts of these gentlemen’s journeys, as well as those of their former associate Mr. Park.
Mr. Browne’s materials consist of a line of 16 degrees of latitude, from Cairo to the capital of Darfoor; corrected by observations of latitude and longitude: together with an extension of this line southward, six degrees farther, by enquiries amongst the natives, and other travellers, on the spot. His inquiries reached to about the parallel of 8 degrees north; in which position there were pointed out to him, the heads of the Bahr Abiad, or White River, taken for the most remote, and long sought for, head of the Egyptian Nile. And besides this line, his inquiries were pointed eastward and south-east, to the borders of Abyssinia; westward and south-west, to Bornu; also to other countries, not before heard of in Europe; the whole forming an extent of more than 15 degrees of longitude.
Mr. Browne’s materials include a line of 16 degrees of latitude, stretching from Cairo to the capital of Darfoor, adjusted with observations of latitude and longitude. He also extended this line southward six degrees further by asking locals and other travelers on site. His inquiries reached around the parallel of 8 degrees north, where he was shown the sources of the Bahr Abiad, or White River, which was believed to be the furthest, long-sought source of the Nile River in Egypt. Additionally, his inquiries were directed eastward and south-east towards the borders of Abyssinia; westward and south-west towards Bornu; and also to other regions previously unknown in Europe, covering an overall distance of more than 15 degrees of longitude.
The line from Cairo to the head of the White River, is in length upwards of 1360 G. miles: or more than 1440, from the mouth of the Nile; taken in direct distance. In its bearing, it varies so little from the meridian, that the head of the river bears only about a point and a half to the west of south, from the place of its discharge into the Mediterranean.
The line from Cairo to the source of the White River measures over 1,360 geographical miles, or more than 1,440 from the mouth of the Nile, measured in a straight line. Its direction varies so slightly from true south that the head of the river is only about a point and a half west of south from where it flows into the Mediterranean.
This route departing from the Nile at Siout, first passes through, and fixes the position of the Greater Oasis; then successively, through the positions of Sheb, Selimé, Leghea, and Bir-el-Malha, in the way to Darfoor.
This route leaving the Nile at Siout first goes through and identifies the location of the Greater Oasis; then it continues through the locations of Sheb, Selimé, Leghea, and Bir-el-Malha on the way to Darfoor.
[160]From the known caution and accuracy of Mr. Browne, this line becomes an important acquisition: and in respect of the place of the head of the White River, his information is corroborated generally, by that collected by Ledyard and Maillet, at Cairo. In other parts of his geography, he is corroborated by the recent information of Mr. Horneman; by the notices in Edrisi; by Maillet; and even by Bruce himself.
[160]Due to Mr. Browne's well-known caution and accuracy, this line becomes a significant addition: regarding the location of the source of the White River, his information is generally supported by what Ledyard and Maillet gathered in Cairo. In other areas of his geography, he's backed up by the latest details from Mr. Horneman, by mentions in Edrisi, by Maillet, and even by Bruce himself.
It is unnecessary to enter into any details, respecting this geography, which is already before the public, in his excellent book of Travels, which furnishes an important part of the subject now before the reader; particularly what respects the head of the White River, (that is, the Nile;) and, by implication, what concerns the termination of the Niger also.
It’s not necessary to go into detail about this geography, which is already presented to the public in his great book of Travels, as it provides an important part of the topic currently being discussed; especially regarding the head of the White River (which is the Nile); and, by extension, what relates to the end of the Niger as well.
In the selection of materials from the map made by Mr. Browne, from his own observations and inquiries, I have scrupulously adhered to the map itself, (except in the single instance of the position of the capital of Bornou;) on a supposition that he had well compared and weighed the authorities for the different reports of bearings and distances; and thence formed a better result than could be done by any other person. But I have added from his Appendix, some intermediate routes, and positions, which he judged proper to omit in his map.
In selecting materials from the map created by Mr. Browne, based on his own observations and inquiries, I have carefully followed the map itself, (except for one instance regarding the location of the capital of Bornou;) assuming that he thoroughly analyzed and considered the various sources for the different reports of bearings and distances, resulting in a more accurate outcome than anyone else could achieve. However, I have included some additional routes and locations from his Appendix that he chose to leave out of his map.
He informs us, that he determined by inquiries, that proved satisfactory, the distance of the Nile from Selimé; whence it appears, that although the position of the great cataract, as well as those of Moscho, and of Dongola, taken on the authority of Mr. Bruce, ought to come somewhat more to the south or south-west; yet that, in a general point of view, the agreement is closer than could have[161] been expected. The same may be said of Sennaar, in respect of Darfoor; Mr. Browne being satisfied, that the interval of distance between them, agreed to the observations; the one being determined by Mr. Bruce, the other by himself. Mr. D’Anville had placed Sennaar nearly four degrees of longitude too far to the west, in his map of Africa, 1749.[46]
He tells us that, through satisfactory inquiries, he figured out the distance from the Nile to Selimé. It seems that although the locations of the great cataract, as well as those of Moscho and Dongola, based on Mr. Bruce's findings, should be a bit further south or southwest, overall, the agreement is closer than expected. The same can be said for Sennaar concerning Darfoor; Mr. Browne is convinced that the distance between them aligns with the observations—one determined by Mr. Bruce and the other by himself. Mr. D’Anville mistakenly placed Sennaar almost four degrees of longitude too far west on his map of Africa from 1749.[46]
It may be observed, that between Egypt and Darfoor, no waters whatsoever communicate with the Nile, from the west: and that Mr. Browne was assured, that the same state of things existed to the south, between Darfoor and the head of the White River. So far indeed, from any water running to the east in that quarter, he was told (and the fact is corroborated in part by others,) that the waters to the west and south-west of Darfoor, all ran to the west or north-west.
It can be noted that there are no waterways connecting Egypt and Darfoor to the Nile from the west. Mr. Browne was informed that this situation also exists to the south, between Darfoor and the head of the White River. In fact, he was told (and this is partially confirmed by others) that the waters to the west and southwest of Darfoor all flow to the west or north-west.
Mr. Browne relates, from the information of the people at Darfoor, that the head of the White River consists of a number of streams, issuing from certain lofty mountains named Kumri, or Komri, situated in a country named Donga, distant a month’s journey from Shilluk; which is itself 3¼ days short of Sennaar: so that the remotest spring of the White River may be 45 journies from Sennaar. Now, some of the slaves brought in the Darfoorian caravan to Cairo, told Mr. Ledyard that they came from a place 55[162] journies westward from Sennaar; and Mr. Browne informs us, that the people of Bergoo (adjacent to Darfoor) make a practice of going a slave hunting into the quarter of Donga. (Travels, p. 473.) Another person amongst those questioned by Mr. Ledyard (implied to come from the same place,) said, that the head of the Nile was situated in his country.[47] If it be supposed that, in stating the distance of Sennaar from the head of the Nile, they meant that the road lay through Darfoor, (which is not improbable) the distance of 55 days would be fully made up. It is reckoned 23 days from Darfoor to Sennaar, and somewhat more from Darfoor to the copper mines of Fertit; which are yet very far short of the head of the White River.
Mr. Browne shares, based on information from people in Darfoor, that the source of the White River consists of several streams that flow from tall mountains called Kumri or Komri, located in a region named Donga, which is a month's journey away from Shilluk; and Shilluk is itself 3¼ days from Sennaar. Therefore, the farthest spring of the White River could be 45 journeys from Sennaar. Some of the slaves brought in the Darfoorian caravan to Cairo told Mr. Ledyard that they came from a place 55[162] journeys west of Sennaar; and Mr. Browne informs us that the people of Bergoo (next to Darfoor) often go slave hunting in the Donga area. (Travels, p. 473.) Another individual questioned by Mr. Ledyard, who is implied to come from the same place, stated that the head of the Nile was located in his country.[47] If it is assumed that when stating the distance from Sennaar to the head of the Nile, they meant that the route went through Darfoor (which is not unlikely), the 55-day distance would add up perfectly. It is estimated that it takes 23 days to travel from Darfoor to Sennaar and a bit more from Darfoor to the copper mines of Fertit, which are still quite far from the head of the White River.
In the map of Africa, 1798, I had placed the head of the White River, about 130 miles to the SE of the place now assigned by Mr. Browne.
In the map of Africa, 1798, I had placed the source of the White River about 130 miles southeast of the location now indicated by Mr. Browne.
Mr. Horneman having again set afloat the idea of the junction of the Niger with the Nile, it becomes necessary to examine, minutely, the geographical materials furnished by Mr. Browne and Mr. Horneman, as well as the notices found in Edrisi; in order to shew the improbability of such a fact. Mr. Horneman was informed by persons who had travelled to Darfoor, that the Niger (Joliba) passed by the south of Darfoor, into the White River. It is certain that Herodotus[48] collected much the same kind of information in Egypt: but it is equally certain that the people whom Mr. Browne consulted at Darfoor, were silent, respecting any such junction: on the contrary, they report, not only that the White River is formed of sources, springing from the mountains on the south, but also that the waters between Darfoor and those mountains, run to the westward. It is[163] proper to add, that the mountains in question, named Kumri, or Komri, are, as the name imports, the Mountains of the Moon; in which Ptolemy, and the Arabian geographers, place the remote head of the Nile.[49]
Mr. Horneman has once again suggested the idea of the Niger connecting with the Nile, so it's necessary to closely examine the geographical information provided by Mr. Browne and Mr. Horneman, along with the notes from Edrisi, to demonstrate how unlikely this is. Mr. Horneman was informed by people who had traveled to Darfoor that the Niger (Joliba) flowed south of Darfoor into the White River. It's clear that Herodotus collected similar information in Egypt; however, it's equally clear that the individuals Mr. Browne spoke to in Darfoor did not mention any such junction. Instead, they reported that the White River is fed by sources originating from the mountains to the south and that the waters between Darfoor and those mountains flow westward. It's important to note that the mountains in question, known as Kumri or Komri, are, as the name suggests, the Mountains of the Moon, where Ptolemy and Arabian geographers located the distant source of the Nile.[49]
In chapter vi. of the Geographical Illustrations, 1798, I have set forth several facts, with a view to shew the probability of the termination of the Niger, by evaporation, in the country of Wangara, &c. To that, I shall beg leave to refer: but as many additional facts, tending to strengthen my former ideas, have been furnished by recent travellers, I shall have occasion to repeat some of the former statements and arguments, in the course of the discussion.
In chapter vi of the Geographical Illustrations, 1798, I've presented several facts to show the likelihood of the Niger ending in the country of Wangara, by evaporation, etc. I'll refer to that, but since many recent travelers have provided additional facts that support my earlier ideas, I'll need to restate some of the previous points and arguments during the discussion.
Towards the west and SW, to the extent of several hundred miles from the capital of Darfoor, Mr. Browne learnt, that the country was intersected by a number of streams, whose courses pointed to the west and north-west. He appears to speak, however, with less confidence of the courses of all the other waters, save the Misselâd, and the small river Batta, its adjunct. These, he unequivocally conducts from SE to NW. (See pages 449—464, and his map at page 180). But of the others, he merely says, “the course of the rivers, if rightly given, is, for the most part, from E to W.” But he also says, p. 449, “the country they flow through, is said to be, great part of the year, wet and marshy; the heat is excessive, and the people remark that there is no winter.” The principal, as well as the most remote of these rivers, is the Bahr Kulla, denominated from a country of the same name, described (p. 308), to abound with water; and this Bahr Kulla is considerable enough to require[164] boats to cross it, of which some are made of single trees, large enough to hold ten persons.[50]
Towards the west and southwest, several hundred miles from the capital of Darfoor, Mr. Browne learned that the country was crossed by numerous streams flowing towards the west and northwest. However, he appears to express less certainty about the paths of other waters, except for the Misselâd and the small river Batta, which runs alongside it. These he clearly states flow from southeast to northwest. (See pages 449—464, and his map on page 180). As for the other rivers, he simply mentions, “the course of the rivers, if accurately described, is mostly from east to west.” Additionally, he notes on page 449, “the area they flow through is said to be wet and marshy for a large part of the year; the heat is intense, and locals point out that there is no winter.” The main and most distant of these rivers is the Bahr Kulla, named after a region of the same name, which is described (p. 308) to abound with water; and this Bahr Kulla is significant enough to require[164] boats to cross it, some of which are made from single trees and are large enough to carry ten people.[50]
It would seem, therefore, (if Mr. Browne was correctly informed, and I can see no reason to doubt, because he speaks with caution), as if these rivers descended from the high country on the south of Darfoor, into a comparatively low, and hollow tract to the west, in which also two large lakes are marked in Mr. Browne’s map: and this tract falls, in our geography, nearly midway between the head of the White River, and the country of Wangara, placed according to the notices found in Edrisi; and which are corroborated, generally, by Mr. Horneman, who was told that Wangara lay to the westward of the empire of Bornu.[51] Through this country of Wangara, the great river of interior Africa (our Niger) runs, and beyond Wangara, eastward, we are unable to trace it. (It may be necessary to remark here, that Edrisi conceived that the Niger ran to the west, from a source, common to that, and to the Egyptian Nile.)
It seems, then, (if Mr. Browne was accurate, and I have no reason to doubt him since he speaks carefully), that these rivers flow down from the highlands south of Darfoor into a relatively low and hollow area to the west, where two large lakes are also shown on Mr. Browne’s map. This area is located nearly midway in our geography between the beginning of the White River and the land of Wangara, as indicated by the information found in Edrisi; this is generally supported by Mr. Horneman, who was informed that Wangara was situated to the west of the Bornu empire.[51] In this land of Wangara, the major river of interior Africa (our Niger) flows, and beyond Wangara to the east, we can't continue to trace it. (It's worth noting that Edrisi believed the Niger flowed westward from a source common to it and the Egyptian Nile.)
In fact, one ought not to be surprised to find, considering how very loosely and inaccurately such kind of information must necessarily be given, at so great a distance from the seat of inquiry, (that is, many hundred miles from Mr. Browne’s station in Darfoor), if the lakes and rivers in question should turn out to be those of Wangara[165] itself! It may be observed, that the distances from the capital of Darfoor agree nearly as well to the lakes of Wangara, as to those of Hermad and Dwi; and the bearing does not differ two points of the compass.[52] There is nothing to check the bearings from Darfoor, on that side; and it would not be at all extraordinary, if two descriptions, such as those of Edrisi, and of the people of Darfoor, should be even more at variance, than the difference between the positions of the two sets of lakes and rivers, on the map.
In fact, one shouldn’t be surprised to find that, given how loosely and inaccurately such information must be shared from so far away (that is, hundreds of miles from Mr. Browne’s location in Darfoor), the lakes and rivers in question could very well be those of Wangara[165] itself! It's worth noting that the distances from the capital of Darfoor match pretty closely with the lakes of Wangara, just as much as they do with those of Hermad and Dwi; and the direction doesn’t differ by more than two points on the compass.[52] There’s nothing to confirm the bearings from Darfoor on that side, and it wouldn’t be surprising if two descriptions, like those of Edrisi and the people of Darfoor, ended up being even more inconsistent than the differences between the locations of the two sets of lakes and rivers on the map.
But how ambiguous soever the subject of the western streams, between the head of the White River and Wangara, may be, the waters that flow from the southern and western borders of Darfoor, are clearly known to run to the north-west, and to form a large lake; proving a hollow space to exist, in the quarter, north-west of Darfoor; and little more than 160 miles eastward of Wangara.[53] Whether this hollow be a continuation of that which receives the waters of the Niger, and forms a part of them into lakes, in Wangara, remains to be discovered. It is, however, in proof, that Edrisi believed the fact, by his describing a water communication the whole way. I now proceed to describe the course of these waters, that flow from the quarter of Darfoor, towards the north-west.
But no matter how unclear the topic of the wester streams may be, between the start of the White River and Wangara, the waters from the southern and western edges of Darfoor are definitely known to flow northwest and create a large lake. This indicates that there is a low area in the northwest part of Darfoor, just a little over 160 miles east of Wangara.[53] Whether this low area connects to the one receiving the waters of the Niger, contributing to the lakes in Wangara, is still to be determined. However, it's clear that Edrisi believed this was the case, as he described a water route all the way. Now, I will describe the path of these waters flowing from the Darfoor area toward the northwest.
Mr. Browne was informed, (page 449,) that on the south of Darfoor, and between that country and the source of the White River, the waters formed a considerable river, named Misselâd. This he traces on his map at page 180, and in the routes given in his Appendix, p. 449, 464, 468, towards the NNW and NW, to a point above the parallel of 15 degrees north (i. e. through near 400 G.[166] miles of course); but he is silent, otherwise than by implication, respecting its future course. But of a second river (the Batta) whose course lies between the Misselâd and Darfoor, and very near to the former, he says, that it flows from the south, and then, deviating to the west, it falls into the Bahr-el-Fittré. (P. 464). It remains to be added, that, following the western road from Wara to Bagherme (in his Appendix, p. 464, 465), we come to the Bahr Fittré itself: but without any notices respecting the crossing of the Misselâd river, by the way. This matter, however, will be made clearer, presently, by the aid of Horneman and Edrisi.
Mr. Browne was informed (page 449) that to the south of Darfoor, and between that area and the source of the White River, the waters formed a significant river called Misselâd. He marks this on his map on page 180 and in the routes provided in his Appendix, pp. 449, 464, 468, heading NNW and NW, to a point beyond the parallel of 15 degrees north (i.e., over nearly 400 G.[166] miles). However, he does not elaborate on its future course, except by implication. Regarding a second river (the Batta), which runs between the Misselâd and Darfoor, and very close to the former, he notes that it originates from the south, then shifts to the west, and flows into the Bahr-el-Fittré (p. 464). Additionally, when taking the western route from Wara to Bagherme (in his Appendix, pp. 464, 465), we arrive at the Bahr Fittré itself, but there are no details about crossing the Misselâd river along the way. This situation, however, will be clarified shortly with insights from Horneman and Edrisi.
Mr. Browne continues to say, (p. 465,) that “the people on the banks of the Bahr Fittré use little boats, for the purpose of passing from one place to another, on the river.” The word Bahr indicating equally a lake or a river, is here understood for the latter, by Mr. Browne; but we learn from Mr. Horneman, that the dominions of the sultan of Fiddri, (as he writes it,) are situated round a large fresh-water lake, which bears the same name: and that, into this lake flows a river which comes from Darfoor; and whose banks are very rich in sugar-canes. (See above, p. 115.)
Mr. Browne goes on to say, (p. 465,) that “the people living along the Bahr Fittré use small boats to get from one place to another on the river.” The term Bahr refers to either a lake or a river, but Mr. Browne understands it in this context to mean the latter. However, we learn from Mr. Horneman that the territory of the sultan of Fiddri, (as he spells it,) surrounds a large freshwater lake of the same name: and that a river from Darfoor flows into this lake; its banks are very fertile for sugar-cane. (See above, p. 115.)
This account of the lake is strengthened by several circumstances. Horneman says, that the district of Fiddri, although so named by its own inhabitants, is called Cougu, or Cugu, by the people who dwell eastward; (the Arabs;) Luffe, by those on the west. Now, Couga, or Kauga, is noted by Edrisi, as a country and city near a large lake of fresh water, situated at 30 journies westward, or south-westward, from Dongola; 36 eastward from Gana: and here we have the very position. Moreover, Mr. Browne describes, in the before-mentioned western route, at 3½ journies short of the Bahr[167] Fittré, Dar Cooka,[54] doubtless the country of Couga or Cugu in question.
This account of the lake is supported by several factors. Horneman states that the area known as Fiddri, although named by its local people, is called Cougu or Cugu by those living to the east (the Arabs) and Luffe by those in the west. Additionally, Couga or Kauga is noted by Edrisi as a region and city near a large freshwater lake, located 30 journeys west or southwest from Dongola and 36 east from Gana. This matches the described location perfectly. Furthermore, Mr. Browne describes, in the previously mentioned western route, a location 3½ journeys short of the Bahr[167] Fittré, Dar Cooka,[54] which is likely the country of Couga or Cugu in question.
The circumstance of boats plying on the Bahr Fittré (Browne’s Travels, p. 465,) also accords with the idea of a lake. Nor can there be a doubt that the Misselâd of Browne, is the river from the quarter of Darfoor, intended by Horneman: and that it, as well as the river of Batta, falls into the lake of Fittré.[55]
The situation of boats traveling on the Bahr Fittré (Browne’s Travels, p. 465) also matches the concept of a lake. There is no doubt that the Misselâd mentioned by Browne is the river from the Darfoor area that Horneman referred to, and that it, along with the river of Batta, flows into the lake of Fittré.[55]
It may be remarked, that what Edrisi describes as the upper part of the course of the Niger, (Nilus Nigrorum) is evidently intended for this river: but he describes it as originating from the same source as the Egyptian Nile, and flowing westward. There also appears in Ptolemy, the same river springing from about the 10th degree of north latitude; as the Misselâd does.
It can be noted that what Edrisi refers to as the upper part of the course of the Niger (Nilus Nigrorum) is clearly meant for this river: however, he describes it as starting from the same source as the Egyptian Nile and flowing westward. Ptolemy also mentions this same river originating from around the 10th degree of north latitude, just like the Misselâd does.
It appears certain then, that the ground declines, from the quarter of Darfoor, towards the interior of Africa, to the north-west and west: and the descriptions of Edrisi, (page 13,) go equally to prove that the ground also declines from the NE to SW, towards the lake of Fittré; because he describes the river of Kuku to run southward.[56]
It seems clear that the land slopes down from the region of Darfoor towards the interior of Africa, to the northwest and west. The descriptions by Edrisi (page 13) also support the idea that the terrain declines from the northeast to the southwest toward Lake Fittré because he notes that the Kuku river flows southward.[56]
[168]The same must be understood of the river of the Antelopes, or Wad-el-Gazel, which is marked by Mr. Browne, (p. 465,) at two journies to the NW of the lake Fittré; and by Mr. Beaufoy at the distance of one journey from the capital of Bournu. Mr. Horneman indeed was told, that the Wad-el-Gazel was not a river, but a fruitful and well inhabited valley. It is probably both: that is, a fertile valley, with a river running through it. Hence we must suppose the Wad-el-Gazel to be another river that falls into the lake Fittré, from the north; and consequently, the lake itself, to be the receptacle of the eastern waters of the interior of North Africa.
[168]The same should apply to the River of the Antelopes, or Wad-el-Gazel, which Mr. Browne notes (p. 465) is located two journeys northwest of Lake Fittré, and Mr. Beaufoy mentions as being one journey away from the capital of Bournu. Mr. Horneman was indeed informed that the Wad-el-Gazel was not a river, but a fertile and well-populated valley. It’s likely both: a fertile valley with a river flowing through it. Therefore, we should consider the Wad-el-Gazel as another river that feeds into Lake Fittré from the north; and as a result, the lake itself is probably the reservoir for the eastern waters of the interior of North Africa.
Edrisi places Semegonda at ten journies to the westward or SW of Kauga, (our Fittré,) and within the country of Wangara, which is entirely surrounded by the branches of the Niger, and periodically inundated by its waters: and it is clear that he believed, that there was a water communication between Wangara and Kauga; because he says, (p. 7.) that salt was conveyed all along the Niger, eastward to that point. It may be remarked, that Horneman says, that the people of Fittré (Kauga) have no salt, but what they obtain from vegetable substances.[57]
Edrisi locates Semegonda ten journeys to the west or southwest of Kauga (our Fittré) and within the region of Wangara, which is completely surrounded by the branches of the Niger and is regularly flooded by its waters. It's clear that he thought there was a water route connecting Wangara and Kauga; he states (p. 7) that salt was transported all along the Niger, heading east to that point. It's worth noting that Horneman mentions that the people of Fittré (Kauga) have no salt except what they get from plant sources.[57]
[169]If there be, as Edrisi says, (page 7,) a water communication between Kauga and Wangara, (no matter which way the water runs), the fact of a common level, would, of course, be proved; and then it must be admitted to be highly improbable, that any part of the course of the White River, southward of Darfoor, should be on a lower level, than the lake of Fittré. But, perhaps, some may doubt the authority of Edrisi, in this point; and possibly, the more so, since he says, that the Niger runs to the west.
[169]If there is, as Edrisi mentions (page 7), a waterway connecting Kauga and Wangara (regardless of the direction of the water flow), it would clearly demonstrate a common water level. Therefore, it must be considered very unlikely that any part of the White River's course, south of Darfoor, is at a lower elevation than the lake of Fittré. However, some may question Edrisi's credibility on this matter, especially since he claims that the Niger flows to the west.
But placing this circumstance out of the question, and leaving the facts set forth by Mr. Browne and Mr. Horneman, to speak for themselves, it may be asked,
But putting this situation aside and letting the facts presented by Mr. Browne and Mr. Horneman speak for themselves, it may be asked,
[170]1. Whether it is probable that the Niger, after running about 2250 British miles in direct distance from its source, should not have arrived at a lower level, than that of the countries adjacent to the heads of the Nile?[58]
[170]1. Is it likely that the Niger, after traveling roughly 2250 British miles straight from its source, hasn't reached a lower elevation than the areas near the sources of the Nile?[58]
2. Whether the course of the Misselâd river, from the south of Darfoor, is not almost directly contrary to that which the Niger should take from Wangara, in order to join the White River?
2. Is the path of the Misselâd River, starting from the south of Darfoor, almost directly opposite to the direction the Niger should take from Wangara to connect with the White River?
3. Whether the course of the waters, to the west of Darfoor, and of the head of the White River, are not also reported to run towards the quarter that contains the Niger, instead of coming from it? and are they not said to run through a wet marshy country; whilst that to the east, in the line between Fittré and the White River, is high and mountainous?[59]
3. Is it not reported that the waters west of Darfoor and at the head of the White River also flow towards the area that includes the Niger, rather than coming from it? And aren’t they said to flow through a wet, marshy region, while the area to the east, along the line between Fittré and the White River, is high and mountainous?[59]
4. Has not the country of Wangara, &c. like that of Fittré, the character of an alluvial tract, inundated by the periodical floods of the Niger, to the extent of more than 350 British miles in length, by more than 170 in breadth: and has not both that and Gana,[171] large fresh water lakes in the dry season?[60] May not so great an extent of surface, suffice for the evaporation of the waters of the Niger; as we have already an instance of the kind in Persia, in which the Heermend, a river of more than 400 miles length of course, is evaporated in less than ¹⁄₂₀ part of the surface of the inundation formed in Wangara?[61] I now return to the general geography.
4. Doesn’t the country of Wangara, like that of Fittré, have the characteristics of an alluvial area, flooded by the seasonal floods of the Niger, stretching over more than 350 British miles in length and more than 170 in width? And don’t both that and Gana, have large freshwater lakes during the dry season?[171] Can such a large expanse of land support the evaporation of the Niger’s waters? We already have an example of this in Persia, where the Heermend, a river over 400 miles long, evaporates in less than ¹⁄₂₀ of the area of the floodplain created in Wangara? I will now return to the general geography.
Mr. Horneman, in describing the position of the southern states, speaks of Wadey, bordering on the west of Darfoor; then Metko, west, (or rather NW) of Wadey; both of which are watered by the river which flows from Darfoor to the lake Fittré, (i. e. the Misselâd); and, finally, Fittré itself, to the NW of Metko. Continuing the description—Begarmé[62] is said to lie N of Wadey; Bournu, N of Fittré. Bergoo seems not to have been known to Horneman; or, perhaps, he may have confounded it with the Burgu[172] towards Augila (the Berdoa of Delisle and D’Anville). Bergoo, according to Mr. Browne, is an independent country: Metko and Wadey, the same: so that the empire of Bournu ends with Fittré (or Cooka) Margi, and Wangara, southward.[63]
Mr. Horneman, in describing the position of the southern states, refers to Wadey, which borders the west of Darfoor; then Metko, to the west (or rather NW) of Wadey; both of which are fed by the river flowing from Darfoor to Lake Fittré, (i.e. the Misselâd); and finally, Fittré itself, to the NW of Metko. Continuing the description—Begarmé[62] is said to be located north of Wadey; Bournu, north of Fittré. Bergoo seems to have been unfamiliar to Horneman; or perhaps he confused it with the Burgu[172] towards Augila (the Berdoa of Delisle and D’Anville). According to Mr. Browne, Bergoo is an independent country: Metko and Wadey are the same: so the empire of Bournu ends with Fittré (or Cooka) Margi, and Wangara, to the southward.[63]
Of these countries, Mr. Browne had not heard of Wangara, under that name;[64] nor of Wadey, or Metko; although he describes the tract which contains them, in his map. Nor does Dar Cooka appear to have been known to him, as the Kauga of Edrisi, or as the Fittré of Horneman.
Of these countries, Mr. Browne hadn't heard of Wangara by that name;[64] nor of Wadey or Metko; even though he does show the area that includes them on his map. It seems that Dar Cooka also wasn't known to him, whether as the Kauga of Edrisi or as the Fittré of Horneman.
At the capital of Bournu, the interesting inquiries of Mr. Browne end, northward: but as those of Mr. Horneman extend to the borders of Darfoor, they of course overlap each other; so as to give much greater authority to the report of the course of the waters from Darfoor to the lake Fittré.
At the capital of Bournu, Mr. Browne's intriguing investigations end to the north. However, since Mr. Horneman's inquiries reach the borders of Darfoor, they naturally overlap; this significantly enhances the credibility of the report about the flow of the waters from Darfoor to Lake Fittré.
With respect to the line of distance, between Fezzan and Darfoor; Darfoor and Sennaar; these are the details: (that from Gana to Dongola, has been already given, page 188.)
With regard to the distance between Fezzan and Darfoor, and Darfoor and Sennaar, here are the details: (the distance from Gana to Dongola has already been provided on page 188.)
Mr. Beaufoy allows between Temissa (in Fezzan) and the capital of Bournu, 43 days of caravan travelling, in a south-easterly direction. Mr. Browne places the same capital, deduced from inquiries made at Darfoor, in lat. 19° 45′, lon. 21° 33′; so as to leave an interval[173] of distance equal to 562 G. miles, between Temissa and Bournu; giving a rate of only 13 miles and a small fraction, per day. This rate falls far short of caravan travelling; and it is possible that the halting days may have been included in the aggregate number 43; as is often done, when the inquiries are not sufficiently pointed. In the Proceed. Afr. Assoc. 1798, it is stated, that Bornou falls at 534 G. miles from Dongola on the Nile; and Mr. Browne’s result gives about 600. It should, however, be noted, that Mr. Browne’s Tables (page 467), give a bearing of N ¼ W between Begarmé and Bournu, which I have followed in preference to his map, where it is N 13 W; and thus place Bournu at 562 from Dongola. A mean between the position in the former map, and that given by Mr. Browne, would be 567. But through the want of a cross line of distance, that can be depended on, the position of this important point in geography, remains in uncertainty. Mr. Horneman was told that Bournu was 15 days journey from Kashna: and at 25, in a W by S direction, short of Fittré. This is, no doubt, meant of the boundary of the empire of Bournu, towards Kashna, and not of the capital; and this report appears very probable, as the Bournuan dominions are said to terminate on that side, with the country of Wangara.
Mr. Beaufoy estimates that it takes 43 days for a caravan to travel from Temissa (in Fezzan) to the capital of Bournu, heading southeast. Mr. Browne places the same capital, based on information gathered in Darfoor, at latitude 19° 45′, longitude 21° 33′; which leaves a distance of 562 geographical miles between Temissa and Bournu, averaging just over 13 miles per day. This pace is much slower than typical caravan travel; it's possible that rest days are included in the total of 43, as often happens when inquiries are not specific enough. In the Proceed. Afr. Assoc. 1798, it states that Bornou is 534 geographical miles from Dongola on the Nile; Mr. Browne’s calculation gives about 600. However, it should be noted that Mr. Browne’s Tables (page 467) indicate a bearing of N ¼ W between Begarmé and Bournu, which I have chosen to follow instead of his map, where it shows N 13 W; this places Bournu at 562 miles from Dongola. The average of the location in the earlier map and that given by Mr. Browne would be 567. But due to the lack of a reliable cross line of distance, the exact location of this significant geographic point remains uncertain. Mr. Horneman was told that Bournu is a 15-day journey from Kashna: and at 25 days, in a W by S direction, short of Fittré. This likely refers to the boundary of the Bournu empire towards Kashna, rather than the capital itself; and this report seems quite plausible, as the Bournuan territories are said to end on that side at the country of Wangara.
[174]CHAPTER IV.
Concerning the Tribes that occupy the habitable Parts of the Great Desert.—Tibbo and Tuarick.—Empires of Bournu, Asben, and Houssa.—General Observations.
About the tribes living in the habitable areas of the Great Desert.—Tibbo and Tuarick.—Empires of Bournu, Asben, and Houssa.—General Observations.
The inquiries of Mr. Horneman throw some new light on the distribution of the habitable tracts, inclosed by, or adjoining to, that part of the Sahara which lies to the east of Tombuctoo; as well as of the tract that stands in the same relation to the Eastern, or Libyan Desert.
The questions raised by Mr. Horneman provide some fresh insights into the distribution of habitable areas that are enclosed by or next to the part of the Sahara located east of Tombuctoo, as well as the area that shares the same position in relation to the Eastern, or Libyan Desert.
The empires of Houssa and Bournou, consisting of various lesser states, appear to divide the space along the Niger, from the quarter of Tombuctoo, to that of Darfoor, eastward; and to extend a considerable way to the north, beyond the general line of the river.
The empires of Houssa and Bournou, made up of several smaller states, seem to stretch along the Niger, from the area of Tombuctoo to that of Darfoor in the east, and extend quite a distance north, beyond the main path of the river.
Two considerable nations, also, the Tibbo and Tuarick, appear to divide the remainder of the space, northward, within the Deserts; embracing Fezzan on every side but the north; and closing on the maritime states along the Mediterranean, from the Desert which shuts up Egypt on the west, to Mount Atlas. Mr. Horneman appears to be the first person who has given these general ideas of the Tibbo and Tuarick; and they merit attention.
Two significant nations, the Tibbo and Tuarick, seem to occupy the remaining area to the north, within the deserts; surrounding Fezzan on all sides except the north; and reaching down to the coastal regions along the Mediterranean, from the desert that borders Egypt to the west, to Mount Atlas. Mr. Horneman seems to be the first person to share these general insights about the Tibbo and Tuarick, and they deserve recognition.
The Tibbo, or Tibboo, possess the eastern, and the Tuarick the[175] western, and most extensive part of this vast tract. Fezzan separates them on the north: and its meridian forms nearly their common boundary, until they close southward on Kashna and Bournu.[65]
The Tibbo, or Tibboo, are located in the east, while the Tuarick occupy the west, which is the largest part of this vast area. Fezzan divides them to the north, and its meridian almost marks their shared boundary, extending south towards Kashna and Bournu.[65]
According to Mr. Horneman, the settlements of the Tibbo, begin at the south and south-east of Fezzan, and extend from thence eastward, along the south of the Harutsch and of the Augilan Desert, to the wide sandy Desert of the Lebetæ[66] (Libya), which shuts up Egypt, on the west. This Desert forms the eastern boundary of the Tibbo. On the south, wandering Arabs possess the tract between them and the empire of Bournu; and on the west, are the Tuarick of Asben (Agades), Tagazee, &c.
According to Mr. Horneman, the settlements of the Tibbo start in the south and southeast of Fezzan and extend eastward along the southern edges of the Harutsch and the Augilan Desert to the expansive sandy Desert of the Lebetæ[66] (Libya), which borders Egypt to the west. This desert serves as the eastern boundary of the Tibbo. To the south, nomadic Arabs occupy the land between them and the Bournu empire, and to the west are the Tuarick of Asben (Agades), Tagazee, and others.
The Tibbo are said to be divided into the following tribes: 1. Rshade, or Rock Tibbo. 2. Febabo. 3. Burgu, or Birgu. 4. Arna. 5. Bilma. 6. Nomadic Tibbo.
The Tibbo are said to be split into these tribes: 1. Rshade, or Rock Tibbo. 2. Febabo. 3. Burgu, or Birgu. 4. Arna. 5. Bilma. 6. Nomadic Tibbo.
1. The Rshade. This tribe possesses the country adjoining to the south and south-east of Fezzan; and is besides intermixed with the Fezzaners, in those quarters of Fezzan, (as the Tuarick are in[176] the western quarters, and the Arabs in the north.) The towns of the Rock Tibbo, are Abo and Tibesty; which I am enabled to place generally, by means of a route given by Mr. Horneman.[67]
1. The Rshade. This tribe holds the land to the south and southeast of Fezzan and is also mixed in with the Fezzaners in those areas of Fezzan, just like the Tuarick are in the western parts and the Arabs in the north. The towns of the Rock Tibbo are Abo and Tibesty, which I can generally locate thanks to a route provided by Mr. Horneman.[67]
The Tibbo Rshade, or Rock Tibbo, are so denominated from their building their habitations under rocks, or living in caves; before which they build huts of rushes, for their summer’s residence.
The Tibbo Rshade, or Rock Tibbo, get their name from living under rocks or in caves; in front of these, they build huts made of reeds for their summer homes.
Some idea of the tract inhabited by this tribe, may be collected from Mr. Beaufoy’s account of the country between Fezzan and Bournu, ch. vi.; and from Mr. Horneman’s description of the white Harutsch. The road to Bournu leads out of the country of Fezzan, from Temissa; from which town, seven journies bring us to the plain of Tibesty, said to be inhabited by Mahomedans; which is indeed the religion of the Rock Tibbo. The last four days lead across what is termed “a hilly desert of sand.” So far Mr. Beaufoy’s informant.
Some idea of the area where this tribe lives can be gathered from Mr. Beaufoy’s account of the region between Fezzan and Bournu, ch. vi.; and from Mr. Horneman’s description of the white Harutsch. The route to Bournu starts from the region of Fezzan, specifically from Temissa; from that town, after seven journeys, you reach the plain of Tibesty, which is said to be populated by Muslims; this is indeed the religion of the Rock Tibbo. The last four days of travel take you across what’s called “a hilly desert of sand.” This is according to Mr. Beaufoy’s source.
The white Harutsch, crossed by Mr. Horneman, is in this vicinity, and extends southward, from the line of his route across it, from Augila to Mourzouk: so that it is not improbable that the[177] “hilly desert” just mentioned, is a continuation of the white Harutsch. What renders it more probable is, that Mr. Horneman was told, that certain black mountains, which he suspected to be a part of the black Harutsch, are crossed in the way from Fezzan to Bournu. And it has been shewn, that the black Harutsch adjoins to the white Harutsch on the east; and this arrangement may continue, southward: in which direction Mr. Horneman was informed the black Harutsch stretched, beyond the line of his route.
The white Harutsch, which Mr. Horneman crossed, is in this area and extends southward from his route, which goes from Augila to Mourzouk. It’s quite possible that the “hilly desert” mentioned earlier is actually part of the white Harutsch. What makes this more likely is that Mr. Horneman was informed of certain black mountains, which he thought were part of the black Harutsch, located along the route from Fezzan to Bournu. It has also been shown that the black Harutsch is next to the white Harutsch on the east; this arrangement might continue southward, where Mr. Horneman was told the black Harutsch extended beyond his route.
This gentleman describes the hilly part of the white Harutsch to consist of “loose friable limestone, in which the petrifactions are imbedded so loosely, that they may be taken out with ease.” No rocks therefore are more likely to contain natural caves, or are more easily excavated, when wanted. This tract, therefore, seems, as well from description, as position, to be that inhabited by the Rock Tibbo.
This gentleman describes the hilly area of the white Harutsch to consist of “loose friable limestone, in which the fossils are imbedded so loosely, that they can be removed easily.” Therefore, no rocks are more likely to contain natural caves, or are more easily excavated when needed. This region, based on both its description and location, seems to be the one occupied by the Rock Tibbo.
A circumstance in Herodotus (Melpom. 183), leads one to conclude, that these are the Ethiopian Troglodytæ, hunted by the Garamantes. The Garamantes, I trust, I have made to appear, are the Fezzaners; and here are a tribe of Troglodytæ, on their very borders. They are said, in the same place, to be very swift of foot. Mr. Horneman says, that the walk of the Tibbos is light and swift: as if remarkably so: but then he speaks of the Tibbo, collectively; and not of any particular tribe. But, on the other hand, it appears that he saw more of the Rock Tibbo, than any other: for he says, “they go in multitudes to Fezzan;” and it may be that his opinion of the nation at large was, in a great measure, formed by what he saw of this tribe.[68]
A situation in Herodotus (Melpom. 183) suggests that these are the Ethiopian Troglodytæ, hunted by the Garamantes. I believe I've shown that the Garamantes are the Fezzaners; and here is a tribe of Troglodytæ right on their borders. They're described in the same passage as being very quick on their feet. Mr. Horneman mentions that the walk of the Tibbos is light and swift—remarkably so. However, he refers to the Tibbo as a whole, not any particular tribe. On the other hand, it seems that he encountered more of the Rock Tibbo than any other group, as he notes, “they go in multitudes to Fezzan;” so it’s possible that his view of the nation as a whole was largely shaped by his experiences with this tribe.[68]
[178]A strange particular is related of the Troglodytæ, by Herodotus. He says, that their language bears some resemblance to the screaming of bats.[69] Melpom. 183.
[178]A strange detail is mentioned about the Troglodytes by Herodotus. He says that their language sounds a bit like the screeching of bats.[69] Melpom. 183.
2. The Febabo. This tribe is found at 10 journies SSW from Augila; between which territories, on the side of Augila, is a desert of 6 journies, void of water. And notwithstanding this circumstance, and the distance from the sea coast of Bengasi (20 days, at least), they are annually exposed to the depredations of the people of Bengasi, who, joined with those of Augila, go to steal men and dates. See above, on Gegabib, page 148.
2. The Febabo. This tribe is located 10 journeys SSW of Augila; between these territories, on the side of Augila, there is a desert spanning 6 journeys that has no water. Despite this and being at least 20 days away from the coast of Bengasi, they are annually vulnerable to raids from the people of Bengasi, who, along with those from Augila, come to kidnap men and dates. See above, on Gegabib, page 148.
3. Burgu, or Birgu. (This must not be mistaken for Bergoo, a state situated in the quarter of Darfoor.) It appears in D’Anville and Delisle, as well as in Leo, under the name of Berdoa; but the name is too often repeated by Mr. Horneman to be a mistake of his. This tribe resides to the south of Febabo, at the distance of some days; and at eighteen, eastward from Tibesty. Hence the Burgu tribe may be placed S a little W from Augila, and about the parallel of the south of Fezzan.
3. Burgu, or Birgu. (This should not be confused with Bergoo, a region located in the Darfoor area.) It appears in D’Anville and Delisle, as well as in Leo, under the name Berdoa; but the name is mentioned too frequently by Mr. Horneman to be an error on his part. This tribe lives south of Febabo, a few days' journey away, and eighteen days east of Tibesty. Therefore, the Burgu tribe can be positioned slightly south-west of Augila, and roughly at the same latitude as the southern part of Fezzan.
Their territory is said to be fertile, but they bear the character of[179] robbers. A caravan of Fezzanners, from Begarmé and Bournu, about the time of Mr. Horneman’s visit, was plundered by them. The Sultan of Fezzan sent a force to punish them; the smallness of which, seems to prove that the Burgu are either not numerous, or are very much dispersed. (See above, page 107). The route of the Sultan’s army helps to fix the positions both of Burgu, and of the Rock Tibbo.[70]
Their land is said to be fertile, but they act like robbers. A caravan of people from Fezzan, coming from Begarmé and Bournu, was robbed by them around the time of Mr. Horneman’s visit. The Sultan of Fezzan sent a small force to punish them; the size of this force suggests that the Burgu are either not very numerous or are spread out. (See above, page 107). The route of the Sultan’s army helps to identify the locations of both the Burgu and Rock Tibbo.[70]
Mr. Beaufoy relates (ch. iv. 1790,) that on another occasion, the Tibbo of Tibesty plundered a caravan of Fezzan, which robbery was also punished: but on the last occasion, the Tibestians (who are the Rock Tibbo), aided the Sultan. It appears by the geography, that the caravans from the SE are much exposed to the Burgu and Tibesty, in their route to Fezzan.[71]
Mr. Beaufoy recounts (ch. iv. 1790) that on another occasion, the Tibbo of Tibesty robbed a caravan from Fezzan, and that theft was also punished. However, the last time, the Tibestians (who are the Rock Tibbo) supported the Sultan. According to the geography, caravans coming from the southeast are very vulnerable to the Burgu and Tibesty on their way to Fezzan.[71]
[180]4. Arna. This tribe is said to live five or six journies to the eastward of the Burgu; and must therefore border on the sandy Desert of the Lebetæ. Mr. Horneman appears to have known them only by name.
[180]4. Arna. This tribe is said to live five or six journeys to the east of the Burgu and must therefore be near the sandy Desert of the Lebetæ. Mr. Horneman seems to have known them only by name.
5. Bilma. This is the principal tribe of the Tibbo. They occupy the middle space, between Fezzan and Bournu, adjacent to the great Desert of Bilma. Their capital of Dyrke is said to be one journey from Bilma; which may be the Balmala of Edrisi. They carry on a commerce between Bournu and Fezzan. (See above, p. 106.) The Billa of Ptolemy may possibly be meant for Bilma; but is too far to the eastward.
5. Bilma. This is the main tribe of the Tibbo. They are situated in the central area, between Fezzan and Bournu, next to the vast Desert of Bilma. Their capital, Dyrke, is reportedly a single journey from Bilma; which might be the Balmala mentioned by Edrisi. They engage in trade between Bournu and Fezzan. (See above, p. 106.) The Billa mentioned by Ptolemy could possibly refer to Bilma; however, it is positioned too far to the east.
Mr. Beaufoy states the distance to be 45 days of the salt caravans from Agadez to the lake of Dumboo; which is situated within the Desert of Bilma. These, at 13 G. miles per day,[72] give a total of 585 miles. The interval on the construction is about 60 less. Either then, Agadez is more to the west, or Dumboo more to the east. Two circumstances render it probable that Agadez should be more to the west: Mr. Magrah was told that it lay S 30° W from Fezzan: and that it lay N from Kashna. That part of the General Map of 1798, has not been altered.
Mr. Beaufoy indicates that it takes 45 days for the salt caravans to travel from Agadez to the lake of Dumboo, which is located in the Desert of Bilma. At a pace of 13 geographic miles per day,[72] this totals 585 miles. The actual distance is about 60 miles less. This means either Agadez is further west or Dumboo is further east. There are two reasons why it seems likely that Agadez is more to the west: Mr. Magrah was informed that it is located S 30° W from Fezzan, and that it is to the north of Kashna. That part of the General Map from 1798 has not been updated.
[181]6. Nomadic Tibbo. These are the most southerly of the tribes; and are seated in the Bahr-el-Gazel, which, Mr. Horneman was told, was a long and fruitful valley, 7 journies north of Begarmé. Of the Bahr (or Wad)-el-Gazel, I have already spoken, in page 168. The distance of 7 journies N of Begarmé would place the Nomadic Tibbo within the empire of Bournu. Perhaps, in Bournu, as in Persia, both ancient and modern, Nomadic tribes find plenty of room:[73] but whether so far southward, may be a doubt, for a river of the name of Wad-el-Gazel, is said to flow even into the Desert of Bilma. Antelopes are found in the neighbourhood of Dumboo; and there may be a river denominated from them, in that quarter, as well as in that of Begarmé.
[181]6. Nomadic Tibbo. These tribes are the southernmost and are located in the Bahr-el-Gazel, which Mr. Horneman mentioned is a long and fertile valley, 7 journeys north of Begarmé. I've already discussed the Bahr (or Wad)-el-Gazel in page 168.. Being 7 journeys north of Begarmé would place the Nomadic Tibbo within the Bournu empire. Maybe, like in ancient and modern Persia, there’s enough space for nomadic tribes in Bournu:[73] but it’s uncertain if that holds true so far south, as a river named Wad-el-Gazel is said to even flow into the Bilma Desert. Antelopes are found near Dumboo, and there might be a river named after them in that area, as well as near Begarmé.
Of the Tuarick.[74]
These, whom Mr. Horneman styles a mighty people, appear to occupy the habitable parts of the Great Sahara, situated to the west of the meridian of Fezzan. They must necessarily be widely dispersed; and they are also divided into many tribes. Mr. Horneman very properly confines himself to what he knew, concerning them: and this knowledge related to little more than to the tribes of Kolluvi and Hagara, who live the nearest to Fezzan; and carry on a commerce between that place, Soudan, and Gadamis.
These people, whom Mr. Horneman calls a mighty group, seem to inhabit the livable areas of the Great Sahara, located to the west of the meridian of Fezzan. They are likely spread out over a wide area and are also divided into several tribes. Mr. Horneman wisely focuses on what he knew about them, which was primarily related to the tribes of Kolluvi and Hagara, who live closest to Fezzan and engage in trade between that region, Soudan, and Gadamis.
The Kolluvi possess (from recent conquest, it would seem,) the[182] country of Agadez; which, with other provinces adjacent, forms a state named collectively, Asben. It adjoins to Kashna (a part of the empire of Houssa,) on the south; Bournu on the east. Its capital is the city of Agadez, said, by Mr. Magrah’s informant, to be in size equal to the suburbs of Tunis; which, Mr. Magrah observes, compose the largest proportion of that city.
The Kolluvi seem to have recently conquered the[182] country of Agadez, which, along with nearby provinces, collectively makes up a state called Asben. It borders Kashna (part of the Houssa empire) to the south and Bournu to the east. Its capital is the city of Agadez, which Mr. Magrah’s informant claims is roughly the same size as the suburbs of Tunis—Mr. Magrah notes that these suburbs make up the largest part of that city.
But it would appear by the Soudan route, transmitted by that gentleman, that the establishments of the Tuarick in other places, as Gazer, Tagazee, Jenet, &c. consisted only of small villages, scattered through an immensity of space: indeed, like most of the other tribes situated within this singular region. Zanfara and Guber, which are said to lie adjacent, pay a tribute to Asben.
But it seems from the Soudan route, shared by that gentleman, that the Tuarick settlements in other areas like Gazer, Tagazee, Jenet, etc., were just small villages spread out over a vast area: actually, like most of the other tribes found in this unique region. Zanfara and Guber, which are said to be nearby, pay tribute to Asben.
The Hagara are the most easterly of the Tuarick, and are near Fezzan. These I am not able to place on the Map: possibly, they either occupy Ganat, on the south of Fezzan; or, as the Tuarick possess Jenet and Sockna, on the NW of it, the town of Agaree, in the same quarter, may be the Hagara meant. It appears in the routes collected by Mr. Magrah, at Tunis.
The Hagara are the easternmost group of the Tuarick and are close to Fezzan. I can't pinpoint their exact location on the map: they might be in Ganat, south of Fezzan; or since the Tuarick occupy Jenet and Sockna to the northwest, the town of Agaree in that area could be the Hagara referred to. This information shows up in the routes compiled by Mr. Magrah in Tunis.
Mr. Horneman also mentions, but without any notice of situation, the Matkara tribe: also that of Tagama, situated towards Tombuctoo and Soudan.[75] He forms an ingenious conjecture respecting this tribe. They are said to be whiter than the rest of the Africans of the interior (or rather, perhaps, less black); and are not Mahometans. Now, as the term Nazary, or Christian, is applied generally to those whom the Mahometans call unbelievers, Mr. Horneman[183] infers that this circumstance has given rise to the report of there being a tribe of white Christians near Tombuctoo.[76]
Mr. Horneman also mentions, but without any indication of location, the Matkara tribe, as well as the Tagama tribe, which is located toward Timbuktu and Sudan.[75] He proposes an interesting theory about this tribe. They are said to be lighter-skinned than the rest of the Africans from the interior (or maybe just less dark) and they are not Muslims. Since the term Nazary, or Christian, is generally used by Muslims to refer to those they consider non-believers, Mr. Horneman[183] deduces that this may have led to the belief that there's a tribe of white Christians near Timbuktu.[76]
The eastern Tuarick live chiefly a Nomadic life.
The eastern Tuarick primarily live a nomadic lifestyle.
One curious particular relating to the Tuarick is, that they have formed colonies in Siwah, Augila, and Sockna; all of which are commercial places, forming a chain along the northern border of the Libyan Desert, towards the maritime states along the Mediterranean. To these, the Lesser Oasis is to be added, in course; as speaking the same language as Siwah; and this is corroborated by Mr. Browne, who says (page 132), that the Lesser Oasis forms a kind of capital settlement of the Muggrebine Arabs. Gadamis also may possibly be found to be a colony of the same people; whose establishments of this kind, may extend along the northern border of the whole Sahara; since they have colonies in a quarter so remote from their own nation.[77]
One interesting detail about the Tuarick is that they have established colonies in Siwah, Augila, and Sockna; all of which are trading hubs that form a chain along the northern edge of the Libyan Desert, leading towards the coastal regions of the Mediterranean. Additionally, the Lesser Oasis should be included, as it speaks the same language as Siwah; this is backed up by Mr. Browne, who states (page 132) that the Lesser Oasis serves as a sort of central settlement for the Muggrebine Arabs. Gadamis might also turn out to be a colony of the same group, as their settlements could stretch along the northern border of the entire Sahara, considering they have colonies in an area so far from their homeland.[77]
The Tuarick are said, by Mr. Horneman, to be a very interesting people; the most so, of any of the tribes of the Sahara: but he gives the palm of intelligence, benevolence, and mildness, to the people of Houssa; who are, however, Negroes.
The Tuarick are described by Mr. Horneman as a very interesting people, more so than any of the tribes in the Sahara. However, he credits the people of Houssa with being the most intelligent, kind, and gentle, although they are Negroes.
[184]This Houssa, (or Haussa, as Mr. Horneman calls it), whose position has so long evaded geographical research, is, according to this gentleman, an empire, consisting of a number of lesser states, in the very centre of North Africa. Kashna, or Kasna, which has so long figured on the Map as an independent empire, must, according to his description, (and which is very consistent), give way to Houssa, of which Kasna is no more than a province. He includes in Houssa, on the authority of a Maraboot, the countries situated generally between Tombuctoo, Asben, and Bournu.[78]
[184]This Houssa (or Haussa, as Mr. Horneman refers to it), which has long eluded geographical research, is considered by this gentleman to be an empire made up of several smaller states, located right in the center of North Africa. Kashna, or Kasna, which has been depicted on maps as an independent empire, must, according to his description (which is very coherent), yield to Houssa, of which Kasna is merely a province. He includes in Houssa, based on the authority of a Maraboot, the regions that generally lie between Tombuctoo, Asben, and Bournu.[78]
He says that three names are applied to this empire (as to Fittré:) Haussa, the name among the people themselves; Soudan,[79] (meaning the country of the Blacks, or Negroes) by the Arabs; and Asna, by the people of Bournu. But this last, he says, in strictness, applies only to the countries of Kasna, Kano, (Gana,) and such parts of[185] Houssa, as lie to the eastward of these: in effect, those parts of Houssa which border on, or are nearest to, the Bournuans: a practice that has prevailed, more or less, in every country.
He mentions that three names are used for this empire (as for Fittré): Haussa, which is the name used by the people themselves; Soudan,[79] (meaning the land of the Blacks, or Negroes) by the Arabs; and Asna, by the people of Bournu. However, he notes that the last name strictly refers only to the regions of Kasna, Kano (Gana), and parts of[185] Houssa that are to the east of these: essentially, those areas of Houssa that border or are closest to the Bournuans—a practice that has occurred, more or less, in all countries.
Concerning the existence of a city of Houssa, Mr. Horneman is silent: but he learnt that Tombuctoo (between which, however, and Fezzan, there is very little intercourse,) is certainly the principal city, and most worthy of notice, in the interior of Africa.
Concerning the existence of a city of Houssa, Mr. Horneman doesn't mention it: but he found out that Tombuctoo (although there is very little interaction between it and Fezzan) is definitely the main city and the most notable one in the interior of Africa.
It must be admitted that the information collected by Mr. Magrah, at Tunis, respecting Houssa, agrees with the report of Mr. Horneman; but still there may also be a city of the name of Houssa, in the quarter towards Tombuctoo, and within the limits of the empire now denominated Houssa; and which city, at an earlier period, may have been the capital of the empire.
It must be acknowledged that the information gathered by Mr. Magrah in Tunis about Houssa matches Mr. Horneman's report; however, there might also be a city named Houssa in the area towards Tombuctoo, within the boundaries of the empire now called Houssa. This city could have been the capital of the empire at an earlier time.
Mr. Magrah says, (Beaufoy’s MSS.) “All my late informants persist in representing Houssa as a considerable empire, comprehending many principalities. Kasna, (says Sidi Cossem,) is the great city, Houssa, the country of the Negroes. The course from Tunis to Gadamis is due south; and the same from thence to Houssa.” (The same authority gave the bearing from Fezzan to Agades, at S 30° W.; and thence to Kasna, due south.)[80]
Mr. Magrah says, (Beaufoy’s MSS.) “All my recent sources insist on describing Houssa as a significant empire, consisting of many principalities. Kasna, (according to Sidi Cossem,) is the great city, Houssa, the land of the Negroes. The route from Tunis to Gadamis goes straight south; and the same applies from there to Houssa.” (The same source provided the direction from Fezzan to Agades, at S 30° W.; and then to Kasna, straight south.)[80]
[186]GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
It is an unquestionable fact, that Geography has gained very considerably by Mr. Horneman’s travels; though not quite so much as if he had transmitted the general bearings of the different portions of his routes; as well as the latitudes of some important geographical points; together with an account of the time employed between Fezzan and Tripoly. However, very great allowances must be made, for the critical situation in which he was placed; from the difficulty of supporting the character he had assumed, whilst he was forwarding the purposes of the Association.
It is an undeniable fact that Geography has significantly benefited from Mr. Horneman’s travels; although not as much as it could have if he had provided the general directions of the various parts of his routes, as well as the latitudes of some key geographical points, along with a report of the time spent between Fezzan and Tripoly. However, we must consider the challenging circumstances he faced; trying to maintain the persona he adopted while furthering the goals of the Association.
It may be justly remarked, that the course of a few years, has solved many of the questions respecting the geography and natural history of Africa, that appeared the most important and curious, during a series of ages: and it may be added, that the physical geography of Africa, turns out to be more remarkable than was even supposed.
It can be rightly said that in just a few years, many important and intriguing questions about the geography and natural history of Africa have been answered, questions that were significant for centuries. Additionally, it turns out that Africa's physical geography is even more impressive than previously thought.
Of the questions either wholly, or in part, solved, may be reckoned the following:
Of the questions that have been fully or partially answered, the following can be considered:
First. The general direction of the stream of the Niger, now proved by Mr. Park, to be from west to east; although the place and mode of its termination, are not exactly known.
First. The overall flow of the Niger river, as confirmed by Mr. Park, is from west to east; however, the exact location and method of its ending are not precisely known.
Secondly. The place of the remote head of the Nile; in all ages a desideratum: and which, although it has not been actually visited,[187] may fairly be believed, on the authority of Mr. Browne’s information: more especially, as it agrees so nearly with the report of the Darfoor people, to Ledyard, at Cairo; with the reports of the Arabian geographers; and with the information collected by M. Maillet, in Egypt.
Secondly. The location of the source of the Nile has been sought after for ages, and although it hasn’t been physically visited,[187] we can reasonably believe it based on Mr. Browne’s information. This is especially true since it closely aligns with the accounts given by the Darfoor people to Ledyard in Cairo, the reports from Arabian geographers, and the data gathered by M. Maillet in Egypt.
Thirdly. The place of the Oasis, and remains of the temple of Jupiter Ammon; discovered by Mr. Browne, and corroborated by Mr. Horneman: as also, the exact position and extent of the Greater Oasis, by Mr. Browne; and the approximated position of the Lesser Oasis, by the joint inquiries of the same gentlemen.
Thirdly. The location of the Oasis and the ruins of the temple of Jupiter Ammon, discovered by Mr. Browne and confirmed by Mr. Horneman; as well as the precise location and size of the Greater Oasis, identified by Mr. Browne; and the estimated location of the Lesser Oasis, determined through the combined investigations of these two gentlemen.
Fourthly. The position of the nation called Garamantes by the ancients; derived from information collected by the African Association.
Fourthly. The status of the nation known as Garamantes by ancient historians; based on data gathered by the African Association.
Fifthly. The truth of the question respecting the Lotus; which, considered fairly, and stripped of the poetical ideas annexed to it, is really what the ancients described it to be. The merit of this discovery, or at least, the distinct proof of it, rests, in a great measure, with Mr. Park.
Fifthly. The reality of the question about the Lotus; which, when viewed objectively and without the poetic embellishments surrounding it, is actually what the ancients claimed it to be. The credit for this discovery, or at least the clear evidence of it, primarily belongs to Mr. Park.
Sixthly. The proof of certain facts stated by the ancients; as,
Sixthly. The evidence of specific facts mentioned by the ancients; as,
1. The Dates of the distant inland tracts, being gathered by the people of the sea coast.
1. The Dates from the faraway inland areas are being collected by the people from the coast.
2. The Mons Ater of Pliny, recognised in the Black Harutsch.
2. The Mons Ater of Pliny, identified as the Black Harutsch.
3. The site of Memphis, before involved in doubt and obscurity.
3. The site of Memphis, which was previously shrouded in uncertainty and confusion.
[188]4. The singular conformation of the Mound of Bubastis, in Lower Egypt, proved by the French Sçavans.[81]
[188]4. The unique shape of the Mound of Bubastis in Lower Egypt was verified by the French Sçavans.[81]
Although a part, only, of these discoveries, have been made by persons employed by the Association, yet it is probable that the gentleman to whom we owe some of the most brilliant of them, was in part determined to the pursuit, by the discussions set on foot by the Association; which had been established some years before Mr. Browne’s travels commenced.
Although only a portion of these discoveries was made by people working for the Association, it’s likely that the gentleman responsible for some of the most remarkable findings was partly motivated to pursue this work by the discussions initiated by the Association, which had been established a few years before Mr. Browne started his travels.
[188*]POSTSCRIPT.
When the above Memoir was printed, I was ignorant that the following passage occurred, in Mr. Horneman’s Letter of the 6th April, from Mourzouk.
Wwhen the above Memoir was printed, I didn’t know that the following passage was in Mr. Horneman’s Letter from Mourzouk dated April 6th.
“I spoke to a man who had seen Mr. Browne in Darfoor: he gave me some information respecting the countries he travelled through, and told me, that the communication of the Niger with the Nile, was not to be doubted, but that this communication before the rainy season, was very little; in those parts, the Niger being at the dry period reposing, or non fluens.”
“I talked to a guy who had seen Mr. Browne in Darfoor: he gave me some information about the countries he traveled through and told me that the connection between the Niger and the Nile is definitely real, but that this connection before the rainy season is very limited; in those areas, the Niger is in a dry period, reposing, or non fluens.”
If the authority is to be depended on, it proves two facts: first, that the Niger and Nile, (that is the western branch, or White River), are by no means one and the same river; but, on the contrary, that their fountains are perfectly distinct: for, it is agreed on all hands, that the White River is a very large stream, at all seasons; whereas, we are here told that the Niger discharges into the Nile, during the dry season, only a very small portion of its waters: consequently, the waters of the Nile must come from some other quarter than the Niger.
If we can trust the authority, it confirms two things: first, that the Niger and Nile (specifically the western branch, or White River) are definitely not the same river; in fact, their sources are completely separate. It’s widely accepted that the White River is a substantial flow of water throughout the year; however, we are informed here that during the dry season, the Niger only contributes a small amount of its water to the Nile. Therefore, the waters of the Nile must come from somewhere other than the Niger.
The other fact is, that during the dry season, the waters of the Niger are generally evaporated in the inland country: a fact disbelieved by many, from their not being well informed respecting the powers of evaporation.
The other fact is that during the dry season, the waters of the Niger usually evaporate in the inland areas; this is a fact that many people doubt because they are not well informed about the process of evaporation.
The communication above alluded to, may probably turn out to be that, between the lakes of Wangara and Fittré; which is described by Edrisi as a part of the track of the salt trade along the Niger. It may be proper to repeat, that the Misselâd of the map, answers to the upper part of Edrisi’s Niger.
The communication mentioned above may likely refer to the area between the lakes of Wangara and Fittré; which Edrisi describes as part of the salt trade route along the Niger. It is worth noting that the Misselâd on the map corresponds to the upper section of Edrisi’s Niger.
ERRATA IN THE GEOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR.
Errata in the geography memo.
- Page 130 line the last, for whole, read given.
- — 148 — last but one, for and, read to.
- — 171, 172 for Metho, read Metko.
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[14]The Reader is referred to the Map of Mr. Horneman’s Route, page 29, and to the General Map of Africa, opposite Chapter III.
[14]The Reader is referred to the Map of Mr. Horneman’s Route, page 29, and to the General Map of Africa, opposite Chapter III.
[15]Mr. Horneman had the misfortune to lose his papers at Schiacha, three days beyond Siwah; so that he must have written down the time, previous to that accident, from recollection only. Between Cairo and Siwah, his time is given, as follows:
[15]Mr. Horneman unfortunately lost his documents at Schiacha, three days past Siwah; thus, he must have recorded the time prior to that incident solely from memory. Between Cairo and Siwah, his time is noted as follows:
Hours. | ||
---|---|---|
Cairo to Wady-el-Latron, or the Natron Valley, about | 19 | |
To | a sand hill, (supposed to be the ridge between the Natron Valley and the bed of the Bahr-bela-ma) | 4 |
To | Muhabag | 13 |
Mogara | 4½ | |
Biljoradeck | 16 | |
To | a station on the hills of Ummesogeir: said to be 40 hours, or more, say | 41½ |
To | Ummesogeir | 5 |
Siwah | 20 | |
Total | 123 |
[16]The ordinary caravan day of 8 hours, appears to be about 20 British miles, by the road; and in direct distance across deserts, about 16¼ or 16½ Geographic miles.
[16]The usual caravan day of 8 hours seems to cover about 20 British miles, by the road; and in straight distance across deserts, about 16¼ or 16½ Geographic miles.
Siwah to the Valley of Schiacha | 23 | hours. |
To Torfaue | 6½ | |
Across the Desert to a watering-place on the border of Augila | 49 | |
To Augila | 9 | |
Total | 87½ |
[19]This is the computation:
This is the calculation:
Hours. | ||
---|---|---|
From Augila to the Mountains of Moraije | 26 | |
To the Plain of Sultin | 18 | |
Across the Plain or Desert of Sultin, &c. to a woody tract, 3 journies; but no account in hours, say | 34 | |
To the entrance of the black Harutsch, about 1 day, say | 10 | |
To a watering-place in the Harutsch | 4 | |
To the end of the black Harutsch, 3½ days; say | 40 | |
Through the white Harutsch, 1½ day; say | 15 | |
To a watering-place on the borders of Fezzan | 4 | |
To | Temissa | 9 |
Zuila | 6¾ | |
Hamarra | 7 | |
Tragan | 10¾ | |
Sidi Bisher | 8 | |
Mourzouk | 3 | |
195½ |
The road distance, at 2¼ British miles per hour, gives 488¾, which, at ¹⁄₂₀ part for windings, as before, would give 463½; or in G. miles about 409. I have deducted 14 for the extraordinary windings and roughness of the paths, in the black Harutsch.
The road distance, at 2.25 British miles per hour, totals 488.75, which, accounting for 1/20 for curviness, as previously mentioned, would come to 463.5; or in G. miles roughly 409. I've subtracted 14 for the unusual twists and roughness of the paths in the black Harutsch.
Remains G. miles 395, for the direct distance between Augila and Mourzouk.
Remains G. miles 395 for the direct distance between Augila and Mourzouk.
[21]The former statement of the distance, (in the Geog. Herod. p. 167.) is 861. The difference is occasioned by the different modes of projection of the maps; that in Herodotus, being on a spherical projection, the present one being rectilinear.
[21]The earlier claim about the distance, (in the Geog. Herod. p. 167.) is 861. The discrepancy is due to the different types of map projections used; Herodotus's map uses a spherical projection, while the current one uses a rectilinear projection.
[24]There are several places of the name of Wadan, in this Geography; the name designing the conflux of two water-courses, or torrents. Another Wadan is found in the road from Mesurata to Fezzan; and a third, between Fezzan and Bournu.
[24]There are several locations named Wadan in this Geography; the name refers to the meeting point of two rivers or streams. Another Wadan is located on the road from Mesurata to Fezzan, and a third one is situated between Fezzan and Bournu.
[25]Mr. Horneman came, on the day before he entered the black Harutsch, to a small wood of green trees. This situation accords with that of Zala, being just midway between Augila and Zuila. No town is known to exist there, at present.
[25]Mr. Horneman arrived, the day before he got into the black Harutsch, at a small forest of green trees. This location is similar to Zala, positioned exactly between Augila and Zuila. Currently, no town is known to be there.
[26]M. D’Anville reckons the distance between Tripoly and Mourzouk 240 G. miles, only: M. Delisle about 280, or less: and Sanuto, who wrote on the African Geography, (A. D. 1588,) 255. Thus, the 289 allowed above, from Mesurata, go beyond the highest calculation hitherto made, from Tripoly, which is yet farther from Mourzouk, than Mesurata is.
[26]M. D’Anville estimates the distance between Tripoli and Mourzouk to be 240 geographical miles; M. Delisle suggests it's about 280, or maybe less; and Sanuto, who wrote on African Geography in 1588, says it's 255. Therefore, the 289 mentioned earlier, from Misurata, exceeds the highest calculation previously made from Tripoli, which is even farther from Mourzouk than Misurata is.
[27]Mr. Browne, who did not see the Bahr-bela-ma, was told that it lay a day’s journey to the west of the Natron Lakes; but unless it takes a turn to the west, beyond the point where General A. saw it, he must have been misinformed. See an account of the Bahr-bela-ma in the province of Faiume, in the Geog. Herod. p. 503.
[27]Mr. Browne, who did not see the Bahr-bela-ma, was told that it was a day's journey to the west of the Natron Lakes; but unless it takes a turn to the west, past the point where General A. saw it, he must have been misinformed. See an account of the Bahr-bela-ma in the province of Faiume, in the Geog. Herod. p. 503.
The description of these valleys is to be found in the Mémoires sur l’Egypte, p. 212.
The description of these valleys can be found in the Mémoires sur l’Egypte, p. 212.
[29]The hills over the valley of Mogara, answer to the hills of Le Magra, (perhaps corrupted from El Mogara,) of Mr. Beaufoy; Afr. Assoc. 1790, ch. x. and also to the M. Ogdamus of Ptolemy, Afr. Tab. III.
[29]The hills above the valley of Mogara correspond to the hills of Le Magra (possibly derived from El Mogara), mentioned by Mr. Beaufoy in the African Association in 1790, chapter ten, and they also relate to the M. Ogdamus noted by Ptolemy in the African Table III.
[34]My friend, Mr. Morton Pitt, M. P. has proved, by the enumeration of the inhabitants of a country parish in Dorsetshire, that the men of an age capable of bearing arms are one-fourth of the whole community. Mr. Horneman, if I understand him rightly, states the number of actual warriors to be 1500; so that we ought, perhaps, to multiply that number by 5, to get nearer to the total amount of the population.
[34]My friend, Mr. Morton Pitt, M.P., has shown, by counting the people in a rural parish in Dorset, that the men of an age able to bear arms make up one-fourth of the entire community. Mr. Horneman, if I understand him correctly, claims the number of active warriors is 1500; so we should probably multiply that figure by 5 to get a more accurate estimate of the total population.
[38](See Proceed. Afr. Assoc. 1790, ch. x.) The sea coast is truly about eight journies from Gegabib: but I know of no place of the name of Duna. Derna is twice that distance.
[38](See Proceed. Afr. Assoc. 1790, ch. x.) The coast is actually about eight trips from Gegabib, but I'm not aware of any location called Duna. Derna is twice that distance.
[40]Abulfeda speaks both of its dates and its fountains: and Ben Ali informed Mr. Beaufoy, that it was famous for the “abundance and flavour” of its dates. Proceed. Afr. Assoc. ch. x.
[40]Abulfeda mentions both its dates and its springs: and Ben Ali told Mr. Beaufoy that it was well-known for the “abundance and flavor” of its dates. Proceed. Afr. Assoc. ch. x.
[41]Mr. Horneman speaks of three towns in Augila, and Ben Ali adds a fourth town, or village, Guizara, situated at one journey to the east of the capital. Hence it agrees with the watering-place to which Mr. Horneman came at nine hours short of Augila. It seems to be also the Saragma of Ptolemy. (Tab. III. Africæ.)
[41]Mr. Horneman talks about three towns in Augila, and Ben Ali mentions a fourth town, or village, Guizara, located just one journey east of the capital. This aligns with the watering place Mr. Horneman reached nine hours before arriving at Augila. It also seems to be the Saragma mentioned by Ptolemy. (Tab. III. Africæ.)
[44]Gadamis, it would appear, ought to be placed more to the eastward than it appears in the Map of 1798; which will increase the direct distance of Teghery from Tunis, on the Map, by straightening the line of the road.
[44]Gadamis seems to need to be positioned further east than shown on the 1798 map; this will make the distance from Teghery to Tunis appear shorter on the map by straightening the road.
Gadamis was pointed out to Mr. Magrah, to bear from Tunis, S 4° E; the distance 23 caravan days. Of these, the first 10 were to Kabes, situated in the Map of D’Anville at 163½ G. miles, in a direction of S a very little W from Tunis. If the other 13 days (at the same rate of 16,35) equal to 212½ G. miles, be laid off on the line of S 4 E from Tunis, Gadamis will fall in latitude 30° 29′ 30″, longitude 11° east.
Gadamis was indicated to Mr. Magrah as being located from Tunis at S 4° E, with a distance of 23 days by caravan. Out of these, the first 10 days were to Kabes, which is shown on D’Anville's map at 163½ G. miles, slightly south and a bit west of Tunis. If we plot the remaining 13 days (at the same pace of 16.35) which equals 212½ G. miles along the S 4° E line from Tunis, Gadamis will be at latitude 30° 29′ 30″ and longitude 11° east.
Mr. Magrah was told that it bore SW from Tripoly, but no distance is given. Pliny says, that Cydamus lies opposite to Sabrata (Sabart, or old Tripoly). In one copy of Pliny, it is reckoned 12 journies from the Greater Syrtis. In this position it is somewhat more than 240 G. miles from it; agreeing to 12 journies of the rate of light travelling, described above, page 126.
Mr. Magrah was informed that it was southwest of Tripoli, but no specific distance was provided. Pliny states that Cydamus is located opposite Sabrata (Sabart, or ancient Tripoli). In one version of Pliny, it is considered to be 12 journeys from the Greater Syrtis. Based on this, it is slightly more than 240 geographical miles away, aligning with 12 journeys at the rate of light travel, as described above, page 126.
These data may be of use in the future corrections of the geography, as Gadamis may, from its position, be a useful point of outset.
These data could be useful for future corrections of the geography, as Gadamis might be a helpful starting point based on its location.
[46]Mr. Bruce describes a chain of mountains, extending westward from the Abyssynian branch of the Nile, between the 11nth and 12th degree of north latitude; and having to the north Dyre and Tegla. As these places are recognised in Browne’s routes, p. 463, under the names of Deir and Tuggala, situated in a mountainous region, I have described the ridge above-mentioned, to run to the WNW instead of west. These places, as well as Harraza and Lebeit, (meant for Ibeit,) are placed very much too far to the west of Sennaar, in the map of Mr. Bruce, Vol. V.
[46]Mr. Bruce describes a mountain range extending west from the Abyssinian branch of the Nile, located between the 11th and 12th degrees of north latitude, with Dyre and Tegla to the north. Since these places are recognized in Browne’s routes, p. 463, as Deir and Tuggala, situated in a mountainous area, I've noted that the ridge mentioned actually runs to the WNW instead of directly west. These locations, along with Harraza and Lebeit (which is intended to mean Ibeit), are positioned far too far west of Sennaar in Mr. Bruce's map, Vol. V.
[48]Euterpe, c. 32.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__Euterpe, around 32.
[50]I think I perceive in Mr. Browne’s description of Darkulla, the traces of an alluvial country; that is, one whose soil is formed from the deposition of rivers; intersected by their branches; and periodically inundated. Mr. Browne says of the natives, “they are very cleanly, to which the abundance of water in their country, contributes. They have ferry-boats on the river, which are impelled by poles, partly by a double oar, like our canoes. The trees are so large, from the quantity of water and deep clay, that canoes are hollowed out of them, sufficiently capacious to contain ten persons.” Travels, p. 308, 309.
[50]I think I see in Mr. Browne’s description of Darkulla the signs of a floodplain; that is, land whose soil is formed from river deposits; crisscrossed by their branches; and regularly flooded. Mr. Browne mentions the locals, “they are very clean, thanks to the abundance of water in their area. They have ferries on the river, powered by poles and partly by a double oar, similar to our canoes. The trees are so large, due to the amount of water and deep clay, that canoes are carved out of them, large enough to hold ten people.” Travels, p. 308, 309.
[51]So says Leo, p. 254.
So says Leo, p. 254.
[54]Here we have a proof that the Eastern people call Fittré by the name of Kauga, (or Cooka,) as Horneman says. Dar has been explained by Mr. Browne to mean country; as Dar-Fûr, the country of Fûr, or Foor.
[54]Here we have proof that the Eastern people call Fittré by the name Kauga (or Cooka), as Horneman states. Dar has been explained by Mr. Browne to mean country; as in Dar-Fûr, the country of Fûr, or Foor.
[55]This lake is said by Mr. Horneman, page 118, to be from four to eight journies in circuit; varying its dimensions with the dry or the rainy season; thus increasing threefold with the rains, and leaving, in the dry season, an enriched soil to the husbandman.
[55]Mr. Horneman claims that this lake has a circumference of four to eight journeys, depending on whether it's the dry or rainy season. It increases threefold during the rains and, in the dry season, leaves behind fertile soil for farmers.
[56]This seems to be the river mentioned by Ibn al Wardi, (in Hartman’s Edrisi, p. 62,) as coming from the east, and passing by Ghama (read Begama, or Begarmé,) into the Nile; meaning the Nile of the Negroes, (our Niger.)
[56]This looks like the river referred to by Ibn al Wardi, (in Hartman’s Edrisi, p. 62,) which flows from the east and passes by Ghama (often read as Begama or Begarmé) into the Nile; referring to the Nile of the Negroes, (which is our Niger.)
[57]It should be observed, that Edrisi, (p. 13,) reckons Kauga to the country of Wangara; although some, says he, reckon it to belong to Kanem.
[57]It should be noted that Edrisi (p. 13) considers Kauga to be part of the Wangara region; however, some believe it belongs to Kanem.
It is proper in this place to restate and correct the line of distance between Gana and Dongola; which will be found in the Proceed. Afr. Assoc. for 1798, p. 122. There it appears, that Kauga is given by Edrisi, at 30 journies, equal on his scale, to 570 G. miles from Dongola; and it is found by Mr. Browne’s statement, to fall at 578. Again, Mr. Horneman says, that Fittré, (or Kauga,) is 40 journies to the eastward of Kashna, (See above, p. 138.) This interval of distance, taking Kashna as it is placed in the Map of 1798, is 653 G. miles; equal to 16⅓ per day; and is perfectly satisfactory. Edrisi allows 36 journies between Gana and Kauga; so that by this account, Gana ought to be nearer to Kauga, by four journies, than Kashna is. In the Map of 1798, Gana is placed eight miles too far to the east. (See the Proceed, p. 121.) This corrected, Gana will be 82 from Kashna; which, however, is still too much for four journies, and agrees better to five.
It’s important to clarify and correct the distance between Gana and Dongola, noted in the Proceed. Afr. Assoc. for 1798, p. 122. There, Edrisi mentions that Kauga is 30 journeys away, which on his scale equals 570 geographic miles from Dongola; Mr. Browne’s data shows it as 578. Additionally, Mr. Horneman states that Fittré (or Kauga) is 40 journeys east of Kashna (See above, p. 138.). This distance, considering Kashna’s position on the 1798 map, measures 653 geographic miles, which equals about 16⅓ per day and is quite reasonable. Edrisi indicates 36 journeys between Gana and Kauga, meaning that according to this, Gana should be four journeys closer to Kauga than Kashna is. The 1798 map places Gana eight miles too far east (See the Proceed, p. 121). Once corrected, Gana will be 82 miles from Kashna, but that’s still too much for four journeys and aligns better with five.
The interval thus corrected, between Gana and Kauga, is 575 G. miles in direct distance; which allows no more than 15½ per day, for Edrisi’s 36 days; whilst his ordinary scale is 19. If therefore, the report of Edrisi is right, Gana must either lie more to the west, or the course of the Niger, along which his route leads, to within ten journies of Kauga, must form a very deep curve to the south, after passing the dominions of Houssa, (of which Gana makes a part.) That it does decline to the south, Mr. Horneman was repeatedly informed, as may be seen above, pages 115, 117, but whether in a degree sufficient to occasion the difference above-mentioned, is not ascertained.
The corrected distance between Gana and Kauga is 575 geographic miles in direct distance; which allows for a maximum of 15½ miles per day over Edrisi’s 36 days, while his usual rate is 19. So, if Edrisi's report is accurate, Gana must be located further west, or the Niger River, which his route follows, must bend significantly to the south after passing through the Houssa territories (of which Gana is a part). It has been noted that it does curve to the south, as Mr. Horneman was told multiple times, as mentioned above, pages 115, 117,, but whether this curve is enough to account for the stated difference is not confirmed.
M. D’Anville also had an idea, and so describes it in his Map of Africa, 1749, (possibly from actual information), that the Niger declined to the south beyond Gana; so that the termination of it, in the lake of Semegonda, was 3½ degrees of latitude to the south of Gana; and which, by the bye, would place the lake of Semegonda, about the same parallel with the Bahr Hemad of Mr. Browne. At present, however, we must be content with proportioning the distance between Gana and Kauga; which, admitting a curvature to the south, allows a rate of 16⅓ or 16½; or that of ordinary caravan travelling. It has been shewn that Horneman’s report of the distance between Kashna and Fittré, is very consistent: and there can be no question, that, of the two, we ought to prefer Horneman’s report, from its being less subject to error than the other, which has passed through so many hands, in its way to us.
M. D’Anville also had an idea, which he outlines in his Map of Africa, 1749 (possibly based on actual information), that the Niger River flows south beyond Gana, ending in the lake of Semegonda, which is 3.5 degrees of latitude south of Gana. Interestingly, this would place the lake of Semegonda about at the same latitude as the Bahr Hemad mentioned by Mr. Browne. For now, we can only estimate the distance between Gana and Kauga; assuming a curve to the south, this gives us a distance ratio of 16⅓ or 16½, similar to standard caravan travel. It has been demonstrated that Horneman’s report on the distance between Kashna and Fittré is quite consistent. Without a doubt, we should favor Horneman’s report since it is less likely to contain errors compared to the other, which has gone through numerous sources before reaching us.
[58]The Thames, between Maidenhead Bridge and Mortlake, (about 41 B. miles in a straight line,) has a fall of rather more than one foot eight inches in each mile. But this is a smooth part of its course: for although the Thames does not, by any means, spring from very elevated lands, it cannot be supposed to fall less than four feet in each mile, taken on its whole course. On this idea, the Niger should have a fall of more than 8000 feet, in its supposed course to the White River. But even if two feet and a half (which appears very moderate indeed) be allowed, the fall would be no less than 5625 feet, or 115 yards more than an English mile. Is it to be credited, that the bed of the White River, on the south of Darfoor, and at a point not very remote from its source, is a mile lower than the springs of the Joliba, or Niger?
[58]The Thames, between Maidenhead Bridge and Mortlake, (about 41 B. miles in a straight line), drops a little over one foot eight inches for each mile. But this section is quite smooth: while the Thames doesn’t come from high land, it should drop no less than four feet for every mile when considering its entire course. Based on this, the Niger would need to drop more than 8000 feet on its supposed route to the White River. However, even if we assume a drop of two and a half feet (which seems quite reasonable), the total fall would still be at least 5625 feet, or 115 yards more than an English mile. Can we really believe that the bed of the White River, to the south of Darfoor, and not far from its source, is a mile lower than the springs of the Joliba, or Niger?
[59]Browne’s Travels, page 473.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__Browne’s Travels, p. 473.
[60]Edrisi says, “Ab urbe Ghana ad primos limites terræ Vancáræ est iter octo dierum (orientem versus)—Atque hæc eadem est insula longitudinis trecentorum milliarium, centum et quinquaginta latitudinis, quam Nilus undequaque circundat toto anni tempore. Adveniente verò mense Augusto, et æstu gravescente, Niloque inundante, insula ista vel certè major pars illius aquis obruitur, manetque sepulta aquis quamdiu Nilus terram inundare consuevit.” (Sionita, p. 11 and 12. See also Hartmann’s Edrisi, article Vankara, p. 47 et seq.
[60]Edrisi says, “From the city of Ghana to the first borders of the land of Vancára, it's an eight-day journey eastward—And this same island is 300 miles long and 150 miles wide, surrounded by the Nile all year round. When August rolls around and the heat increases, causing the Nile to flood, this island, or at least most of it, gets submerged underwater and stays buried for as long as the Nile usually floods the land.” (Sionita, p. 11 and 12. See also Hartmann’s Edrisi, article Vankara, p. 47 et seq.
[61]Ebn Haukal, an Arabian geographer, of the tenth century, (lately translated by Sir William Ouseley,) gives the following account of the river Heermend, p. 205.
[61]Ebn Haukal, a 10th-century Arab geographer, (recently translated by Sir William Ouseley,) provides the following description of the river Heermend, p. 205.
“The most considerable river of Sejestan is the Heermend, which comes from Ghaur to the city of Bost, and from that runs to Sejestan, to the lake Zareh. This lake is very small when the waters of the river are not copious; when the river is full, the lake increases accordingly. The length of this lake is about 30 farsangs, (about 110 B. miles,) and in breadth about one merhilch. (Day’s journey, or 24 B. miles.) Its waters are sweet, wholesome, &c.”
The biggest river in Sejestan is the Heermend, which flows from Ghaur to the city of Bost, and then goes on to Sejestan, reaching the lake Zareh. This lake is quite small when the river doesn’t have a lot of water; when the river is full, the lake expands accordingly. The lake is about 30 farsangs long (around 110 B. miles) and about one merhilch wide (a day’s journey, or 24 B. miles). The water is sweet and good for drinking, etc.
It is well known, that there is no outlet from the lake Zareh.
It is well known that there is no outlet from Lake Zareh.
[62]Begama of Edrisi.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__Begama of Edrisi.
[64]Mr. Horneman’s informant called it Ungara; and it appears that the Arabs name it Belad-el-Tebr, or the country of gold. (Herbelot and Bakui.) Mr. Browne was told, in Darfoor, that gold was not found in any quantity, to the west. But Wangara, a country of gold, at least in former times, lies to the west of Darfoor!
[64]Mr. Horneman’s informant referred to it as Ungara; and the Arabs call it Belad-el-Tebr, or the land of gold. (Herbelot and Bakui.) Mr. Browne was informed in Darfoor that gold wasn't found in significant amounts to the west. However, Wangara, a historically gold-rich region, is located to the west of Darfoor!
[65]There is a town named Taboo, a considerable way to the SW of Fezzan. D’Anville writes it Tibedou. It seems to be the Tabidium of Pliny, one of the towns conquered by the Romans, under Balbus. (Pliny, lib. v. c. 4 and 5.) Pliny says, c. 8. that “the Romans possessed the country, even to the river Niger, which separates Africa from Ethiopia;” and gives a long list of provinces and towns subject to them. It may be conceived, that besides Fezzan, Gadamis, Taboo, &c. they possessed the fertile tract, in the line from thence to the Niger; that is, Agadez, Kashna, and perhaps Gana.
[65]There’s a town called Taboo, quite a distance southwest of Fezzan. D’Anville refers to it as Tibedou. It appears to be the Tabidium mentioned by Pliny, one of the towns taken over by the Romans under Balbus. (Pliny, lib. v. c. 4 and 5.) Pliny notes in c. 8 that “the Romans controlled the land all the way to the Niger River, which separates Africa from Ethiopia;” and provides an extensive list of provinces and towns under their control. It’s reasonable to assume that, in addition to Fezzan, Gadamis, Taboo, etc., they also controlled the fertile area extending from there to the Niger; that is, Agadez, Kashna, and possibly Gana.
It may be remarked that Pliny (c. 8) speaks of two Ethiopias; and quotes Homer, as having divided them into Eastern and Western. One may conceive that the division between them, was the fertile tract in question, extending from Fezzan, in the line towards the Niger.
It can be noted that Pliny (c. 8) mentions 2 Ethiopias; and he quotes Homer, who divided them into Eastern and Western. One might imagine that the boundary between them was the fertile area in question, stretching from Fezzan in the direction of the Niger.
[67]From Mourzouk to Gatron, (or Kattron,) south 54 miles; understood to be of British standard, and to include the windings of the road. Thence to Tegerhie, SSW 33 miles. To Abo 7 days; and thence to Tibesty, 3 days in an easterly direction. Finally, to Burgu, 18 days; each of which 28 days are reckoned 18 B. miles by the road. See above, page 107.
[67]From Mourzouk to Gatron (or Kattron) is 54 miles to the south; it's assumed to meet British standards and includes the winding of the road. From there to Tegerhie is 33 miles SSW. It takes 7 days to get to Abo, and then 3 days heading east to Tibesty. Finally, reaching Burgu takes 18 days; in total, each of those 28 days counts as 18 British miles by the road. See above, page 107.
It has been calculated in page 155, that Teghery, by the general result of the authorities, should be placed S 26 W, 68 G. miles from Mourzouk.
It has been calculated in page 155, that Teghery, based on the overall findings of the experts, should be located S 26 W, 68 G. miles from Mourzouk.
From thence, the 10 days to Tibesty, in an easterly direction, may be taken at about 140 G. miles; which meeting the line of 7 days, equal to 98 G. miles from Temissa, (See Proceed. Afr. Assoc. 1790, chap. iv.) places Tibesty at 133 miles SE by E. from Mourzouk.
From there, the 10 days to Tibesty, heading east, can be estimated at about 140 geographical miles; which, meeting the line of 7 days, equivalent to 98 geographical miles from Temissa (See Proceed. Afr. Assoc. 1790, chap. iv.), puts Tibesty at 133 miles southeast by east from Mourzouk.
[68]The Troglodytæ were found in every place where nature or art had prepared recesses for them; and are always gifted with superior swiftness of foot. In particular, in Pliny, lib. vii. c. 2. and in Hanno’s Voyage, &c.
[68]The Troglodytes were found in every location where nature or human effort created shelters for them; and they are always known for their exceptional speed. Specifically, see Pliny, book VII, chapter 2, and Hanno’s Voyage, etc.
Considering that Fezzan, under the name of Garamanta, was one of the earliest known inland countries of Africa, to the Greeks, it is not altogether improbable that the first idea of the characteristic swiftness of the Ethiopian Troglodytæ, was derived from thence. And considering also the false idea entertained by the Greeks, of the bearing of the western side of Africa, Hanno might have supposed the source of the river Lixus, the reported seat of his Troglodytæ, to have been situated in the centre of Africa.
Considering that Fezzan, known to the Greeks as Garamanta, was one of the earliest recognized inland regions of Africa, it's quite possible that the initial concept of the unique speed of the Ethiopian Troglodytæ originated from there. Additionally, given the misconceptions the Greeks had about the western part of Africa, Hanno might have assumed that the source of the river Lixus, which was said to be the home of his Troglodytæ, was located in the heart of Africa.
[69]Horneman was told by the Augilans, that the Tibbo of Febabo, or Burgu, (it is not clear which) spoke a language that resembled the whistling of birds. He also takes occasion to remark, what Herodotus says concerning the language of the Ethiopians, hunted by the Garamantes; but probably without referring these last to the country of Fezzan.
[69]Horneman was informed by the Augilans that the Tibbo of Febabo, or Burgu (it's unclear which), spoke a language that sounded like the whistling of birds. He also mentions what Herodotus said about the language of the Ethiopians who were hunted by the Garamantes, although he probably doesn't link these to the region of Fezzan.
[70]It appears in page 176, (note) that Burgu is 18 journies from Tibesty; which, at 14 G. miles each, (as they are of 18 B. miles by the road,) produce 252 miles. Burgu is said, page 119, to be situated to the south, some days distant from Febabo. On the construction the line of 252 miles passes to the eastward of Febabo, (placed at 10 days to SSW from Augila, see page 108,) so far, as to place Burgu to the south-eastward, instead of south, from Febabo. It may be, that Febabo does not bear so far to the west, as SSW from Augila; as less than 14 miles per day cannot well be allowed, from Tibesty. I have therefore altered the bearing from SSW, and made it somewhat nearer to the meridian. The Berdoa, or Bardeo of Leo, (pages 245, 246,) agrees to this position, 500 Arabic miles from the Nile, in the midst of the Desert of Libya; and abounding with dates.
[70]It mentions in page 176, (note) that Burgu is 18 journeys from Tibesty; which, at 14 G. miles each (since they are 18 B. miles by the road), totals 252 miles. Burgu is said page 119, to be located to the south, some days away from Febabo. Based on this, the 252-mile line passes to the east of Febabo, (located 10 days to SSW from Augila, see page 108,) enough to position Burgu to the southeast, rather than south, from Febabo. It’s possible that Febabo isn’t as far west as SSW from Augila; less than 14 miles per day seems unreasonable from Tibesty. Therefore, I’ve adjusted the direction from SSW to be a bit closer to the meridian. The Berdoa, or Bardeo of Leo, (pages 245, 246) agrees with this location, being 500 Arabic miles from the Nile, in the heart of the Desert of Libya, and rich in dates.
[71]Notwithstanding the appearance of retributive justice in these attacks on the Tibbo, by the Sultan of Fezzan, yet Mr. Horneman lets us a little into the secret, by informing us, (page 68,) that “for some years past, the Sultan has augmented his revenues considerably, by cursory expeditions against the Tibbos of Burgu.” And the result of the above expedition was, “the stealing of about two hundred people, which were sold,” &c. It may be remarked, that Mr. Browne says of the Sultan of Darfoor, that a part of his revenue arises from a participation in the profits of the selatia, or slave-hunting parties, (page 299.) And of the Negro country of Dar Kulla, he says, that even the public regulations are framed with a view to the entrapping of individuals for slaves. (308.) So that the slave trade exists much in the same manner, in this quarter of Africa, where none of the slaves are purchased by European traders, as in the west.
[71]Despite the appearance of retributive justice in these attacks on the Tibbo by the Sultan of Fezzan, Mr. Horneman gives us some insight by telling us, (page 68,) that “for several years now, the Sultan has significantly increased his revenues through quick raids against the Tibbos of Burgu.” The outcome of the aforementioned raid was “the capture of about two hundred people, who were sold,” & c. It’s worth noting that Mr. Browne mentions that part of the Sultan of Darfoor's revenue comes from sharing in the profits of the selatia, or slave-hunting groups, (page 299). He also states that in the Negro region of Dar Kulla, even the public regulations are designed with the aim of trapping individuals for slavery. (308.) Thus, the slave trade operates similarly in this part of Africa, where none of the slaves are bought by European traders, unlike in the west.
[72]It has appeared that the caravan travellers in stating the time between distant places, are apt to give the whole time that elapses between their leaving one place, and arriving at another. Hence the days of halt, have often been added to the days of march; and a faulty route of travelling has thence been adopted. This, no doubt, occasioned the low rate adopted, soon after the institution of the Association: and which nothing but actual experiment can effectually correct.
[72]It seems that caravan travelers, when mentioning the time it takes to travel between distant locations, often include the total time from when they leave one place until they arrive at another. As a result, the days spent resting have frequently been counted along with the days spent traveling, leading to a flawed way of measuring travel time. This, without a doubt, caused the low rates that were established soon after the association was formed, and only real testing can properly fix this issue.
[73]The proof of this fact is most satisfactorily established, by Herodotus, and by Ibn Haukel, a geographical writer of the tenth century, whose work has been lately translated by Sir William Ouseley; to whose labours the science of Geography is much indebted.
[73]The proof of this fact is clearly established by Herodotus and Ibn Haukel, a geographical writer from the tenth century, whose work has recently been translated by Sir William Ouseley; the field of Geography owes a great deal to his efforts.
[75]Ptolemy has a city named Tagama, at the Niger, but too far to the east, to answer to the position here given. (Afr. Tab. IV.). There is also a Tegoma in our geography, near Kashna.
[75]Ptolemy mentions a city called Tagama located along the Niger River, but it's situated too far to the east to match the location described here. (Afr. Tab. IV.). There's also a Tegoma in our maps, close to Kashna.
[76]Many persons have expected to find in the interior of Africa, the remains of the Carthaginian nation, expelled by the Romans. Considering, however, the vast interval of time that has elapsed, we can hardly expect to find the remnant of a nation, continuing so far unmixed with the surrounding nations, as to preserve their distinction of character and language. Besides, it would really seem as if the Carthaginians themselves, (meaning the descendants of the Phœnicians,) were not to be regarded as a nation, so much as bodies of citizens, inhabiting commercial towns: so that their language may never have prevailed generally over Barbary.
[76]Many people have hoped to find in the interior of Africa the remnants of the Carthaginian nation, which was driven out by the Romans. However, considering the long time that has passed, we can hardly expect to find a fragment of a nation that has remained so unchanged from surrounding groups that it still preserves its unique character and language. Furthermore, it really seems like the Carthaginians themselves (meaning the descendants of the Phoenicians) should not be seen as a nation so much as groups of citizens living in trading towns, which means their language may never have been widely spoken across Barbary.
[77]Mr. Browne (page 232) denominates the people of the Greater Oasis, Muggrebine Arabs, as well as those of the Lesser. It is probable then, that all the Oases are colonies of the Tuarick.
[77]Mr. Browne (page 232) refers to the people of the Greater Oasis and the Muggrebine Arabs, as well as those of the Lesser Oasis. It seems likely that all the Oases are settlements of the Tuarick.
[79]The Moors, and Arabs call the country of the Negroes, which was designed by the Romans under the name of Nigritia, Soudan. Abulfeda includes all the known part of Africa, south of the Great Desert, in Belad Soudan, or the country of Soudan. (The word Souda or Suda, in Arabic, signifies black.)
[79]The Moors and Arabs refer to the land of the Black people, which the Romans named Nigritia, as Sudan. Abulfeda includes all the known parts of Africa south of the Great Desert in Sudan, or the country of Soudan. (The word Souda or Suda in Arabic means black.)
Mr. Browne, who had visited a part of Soudan, namely Darfoor, agrees that Soudan corresponds to our Nigritia; being “a general term for the country of the Blacks.” (page 182.) In his preface, page xxv. he says that “nothing can be more vague, than the use of the word Soudan, or Sudan. Among the Egyptians and Arabs, Ber-es-Soudan is the place where the caravans arrive, when they reach the first habitable part of Dar-Fûr: but that country seems its eastern extremity; for I never heard it applied to Kordofân or Sennaar. It is used equally in Dar-Fûr to express the country to the west; but on the whole, seems ordinarily applied to signify that part of the land of the Blacks nearest Egypt.”
Mr. Browne, who has visited a region of Sudan, specifically Darfoor, agrees that Sudan corresponds to our Nigritia, being “a general term for the country of the Blacks.” (page 182.) In his preface, page xxv, he states that “nothing can be more vague than the use of the word Sudan. Among the Egyptians and Arabs, Ber-es-Soudan refers to the place where the caravans arrive when they reach the first habitable part of Dar-Fûr: but that area seems to be its eastern extremity; as I have never heard it used for Kordofân or Sennaar. It is also used in Dar-Fûr to denote the land to the west; but overall, it seems to usually refer to that part of the land of the Blacks closest to Egypt.”
It has been seen, however, that the people of Tunis and Fezzan, reckon Houssa, that is, Kashna, and the adjacent countries, to Soudan; whence it must be extended westward to Tombuctoo, at least. Whether it ought to be extended farther west, I know not. The term, which is of Arabic origin, may possibly have in its application, a limited range, and may not embrace the entire country of the Negroes.
It has been observed, however, that the people of Tunis and Fezzan consider Houssa, which is Kashna, and the nearby regions to be part of Soudan; therefore, it should definitely extend westward to Tombuctoo, at the very least. Whether it should go further west, I’m not sure. The term, which comes from Arabic, might actually have a limited meaning and may not cover the whole area of the Negroes.
[80]The following information occurs in a letter from Mr. Jackson of Santa Cruz, to Mr. Willis, dated 1st of July, 1797.
[80]The following information is from a letter written by Mr. Jackson of Santa Cruz to Mr. Willis, dated July 1, 1797.
“I have informed myself particularly concerning Houssa, and I find there is no such place. The environs of all great towns are called in the Arabic of this country, El Huz, or Huza.”
“I have specifically informed myself about Houssa, and I find that there’s no such place. The surrounding areas of all major towns are referred to in the Arabic of this country as El Huz or Huza.”
[81]The reader is requested to compare the description of this Mound in Herodotus, (Euterpe, 137, 138,) with that in the Voyage on the Tanitic branch of the Nile, in the Mémoires sur L’Egypte, p. 215, et seq. See also the Geog. System of Herodotus, p. 513, for the application.
[81]Please compare the description of this Mound in Herodotus, (Euterpe, 137, 138,) with the one in the Voyage on the Tanitic branch of the Nile, in the Mémoires sur L’Egypte, p. 215, et seq. Also, refer to the Geog. System of Herodotus, p. 513, for further details.
[189]OBSERVATIONS
ON THE
SIWA LANGUAGEH.
By WILLIAM MARSDEN, Esquire F. R. S.
To the Right Honourable Sir Joseph Banks, Bart.
To the Right Honorable Sir Joseph Banks, Knight Bachelor.
Dear Sir,
Dear Sir,
My curiosity has been much gratified by your obliging communication of Mr. Horneman’s specimen of the language spoken at Siwah, or the Oasis of Ammon, in the Lybian Desert; and it will afford satisfaction to you in return, to be informed, that notwithstanding the accident to his papers, which we must all regret, and which might cause some doubt to attach to the correctness of a list subsequently formed, I am enabled to identify the words he has transmitted, amongst the dialects of Africa with which we are already acquainted, and thereby to increase the confidence we feel in the general accuracy of this zealous and enterprising traveller.
My curiosity has been greatly satisfied by your kind communication regarding Mr. Horneman’s sample of the language spoken at Siwah, or the Oasis of Ammon, in the Libyan Desert. In return, I’m pleased to let you know that despite the unfortunate loss of his papers, which we all regret and which might raise some doubts about a list created later, I can identify the words he provided among the dialects of Africa that we already know, thus boosting our confidence in the overall accuracy of this enthusiastic and adventurous traveler.
Not having any previous knowledge of the extensive people whom he calls Tuarick, of whose language he was given to understand that this of Siwah is a dialect, I directed my attention in the first instance to the numerous specimens I possess of the languages[190] spoken by various tribes of Negros, in the northern part of the continent, but without being able to trace in any of them the slightest similitude. I then pursued my comparison through the Arabic, Hebrew, Syriac, Chaldaic, and the different branches of the Ethiopic; and although I thought some distant affinity perceptible, it was not such as could be insisted upon. I was next led to examine the language spoken by the inhabitants of Mount Atlas, known in Morocco by the names of Shilha شلح, and Breber or Berber بربر, but in their own country by that of Amazigh امزيغ; and here I had the satisfaction of ascertaining the object of my search. The following examples will, I doubt not, be judged sufficient evidence of the language of these countries of Siwah and Shilha, distant from each other by the whole breadth of Africa, being one and the same; and I scarcely need to claim even that reasonable allowance which every candid person will make for the difference of orthography that unavoidably results from the different circumstances under which collections of this nature are formed.
Not having any prior knowledge of the various people he refers to as Tuarick, and understanding that the language of Siwah is a dialect, I initially focused on the many samples I have of the languages[190] spoken by different tribes of Africans in the northern part of the continent, but I couldn’t find any similarities among them. I then compared it with Arabic, Hebrew, Syriac, Chaldaic, and the various branches of Ethiopic; although I thought I noticed some distant connection, it wasn't strong enough to be definitive. Next, I looked into the language spoken by the people of Mount Atlas, known in Morocco as Shilha شلح and Breber or Berber بربر, but referred to in their own country as Amazigh أمازيغ; and here I found the information I was searching for. The following examples will, I believe, provide sufficient evidence that the languages of Siwah and Shilha, which are separated by the entire width of Africa, are the same; and I hardly need to request even the reasonable consideration that any fair-minded person would give for the differences in spelling that inevitably arise from the varying circumstances under which these collections were made.
Siwah. | Shilha. | |
---|---|---|
Head, | Achfé, | Eghf, Eaghph. |
Eyes, | Taun, | Tet, Tetten, Azain. |
Hand, | Fuss, | Efus, Aphoose. |
Water, | Aman, | Aman. |
Sun, | Itfuct, | Taffought, Tafogt. |
Cow, | Ftunest, | Tefnast, Taphonest. |
Mountain, | Iddrarn, | Adarar. |
Dates, | Tena, | Tini, Teeny. |
The earliest account of the Shilha language of which I am at present aware, is that given by Jezreel Jones, in a Latin epistle published at the end of Chamberlayne’s Oratio Dominica, in 1715. He says, “Lingua Shilhensis vel Tamazeght, præter planities Messæ,[191] Hahhæ et provinciam Daræ vel Drâ, in plus viginti viget provinciis regni Sûs in Barbaria Meridionali. Diversæ linguæ hujus dantur dialecti in Barbaria, quæ ante Arabicam, primariam Mauritaniæ Tingitanæ et Cæsariensis provinciarum linguam ibi obtinuêre, et hodiernum inter Atlanticorum Sûs Dara et Reephean Montium incolas solum exercentur.” A specimen is added, consisting of about one hundred words. In the excellent account of Morocco published in Danish, by George Höst, in 1779, there is also a short vocabulary of this language, where the words are given with apparent accuracy, in the Arabic character.
The earliest account of the Shilha language that I'm currently aware of comes from Jezreel Jones, in a Latin letter published at the end of Chamberlayne’s Oratio Dominica in 1715. He states, “The Shilha language, or Tamazeght, is spoken in over twenty provinces of the Sûs kingdom in Southern Barbary, besides the plains of Messæ, [191] Hahhæ, and the province of Daræ or Drâ. Various dialects of this language exist in Barbary, which were spoken before Arabic and were the primary languages of the provinces of Mauritania Tingitana and Caesariensis, and are still used among the inhabitants of the Atlantic Sûs, Dara, and the Reephean Mountains.” A sample of about one hundred words is included. In the excellent description of Morocco published in Danish by George Höst in 1779, there is also a short vocabulary of this language, with the words provided in the Arabic script with apparent accuracy.
Several years ago you were so kind as to transmit for me to Mr. Matra, His Majesty’s Consul at Morocco, (a gentleman whose exertions for the advancement of useful knowledge, and particularly of that which is the object of the African Association, deserve the highest praise,) a copy of an extensive alphabetical list of English words, which I printed and distributed with the view of facilitating the attainment of languages not to be met with in dictionaries, and in consequence of which I received from him, through your hands, a very valuable communication. “It is not, (he says in a letter dated in 1791, that accompanied it,) the printed copy Mr. Marsden sent me, but an exact duplicate. His copy, with the words translated into Arabic, is sent to Tombuctoo, I fear but with little chance of its returning.” That copy never did return; but the transcript I received contains a version of all the words into the Mauritanian dialect of Arabic, for the purpose of enabling a talb, or priest, from the Shilha country, to write opposite to each, in the same character, the corresponding terms in his language. I have been used to consider this as a very curious document, even when I believed it to apply only to the western coast of Africa, but its importance will be much increased, if we should find, as there is ground to presume, that the Shilha or Berber extends across the whole continent, in a[192] direction between the Negro dialects on the southern side, and the Moorish or Arabic of the Mediterranean coasts, and that it was the general language of all Northern Africa before the period of the Mahometan conquests. Independently of the Arabic terms, which must ever accompany the progress of that religion, I think it exhibits some strong marks of affinity to that class of Oriental languages which the German writers have distinguished by the name of Shemitic; and if this should be established, (contrary, however, to the opinion of Höst,) it will not be unreasonable to suppose it the ancient Punic, corrupted by the influx of words successively introduced by the colonies or armies of Greeks, Romans, and Goths, and at length mixing again with a branch of the original stream, in its connection with the modern Arabic.
Several years ago, you kindly sent a copy of an extensive alphabetical list of English words to Mr. Matra, His Majesty’s Consul in Morocco, a man whose efforts to promote useful knowledge, especially that related to the African Association, deserve high praise. I printed and distributed this list to help people learn languages that aren’t found in dictionaries. As a result, I received a very valuable communication from him through you. “It is not,” he says in a letter dated 1791 that came with it, “the printed copy Mr. Marsden sent me, but an exact duplicate. His copy, with the words translated into Arabic, is sent to Tombuctoo, where I fear it has little chance of returning.” That copy never came back; however, the transcript I received contains a version of all the words in the Mauritanian dialect of Arabic, to help a talb, or priest, from the Shilha region to write the corresponding terms in his language next to each word. I have always thought of this as a very interesting document, even when I believed it applied only to the western coast of Africa, but its significance will increase if we find, as is likely, that the Shilha or Berber extends across the whole continent, in a[192] direction between the Negro dialects to the south and the Moorish or Arabic of the Mediterranean coasts, and that it was the common language of all Northern Africa before the time of the Muslim conquests. Aside from the Arabic terms that will always accompany the spread of that religion, I think this shows some strong signs of being related to the group of Oriental languages that German scholars call Shemitic. If this can be established, contrary to the opinion of Höst, it wouldn’t be unreasonable to think it is the ancient Punic, altered by the influx of words introduced over time by the colonies or armies of Greeks, Romans, and Goths, and ultimately mixing again with a branch of the original stream in its connection with modern Arabic.
I am, Dear Sir, &c.
I am, Dear Sir, etc.
W. M.
W. M.
Spring Garden, 1st May, 1800.
Spring Garden, May 1, 1800.
P. S. Since writing the foregoing, I have adverted to the chapter on the Oasis of Ammon, in the learned work of my friend Major Rennell, (the Geographical System of Herodotus examined,) and perceive from the extracts he has selected, (p. 589, 590) that Herodotus understood the Ammonians to be composed of Egyptians and Ethiopians, and their language to be formed from a mixture of both, which might have been true in his time; but that the Arabian geographers, Edrisi and Ibn Al Wardi, assert that Santariah (which the Major has proved to be the Oasis of Ammon, or Siwah) is inhabited by Berbers mixed with Arabs.
P. S. Since I wrote the above, I've looked at the chapter on the Oasis of Ammon in my friend Major Rennell's insightful work (the Geographical System of Herodotus Examined) and see from the excerpts he's chosen (p. 589, 590) that Herodotus believed the Ammonians were made up of Egyptians and Ethiopians, and that their language was a mix of both, which might have been accurate in his time. However, the Arabian geographers, Edrisi and Ibn Al Wardi, claim that Santariah (which the Major has shown to be the Oasis of Ammon, or Siwah) is populated by Berbers mixed with Arabs.
[193]MAY, 1802.
SOCIETY LIST,
Established in 1788, to explore
The Heart of Africa.
The Countess of Aylesbury. |
The Right Hon. Henry Addington. |
The Duke of Buccleugh. |
The Marquis of Blandford. |
The Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, Bart. K. B. |
The Hon. Thomas Brand. |
Richard H. A. Bennet, Esq. |
Mark Beaufoy, Esq. |
Robert Barclay, Esq. |
William Bosville, Esq. |
William Burgh, Esq. |
Dr. Charles Burney. |
N. Boylston, Esq. |
The Earl of Carlisle. |
The Earl of Carysfort. |
Lord Cawdor. |
The Hon. Henry Cavendish. |
Thomas Coutts, Esq. |
Thomas Gray Comings, Esq. |
The Marquis of Exeter. |
Gerard Noel Edwards, Esq. |
The Rev. Francis Egerton. |
John Ellis, Esq. |
George Ellis, Esq. |
Sir Adam Ferguson, Bart. |
Colonel Fullarton. |
The Duke of Grafton. |
Lord Gwydir. |
Lord Glenbervie. |
The Rt. Hon. Thomas Grenville. |
[194]Thomas Gisborne, Esq. |
George Gostling, Esq. |
Robert Gregory, Esq. |
The Earl of Harrington. |
The Countess of Harrington. |
The Earl of Hardwicke. |
Lord Hawke. |
Sir Charles Grave Hudson, Bart. |
Sir John Hort, Bart. |
Charles House, Esq. |
Henry Hoare, Esq. |
Henry Hugh Hoare, Esq. |
Benjamin Hobhouse, Esq. |
Everard Home, Esq. |
The Earl of Ilchester. |
Thomas Johnes, Esq. |
R. Payne Knight, Esq. |
Lord Louvaine. |
The Bishop of Llandaff. |
Sir Wilfred Lawson, Bart. |
The Earl of Moira. |
The Earl of Morton. |
Sir Charles Middleton, Bart. |
William Marsden, Esq. |
Charles Miller, Esq. |
James Martin, Esq. |
John Maitland, Esq. |
Colonel de Meuron. |
The Duke of Northumberland. |
The Hon. Frederick North. |
Sir Richard Neave, Bart. |
Lord Viscount Palmerston. |
The Hon. John Peachy. |
Sir William Pulteney, Bart. |
William Morton Pitt, Esq. |
Samuel Parker, Esq. |
The Duke of Roxburgh. |
General Rainsford. |
Colonel Roberts. |
The Earl of Shaftesbury. |
The Earl Spencer. |
Sir John Stepney, Bart. |
Sir John Sinclair, Bart. |
Hugh Scott, Esq. |
John Symmons, Esq. |
Richard Stonhewer, Esq. |
Hans Sloane, Esq. |
David Scott, Esq. |
The Bishop of Winchester. |
Sir Edward Winnington, Bart. |
[195]Sir William Watson, Bart. |
John Wilkinson, Esq. |
Joseph Windham, Esq. |
Samuel Pipe Wolfrestan, Esq. |
George Wolfe, Esq. |
Roger Wilbraham, Esq. |
John Willett Willett, Esq. |
The Rev. Dr. Winne. |
Lord Yarborough. |
Sir William Young, Bart. |
HONORARY MEMBER. |
Major James Rennell, F. R. S. |
THE COMMITTEE. |
The Earl of Moira. |
The Bishop of Llandaff. |
Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, Treasurer. |
Sir John Stepney, Bart. |
Sir William Young, Bart. Secretary. |
Any Person desirous of becoming a Member of the African Association, is desired to signify the same to a Member of the Committee; or, in Writing, to Mr. Henry Chisholm, Clerk to the Meetings, No. 23, Bridge-street, Westminster.
Anyone who wants to become a Member of the African Association should inform a Member of the Committee or write to Mr. Henry Chisholm, the Clerk to the Meetings, at No. 23, Bridge Street, Westminster.
N. B. The Subscription of each Member is Five Guineas annually.
N. B. Each Member's subscription is five guineas a year.
Printed by W. Bulmer and Co.
Cleveland-row, St. James’s.
Printed by W. Bulmer and Co.
Cleveland Row, St. James's.
Transcriber's note:
- The changes indicated in the Errata and the errata of Appendix IV. have been done.
- pg 2 Changed: to asssit others to: assist
- pg 36 Changed (x2): Torfauc to: Torfaue
- pg 84 Changed: for ascersaining the to: ascertaining
- pg 85 Changed: is was a necessary to: was a necessary
- pg 99 Changed: of the Tauricks to: Tuaricks
- pg 100 Changed: re-establisment to: re-establishment
- pg 111 Changed: little intercouse to: intercourse
- pg 133 (footnote 25) Changed: between Augla and Zuila to: Augila
- pg 139 Changed: as are denominatd to: denominated
- The correction (Errata) of Monachie to: Menschie in page 14, has also been done in page 77.
- The correction (errata of Appendix IV.) of Metho to: Metko in pages 171 and 172, has also been done in pages 114 and 117.
- Minor changes in punctuation have been done silently.
- Other spelling inconsistencies have been left unchanged.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!